SMOKE BOMB HILL QDOBA FINISH OUT Bragg...23 55 11 Building Automation System DIVISION 26 –...

TITLE II SERVICES

ISSUE FOR BIDDING

SPECIFICATIONS

SMOKE BOMB HILL

QDOBA FINISH OUT

GFF PROJECT NUMBER 11174

AAFES PROJECT NUMBER 0530-11-000017

May 6, 2016

Smoke Bomb Hill Qdoba

Fort Bragg, North Carolina Issue for Bidding May 6, 2016

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

DIVISION 0 – BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE

CONTRACT

00 04 04 Substitutions 00 22 00 Geotechnical Data 00 23 00 Existing Conditions

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 Summary 01 10 17 EXCHANGE (AAFES) Furnished and Installed Equipment (EF/EI) or (AF/AI) 01 10 18 EXCHANGE (AAFES) Furnished Contractor Installed Equipment (EF/CI) or (AF/CI) 01 10 42 Construction Phasing 01 10 60 Safety Policies and Procedures 01 13 00 Safety Regulations and Codes 01 13 00.1 Fort Bragg Waste Disposal 01 14 50 Cutting and Patching 01 22 00 Unit Prices 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 00 Construction Progress Schedules 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 33 10 Weather Table 01 35 43 Environmental Protection 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities 01 55 00 Temporary Facilities, Barriers and Controls 01 59 00 Field Offices and Sheds 01 65 00 Starting of Systems 01 71 00 Cleaning 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 77 00 Project Closeout 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS – NOT USED

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 35 36 Polished Concrete Floor Finish

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY – NOT USED

DIVISION 5 – METALS – NOT USED

05 12 23 Structural Steel 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing



Table of Contents

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 92 00 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS – NOT USED

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 00 Tiling 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 65 13 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09 91 23 Interior Painting DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

11 40 00 Food Service Equipment

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS – NOT USED

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION – NOT USED

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT – NOT USED

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 13 00 Fire Sprinkler Systems 21 13 13 Fire Protection Piping DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 00 00 Plumbing – General Provisions 22 05 00 Common Work Results For Plumbing 22 05 23 Plumbing Piping Valves and Accessories 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping 22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures



Table of Contents

DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL 23 00 00 HVAC General Provisions 23 05 13 Variable Frequency Drives 23 05 15 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 48 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 13 Ductwork Insulation 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation 23 09 93 Sequence of Operations for Controls 23 31 00 Ductwork 23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories 23 34 16 Centrifugal Fans 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 23 40 00 Filters 23 55 11 Building Automation System DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical Systems 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 26 09 43 Network Lighting Controls 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 13 Fuses 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches, Circuit Breakers and Starters 26 41 13 Lightning Protection System 26 51 00 Interior Lighting DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 31 00 Fire Detection & Alarm Systems 28 39 00 Mass Notification Systems DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK – NOT USED DIVISION 32 –EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS – NOT USED DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES – NOT USED

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS



Table of Contents

Smoke Bomb Hill Qdoba Fort Bragg, North Carolina Issue for Bidding May 6, 2016

00 04 04 - 1

SECTION 00 04 04

SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACTING OFFICERS APPROVAL

A. The contract is based on materials and methods described in the contract document. B. The Contracting Officer will consider proposals for substitution of materials, equipment and methods

only when such proposals are accompanied by full and complete technical data and all other information required by the Contracting Officer to evaluate the proposed substitution.

C. Do not substitute materials or equipment, unless such substitution has been specifically approved

for this Work by the Contracting Officer. D. All substitution requests submitted during solicitation (bid phase) must be received by the

Contracting Officer no later than 10 days prior to solicitation due date. 1.2 “OR EQUAL”

A. Where the phrase “or equal” or “or equal as approved in advance by the Contracting Officer” occurs in the Contract Documents, do not assume that material and equipment will be approved as equal by the Contracting Officer unless the item has been specifically approved for this work by the Contracting Officer.

B. The decision of the Contracting Officer shall be final.

1.3 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFIED ITEMS

A. Verify prior to bidding that all specified items will be available in time for installation during orderly and timely progress of the Work.

B. In the event specified item or items will not be so available, notify the Contracting Officer prior to

receipt of bids. C. Costs of delays because of non-availability of specified items, when such delays could have been

avoided by the Contractor, will be back-charged as necessary and shall not be borne by EXCHANGE.

1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS FOLLOWING AWARD OF CONTRACT

A. Substitutions for Cause: Not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of submittals.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)


00 04 04 - 2

END OF SECTION 00 04 04


Existing Conditions

00 23 00-1

SECTION 00 23 00

EXISTING CONDITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The existing building is located on the northeast corner of Gruber and Reilly Roads. The demising walls are in place around the Qdoba space, and the underfloor plumbing work has been installed. No slab has been poured in the space except for a portion at the southeast corner of the space, provided for access to the emergency exit doors. The existing slab in the southeast corner provides access for emergency exiting of the Back of House Area south of the Qdoba space, and a clear path of exit will need to be maintained at all times during construction during times that the building is occupied. There is an existing overhead door between the Qdoba space and the dining area, an existing temporary door between the Back of House Area and Qdoba and an existing permanent pair of exit/service doors on the exterior wall to the service yard. The storefront and storefront door is in place on the north wall of the building. The studs have been installed around the perimeter of the space, but no gypsum board has been installed on the interior of the space. Fire alarms and fire sprinklers have been installed and are operational for shell building conditions, but modifications to the fire alarm work will be required to place fire alarm devices into proposed finished surfaces, and modifications will be required to the fire sprinkler system to function in a space with a ceiling. No lighting has been installed other than required exit signs. No power has been installed, but electrical provisions have been made in the shell building for future connections as indicated on the drawings. The HVAC units have been installed, but the make-up air units have not. See drawings for detailed information about HVAC scope of work.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF SITE

A. The site, comprising approximately 7.2 acres, bounded on 3 sides by streets, Gruber Road, Reilly Road and Kedenburg Road. The site’s topography slopes from Gruber Road to Kedenburg Street ranging from elevations 300 to 270 ft. MSL (NAVD 88). The parking lot, curbs, gutters, sidewalks, service drive and all other site work have been installed by others.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF EXISTING BUILDINGS

A. There is a newly constructed building of approximately 34,000 square feet, consisting of an Express on the south end, a food court in the middle, and concession spaces on the north end of the building. The Qdoba space is in the northeast corner of the building.

END OF SECTION 00230


Fort Bragg, North Carolina

Issue for Bidding May 6, 2016

Summary 01 10 00 - 1

SECTION 01 10 00

SUMMARY

1.1 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Smoke Bomb Hill Qdoba Finish Out

1. Project Location: Fort Bragg, North Carolina

B. Owner: EXCHANGE.

1. EXCHANGE Contracting Office: Nikisha Knowlton, Army & Air Force Exchange Service; 3911 S. Walton Walker; Dallas, TX 75236; (214) 312-4570.

C. Architect: Tammy Chambless; Good, Fulton & Farrell Architects; 2808 Fairmount, Suite 300; Dallas, TX 75201; (214) 303-1500.

D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

1. Structural Engineer: Brandon Fick; Hunt & Joiner, Inc.; 1825 Market Center Blvd, Suite 620; Dallas, TX 75207; (214) 760-7000

2. MEP Engineer: Stacy Carr; GazaBury.; 5310 Harvest Hill Road, Ste. 100, Dallas, TX 75230; (972) 295-9140

3. Fire Protection Engineer: Carissa Platter; Reed Fire Protection Engineering; 4144 N. Central Expressway, Suite 510; Dallas, TX 75204; (214) 638-7599

4. Civil Engineer: Branch Smith; McKim and Creed; 243 North Front Street; Wilmington NC 28401; (910) 520-7754

E. Exchange Project Manager: Dennis Stephens; Army & Air Force Exchange Service; 3911 S. Walton Walker; Dallas, TX 75236; (214) 312-6101

F. Project Web Site: Administered by the Exchange.

1.2 STATEMENT OF WORK

A. Scope: The work covered by these specifications consists of furnishing all plant, supervision, labor, equipment, and materials as necessary to perform all operations required to complete construction of a Qdoba finish out. The work is to be performed in accordance with the specifi-cations and the applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract.

B. Location: The work to be performed is located at Fort Bragg, North Carolina. The site is locat-

ed to the east of Reilly Street, to the north of Gruber Road and south of Kedenburg. The Qdoba space is on the northeast corner of the building.




Summary 01 10 00 - 2

C. Principal Features:

1. The project consists of an interior finish out of an existing shell vendor space. 2. The work excludes underfloor plumbing work, as this is already installed. There may be

modifications to coordinate with proposed work. 3. The work includes a concrete floor slab in the area that currently has no slab. 4. The project includes interior layer of gypsum board to be installed on existing perimeter

studs at the exterior walls and demising walls. The project includes all interior partitions within the space.

5. The project includes all work shown on the drawings including architectural, mechanical, plumbing, electrical, fire alarms and fire protection system.

6. The RTU’s to serve this area are existing and located on the roof above this space. 7, Refer to drawings for other work to be included or that is excluded from this contract.

D. General Provisions: The Contractor is advised to take note of the following General Provisions

of the Contract: Cleaning up; Material and Workmanship; Accident Prevention; Protection of Existing Vegetation, Structures, Utilities and Improvements; Operation and Storage Areas; Site Investigation; Permits and Responsibilities. Copies of the General Provisions may be obtained from the Contracting Officer.

E. Type of Contract: Single prime contract. F. Bid Alternates: Refer to Section 01 23 00 Bid Alternates.

1.3 SPECIAL BASE REQUIREMENT A. General working hours on Base are from 7:00 A.M. to 7:00 P.M. B. No streets will be blocked without Base headquarters approval. C. Contractor shall immediately clean up any debris tracked on to the Base streets resulting from

this construction operation. D. Construction areas including equipment storage areas shall be kept clean and neat. E. No burning is permitted on the Base.

1.4 UTILITIES (WATER, GAS AND ELECTRICITY)

A. Existing hose bibbs and water lines, power and gas can be used to obtain utility services for this project. The Contractor will not be charged for consumption of temporary utilities (water, gas and electricity).

B. The Contractor shall provide and use the proper backflow prevention devices. The Contractor

shall provide documentation of proper/current certification of the devices and proper/current cer-tification of the installer.




Summary 01 10 00 - 3

1.5 LAYING OUT WORK

A. Layout: Dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of work shall be verified by the Contrac-tor. Discrepancies between Drawings, specifications, and Conditions shall be referred to the Contracting Officer in writing for adjustment before work affected is performed. Failure to make such notifications shall place responsibility upon the Contractor to carry out work in a satisfacto-ry and workmanlike manner.

B. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the location and elevation of all the construction

contemplated by the construction documents. C. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall carefully compare and check all Architectural,

Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical drawings, each with the other, that in any way affect the locations of elevation of the work to be executed by him, and should any discrepancy be found, he shall immediately report the same to the Contracting Officer for verifications and adjustment. Any duplication of work made necessary by failure or neglect on the Contractor's part to comply with this function shall be done at his sole expense.

D. Field Dimensions: The drawings accompanying these specifications indicate generally the de-

sign and arrangement of all apparatus, fixtures, accessories, etc. necessary to complete the work required. The exact location or arrangement of equipment is subject to minor changes ne-cessitated by field conditions and shall be made as required without additional cost to EXCHANGE. Measurements shall be verified by actual observations at the construction site, and the Contractor shall be responsible for all work fitting into place in a satisfactory and work-manlike manner meeting the approval of the Contracting Officer.

1.6 EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND WORK

A. Carefully check the site where this project is to be erected and observe any overhead wires and equipment. Any such work shall be moved, replaced, or protected, as required, whether or not shown or specified.

B. Attention is directed to the existence of pipe and other underground improvements which are

shown on the drawings. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to preserve and protect all such improvements shown on the drawings.

C. Locations of underground lines, shown on the drawings, are based on the best available

sources, but are to be regarded as approximate only. Exercise extreme care in locating and identifying these lines before excavating in adjacent areas.

1.7 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SERVICES

A. The Contractor shall perform the work under this Contract with a minimum of outage time for all utilities. Interruption shall be by approved section of the utility. In some cases, the Contractor may be required to perform the work while the existing utility is in service. The existing utility services may be interrupted only when approved by the Contracting Officer. When it is neces-sary to interrupt the existing utilities, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer and facili-ties engineer in writing at least seven work days in advance of the time he desires the existing service to be interrupted. The interruption time shall be kept to a minimum. Depending upon the activities at the facility which require continuous service from the existing utility, an interrup-tion may not be subject to schedule at the time desired by the Contractor. In such cases the in-terruption may have to be scheduled at a time of minimum requirement of demand for the utility.




Summary 01 10 00 - 4

The amount of time requested by the Contractor for interruption of existing utility services shall be as approved by the Contracting Officer.

1.8 EXCAVATION

A. Contractor shall obtain a valid Authorization Form from the Base Civil Engineering Work Clear-ance Request from the. Make the changes and send to any jurisdictions, sections, elements, offices and/or organizations not located at Fort Bragg.

1.9 WELDING PERMIT

A. Prior to commencing any welding, the Contractor shall obtain a welding permit from the Fort Bragg Fire Department.

1.10 BARRICADES AND WARNING DEVICES

A. The Contractor shall provide barricades and lighting devices, in accordance with Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices by Department of Transportation, latest Edition, at all points of excavation and construction in vehicle traffic areas.

1.11 PROTECTION FOR OPEN FLAME DEVICES

A. When open flame and/or spark producing devices, i.e., acetylene oxygen welding equipment, electric arc welding, etc., are employed for job accomplishment, the following procedures are mandatory:

1. Inspect all surroundings and equipment to insure that combustible substances are not

present in any area where contact of metal at a temperature above the flashpoint of any compound is possible.

2. Ensure that no open containers or spills of combustible substances are present. 3. Ensure that ignition is not possible by conduction, convection, radiation, or dispersion of

molten metal. 4. Proper protection equipment and practices will be used, i.e., fireproof blankets, wetting of

surrounding area, removal o combustible materials where practicable, earth filled backing and portable fire extinguishers of proper type on hand.

5. When the above devices are being used notify the Base Fire Department 24 hours ahead of usage.

1.12 FIRE PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall at all times maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of fire damage. All scrap materials, rubbish, and trash shall be removed daily from in and about the building and shall not be permitted to be scattered on adjacent property.

B. Suitable storage space shall be provided 50 feet minimum outside the building area for storing

flammable materials and paints; no storage will be permitted in the building. Excess flammable liquids being used inside the building shall be kept in closed metal containers and removed from the building during unused periods.




Summary 01 10 00 - 5

C. A contractor shall provide a fire extinguisher at each location where cutting and welding is being performed. Where electric or gas welding or cutting is done, interposed shields of incombus-tible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks and hot metal. When temporary heating devices are used, a watchman shall be present to cover periods when other workmen are not on the premises.

D. The Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations of

NFPA Nos. 10 and 241. However, in all cases a minimum of four fire extinguishers shall be available for each building.

E. Fire Codes: The Contractor shall obey all requirements of the National Fire Codes, (Army or Air

Force) Fire Regulations and Base Fire Regulations, as they relate to this work on post.

1.13 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Work not included: Except for such auxiliary work as is shown or specified or is necessary as a part of the construction, the following work is not included in the Contract: 1. Any work shown, but marked "NOT IN CONTRACT" (N.I.C.). 2. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by the Exchange. 3. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by the Vendors or Concessionaires.

1.14 EXCHANGE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A. See Specification Section 01 10 17: EXCHANGE Furnished and Installed Equipment.

1.15 EXCHANGE FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A. See Specification Section 01 10 18: EXCHANGE Furnished Contractor Installed Equipment.

1.16 ALIGNMENT OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALS

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain in the installation of jointed floor, wall, and ceiling materials that:

1. The joints align through in a straight line and in both directions wherever possible. 2. The joints relate to all openings and breaks in the structure and be symmetrically placed

wherever possible. This includes heating registers, light fixtures, equipment, etc. 3. If, because of the non-related sizes of the various materials and locations of openings,

etc., it is not possible to accomplish the above, the Contractor shall meet with the Con-tracting Officer to determine the most satisfactory arrangement. The Contractor shall es-tablish center lines for all trades.

1.17 INTEGRATING WORK

A. All streets, buildings, and other improvements shall be protected from damage.




Summary 01 10 00 - 6

B. Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the project work and shall not in any way interfere with or obstruct the ingress or egress to and from street or adjacent property.

C. If new work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised not to disturb or

damage the existing work more than necessary. All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired, and restored to its original condition at no cost to the Exchange Service.

1.18 HEADROOM UNDER PIPES

A. All horizontal runs of plumbing and heating pipes and/or electrical conduit suspended from ceil-ings shall provide for a maximum headroom clearance, but in no case shall this clearance be less than 7'-0" without written consent from the Contracting Officer. Where piping or conduit is left exposed within a room, the same shall run true to plumb, horizontal or intended planes. Where possible, uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and/or adjacent wall, floor, or ceiling surfaces.

1.19 PATCHING GOVERNMENT-OWNED FACILITIES

A. Government-owned structures, facilities, streets, curbs, walks, etc., that are damaged or re-moved due to required excavations or other construction work, shall be patched, repaired or re-placed, and be left in their original state of repair by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and of authorities having jurisdiction thereover.

1.20 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING

A. Drawings showing location of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., are diagrammatic and job con-ditions shall not always permit their installation in the location shown.

B. When this situation occurs, it shall be brought to the Contracting Officer's attention immediately

and the relocation determined in a joint conference. The Contractor will be held responsible for the relocating of any items without first obtaining the Contracting Officer's approval. He shall remove and relocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the Contracting Officer.

1.21 OVERLOADING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for overloading any part or parts of structures beyond their

safe calculated carrying capacities by placing of materials, equipment, tools, machinery, or any other item thereon. No loads shall be placed on floors or roofs before they have attained their permanent and safe strength.

1.22 STANDARDS

A. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title of a specific standard such as Commercial Standard, a Federal Specification, a trade association standard, or other similar standard shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof, and any amendment or supplement thereto, in effect on the date of invitation for proposals, except as limited to type, class, or grade, or modified in such reference, and except as otherwise indicated.




Summary 01 10 00 - 7

1. The standard referred to, except as modified in the specifications, shall have full force and effect as though printed in these specifications. These standards are not furnished to bidders for the reason that the manufacturers and trades involved are assumed to be familiar with their requirements.

a. Where Federal Specifications are referred to as a measure of quality and standard,

they refer to Federal Specifications established by the Procurement Division of the United States Government and are available from the Superintendent of Docu-ments, U.S. Government Printing Office.

b. Where Federal Specification numbers are used, they refer to the latest edition in-cluding amendments thereto.

c. Where Commercial Standards are referred to as a measure of quality, standard, and method of fabrication, they refer to Commercial Standards issued by the U.S. Department of Commerce.

d. Where A.S.T.M. Serial Numbers are used, they refer to the latest tentative specifi-cations, standards specifications, standards methods, or standard method of test-ing issued by the American Society for Testing and Materials.

1.23 CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE

A. Except where tests and/or inspections in connection with structural materials are specified or required by applicable laws, rules, and regulations, manufacturer's certificate covering conform-ance with the requirements of the above mentioned Federal Specifications and Commercial Standards may be acceptable in lieu of such items. Such certificates shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer for all items so specified.

1.24 OCCUPANCY BY THE EXCHANGE

A. The Exchange shall reserve the right and privilege of partial occupancy during and prior to the absolute completion of the total work. Access shall be allowed at all times to the Exchange and its own Contractors in the endeavor.

1.25 TESTS AND REPORTS

A. See Specification Section 01 41 00: Quality Control.

1.26 REFERENCES

A. All references to the word "Government" in the specifications shall mean EXCHANGE. B. Wherever the word "provide" is used in the Contract Documents as a directive, it shall be inter-

preted as meaning "provide and install completely and ready for use". C. Definitions:

1. Vendor: Person or persons selling any material item. 2. Base or Facility: Location on which Exchange is being remodeled. 3. Concessionaire: Person who is directly responsible for the lease of and operation of the

concessions such as Beauty Shop and Barber Shop. 4. Architect-Engineer: That person or firm responsible for preparing the working drawings

and specifications.




Summary 01 10 00 - 8

5. EXCHANGE: Army and Air Force Exchange Service. 6. Inspection Agency: Project Inspector contracted by EXCHANGE.

1.27 TOXIC MATERIALS

A. Removal or disposal of toxic materials or asbestos is not included in this contract. If the Con-tractor encounters such materials, he shall immediately stop work and notify the Contracting Of-ficer.

1.28 SUBMISSION OF PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer digital photographs taken on or about the first of every month, showing the general conditions of the work as viewed from the north, south, east, west interior. Photographs (minimum of 10) must accompany each Application for Pay-ment. Each print shall be identified by date of exposure, project title, and EXCHANGE Project Number, location and direction taken. The Contractor may also submit a video of the above re-quirements as an option to photographs.





Summary 01 10 00 - 9

Smoke Bomb Hill Qdoba Fort Bragg, North Carolina


EXCHANGE (AAFES) Furnished and Installed Equipment (AF/AI) 01 10 17 - 1

SECTION 01 10 17

EXCHANGE (AAFES) FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/EI) OR (AF/AI)

1.1 GENERAL

A. Certain items of equipment will be furnished and installed by EXCHANGE (AAFES). See drawings references to (EF/EI) or (AF/AI).

B. The Contractor shall provide for and cooperate with personnel installing EXCHANGE furnished materials and equipment, should overlap of work occur.

C. Schedule: Contractor shall schedule early completion of designated areas for beneficial occupancy by EXCHANGE usage prior to completion of entire project.

D. EXCHANGE will furnish and install equipment as indicated.

E. Contractor's Duties:

1. Provide access for EXCHANGE personnel. 2. Coordinate work and cooperate with the installers of the property so that installation can

be accomplished in accordance with construction schedule. 3. Provide mechanical and electrical connections to equipment and building systems

where indicated on the drawings and in the specification. 4. Provide security of designated areas.

F. EXCHANGE Duties:

1. Inspect designated area prior to use and issue statement of acceptance of area for installation of property.

2. Make final mechanical and electrical connections between property and building systems where indicated on the drawings and/or in the specifications.

3. Provide custodial services for designated areas during use after beneficial occupancy.

1.2 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES

A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing at least 30 days in advance of the designated delivery date. If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of EXCHANGE furnished property the Contractor shall be responsible for storage and redelivery cost. Should EXCHANGE be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit his request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under this contract and as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon which he can file a claim under these conditions.

1.3 EXCHANGE ACTIVITIES AFFECTING PROGRESS OF WORK:

A. Express and Concessions Sales Areas: Schedule date of installation of fixturing and possession of these areas 120 days prior to completion of project.

B. Serving Areas & Food Preparation Areas: Schedule date of use and possession of food preparation serving areas 60 days prior to completion of project.

C. Construction in each area at date scheduled for its use and possession by EXCHANGE shall be sufficiently complete, in accordance with Contract Documents, so the EXCHANGE may occupy the area for the use for which it is intended. Comply with Contract Clauses titled inspection of Construction, and Use and Possession Prior to Completion.



EXCHANGE (AAFES) Furnished and Installed Equipment (AF/AI) 01 10 17 - 2

1.4 ACCEPTANCE OF AREAS FOR BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY

A. Inspection: Prior to acceptance by EXCHANGE of an area for beneficial occupancy, the Contracting Officer will conduct an inspection of the specific area. A list of deficiencies will be provided to the Contractor.

B. Acceptance: If the Contracting Officer determines the specific area is sufficiently complete for beneficial occupancy by EXCHANGE, the area will be accepted in writing with the exception of the deficiencies listed. The deficiencies listed shall be completed or corrected prior to final acceptance at the completion of the project.

C. Damage: Damage resulting from EXCHANGE' use will not be considered the Contractor's responsibility.

D. Refer to clause entitled "Final Inspection and Acceptance" of the EXCHANGE "General Provisions".

1.5 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (EF/EI) OR (AF/AI):

A. Equipment or material to be furnished and installed by EXCHANGE is as follows and as indicated on the Drawings:

1. Food Court: Beverage/condiment stations, furnishings, fixtures and equipment. 2. Food Concepts/Kitchen: Fixtures, food service/prep equipment, dry storage shelving,

safes, cash registers, metal wall panels, menu boards, concept signage, decorative lighting fixtures, and small wares packages. (Built-in service counters, casework and exhaust vent hoods by Contractor unless noted otherwise on individual Food Concept Equipment Schedules.)

3. Walk-in Coolers & Freezers. (Electrical & Mechanical service, connections, lighting and fire protection by Contractor.)

4. Communications Equipment. (Rough-ins and final points of connection by Contractor.) 5. Satellite Dish 6. Telephone system equipment, devices and cabling. (Rough-ins and final points of

connection by Contractor.) 7. Intrusion Detection System

1.3 FINAL CONNECTIONS:

A. All final electrical connections to EXCHANGE furnished and installed equipment shall be made by the Contractor as part of the construction contract. The GC shall construct all openings, furnish and install required sleeves and conduit, and furnish and install all reinforcing, miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and bolts necessary to secure EXCHANGE-furnished equipment in place.



EXCHANGE (AAFES) Furnished, Contractor Installed Equipment (AF/CI) 01 10 18 - 1

SECTION 01 10 18

EXCHANGE (AAFES) FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/CI) OR (AF/CI)

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. The material noted below will be furnished by the Exchange and shall be installed by the Contractor. See drawing references to (EF/CI) or (AF/CI). The Contractor shall provide for and cooperate with personnel furnishing the designated material.

B. All food service equipment must be approved by the National Sanitation Foundation, NSF.

C. Contractor's Duties:

1. Designate required delivery date for each product. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 60 days in advance of the date that EXCHANGE furnished equipment and furnishings will be needed. Shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all plumbing and electrical rough-ins will be furnished by EXCHANGE.

2. The equipment will be received at the job site by a representative of EXCHANGE who will jointly, with the Contractor, verify condition and quantities. The representative will then effect receipted transfer of custody of the equipment to the Contractor.

3. Unload, handle, store (on-site), protect, uncrate, assemble, install set in final position, align, join, level, and make all utility connections to all items of equipment. Installation shall be performed in accordance with the specifications, equipment plans, and schedules shown on the Drawings and the rough-in drawings provided by EXCHANGE.

4. Construct all openings, furnish and install required sleeves and furnish and install all reinforcing, miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and bolts necessary to secure EXCHANGE furnished equipment in place.

5. Repair or replace items damaged as a result of Contractor's operations. 6. Apply finish indicated, if any. 7. The installation shall be complete in all respects, including mechanical and electrical hook

ups, and put into good operating condition.

D. EXCHANGE Duties:

1. Deliver all EXCHANGE furnished items to the job site. Schedule delivery date with supplier in accordance with Progress Chart.

2. Provide Contractor with installation drawings and instructions. 3. Provide Contractor with shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all plumbing and

electrical rough-ins.

1.2 DELIVERY:

A. Contractor shall unload, handle, store, protect, uncrate, assemble, set in final position, align, join, and level all Exchange-Furnished material, and shall make all utility connections thereto. EXCHANGE will provide supervision for installation of the material.

B. The material will be received at the job site by a representative of the local EXCHANGE who, together with the Contractor, will jointly verify conditions and quantities. The representative of the local EXCHANGE will then affect receipted transfer of custody of the material to the Contractor. Material damaged by or during construction operations shall be replaced at no additional cost to EXCHANGE.


EXCHANGE (AAFES) Furnished, Contractor Installed Equipment (AF/CI) 01 10 18 - 2

1.3 FAILURE TO VERIFY:

A. Failure to execute above required verification shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for proper installation of the material, which shall be installed without additional cost to EXCHANGE.

1.4 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES:

A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing at least 60 days in advance of the designated delivery date. If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of EXCHANGE furnished equipment the Contractor shall be responsible for storage and delivery cost. Should EXCHANGE be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit his request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under his contract and as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon which he can file a claim under these conditions.

1.5 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (AF/CI):

A. Contractor shall install the following EXCHANGE furnished items at locations indicated on drawings:

1. Vendor Signage 2. PA System and speakers.

Contractor is responsible to provide all MEP connections and final hook-ups of all EF/EI equipment and fixtures as required.

1.6 INSTALLATION

A. The GC shall construct all openings, furnish and install required sleeves and conduit, and furnish and install all reinforcing, miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and bolts necessary to secure EXCHANGE-furnished equipment in place. All final electrical connections to EXCHANGE furnished equipment shall be made by the Contractor as part of the Construction Contract.



Safety Policies and Procedures

01 10 60 - 1

SECTION 01 10 60

SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Contractor required health and safety plan.

1. Contractor is responsible for reading the Risk Assessment Plan and following the directions therein.

2. Contractor must maintain OSHA permissible exposure limits related by the risk assessment: That is, 25 ppm (170 mg/cubic meter) during any 8 hour work shift for a 40-hour week

B. Sample Construction Hazard Plan. C. Samples of the “Construction Hazard Plan” and “Safety Plan” attached at the end of the section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Submittals - Section 01 33 00 (Construction Hazard Plan, Job Safety and Health Plan, Emergency Response Plan).

B. Record Documents - Section 01 78 39. C. Environmental Protection – Section 01 35 43

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. OSHA 1910 R.E.G. - 29CFR, OSHA 1910.120 2. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Publication. – EM 385-1-1: Safety and Health Requirements

Manual (Most current version). 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for EXCHANGE approval - The following items shall be submitted for EXCHANGE approval:

1. Designation of Safety Representative: The Contractor shall designate in writing a qualified

employee OSHA Trained under 1910.120 responsible for the overall supervision of all accident prevention activities. Duties shall include ensuring applicable safety requirements are incorporated into work methods and inspecting the job site to ensure that safety measures and instructions are actually being applied. This person shall be on site at all times that work is in progress.

2. The Contractor shall be trained/certified in OSHA 1910.120 procedures. All other employees performing site work will meet OSHA 1910 training requirements for their job capacity.



01 10 60 - 2

B. Submittals for Information Only - The following items shall be Contractor certified:

1. Job Hazard Analysis: Contractor shall develop a job hazard analysis for presentation at the pre-construction conference. The Contractor's job hazard analysis shall list potential hazards that could arise during the course of the work.

2. Job Safety and Health Plan.

a. The Contractor shall develop a Job Safety and Health Plan for presentation at the Pre-construction conference. The Contractor's Safety Plan shall make whatever provisions are necessary to conduct his work in accordance with current OSHA standards.

b. The safety and health plan must specifically address the excavation portion of construction and will be specific to perchloroethylene (tetrachloroethylene) (PCE), and incorporate decontamination procedures for personnel and equipment, continuous vapor monitoring, a prohibition against eating in proximity to the site, and a prohibition against the smoking of tobacco products in the proximity to the site.

c. The following are minimum requirements for the health and safety plan:

1. The Contractor is responsible for all compounds and degradation products addressed by the Risk Assessment Plan.

2. Specialized Designs: Specialized designs will be provided when the situation requires. Examples of such designs include, but are not limited to, vapor barriers in areas of known vapor hazard.

3. Safety Plans: Safety Plans will be the responsibility of the Contractor for construction areas identified by the installation and/or EXCHANGE as areas of known hazards only. These plans are required by 29 CFR 1910 and are the responsibility of the Contractor. This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation by the Contractor.

4. Minimum Requirements for the Health and Safety Plan are as follows:

(a) Must be kept on site, and must be written. (b) Will contain a hazard analysis (safety and health risk) for each

site task and operation (to be supplied by the installation). (c) Will include employee training (per paragraph (3) of 1910.120). (d) Will include personal protective equipment to be used by

employees for each of the site tasks and operations (paragraph (g) (5) of 1910.120).

(e) Will include provision for medical surveillance (paragraph (f) of 1910.120).

(f) Will include the frequency and types of air monitoring, personal monitoring, environmental sampling techniques, instruments to be used (their maintenance and calibration).

(g) Will include a site control program (per paragraph (d) of 1910.120) to be coordinated with the installation.

(h) Will include a decontamination procedure (per paragraph (k) of 1910.120).

(i) Will include an emergency response plan (per paragraph (1) of 1910.120).

(j) Will include a confined space entry procedure (per 1910.146, 147 or program equivalent).

(k) Will include provision for spill containment (per paragraph (j) of



01 10 60 - 3

1910.120). (l) Will include pre-entry briefings (prior to each site task activity) for

all employees involved in the task, supervision, or emergency response.

(m) Written verification of adherence to the "plan" by a Safety and Health Supervisor is required (the supervisor must meet the 1910.120 training requirements for supervisors).

(n) Deficiencies will be corrected immediately upon discovery and after consultation with the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer and Installation Safety Office.

d. Hazard Response Plan: The unplanned or non-predicted discovery of such hazards

as transite pipe, contaminated soils, and other possible hazards will be addressed within an Emergency Response Plan (EMR) by all contractors. This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation by the contractor (sample provided).

e. Material Safety Data Sheets will be maintained at the site for all hazardous materials in use.

1.5 MONTHLY SAFETY MEETINGS

A. The Installation will schedule subsequent safety meetings with Contractor and subcontractor personnel on a monthly basis. The Owner's representative and installation will attend periodically. Minutes of safety meetings shall be prepared and signed by the Contractor. Concurrence signed by Inspection Section and the original submitted to the Contracting Officer for inclusion in the contract file.

1.6 ACCIDENT REPORTING AND RECORD KEEPING

A. Accident reporting and record keeping shall be in accordance with Base requirements. Telephonic reports of injuries or property damage will be made as soon as possible after the incident and will be followed by a copy of an Accident Report.

1.7 LIFE OF CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of this section during the life of the contract. 1.8 HEAD PROTECTION (HARD HATS)

A. All work sites under this contract are designated Hard Hat Areas. The Contractor shall post the area and shall ensure that all personnel, vendors and visitors use hard hats while within the limits of the work site.




Safety Regulations and Codes (Rev.)

01 13 00 - 1

SECTION 01 13 00

SAFETY REGULATIONS AND CODES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Reference Standards.

B. Licenses and Permits

C. Safety.

D. Fire Safety.

E. Affirmative Procurement Program

F. Industrial Ventilation

G. Use of Ionizing Radiation (IR).

H. Use of Lasers.

I. Use of Radioactive Materials

J. Use of Radio Frequency (RF) Radiation.

K. Use of Ultraviolet (UV) Radiation.

L. Protection of Nesting Birds

M. Historical or Cultural Artifacts

N. Ozone Depleting Substances.

O. Lead Base Paint.

P. Cleaning & Debris Control

Q. Nuisance Dumping & Polluting Activities

R. Stormwater Pollution Prevention

S. Excavation at IRP Sites

T. Contaminated Soil

U. Suspected Hazardous Materials

V. Oil-Filled or Impregnated Electrical Components




01 13 00 - 2

W. Hazardous Waste Testing

X. Hazardous Material Inventory

Y. Spill Response and Reporting

Z. Waste Disposal and Environmental Protection

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Federal, State and Local Codes and Ordinances take precedence over these Specifications and Drawings where conflicts occur, unless the Drawings or Specifications call for more stringent requirements. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing of conflicts.

B. Comply with all applicable laws, building and construction codes, OSHA Safety and Health Regulations and applicable requirements of any governmental agency under whose jurisdiction this Work is being performed.

C. Obtain a copy of standards referenced in the various Specification Sections. Maintain a copy at the jobsite during execution of Work to which the standard applies.

D. Construction that is not governed by the contract specifications will be governed by the more stringent provisions of the latest published edition or statute adopted edition, of the following applicable codes, regulations and standards.

ADA Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines

AFR Air Force Regulations

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

CFR Code of Federal Regulations

FAR Federal Acquisition Regulations

IBC International Building Code

IMC International Mechanical Code

IPC International Plumbing Code

NEC National Electrical Code

NFPA National Fire Code

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act

Other applicable codes and standards as applicable or as referenced by the individual specification Sections.




01 13 00 - 3

1.3 LICENSES AND PERMITS

A. The Contractor shall obtain and maintain current for the duration of this Contract, all required Federal, State and local licenses and permits. All associated fees and taxes shall be paid by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government.

B. Obtain from base security all required vehicle and entry permits. Fort Bragg required permits. Current permit requirements shall be provided to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference.

1.4 SAFETY

A. Comply with all Federal and State regulations concerning safety of personnel and equipment. All Contractor personnel shall wear hard hats and steel toe safety shoes while on the project site. In addition, all personnel shall wear hearing protection (ear muffs or ear plugs) when inside the power plant, excluding office areas, restrooms, break rooms and other “quiet” areas.

B. Ensure that lock out, tag out procedures are established and used as directed by 29 CFR 1910.145. Comply with the lock out, tag out procedures in use by CH&PP personnel. Ensure that contractor’s personnel on site are trained on the government’s procedures.

C. Comply with all safety, traffic and protection requirements in effect on Fort Bragg. Government will brief the Contractor on these requirements at the preconstruction conference.

D. Work areas in this Project may be classified as “permit-required confined spaces” or “non-permit required confined spaces.” The Contractor’s Certified Industrial Hygienist will determine the confined space status of the Project areas. Regulations and procedures for entry into “permit-required confined spaces” are contained in 29 CFR 1910.146 and 8 AAC 61.010.14. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring the safety of his employees in confined spaces according to these regulations.

E. Confined Space Permit:

1. Provisions for confined space are outlined in 29CFR 1910.146 and ANSIZ117.1 1989 and shall be followed throughout Project.

2. Fort Bragg Contact for information regarding confined Space issues is Robert Fleming, 910-396-1936. However, the Contractor shall process any permits required for confined space through his own safety Manager and Permit Space Program.

F. Provide safety barriers around open excavations, openings in floors and other hazards created by the Contractor’s activities.

G. The Contracting Officer may direct the Contractor to cease activities which, in their opinion, are unsafe.

1.5 FIRE SAFETY

A. Comply with all fire safety and protection requirements in effect on Fort Bragg. Government will brief the Contractor on these requirements at the preconstruction conference.




01 13 00 - 4

B. Prior to beginning any welding, use of open flame device, or any activity that produces

sparks, obtain a “hot work permit” from Fort Bragg Fire Department. The permit shall be

renewed each day welding or open flame devices will be used.

C. If the contract work requires numerous days of hot work, the Contractor may elect to have one of his on-site personnel designated as a Permit Authorizing Individual (PAI). The Contractor’s PAI may issue hot work permits at the work site, thus avoiding the requirement for daily permits issued by the Fire Department.

D. The Contractor’s PAI shall be the on-site superintendent, a foreman, the Contractor’s Safety Manager, or other individual with sufficient knowledge and experience to recognize unsafe work practices or conditions and having authority to stop work immediately if such unsafe practices or conditions are observed. To be designated as a PAI, a person must schedule and successfully complete PAI certification training offered by the Base Fire Department. PAI certification training is estimated to last 60 to 90 minutes.

E. Fire Department personnel may periodically visit the site to ensure the Contractor is complying with fire safety requirements. A PAI’s certification may be revoked if the PAI has failed to issue permits on days when hot work is performed, or if unsafe practices or conditions are observed.

F. Questions concerning these requirements may be directed to Robert Fleming, 910-396-

1936, who will forward questions to the appropriate person at the Fire Department. G. The Contractor shall notify the Fire Department a minimum of 48 hours before, and again

immediately prior to, temporarily closing any street or paved building access, interrupting water service to any fire hydrant or interrupting the operation of any fire detection, alarm or suppression system. The fire Department shall be immediately notified upon reopening closed areas, restoration of water service to any fire hydrant, or reactivation of any detection, alarm or suppression system. This notification requirement is in addition to other contract requirements.

H. Provide a 10 lb, ABC fire extinguisher at all work stations.

I. Report a fire: Dial 911.

1.6 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT PROGRAM

A. These standards apply to all new construction, demolition, rehabilitation, alteration, modification, repair, and maintenance of existing facilities.

B. In an effort to comply with the affirmative procurement requirements of Section 6002 of the Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) and Executive Order 13101, the government strongly promotes the use of the recycled and recovered materials and products identified in the Environmental Protection Agency’s Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines.

C. Recycled and recovered materials and products must be considered first before any other materials and products will be accepted. Recycled and recovered materials and products must be used throughout the project unless they either do not meet the requirements of this specification, delay the progress of the work, or are cost prohibitive.




01 13 00 - 5

D. Examples of these materials and products are detailed below. These are recommended quantities and represent minimum compliance. The actual requirement is to use the maximum amount of recycled material possible, while meeting the performance specifications.

1.7 INDUSTRIAL VENTILATION

A. Contact the Contracting Officer 10 working days prior to any industrial ventilation systems (systems which control a hazard) being evaluated for acceptance. Advance notification is required by Bioenvironmental Engineering (BE) to allow performance or observation of tests of any new or renovated system prior to initial startup to verify the system will control the hazard. BE will be present for tests of fan speed and rotation, fan motor load, and air flow in all hoods or branches.

1.8 USE OF IONIZING RADIATION (IR)

A. Submit a written request for approval at least 30 calendar days before commencement of activities which require the use of IR generating devices.

B. Submit request to the Base Radiation Safety Officer (RSO) with a courtesy copy to the Contracting Officer. Request shall include:

1. Description/Characteristics:

Type Material Recycled Material %

Insulation Rock wool Slag 75

Fiberglass Glass cullet 20-25

Loose fill & spray on (cellulose) Postconsumer paper 75

Perlite composition board Postconsumer paper 23

Plastic rigid foam Recovered material 9

Foam-in place Recovered material 5

Glass fiber reinforced Recovered material 6

Phenolic rigid foam Recovered material 5

Wall Board Structural fiberboard 80-100

Laminated paperboard Postconsumer paper 100

Carpet Polyester carpet face fiber Excludes severe wear

applications

25-100

Playground surfaces Rubber or plastic 90-100

Running tracks Rubber or plastic 90-100

Cement/Concrete Concrete & cement Coal fly ash 15-35

Concrete & cement Ground granulated blast furnace

(GGBF)

25-50

Flooring/Patio Patio blocks Plastic or plastic blends 90-100

Patio blocks Rubber or rubber blends 90-100

Floor tiles Rubber 90-100

Floor tiles Plastic 90-100

Landscaping Paper based hydraulic mulch Postconsumer paper 100

W ood based hydraulic mulch Recoverd wood and/or paper 100

Compost 100




01 13 00 - 6

a. X-ray unit manufacturer b. Model number c. Serial number d. Maximum kVp, mA, Sec e. Ionizing radiation source/emitter (electron tube)

2. The part of the EXCHANGE contract describing work to be done at the base and the inclusive dates of such work.

3. An acknowledgment that the RSO may make initial and periodic checks to ensure the Contractor is following applicable radiological health and safety practices which prevent unnecessary exposures to Post or Base personnel.

1.9 USE OF LASERS

A. Submit a written request for approval at least 30 calendar days before commencement of activities which require the use of a laser.

B. Submit request to the RSO with a courtesy copy to the Contracting Officer. Request shall include:

1. Description/Characteristics:

a. Manufacturer. b. Model. c. Number of same units. d. Serial number(s). e. Laser medium. f. Mode of operation (i.e. continuous wave (CW), single pulse, multiple

pulse). g. Maximum exposure time (train length). h. Ime (sec) & wave length. i. Energy/pulse (J) or CW power (W). j. Pulse repetition frequency. k. Pulse width. l. Beam diameter (at 1/e point). m. Beam divergence (at 1/e point).

2. The part of the EXCHANGE contract describing work to be done and the inclusive dates of such work.

3. An acknowledgment that the RSO may make initial and periodic checks to ensure the contractor is following applicable radiological health and safety practices which prevent unnecessary exposures to Post or Base personnel.

1.10 USE OF RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS (RAM):

A. Prior to bringing RAM onto Fort Bragg property, the Contractor shall obtain permission from the RSO. To obtain approval, forward an application to the RSO, and a courtesy copy to the Contracting Officer at least 30 calendar days before the planned date for commencement of activities on the installation. Requests shall include:

1. A description of the proposed activities on NRC Form 241, Report of Proposed Activities in Non-Agreement States, (the 180-day limitation on the form does not apply to organizations holding an NRC license). Contractors possessing




01 13 00 - 7

Agreement State Licenses shall also submit an NRC Form 241 to NRC in compliance with 10 CFR 150.21. Contractors requiring more than 180 days of operation per calendar year on the installation shall possess an NRC license.

2. The procedures established to ensure radiological health and safety of Base personnel and the public while on Army or Air Force installations on site and the name of the responsible Contractor representative.

3. A current copy of the applicable NRC, or Agreement State license. Expired licenses are unacceptable. To be valid at the installation, the license must either specifically state the installation by name on the license or state approval for work at temporary job sites anywhere in the United States where the NRC or Agreement State maintains jurisdiction. DOE or DOE prime contractors must provide, in lieu of a license, written certification of their exemption from NRC licensing requirements and cite the applicable exemption of 10 CFR.

4. The part of the EXCHANGE contract describing work to be done and the inclusive dates of such work

5. An acknowledgment that the Base RSO may make periodic checks to ensure the Contractor is following applicable radiological health and safety practices which prevent unnecessary exposures to Army or Air Force personnel and prevent potential contamination of Government property.

1.11 USE OF RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) RADIATION

A. Prior to using equipment generating RF Radiation in excess of seven watts peak power and a frequency of 1000 MHz or greater on Fort Bragg must submit a written request for approval at least 30 calendar days before commencement of activities which require the use of the RF generating device.

B. Submit request to the RSO, with a courtesy copy to the Contracting Officer. Submittal shall include:

1. Description. 2. Nomenclature. 3. Location of emitters. 4. Quantity. 5. Frequency (Mhz). 6. Pulse width (microsec.). 7. Pulse repetition freq. (pps). 8. Peak power (kW). 9. Antenna size (feet--horizontal/vertical). 10. Antenna band width (degrees-- horizontal/vertical). 11. Antenna gain (dB). 12. Scan rate (rpm).

C. The part of the EXCHANGE contract describing work to be done at the base and the inclusive dates of such work.

D. An acknowledgment that the RSO may make initial and periodic checks to ensure the Contractor is following applicable radiological health and safety practices which prevent unnecessary exposures to Post or Base personnel.




01 13 00 - 8

1.12 USE OF ULTRAVIOLET (UV) RADIATION

A. Submit a written request for approval at least 30 calendar days before commencement of activities which require the use of UV generating devices on Fort Bragg.

B. Submit request to the RSO, with a courtesy copy to the Contracting Officer. Request shall include:

1. The part of the EXCHANGE contract describing work to be done at the base and the inclusive dates of such work.

2. An acknowledgment that the RSO may make initial and periodic checks to ensure the Contractor is following applicable radiological health and safety practices which prevent unnecessary exposures to Post or Base personnel.

1.13 PROTECTION OF NESTING BIRDS

A. Federal law prohibits disturbing bird nests containing eggs or birds too young to fly. Harassment of birds to force them to abandon an occupied nest is also illegal. If the Contractor removes nests or harasses birds in violation of federal and state law, the Contractor is responsible for any charges filed by U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service or State of North Carolina and is the liable party.

B. If an occupied bird nest is discovered, the contractor shall cease activities in the vicinity of the bird nest until the young birds are able to fly and leave the nest under their own power.

C. Cliff swallow nests are usually the greatest threat to construction projects. As a general rule, cliff swallows can begin nest construction any time between 10 May and 21 July.

D. The Government is responsible for removing new nests in the vicinity of the work area prior to Notice to Proceed.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for control of new nest construction after issuance of

NTP. The contractor shall survey the work area daily for new nest construction. To avoid project delays, the contractor shall remove all nests discovered before the nests have been completed and occupied.

F. The contractor shall be responsible for any increased cost or delay resulting from a nest constructed and occupied in the work area after NTP has been issued.

1.14 DISCOVERY OF HISTORICAL OR CULTURAL ARTIFACTS

A. Should any historical artifacts or cultural resources be unearthed, stop excavating and immediately notify the Contracting Officer.

1.15 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

A. No ozone depleting substances (refrigerants or any other compounds) shall be used in any capacity on this project unless specifically approved by the HazMart.




01 13 00 - 9

1.16 LEAD BASE PAINT

A. No paint with a lead content of 0.06 percent or greater shall be used in any capacity on this project unless specifically approved by the HazMart.

1.17 CLEANING AND DEBRIS CONTROL

A. During the term of this Contract, the Contractor shall remove any materials and equipment that are not required for the completion of the work as promptly as possible. All debris shall be removed from the site and legally disposed. The Contractor shall take particular care to eliminate any hazards created by his operations.

B. The Contractor is responsible for any damage caused by his debris without additional cost to the Government.

C. The Contractor shall maintain at all times during his work at this Project Site a strict windblown debris control program. This program shall ensure no windblown debris or other debris from his work shall contaminate or interfere with any access to or operation of any facility or any parking area, road or street.

1.18 NUISANCE DUMPING AND POLLUTING ACTIVITIES

A. Polluting, dumping, or discharging of any harmful, nuisance, or regulated materials (such as concrete truck washout, vehicle maintenance fluids, residue from saw cutting operations, solid waste or hazardous substances) into building drains, site drains, streams, waterways, holding ponds or to the ground surface is not permitted. The contractor shall be responsible for any and all damages resulting from dumping or discharges. Further, the Contractor shall conduct activities in such a fashion to avoid creating any legal nuisance, including but not limited to, suppression of noise and dust, control of erosion, and implementation of other measures as necessary to minimize off site impacts of work activities.

B. Fugitive Dust emissions (airborne dust generated by vehicles operating on unpaved surfaces, transfer or transport of dust producing materials, etc.) shall be controlled at the construction site, along haul routes and at staging areas. Water spraying shall be conducted as necessary to minimize fugitive dust generation.

C. If contaminated ground water is encountered, the contractor must notify DPW immediately via the 24/7 spill phone. Contact Robert Fleming at 910-396-1936 for further information regarding that 24/7 spill phone number.

1.19 CONTAMINATED SOIL

A. If unexpected contaminated soil is encountered while performing work, stop work immediately and contact the Contracting officer. Do not resume work until approved by the Contracting Officer.




01 13 00 - 10

1.20 SUSPECTED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Any suspect hazardous materials encountered during demolition or construction shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer’s representative. Work shall not resume until the Contracting Officer is satisfied that the materials are not hazardous. Should they be found to be hazardous, the contractor shall immediately take steps to contain the material, so further damage and contamination does not occur. The contractor shall then submit a proposal for removal.

1.21 OIL-FILLED OR IMPREGNATED ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

A. Notify (Post or Base Environmental Safety Office and phone number) before demolition or installation of any oil-filled electrical equipment (for example: transformers and regulators). All transformers (both PCB and non-PCB-containing) and light ballasts (unless labeled “No PCBs”) shall be disposed through the Fort Bragg Hazardous Material and Waste Handling facility.

1.22 HAZARDOUS WASTE TESTING

A. The Contractor shall subject a representative sample of each type of hazardous waste, or potentially hazardous waste, generated to TCLP (Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure) testing. Sampling and testing for appropriate metals, and volatile and semi-volatile chemicals shall be performed by an independent test agency that is regularly engaged in the sampling and testing of hazardous materials and waste. Provide the test results to Post or Base Hazardous Waste Facility before transferring the waste to the facility. Refer to the attached Waste Disposal and Borrow Pit Worksheet for additional hazardous waste handling requirements.

1.23 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INVENTORY

A. Contractor must submit an inventory of all hazardous materials to be used to include quantities. Inventory must be updated at completion of the project to indicate quantities used, spilled, and disposed of, etc.

B. The Contractor shall provide the Hazardous Materials Pharmacy (HazMart) a list and quantity of all hazardous materials that the Contractor intends to bring onto Government property. The Contractor shall provide the HazMart with copies of all MSDSs and an inventory for each Hazardous chemical listed in OSHA Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1910.1200 intended to be used. Each MSDS shall be on file prior to use of the chemical, and shall be maintained for all chemicals. Once the hazardous material is used, its quantity of use shall be reported to the HazMart along with the disposition of the container.

C. Submit a completed Hazardous and Related Material Identification Form, and an MSDS for all materials listed on the form and brought on Post, to DPW, Contact Robert Fleming 910-396-1936.

D. If hazardous materials are not in their original container, the container containing the substance must be labeled.




01 13 00 - 11

1.24 SPILL RESPONSE AND REPORTING

A. Spills of hazardous waste, hazardous materials or non-regulated substances such as oils, antifreeze, grease, latex paint, hydraulic fluid, etc. shall immediately be reported to DPW (Robert Fleming, 910-396-1936) for reporting purposes to local, state and federal agencies and proper clean-up action. If a spill occurs after normal working hours, or on a weekend or holiday, report spills to the Fort Bragg Fire Department.

B. The contractor is encouraged to have a supply of absorbent pads on-site to aid in immediate clean-up of smaller spills, such as oil, coolant or hydraulic fluid leaks from vehicles or equipment.

C. Spill notification placards are to be placed on the job site. DPW will provide format and required locations prior to construction.

D. The contractor shall develop a spill plan. The format for the plan will be provided by DPW prior to construction.

1.25 WASTE DISPOSAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall comply, and ensure that all subcontractors comply, with all Federal, State, local laws, and regulations, ordinances and standards related to environmental pollution control and abatement in effect and the specific requirements stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

B. All hazardous wastes as defined in 40 CFR, Part 261, shall be collected and disposed of in accordance with 40 CFR, Parts 260-268. The Contractor is responsible for properly storing, marking, labeling, securing and transporting hazardous wastes. All hazardous wastes shall be collected in contractor furnished DOT/UN approved containers and taken to Fort Bragg Hazardous Waste Facility for disposal. Call the Hazardous Waste Facility prior to transporting wastes to the facility to coordinate delivery of the waste materials. The Contractor shall not store hazardous waste on base for more than 30 days.

C. Any previously unidentified suspected hazardous materials encountered during performance of the work of the contract shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer.

D. All general construction wastes, other than those specifically allowed, or required, to be disposed of on-base shall be legally disposed at an off-base sanitary landfill.

E. Comply with the requirements of Fort Bragg Waste Disposal, which immediately follows this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION - (Not Used)





01 13 00 - 12



Waste Disposal

01 13 00.1 - 1

SECTION 01 13 00.1

FORT BRAGG WASTE DISPOSAL

The Contractor shall obtain all permits required by federal, state and local laws for the construction activities involved. The Contractor shall perform all work in such a manner as to minimize the polluting of air, water or land and shall, within reasonable limits, control noise and the disposal of solid waste materials, as well as other pollutants. The Contractor shall ensure that all construction, repair, maintenance operations and practices and waste disposal performed under this contract shall be in strict compliance with all applicable city, county, state and federal environmental laws and regulations.

1. Hazardous and Non-hazardous Waste Disposal: There are no known existing sources of hazardous waste involved with this project. If the Contractor generates or discovers suspected hazardous waste it shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contracting Officer for review and direction on how to proceed with handling and disposal. As part of the proposed implementation above and prior to on-site construction, the Contractor shall submit for approval, a plan for storing, characterizing and disposing of hazardous and non-hazardous waste materials resulting from the work under this contract. Waste includes, but is not limited to, paint waste, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers. If any waste material is dumped in unauthorized areas, the Contractor shall remove the materials and restore the area to the condition of the adjacent undisturbed areas. Where directed and approved by the Contracting Officer, contaminated ground shall be excavated, characterized, stored, disposed of and replaced with suitable fill material at the expense of the Contractor. All waste disposal shall be in strict accordance with local, state and federal requirements and regulations. Waste paint, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers shall be disposed of off base by the Contractor, at the Contractors’ expense. Any soil contaminated through spillage shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with the requirements specified herein. Soil that is required to be removed shall be replaced by similar soil approved by the Contracting Officer.



Cutting and Patching

01 14 50 - 1

SECTION 01 14 50

CUTTING AND PATCHING


A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary. B. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals. C. Individual Product Specification Sections:

1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the section. 2. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. 3. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of EXCHANGE or separate contractor.

B. Include in request:

1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected Work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed Work and Products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of EXCHANGE or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be executed.

1.4 MATERIALS

A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation. 1.5 EXAMINATION

A. Examine existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

B. After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work.



Cutting and Patching

01 14 50 - 2

C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

1.6 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.

B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work.

1.7 CUTTING

A. Execute cutting and fitting to complete the Work. B. Uncover work to install improperly sequenced work. C. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. D. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. E. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. F. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture

resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. G. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior

approval. 1.8 PATCHING

A. Execute patching to complement adjacent Work. B. Fit Products together to integrate with other Work. C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate

surfaces to receive patching and finishing. D. Employ original installer to perform patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements,

and sight-exposed surfaces. E. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with

fire rated material, to full thickness of the penetrated element. H. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection

or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.




Unit Prices 01 22 00 - 1

SECTION 01 22 00

UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders.

2. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price shall be added to Contractor’s proposal on EXCHANGE Solicitation Form 4450-024, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if concealed conditions cause quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents to be increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included below in Part 3, EXECUTION. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.



Unit Prices 01 22 00 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES

A. Unit Price 1: To Be Determined (If Any)

1. Description: 2. Unit of Measurement:




Substitution Procedures

01 25 00 - 1

SECTION 01 25 00

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Documentation:

1. Justification. 2. Coordination information. 3. Detailed comparison. 4. Product Data. 5. Samples. 6. Certificates and qualification data. 7. List of similar installations. 8. Material test reports. 9. Research reports. 10. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule. 11. Cost information. 12. Contractor's certification. 13. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time.

B. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor through EXCHANGE Project Manager of acceptance or rejection within 15 Insert number days of receipt, or ten days of receipt of additional information.

1.2 CONTRACTING OFFICERS APPROVAL

A. The contract is based on materials and methods described in the contract document. B. The Contracting Officer will consider proposals for substitution of materials, equipment and

methods only when such proposals are accompanied by full and complete technical data and all other information required by the Contracting Officer to evaluate the proposed substitution.

C. Do not substitute materials or equipment, unless such substitution has been specifically ap-

proved for this Work by the Contracting Officer. D. Requests for substitution must be made no less than 10 days prior to proposal closing date.s, in

which case the bidder shall not be liable for costs of the Contracting Officers review, or at any time following award of Contract, in which case, however, the contractor shall be liable for costs of the Contracting Officer’s review. No further substitutions will be permitted after contract award.

E. Where the phrase “or equal” or “or equal as approved in advance by the Contracting Officer” occurs in the Contract Documents, do not assume that material and equipment will be approved as equal by the Contracting Officer unless the item has been specifically approved for this work by the Contracting Officer.

F. The decision of the Contracting Officer shall be final.



Substitution Procedures

01 25 00 - 2

1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS FOLLOWING AWARD OF CONTRACT

A. Substitutions for Cause: Not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of submittals. The submittal must include a justification explaining the rational for the requested substitution.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed after contract award.

1.4 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFIED ITEMS

A. Verify prior to bidding that all specified items will be available in time for installation during or-derly and timely progress of the Work.

B. In the event specified item or items will not be so available, notify the Contracting Officer 10-

days prior to receipt of proposals. C. Costs of delays because of non-availability of specified items, when such delays could have

been avoided by the Contractor, will be back-charged as necessary and shall not be borne by EXCHANGE.




Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 1

SECTION 01 31 00

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

1.1 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. RFI Forms: Software-generated form acceptable to Architect and EXCHANGE Project Manager.

B. Architect's Action: Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI.

C. RFI Log: Maintain a tabular log of RFIs. Submit log weekly.

1.2 PROJECT WEB SITE

A. Use EXCHANGE’ Project Web site for project communication and documentation.

B. EXCHANGE to provide up to seven Project Web site user licenses for use of EXCHANGE's Commissioning Authority, Contractor, Architect, and Architect's consultants. EXCHANGE to provide eight hours of software training at Architect's office for Project Web site users.

C. Project Web site software package:

1. Autodesk, Constructware, Procore Construction Management Software.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. The Contracting Officer and/or Contracting Officer’s representative will schedule and preside at preconstruction meeting.

B. Attendance Required:

1. Contracting Officers and/or Contracting Officer’s representative and other Headquarters

EXCHANGE representatives. 2. Local and regional EXCHANGE representatives. 3. Installation representative (Engineering, Fire Marshall, Security, etc.) 4. Contractor 5. Major Sub-contractors

C. Agenda:

1. Execution of Notice to Proceed. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of sub-contractors. 4. Review of EXCHANGE checklist of contract requirements. 5. Discussion of Schedule. 6. Discussion of critical sequencing. 7. Designation of responsible personnel.




8. Processing of field decisions and change orders. 9. Submission of applications for payment. 10. Submittal of shop drawings. 11. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 12. Fire and safety procedures. 13. Security procedures. 14. Accident prevention and reports. 15. Housekeeping procedures. 16. Use of premises

a. Office and storage locations. b. Personnel parking.

17. Major equipment deliveries. 18. Other issues pertinent to completing the contract.

D. Meeting minutes: Minutes will be taken by the A/E and distributed to EXCHANGE, Contractor,

and Installation Engineer. 1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. The contractor shall schedule and preside at monthly progress meetings. B. The contractor shall make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for partici-

pants. C. Location of Meetings: Construction office, or as directed in the notice. D. Attendance Required:

1. Contractor's project manager. 2. Contractor's superintendent. 3. Major sub-contractors and suppliers. 4. EXCHANGE representative (EXCHANGE' option).

E. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Coordination of projected progress. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to work.

F. Meeting Minutes: The Contractor shall record meeting minutes, and distribute copies to the par-

ticipants (including the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer) within three (3) business days of the meeting.




1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. The Contractor shall schedule and preside at other project meetings when required.

1. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

B. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect and EXCHANGE’s Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

C. Coordination Meetings: At weekly intervals, in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes.



Construction Progress Schedules 01 32 00 - 1

SECTION 01 32 00

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere:

1. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01 10 42 – Construction Phasing. 3. Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination. 4. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Provide projected construction schedules for entire work, update monthly.

1.2 SCOPE

A. The Contractor shall prepare a Progress Chart System to serve as a guide in managing the construction progress. Reference General Provisions clause entitled, “Schedule and Progress”.

1.3 GENERAL

A. The progress chart shall be prepared by the contractor and shall consist of a bar chart as described in this section. In preparing this system, the scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the contractor and shall be developed in accordance with the phasing plan shown on the construction drawings. The requirement for the system is included to assure adequate planning and execution of the work and to assist the Contracting Officer in appraising the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and evaluating progress of the work.

1.4 PROGRESS CHART SYSTEM

A. The system consists of keeping a record of the time allotted for each activity and the actual progress of the activity.

B. Activities shall be listed vertically and shall include the units of work required for the project.

C. All activities of EXCHANGE which affect progress and Contract required dates for completion shall be shown. Include activities for EXCHANGE FURNISHED/EXCHANGE INSTALLED ITEMS.

D. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the Contracting Officer’s approval.

1.5 A SCALE OF TIME

A. A scale of time, from date of the beginning of the contract work to the date of completion of the contract work, shall be indicated horizontally on the chart. The units of time indicated shall be days.



Construction Progress Schedules 01 32 00 - 2

1.6 ACTIVITY TIMES

A. Activity shall be indicated in the form of scaled time bars. The bars shall indicate the following:

1. The schedule of time allotted for the activity. 2. The actual progress of the activity including the actual time of the activity start, the time

spent to date or to the finish of the activity.

1.7 SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL

A. Submission and approval of the system shall be as follows:

1. A preliminary bar chart defining the contractor’s planned operations during the first sixty (60) calendar days after notice to proceed shall be submitted within ten (10) days. The Contractor’s general approach for the balance of the project shall be indicated. Cost of the activities expected to be completed or partially completed before submission and approval of the complete bar chart should be included.

1.8 THE COMPLETE BAR CHART

A. The complete bar chart shall be submitted within thirty (30) calendar days after receipt of notice to proceed.

1.9 CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall submit at intervals of thirty (30) calendar days a copy of the complete bar chart with the current activity progress clearly indicated. Cost of each activity completed and each partially completed shall be included.

B. The contractor shall also submit a narrative report with the updated bar chart, including a description of problem areas current and anticipated) delaying factors and their impact, and an explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed.




Submittal Procedures

01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

0.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Submittal procedures. B. Construction progress schedules. C. Shop Drawings. D. Samples. E. Product Data. F. Certificates.


A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Project. B. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation C. Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures. D. Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use.

B. Processing Time:

1. Initial Review: 15 calendar days. 2. Resubmittal Review: 15 calendar days. 3. Sequential Review: 21 calendar days. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: 15 calendar days.

C. Electronic Submittal:

1. Post as PDF files directly to Architect’s Pro-core Construction Management software website.

2. Submit via email as PDF files.

D. Contractor's Review:

1. Submittals: Marked with approval stamp before submitting to the Contracting Officer.

E. Transmit each submittal with EXCHANGE Form 4450-48.




01 33 00 - 2

F. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix.

G. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate.

H. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

I. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and in accordance with the List of Required Submittals in this section. Transmit submittals to Contracting Officer. Coordinate submission of related items.

J. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. Failure to identify such variations will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for completing the work in full accordance with the Contract Documents even though such submittals are approved by the Contracting Officer.

K. Prior to approval of the material/product submitted, the contractor shall include with the submittal a written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos. This certificate is mandatory before approval will be issued.

L. Provide space for Contractor and Contracting Officer review stamps.

M. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.

N. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.

1.4 EXCESSIVE RESUBMITTALS

A. The architects’ contract with the owner covers one to two reviews of each submittal. If a submit-

tal is rejected more than two times or requires more than two reviews, the architect shall review resubmittals at the contractor’s expense. The architect will invoice the contractor in advance for additional reviews and will review shop drawings after payment is received.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit preliminary Progress Schedule within ten (10) days of the Notice to Proceed. B. Submit complete (final) Progress Schedule within thirty (30) days of the Notice to Proceed. C. Submit monthly revisions of Progress Schedule. D. Refer to Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Shop Drawings for Review:

1. Submitted to Contracting Officer for review for the limited purpose of checking for con-formance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract doc-uments.




01 33 00 - 3

2. Shop drawings shall be prepared by a qualified detailer. 3. Minimum sheet size for shop drawings shall be 8 1/2" x 11". 4. After review, and distribute copies in accordance with Submittal Procedures article

above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 70 00 - Project Closeout.

B. Shop Drawings for Project Close-out:

1. Submitted for the EXCHANGE's benefit during and after project completion.

C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

1. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus three (four

on structural, mechanical, and electrical submittals) copies which will be retained by Contracting Officer.

1.7 SAMPLES

A. Samples for Review:

1. Submitted to Contracting Office for review for the limited purpose of checking for con-formance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract doc-uments.

a. Submit 1 copy of product data, catalog sheets and product samples for any product

used on the exterior of the building to Robert Fleming at Directorate of Public Works at Fort Bragg

2. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with Submittal Proce-

dures article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 70 00 - Project Closeout.

B. Samples for Information:

1. Submitted for the Contracting Officer's knowledge as project administrator or for EXCHANGE.

C. Samples for Selection:

1. Submitted to Contracting Officer for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. 2. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors, or in

custom colors (if so stated in the product specification section), textures, and patterns for Contracting Officer selection.

3. After review, distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout.

D. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral

parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. E. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.




01 33 00 - 4

F. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification sections; two of which will be retained by Contracting Officer.

G. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification sec-

tions. H. Coordinate sample submittals with respective shop drawings.

1.8 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, specifications, illustrations, and other descriptive data. Do not submit Manufacturer’s MSDS sheets. These will be returned without review.

B. Product data that relates to shop drawings or samples must be submitted with the respective

shop drawings or samples. 1.9 CERTIFICATES

A. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to other required submittals, submit a cer-tificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional.

B. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer, in-

stallation/application subcontractor, or the Contractor to Contracting Officer, in quantities speci-fied for Product Data.

C. Certify that material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit support-

ing reference data, test results, affidavits, and/or certifications as appropriate. D. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be accepta-

ble to Contracting Officer/Engineer.




Environmental Protection 01 35 43 - 1

SECTION 01 35 43

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES (Scope) A. The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment and

performing all work required for the prevention of environmental degradation during and as a result of construction operations under this contract. These requirements are in addition to any environmental protection requirements elsewhere in these specifications. For the purpose of this specification, environmental pollution is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents, not naturally occurring at the site, which adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances important to human life; affect other species of importance to humans; or degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic and recreational purposes. The control of environmental pollution by the contractor requires consideration of air, water, and land, and involves noise control, solid waste management and management of radiant energy and radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants. This section also requires the protection of cultural and historic resources.

B. Contractor shall coordinate the work of this section with the work called for under the various

Earthwork and Utilities sections. 1.2 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OBLIGATIONS. Work under this contract is to be performed on a government facility. All environmental rules

applying to contractor operations elsewhere will also apply on the government facility. Contractor (and any subcontractor, agent or representative) shall comply with all Applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations providing for environmental protection and pollution control and abatement. These include but are not limited to: the Clean Air Act, Clean Water Act, Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, Toxic Substances Control Act, Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act, Coastal Zone Management Act, Endangered Species Act, National Historic Preservation Act, Safe Drinking Water Act, Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act, Oil Pollution Act, Archeological Resources Protection Act, and Pollution Prevention Act. Contractor has the duty to determine for itself where such laws and regulations apply. Although the Contractor may request assistance from the Contracting Officer in delineating applicable environmental laws and regulations, Contractor has an independent responsibility to make its own determination and to do so in a timely fashion.

1.3 FINES OR PENALTIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL NON-COMPLIANCE. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying any fines or penalties assessed against AAFES

or the installation or the Army or the Air Force for violations of environmental laws or regulations resulting from acts or omissions of the contractor or its employees, subcontractors, or agents. This obligation is in addition to any fines or penalties that may be assessed against the contractor for the same conduct. Contractor may either reimburse these fines or penalties through the Contracting Officer, or with the consent of the Contracting Officer, the Contractor may pay such fines or penalties directly to the regulatory agency or agencies concerned.




1.4 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGES Contractor agrees to hold harmless and indemnify AAFES (which includes the Army, Air Force,

or other Department of Defense component, as appropriate) for any and all damages of any kind resulting from environmentally harmful activities by the contractor, contractor's employees or agents or subcontractors. "Damages" includes but is not limited to personal injury, property damage (including diminution of value), or death, environmental restoration and response costs, natural resource damages, expert witness and attorney's fees, and reimbursement of any and all expenses incurred to obtain permits as a result of Contractor's failure to identify or obtain permits for itself or AAFES.

1.5 CONTACTS WITH ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY OFFICIALS. Contractor shall immediately advise the Contracting Officer and the installation environmental

office of the content of all contacts with federal, state, or local environmental regulators, before, during, and after the performance of this contract concerning the performance of this contract.

PART 2 - PERMITS 2.1 PERMITS FOR EQUIPMENT USED BY CONTRACTOR IN PERFORMING AAFES CONTRACTS. For equipment used in the performance of this contract, Contractor shall obtain in Contractor's

name and at no additional expense to AAFES, all permits, coordinations, certifications or other regulatory authorization necessary to perform and complete the work required by this contract under applicable environmental laws and regulations. “Applicable environmental laws and regulations" includes but is not limited to: the Clean Air Act, Clean Water Act, Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA), Toxic Substances Control Act, Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act, Coastal Zone Management Act, Endangered Species Act, National Historic Preservation Act, Safe Drinking Water Act, Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act, Oil Pollution Act, and Pollution Prevention Act and State, County, and Local laws and regulations on the same subjects.

2.2 PERMITS NEEDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, EXCAVATION, MODIFICATION, RENOVATION,

DEMOLITION, INSTALLATION, OR OTHER ALTERATION OF BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, INSTALLATIONS, REAL PROPERTY OR SYSTEMS

Contractor shall identify all Federal, State, County, or local, permits, coordinations, certifications

or other regulatory authorization requirements under all applicable environmental laws and regulations as defined in (a.) above. Contractor shall then prepare and submit in draft all applicable permit applications, coordinations, notices, or other required filings, together with all supporting data to the contracting officer for review. Permit applications or notifications or other documents that must be submitted by AAFES will be submitted by AAFES, and any documents that must be submitted by the contractor will be returned after review to the contractor for submission. No work requiring permit or other written authorization shall proceed before the Contractor has the permit or authorization or a copy thereof in its possession.




PART 3 - MATERIALS 3.1 RECYCLED MATERIALS. Materials used in this contract shall be, to the greatest extent practicable and consistent with

financial prudence, made of recycled materials or of materials that are recyclable. Where construction debris such as concrete or asphalt or wood can be recycled, this alternative will be considered.

3.2 ASBESTOS Asbestos will not be used or included in this project. 3.3 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL'S (PCBs) PCBs will not be used or included in this project. 3.4 LEAD-BASED PAINT Lead-based paint will not be used included in this project. 3.5 OZONE-DEPLETING SUBSTANCES. A. "Class I substance," as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class I by the

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)(40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to chlorofluorocarbons, halons, carbon tetrachloride, and methyl chloroform.

B. "Class II substance," as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class II by

EPA (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to, hydrochlorofluorocarbons. C. As required by 42 USC 7671j(b), c, and (d) and 40 CFR Part 82, Subpart E, the Contractor

shall label products which contain class I or class II ozone-depleting substances or are manufactured with a process that uses class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, or containers of class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, as follows:

"WARNING: Contains (or manufactured with, if applicable) _________*__________, (a) substance(s) which harm(s)public health and the environment by destroying ozone in the upper atmosphere." *The Contractor shall insert the name of the substance(s). D. The contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Sections 608 and 609 of the

Clean Air Act (42 USC 7671g, National Recycling and Emission Reduction Program and 7671h, Servicing of Motor Vehicle Air Conditioners) as each or both apply to the contract.

3.6 PESTICIDES Except as may be specified elsewhere in this contract, Contractor will not use or apply

pesticides (such as herbicides or weed-killers, insecticides, or rodenticides) without the specific written prior approval of the Contracting Officer.




PART 4 - EXECUTION (WORK PRACTICES) 4.1 GENERAL: SITE DISTURBANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. Contractor shall use industry-recognized best management practices to avoid creation of

fugitive dust emissions and to avoid and control storm water runoff from the construction site and any temporary roads that may be used for access to it. Water sprinkling may be used to control dust. Contractor shall perform all work under this contract in such a manner that no pollutants of any kind are released into ditches, storm drains, streams, lakes, or other surface waters on or connected to the site.

4.2 PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCES A. General: The General Contractor shall not pollute storm drainage, streams, lakes, or reservoirs

with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, acids, construction wastes or other harmful materials or pollutants. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to determine and comply with all applicable federal, state, regional, municipal, and other regulations.

B. Spillage: The General Contractor shall take special measures to prevent chemicals, fuels, oils,

greases, bituminous materials, waste washings, herbicides, cement, and surface drainage from entering public waters. In the event of a spill, the contractor must make all required notifications to federal, state or local authorities and will notify the Contracting Officer immediately.

C. Washing and Curing Water: Water used in aggregate processing, concrete curing, foundation,

and concrete lift clean-up and other waste water shall not be allowed to enter the storm drainage system.

4.3 PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCES A. General: It is intended that the land resources within the project boundaries and outside the

limits of permanent work performed under this contract be preserved in their present condition or be restored to a condition after completion of construction that will appear to the natural and not detract from the appearance of the project. The General Contractor shall limit his construction activities to areas defined by the Drawings or Specifications.

B. Prevention of Landscape Defacement: Except in areas marked on the plans to be cleared, the

General Contractor shall not deface, remove, cut, injure or destroy trees or shrubs without specific written authority. Trees designated to be saved shall be protected from either excavation or filling within the root zone. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened or attached to any existing trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized by the Contracting Officer. The General Contractor shall in any event be responsible for any damage resulting from such use.

C. Restoration of Landscape Damage: Any trees or other landscape features scarred or damaged

by the General Contractor's equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to the original condition at the General Contractor's expense. The Contracting Officer will decide what method of restoration shall be used, and whether damaged trees shall be treated and healed or removed and disposed of under requirements for clearing and grubbing (Section 31 10 00). All scars made on trees not designated on the plans to be removed by equipment construction operations, or by the removal of limbs larger than 1-inch in diameter shall be coated immediately with an approved tree wound dressing. All trimming or pruning shall be performed in an approved manner by experienced landscape personnel. Tree trimming with axes shall not be permitted. Trees that are to remain, either within or outside established clearing limits, that are subsequently damaged by the General Contractor and are beyond saving in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, shall be immediately removed and replaced with a nursery-grown tree of the same species.




4.4 CONTROL OF AIR EMISSIONS. Contractor's actions shall conform to all federal, state, and local requirements for the control of

air emissions during work under this contract. Trucks leaving the site will be brushed or washed to remove all practicable amounts of dust or other material that may become airborne. Contractor will ensure that all internal construction vehicles and equipment used will have the lowest practicable emissions characteristics and be maintained in optimum operating condition for the reduction of air emissions. Where use of electric motors instead of internal combustion engines is feasible, electric motors will be used during construction.

PART 5 – POLLUTION PREVENTION AND WASTE DISPOSAL 5.1 POLLUTION PREVENTION The contractor should use prior planning to find those materials that will minimize the creation

of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular. Recycling should be considered and implemented at every practicable stage of the project.

5.2 WASTE DISPOSAL A. Pollution Prevention: The contractor should use prior planning to find those materials and work

practices that will minimize the creation of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular. B. Hazardous Waste Generation, Handling, and Disposal. Work done under this contract is to be

performed on a government facility. According to rules and procedures of the United States Environmental Protection Agency, the federal facility is required to have a generator identification number under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and to be responsible for wastes (as defined under RCRA) produced, managed, stored, disposed on, or transported from the facility. Accordingly, Contractor will, to the greatest extent practicable, use materials, processes, and techniques that will avoid the creation of hazardous waste. Contractor shall prepare and follow a written waste management and disposal plan for all hazardous wastes generated on the site. Prior to generation of any hazardous wastes, contractor will coordinate planned activities regarding hazardous materials and hazardous waste with the Contracting Officer. Contractor shall submit a written waste management plan, through the contracting officer, to installation environmental office. Contractor shall follow this plan once it has been approved by the contracting officer. Under no circumstances will contractor bring onto the site hazardous waste that has been generated elsewhere. All hazardous waste will be properly disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with all federal, state, and local requirements.

C. Disposal of Non-RCRA Wastes. All non-hazardous wastes generated on the site as a result of this contract must be disposed of

properly, in accordance with all federal, state and local requirements. Materials will be recycled whenever practicable. Prior to creation of such wastes, the contractor shall submit to the installation environmental management function, through the Contracting Officer, a plan for disposal of wastes. Such plan shall include the types of waste to be created, how they shall be stored, managed and disposed. Contractor shall follow this plan once it has been approved by the installation and contracting officer. Such wastes will not be created until approved by the Contracting Officer.




D. Construction Debris.

1. Debris from demolition of existing structures will ordinarily be removed to a location on the

installation, as designated by the installation authorities. 2. If a location on the installation is not available, other sections in this contract may require

the contractor to remove clean construction debris from the site to a location of the contractor’s choosing off the installation. (Site soil or other site media are not covered by this paragraph.) Debris will be recycled or disposed of in accordance with all applicable federal, state and local rules. Such debris must be free of all contamination, including but not limited to, lead paint, asbestos, and insecticides. Prior to removal of any construction debris, that debris must be certified by the installation to be free of contamination and of no value to the United States, and this certification must be provided to the contracting officer. To expedite work, this may be accomplished by a telecopier or other suitable electronic means, however, the original certification form must be provided to the contracting officer. No form is prescribed for this certification so long as all necessary information is provided and the document is signed by an authorized installation representative. However, an example is provided at page 7 and this form may be used. All construction debris removed from the installation must be covered by a certification. The contractor must arrange with the installation POC whether all debris will be covered by one certification or if several certifications will be required.

E. Consolidated Waste Disposal Plans: Contractor may, at contractor’s option, submit for

approval as specified above one consolidated plan for handling hazardous and non-hazardous wastes.

F. Earthwork and Removal of Potentially Contaminated Media: 1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, the site has been inspected and is,

consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination or pollution. However, work under this contract will be performed on a military installation, where the history of prior military and industrial activities is not necessarily completely known. The following provisions prohibit the removal from the installation of soil or other materials found on site and are included, in an abundance of caution, for the protection of AAFES, the installation, and the contractor.

2. Notwithstanding any other clause in this contract, including but not limited to all standard site work general provisions (02010-02900); no media by-product resulting from site preparation, construction or excavation shall be moved off the post, base, or installation where the construction is occurring. If the construction is off the post, base or installation, no media by-product shall be moved off the construction site.

3. The contractor shall: (1) leave the media in place at the site, subject to appropriate erosion control; or (2) haul the media to and place it at a location on the installation that has been designated either in this contract or in writing by the contracting officer; and (3) if unforeseen difficulties arise, such as excessive quantity of media is generated, the contractor shall advise the contracting officer and shall not remove media from the site without written authorization from the contracting officer.

DEFINITIONS Media - Any soil, water, or air, moved, disturbed or released from a site. The terms hazardous, waste, pollutant, contaminate, substance have the same meanings and usage here

as they commonly do in CERCLA, RCRA, FWPCA, CAA, TSCA, and SDWA respectively."




INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FOR CLEAN CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS

TO BE REMOVED FROM AAFES PROJECT SITE

As representative of ________________________ (insert name of installation), I am authorized

to certify, and hereby do so certify, that the construction debris to be removed from the AAFES project site at ________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ (describe project and list address, for example Main Exchange Project, 111 Road A, X installation) has been inspected and is of no value to the United States and is free of all contamination, including but not limited to: lead paint, asbestos, PCBs, and pesticides.

CERTIFICATION: Signed: __________________________________________________________________ Date: ____________________ Printed Name: ______________________________________________________________ Rank or Grade, and Duty Title: _________________________________________________

ORIGINAL OF THIS FORM MUST BE PROVIDED TO CONTRACTING OFFICER PART 6 - UNEXPECTED SITE CONDITIONS 6.1 CONTAMINATED SOIL OR GROUNDWATER. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, site has been inspected and is,

consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination or pollution. However, unexpected conditions can always arise. Contractor or subcontractor personnel may encounter soil or groundwater that is suspected to be contaminated, either because of odors, colors, free liquids, unexpected construction debris, or other suspicious conditions. Should this occur, contractor will immediately notify the Contracting Officer and the installation environmental office and take necessary initial measures to protect workers, the site, and other personnel.

6.2 UNEXPECTED ARTIFACTS OR RELICS Should contractor employees in the course of site preparation or other work on this contract

find unexpected historic or archeological remains, such as bones, arrow points, pottery remnants, foundations, or other evidence of previous uses of the site, contractor will cease further site-disturbing activity and immediately notify the Contracting Officer and installation environmental office.





Quality Requirements

10 40 00 - 1

SECTION 01 40 00

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. The Contractor shall establish a quality control system to perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of his subcontractor(s) to insure conformation to applicable specifications and drawings with respect to the materials, workmanship, construction, finish and functional performance. Tests of materials and/or special inspections will be made, when required by these specifications, by applicable law, rules and regulations in accordance with respective Sections of the specifications. Where required, the Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent agency to perform specific services and testing. Examples of such services are tests of fill materials, concrete materials, concrete mix design, asphalt concrete laboratory testing of materials proposed and calculations for asphalt concrete mixtures, etc.

B. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for all services and testing which are not specifically indicated

to be provided by EXCHANGE. C. If a material is not required to be field tested, the Contracting Officer may require the supplier to

furnish with each delivery of such material, a certificate bearing legal signature of said supplier, stating that such material complies with specification requirements.

D. If any work or material requiring tests and inspections is executed, enclosed or covered before tests

are made, or test reports distributed, then the Contractor shall, at his own expense, uncover such part of this work or material and keep it uncovered until such tests and inspections have been made and test reports distributed. If work or material so tested and inspected shall not be found to conform to the requirements of the Construction Documents, it shall be deemed and construed to be defective materials or faulty workmanship and the Contractor, at his own expense, shall replace work or material removed and repair all work disturbed thereby.

1.2 EXCHANGE RESPONSIBILITY

A. EXCHANGE will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Agency to perform

specified quality control testing during construction indicated in the following sections:

1. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00. 1.3 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY

A. Cooperate with the Contracting Officer and laboratory personnel and provide access to work an to manufacturer’s operations. Provide samples of materials to be tested, in required quantities. Furnish casual labor and facilities required to provide access to work to be tested; to obtain and handle samples at the site; to facilitate inspections and tests; and for laboratory’s exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for its assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

The owner will pay for testing services provided during the testing laboratories standard work hours.

If the contractor elects to request the testing company be present for tests or observation at times outside of the testing company’s normal working hours due to the contractor’s schedule or convenience, the testing company shall bill the contractor directly for these extra charges, and the contractor shall pay the overtime charges for these requested services.





10 40 00 - 2

B. The use of EXCHANGE’ or Contractor’s independent testing services shall in no way relieve the

Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with the plans and specifications.

C. The Contractor shall coordinate with both EXCHANGE and his own testing laboratories so that the

work will be inspected and tested according to contract requirements. This coordinately includes notification of when tests should be taken, easy access to the work, and general cooperation in every way to insure proper control of the work.

D. Upon completion of the project the Contractor shall submit a signed certificate stating tests for this

work were made in accordance with provisions of these specifications and, further, all such tests and reports made were reported as required. This certificate shall list all tests and dates when work was completed.

E. Testing to be provided by the General Contractor (Not to be provided by the Mechanical Contractor):

1. Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC: Section 23 05 93.

1.4 AGENCY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. B. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Contracting Officer and Contractor in

performance of services. C. Perform specified sampling and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards. D. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Promptly notify Contracting Officer, and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of

Work or Products. F. Perform additional tests required by Contracting Officer. G. Provide Contracting Officer with three (3) copies of each written test report, and the Contractor each

with one copy of each test report. Each report shall include:

1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing Laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by the Contracting Officer.

H. Upon completion of the project, the testing agency shall prepare a certificate, certified in the

presence of a Notary Public, stating testing for this work was conducted in accordance with the provisions of these specifications, and further, all tests and reports were provided for this job were reported as required.





10 40 00 - 3

1.5 LIMITS ON TESTING AUTHORITY

A. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C. Agency or laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.

1.6 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Required Submittals Section 01 33 00. B. Related requirements and tests specified in Division 2 through 33.






10 40 00 - 4


Temporary Utilities

01 51 00 - 1

SECTION 01 51 00

TEMPORARY UTILITIES


A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water and sanitary facilities.


A. Section 01 55 00 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers and Controls. 1.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC

A. The contractor shall use existing electric service in the building for construction needs throughout the construction period (except at the field office. See Spec Section 01 59 00)

1. The electric service shall be a 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 200 amp service for

construction operations. 3. Provide power centers, located such that all points of the construction area can be reached

with extension cords no more than 100 feet long. Provide 20 amp, 120 and 208 volt grounded outlets, for use by all trades, each protected by a circuit breaker.

4. The Contractor is allowed to utilize the existing utilities at the building without cost. The general contractor shall designate a representative to monitor use and ensure usage is not excessive. The designee shall check for instances of over usage and will be responsible to remedy the situation. Excessive use shall be defined as use for an operation that exceeds the use of a base employee performing the same task.

5. Use of electric resistance heating devices is not permitted. 6. Unusually heavy electric loads, such as electric welding equipment, and other equipment

with special power requirements shall not be connected to the existing system.

B. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of five (5) foot candles.

1. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors,

pigtails, and lamps as required. 2. Provide guarded lighting sockets and lamps. Use 100 watt lamps, minimum. Maintain 110

volts in lighting system. 3. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 4. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during final stages of construction.

C. Field Offices and Sheds: Provide temporary electric service to the field office(s) and shed(s) to meet

the requirements listed in Section 01 59 00 - Field Offices and Sheds. D. Standards: the temporary electric service shall comply with the National Electric Code. Extension

cords used by any and all trades, shall be UL approved.


Temporary Utilities

01 51 00 - 2

1.4 TEMPORARY HEATING

A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and pay for temporary heating equipment of

adequate capacity to provide temporary heat meeting the requirements of this section.

B. The Contractor shall pay for the fuel consumed by the temporary equipment.

C. The Contractor may use the new permanent heating system for construction purposes under the following conditions:

1. The Contractor shall verify the system is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and proper filters are in place.

2. The Contractor shall provide and pay for operation maintenance, and shall provide new filters and replace any damaged or worn parts immediately prior to when the equipment is accepted by EXCHANGE.

3. The Contractor will not be charged for a reasonable amount of fuel or energy consumed by the permanent heating equipment. The Contractor shall maintain strict conservation measures to prevent the waste of fuel or energy.

D. Requirements: The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary heat meeting the

following requirements:

1. As required under each individual specification section for proper placement, setting, and curling of materials.

2. Maintain a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F. (5 degrees C.) For twenty four (24) hours a day during placing, setting, and curing of cementitious materials.

3. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 degrees F. (28 degrees C.), or as required under each individual specification section, for twenty four (24) hours a day, seven (7) days prior to, and during installation of all finish materials, including but not limited to: resilient flooring and base, carpet, paint and wall covering, tile work, acoustic ceilings, and all finish woodwork.

4. Maintain a minimum temperature of 65 degrees F. (28 degrees C.) For twenty four (24) hours a day from the time of placement until beneficial occupancy, all finish materials, including but not limited to: resilient flooring and base, carpet, paint and wall covering, tile work, acoustic ceilings and all finish woodwork.

1.5 TEMPORARY VENTILATION

A. The Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation to:

1. Aid in curing installed materials. 2. Dispersal of humidity. 3. Ventilation of temporary sanitary facilities. 4. Prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapors, or gases in

areas occupied during construction.

B. The Contractor shall employ the use of temporary ventilating equipment, adequately sized to accomplish the required ventilation.


Temporary Utilities

01 51 00 - 3

C. The Contractor may use the existing, permanent ventilating equipment, supplemented by temporary equipment, if required, under the following conditions:

1. Use of the existing, permanent equipment does not spread hazardous or

objectionable dust, fumes, mists, vapors, gases, or odors into areas of the building occupied by EXCHANGE personnel or customers.

2. Use of the existing, permanent equipment does not cause damage to equipment. 3. The Contractor shall provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and

replacement of filters and worn or damaged parts on the equipment used. 1.6 TELEPHONE SERVICE

A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field office and Contracting Officer’s field office at time of project mobilization.

B. Refer to Section 01 59 00 - Field Offices and Sheds.

1.7 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE

A. Connect to existing water source for construction operations at time of project mobilization.

B. The Contractor will not be charged for a reasonable amount of water consumed for construction

purposes. The Contractor shall maintain strict conservation measures to prevent waste of water. C. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections.

Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. D. The Contractor shall provide and install proper backflow prevention devices on all water service

lines. Contractor shall provide documentation of proper/current certification of the devices and proper/current certification of the installer.

1.8 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facility use is not permitted. Provide at time of project mobilization.

B. Furnish, install, and maintain adequate portable chemical toilets for use by construction personnel. C. Provide regular maintenance service to maintain clean and sanitary conditions.

1.9 DUMPSTERS

A. Provide and maintain dumpsters. Equip dumpsters with a secure cover and paint the Standard Fort Bragg color.

1. The cover shall be closed at all times, except when being loaded with trash and debris.

B. Locate dumpsters behind the construction fence and out of the public view. C. Empty dumpsters at least once a week or as needed to keep the site free of debris and trash.



Temporary Utilities

01 51 00 - 4



Temporary Facilities, Barriers and Controls 01 55 00 - 1

SECTION 01 55 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES, BARRIERS AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for support and protection facilities.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on work restrictions and utility interruptions. 2. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for removal of selected portions of a building or

structure. 3. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for plywood sheathing.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Dust-Control and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust-control and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of the work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air filtration system discharge. 4. Other dust-control measures. 5. Waste management plan.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 6 mils minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84.




B. Dust Barrier Tape: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by polyethylene sheet manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations.

C. Dust Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914 by 1624 mm).

D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

E. Spring-Loaded Poles, Ceiling/Wall Rails and Side Wall Clamps: Zipwall Barrier Products for fast set-up and break-down dust barrier system that consists of spring-loaded support poles that extend from 4 feet 7 inches to 12 feet that hold plastic sheeting in position as a curtain-barrier. Zipwall, 37 Broadway, Arlington MA 02474. Phone: 1-800-718-2255, website: www.zipwall.com. Also available are longer poles that adjust from 6 foot 9 inches to approximately 21 feet with spring loaded jacks.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Until Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

3. Permanent HVAC System: Not allowed in areas where Polished Concrete Floor Finish operations are in progress.

C. Air Filtration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:




1. Maintain support facilities until Contracting Officer schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Safety Regulations and Codes” and “Waste Disposal."

F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized

personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.

B. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

D. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures.




F. Temporary Barriers: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof barriers to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by EXCHANGE and tenants from fumes and noise.

1. Dust Barrier: Where dust barriers are required, provide a single layer of 6 mil fire resistant clear polyethylene fiberglass reinforced sheet as manufactured by Griffolyn, or equal. Tape all joints and provide fire resistive treated 2 x 4 wood or metal stud top and bottom runners and verticals 4 foot o.c. with polyethylene sheet wrapped and taped to the runners.

a. Contractor Option: Zipwall temporary barrier system. b. Seal Joints and Perimeter: Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and

security locks where openings are required. Where practical, locate doors in or towards back of house areas to avoid tracking dust in areas open to the public.

2. Opaque Dust Barrier: Where dust barriers are required and where indicated for long duration separation of construction operations from EXCHANGE and tenant spaces, provide braced metal stud framing covered on construction side with 6 mil fire resistant clear polyethylene fiberglass reinforced sheet as manufactured by Griffolyn, or equal. Tape all joints and perimeter. Provide ½ inch gypsum board, fire taped on the EXCHANGE/tenant side from floor to ceiling. Provide R-11 batt insulation for thermal separation from unconditioned construction areas and noise reduction adjacent to sales, food service or office areas.

a. Seal Joints and Perimeter: Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. Where practical, locate doors in or towards back of house areas to avoid tracking dust in areas open to the public.

3. Security Weather-tight Barrier: Where a secure weather-tight barrier is required and where a temporary exit enclosure through surrounding and overhead construction is indicated, provide braced metal stud framing covered on construction side with ½ inch plywood. Provide ½ inch gypsum board, fire-taped on the EXCHANGE/public side on entire enclosure. Provide R-11 batt insulation for thermal separation from the exterior, unconditioned construction areas and noise reduction adjacent to sales, food service or office areas. Panelize framing for ease of removal and relocation.

a. Construct vestibule at each access through the barrier with 1-3/4 inch solid core wood doors with ¾” wood frames spaced not less than 6 feet apart. Doors shall be hinged with latches and provided with double high security padlocks in accordance with EXCHANGE security. Maintain water dampened or adhesive surfaced foot mats in vestibules.

b. At temporary exits, provide individual 1-3/4 inch solid core wood doors with ¾ inch wood frames at each end of the enclosure swinging in the direction of exit. Provide hinges, exit devices and closers. Exit devices to always be operable in the direction of exiting and locked on the opposite side.

G. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.




3.4 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and

exposure to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48hours are considered defective.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may




have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."




Field Offices and Sheds

01 59 00 - 1

SECTION 01 59 00

FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Temporary office in the existing building. B. Temporary field sheds for storage. B. Maintenance and cleaning. C. Removal.


A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary. B. Section 01 50 10 - Temporary Utilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, FURNISHINGS

A. Materials, Equipment, Furnishings: Serviceable, new or used, adequate for required purpose. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors.

B. Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight enclosures for storage spaces. Maintain

during progress of Work; remove at completion of Work. C. Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Compatible with occupancy

and storage requirements. D. Exterior Materials: Weather resistant, finished in one color acceptable to Contracting Officer. E. Fire Extinguishers: One 10# standard dry chemical (ABC) type fire extinguisher at each storage

area. F. Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified conditions for storage of

products.



Field Offices and Sheds

01 59 00 - 2

2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL

A. Storage Spaces: Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain Products in accordance with Contract Documents; adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of Products.

2.4 CONTRACTOR OFFICE AND FACILITIES

A. AAFES will provide space for a desk for the contractor’s use in the existing building in the back of house area. Contractor to provide furniture.

B. Telephone: The Contractor shall install, maintain and pay for telephone service for the Contractor's

field office including an answering device and outside bell. Mobile phone is acceptable. C. Internet, E-Mail and Fax: Contractor shall provide access to the internet and email for their use.

Install, maintain and pay for services for a fax machine at Contractor’s option. D. Other Furnishings: Contractor's option.

2.5 STORAGE AREAS AND SHEDS

A. Size to storage requirements for products of individual Sections, allowing for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Employee Residential Occupancy: Not permitted on Installation property.

3.3 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

A. Weekly cleaning services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage areas.

B. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow.

3.4 REMOVAL

A. At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. Restore areas.




Starting of Systems

01 65 00 - 1

SECTION 01 65 00

STARTING OF SYSTEMS


A. Starting Systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing, adjusting and balancing.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures: System operation and maintenance data and extra

materials. C. Section 23 05 93 - Testing and Balancing: System Commissioning.

1.3 STARTING SYSTEMS

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Contracting Officer seven (7) working days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive

rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the

equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative and/or Contractors'

personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized

representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01 33 00 that equipment or system has been

properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to EXCHANGE and Facility personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection.

B. Demonstrate project equipment by a qualified representative who is knowledgeable about the

project.



Starting of Systems

01 65 00 - 2

C. For equipment of systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season

within six months. D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with

AFFES/Installation personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and

shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time at designated location. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional

data becomes apparent during instruction. G. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified

in individual sections.

1.5 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

A. EXCHANGE will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. The independent firm will perform services specified in Section 23 05 93. C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Contracting Officer indicating observations

and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)




Cleaning

01 71 00 - 1

SECTION 01 71 00

CLEANING


A. Progress Cleaning. B. Final Cleaning.


A. General Provisions of the Contract. B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary. C. Section 01 14 50 - Cutting and Patching. D. Section 01 55 00 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers and Controls. E. Individual Specification Sections - Cleaning Requirements.

1.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. Standards: Maintain project in accordance with the following safety and insurance standards:

1. The Corps of Engineers Manual, EM 385-1-1, latest edition, entitled: "General Safety Requirements", as referred to in General Provisions, Paragraph: Accident Prevention.

B. O.S.H.A. Standards:

1. The Contractor shall be required to comply with OSHA Requirements in 29 CFR 1926 and

29 CFR in 1910. The OSHA Standards are subject to change, and such changes may affect the Contractor in his performance under the contract. It is the Contractor's responsibility to know such changes, effective dates of changes, and comply with all requirements.

C. Hazards Control:

1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. 2. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during the use of volatile or noxious substances.

D. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.

1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the installation. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or

sanitary drains. 3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned.



Cleaning

01 71 00 - 2

B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Execute cleaning to ensure that the building, grounds, and public properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.

B. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. C. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and legally dispose of at public or private

dumping areas off of Government property. E. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, and continue cleaning to

eliminate dust. F. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or throw

materials from heights. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. G. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from the cleaning

process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Employ professional cleaners for final cleaning. B. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of sight-exposed

interior and exterior surfaces and of concealed spaces. C. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, temporary labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from

sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish surfaces so designated to shine; finish vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

D. Repair, patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds. G. Clean all glass. H. Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction. I. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils, if air H.V.A.C. units were operated without filters during

construction. J. Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by EXCHANGE.




Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 74 19 - 1

SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.


1. Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordination of responsibilities for waste management.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.





A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for commencement of the Work.

B. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.


A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements.

B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator.

2. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays.

3. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.

4. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.




2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating

elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.




5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated.

B. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating

elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors.

D. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather.

E. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.

F. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.

G. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information only; available

recycling receivers and processors include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Pratt Industries, 3686 Owen Dr, Fayetteville, NC 28306 (910) 483-7902 2. Fayetteville Metal Recyclers, 629 S King St, Fayetteville, NC 28301 (910) 486-4646 3. Regional Materials Recovery, 629 S King St, Fayetteville, NC 28301 (910) 486-4646 4. All American Surplus, 5330 Bragg Blvd, Fayetteville, NC 28303 (910) 868-3232 5. River City Recycling, 1049 S Eastern Blvd, Fayetteville, NC 28306 (910) 486-4226 6. Sonoco Recycling, 3226 Mid Pine Rd, Fayetteville, NC 28306 (910) 423-8700 7. First Source Recycling, 4439 Claude Lee Rd, Fayetteville, NC 28306 (910) 425-3373 8. Cohen & Green Salvage Co Inc, 445 Glidden St, Fayetteville, NC 28301 (910) 483-1371 9. Omni Source Corp, 445 Glidden St, Fayetteville, NC 28301 (910) 483-1371 10. Waste Management of Fayetteville, 691 Tom Starling Rd, Fayetteville, NC 28306 (877)

882-2121 11. Solid Waste Convenience Ctr, 322 Old NC Hwy, Red Springs, NC 28377 (910) 843-8517 12. Waste Industries Inc, 4621 Marracco Dr, Hope Mills, NC 28348 (910) 423-4122

C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to the Contractor.

D. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.




E. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or

processor.

3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2-inch size. 2. Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth

Moving" for use as satisfactory soil for fill or sub-base.

B. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

C. Metals: Separate metals by type.

1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.

D. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.

E. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.

F. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from

Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.




4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.

1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Burning: Burning of waste materials is permitted only at designated areas on Owner's property, provided required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for burning materials until fires are extinguished.

D. Disposal: Remove waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property.

E. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.




Project Closeout

01 77 00 - 1

SECTION 01 77 00

PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Substantial Completion. B. Final Inspections. C. Closeout Submittals.

1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 2. Operation and Maintenance Instruction.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. General Provisions of the Contract: Final Acceptance and Payment. B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. C. Section 01 71 00 - Cleaning. D. Section 01 65 00 – Starting of Systems. E. Section 01 72 00 - Project Record Documents.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection, complete the following.

1. Contractor's list of incomplete items (punch list) prepared.

a. Submit PDF electronic file. b. Submit paper copies.

2. Owner advised of pending insurance changeover. 3. Warranties, maintenance service agreements, and similar documents submitted. 4. Releases, occupancy permits, and operating certificates submitted. 5. Project Record Documents submitted. 6. Tools, spare parts, and extra materials delivered. 7. Final changeover of locks performed. 8. Startup testing completed. 9. Test/adjust/balance records submitted. 10. Temporary facilities removed. 11. Owner advised of heat and utility changeover.



Project Closeout

01 77 00 - 2

12. Changeover information for use, operation, and maintenance submitted. 13. Owner's personnel instructed in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and

systems, including demonstration and training videotapes submitted. B. Contractor:

1. Submit written certification to Contracting Officer that project, or designated portion of

Project, is substantially complete. 2. Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected.

C. Contracting Officer will make an inspection after receipt of certification. D. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is substantially complete:

1. Contractor shall prepare, and submit to Contracting Officer, a list of items to be completed

or corrected, as determined by the inspection. 2. Contracting Officer will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion,

containing:

a. Date of Substantial Completion. b. Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, verified, and amended by

Contracting Officer. c. The time within which Contractor shall complete or correct work of listed items. d. Time and date EXCHANGE will assume possession of work or designated portion

thereof. e. Responsibilities of EXCHANGE and Contractor for:

(1) Utilities. (2) Operation of mechanical, electrical, and other systems. (3) Maintenance and cleaning. (4) Security.

f. Signatures of: (1) Contracting Officer. (2) Contractor.

3. EXCHANGE occupancy of project or designated portion of project:

a. Contractor shall:

(1) Perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01 71 00.

b. EXCHANGE will occupy project, under provisions stated in Certificate of Substantial Completion.

4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within designated time.

E. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is not substantially complete:

1. He shall immediately notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor: Complete work, and send second written notice to contracting officer, certifying

that project, or designated portion of project, is substantially complete. 3. Contracting Officer will reinspect work.



Project Closeout

01 77 00 - 3

1.4 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall submit written certification that:

1. Contract documents have been reviewed. 2. Project has been inspected for compliance with contract documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Facility Representatives and are

operational. 5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection.

B. Contracting Officer will make final inspection after receipt of certification. C. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is finally complete in accordance with

requirements of contract documents, he shall request contractor to make project closeout submittals.

D. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is not finally complete:

1. He shall notify contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send second

written notice to the Contracting Officer certifying that work is complete. 3. The Contracting Officer will reinspect work.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. Project Record Documents: Specified requirements of Section 01 78 39. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers.

B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "Operation and Maintenance Manuals", title of project, and

subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as

described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description

identified, typed on 20 pound white paper, in three parts as follows:

1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.

2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:

a. Significant design criteria.



Project Closeout

01 77 00 - 4

b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Value chart. f. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. g. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and

materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:

a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties. e. Training Sessions attendance roster. f. Warrantees.

E. Submit three (3) hard copies and one electronic CD-ROM with pdfs of the operation and

maintenance manuals to the Contracting Officer. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION:

A. The Contractor shall provide, at his expense, manufacturer's representatives to completely check out all mechanical and electrical systems and items covered by the drawings and specifications. This requirement shall be scheduled just prior to, and during the initial start up. After all systems are functioning properly, the representatives shall instruct Facility Maintenance Personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of each item. In addition to instructions given at the project, the Facility Maintenance Personnel shall be given a classroom instruction course on operation and maintenance of the systems. Training sessions shall be limited to four (4) continuous hours where practical. Schedule additional four (4) hour sessions as required.

1.9 WARRANTY AND EXTENDED WARRANTIES:

A. Upon completion of project, prior to final payment, guarantees required by technical divisions of

Specifications shall be properly executed in quadruplicate by subcontractors and submitted to Contracting Officer. Delivery of guarantees shall not relieve contractor from any obligation assumed under contract.

B. Submit guarantee covering entire project for one year. In addition, where separate guarantees, for

certain portions of work, are for longer periods, General Contractor's guarantee shall be extended to cover such longer periods.

C. Guarantees shall become valid and operative upon issuance of Certificate of Inspection and

Acceptance by EXCHANGE. Guarantees shall not apply to work where damage is a result of abuse, neglect by EXCHANGE, or his successor(s) in interest.




Project Record Documents

01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 78 39

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Submittals: Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1.2 RECORD FIELD DATA

A. General: Maintain at job site, two complete sets of Contract Documents. During construction, both sets shall be marked to show all deviations in actual construction from the Contract Documents.

1. Red Markers: Indicate all additions. 2. Green Markers: Indicate all deletions.

B. Record Documents: The drawings shall show, but no be limited to, the following information:

1. Locations and description of any utility lines and other installations of any kind or description known to exist within the construction area. Include dimensions and/or survey coordinates to permanent features.

2. Locations and dimensions of any changes within the building or structure and the accurate location and dimension of all underground utilities and facilities.

3. Correct grade or alignment of roads, structures and utilities if any changes were made from Contract Drawings.

4. Correct elevations if changes were made in site grading. 5. Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from shop drawings

prepared or furnished by the Contractor including, but not limited to:

a. Fabrication erection b. Installation and placing details c. Pipe sizes d. Insulation materials e. Equipment pad dimensions

6. Topography and grades of all drainage. 7. All changes or modifications from the original design. 8. Where contract drawings or specifications allow options, only the option actually used in the

construction shall be shown on the Record Drawings. The option not used shall be deleted.

C. Record Field Data: All deviations shall be shown in the same general detail utilized in the Contract Documents. Marking of the documents shall continue throughout construction to keep the documents up to date.

1. Additional Data: The Contractor shall maintain the following:

a. Full size marked-up drawings. b. Survey notes c. Sketches




01 78 39 - 2

d. Nameplate data e. Pricing information f. Description and serial number of all equipment

2. Record field data shall be available for inspection by the Contracting Officer whenever

requested and shall be jointly inspected for accuracy and completeness by the Contracting Officer and Contractor. Failure to keep record field data current shall be sufficient justification to withhold a retained percentage from the monthly Application for Payment.

D. Submittal of Record Field Data:

1. Submit two sets to the Contracting Officer a minimum of 20 calendar days prior to the date of final inspection.

2. The Contractor shall make all corrections identified during Contractor Officer review and resubmit corrected data within ten (10) calendar days of receipt.

3. When data is accepted as complete, one set of documents will be returned to the Contractor for completion of the Record Documents.

1.3 RECORD ELECTRONIC FILE DOCUMENTS

A. Electronic File Format: No earlier than 30 days after award, the Contracting Officer will provide one set of AutoCAD electronic file format contract drawings to be used for preparation of Record Drawings.

1. Media: ISO – 9660 CD 2. The Contractor shall verify usability of AutoCAD files and notify the Contracting Officer of

any discrepancies within 30 calendar days of receipt. Any discrepancies will be corrected and files returned to the Contractor.

3. The Contractor shall incorporate all deviations from the original Contract Documents as recorded in the approved “Record Field Data” as indicated in Paragraph 1.2.C above.

4. The Contractor shall also incorporate all written modifications to the Contract Documents which were issued by amendment or contract modification.

5. All revisions and changes shall be incorporated:

a. Items marked deleted shall be deleted. b. Clouds around new items shall be removed.

B. Electronic File Submittal: Submit a complete set of Record Drawings in AutoCAD electronic file

format no later than 30 days after final acceptance. The Record Drawings shall be done in equal quality to the originals, including line work, line weights, lettering and symbols. Identify each drawing with the word “RECORD” in block letters at least 3/8” high above the title block. The date of completion and the words “Revised Record” shall be placed in the revision block above the latest revision notation.

1. Format: AutoCAD Release 2005 ‘DWG’ format. All support files required to display or plot

the files in the same manner as they were developed shall be delivered along with the files, including but not limited to:

a. Font files b. Menu files c. Plotter setup d. Referenced files




01 78 39 - 3

2. Layering: Conform to AIA Standard Document, “CAD Layer Guidelines,” latest version. An explanatory list of which layer is used at which drawing and an explanatory list of all layers which do not conform to the standard AIA CAD Layer Guidelines including any user definable fields permitted by the guidelines shall be provided with each submittal.

3. Electronic File Deliverable Media: ISO 9660 Format CD-ROM. Submit three (3) complete

sets of disks and one complete set of full size reproducible prints taken from the disks. Each disk shall have a clearly marked label stating the Contractor’s firm name, project name and location, submittal type (record) and date. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a hard copy transmittal sheet that contains the above information along with tabulated information about each file as shown below:

Electronic File Name Plate Number Drawing Title

a. Include electronic version of the table.

4. Submit one copy of the CD-Rom and one set of full-size Mylar reproducibles of the drawings to (Building Records staff person) at (Post or Base).

1.4 SUBMITTAL OF FINAL RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Complete and return the final record documents and the approved preliminary record documents to the Contracting Officer within 30 calendar days of final acceptance.

1. All drawings from the original contract documents shall be included, including drawings

where no changes were made. 2. The drawings will be returned to the Contractor if corrections are necessary. 3. The Contractor shall make all corrections and shall return the drawings to the Contracting

Officer within seven (7) calendar days of receipt. 1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT COST

A. All costs incurred by the Contractor in the proportion and furnishing of record documents, including electronic file format, shall be included in the contract price and no separate payment will be made for this work.

1. Approval and acceptance of the final record documents shall be accomplished before final

payment is made to the Contractor. 1.6 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Provide one set of marked-up record drawings at the time of system acceptance testing. These record drawings shall be in addition to the submittal of marked-up record drawings specified elsewhere in the contract.




General Commissioning Requirements 01 91 13 - 1

SECTION 01 91 13

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Commissioning Team:

1. Members representing contractor, including Project superintendent and subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and specialists.

2. Members representing Owner, including Commissioning Authority (CxA), facility user and operation and maintenance personnel, and Architect and engineering design professionals.

B. EXCHANGE’ Responsibilities:

1. Provide Operating (OPR) and Basis of Design (BoD) documentation. 2. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them for commissioning

activities.

C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Assign personnel and schedule them for commissioning activities.

D. CxA's Responsibilities:

1. Organize and lead commissioning team. 2. Provide commissioning plan. 3. Convene commissioning team meetings. 4. Provide Project-specific checklists and test procedures. 5. Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling. 6. Prepare and maintain Issues Log. 7. Prepare and maintain completed construction checklist log. 8. Witness systems, assemblies, equipment, and component startup. 9. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates; include them in the systems

manual and commissioning process report.




General Commissioning Requirements 01 91 13 - 2



CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

03 20 00 - 1

SECTION 03 20 00


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Includes furnishing all materials, equipment, transportation and facilities, and performing all labor necessary for preparation and submittal of shop drawings, furnishing and placing reinforcing steel.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop and installation drawings of steel reinforcement. Shop fabricator shall produce sufficient diagrams, notes, etc., to insure proper placing of reinforcing steel and submit it with each set of shop drawings for field use. Submit a placement plan and elevation for all walls.

B. Mill Test Reports: Certified copies, evidencing compliance with the requirements of these Specifications, shall be delivered to the Architect with all deliveries of reinforcing steel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS:

A. Reinforcing Bars: Meet requirements shown on the drawings.

B. Welded Wire Mesh: Conform to requirements shown on the drawings.

C. Concrete Accessories: Bar supports, chairs, spacers, etc., shall be cold-drawn wire and shall be

fabricated in accordance with ACI Detailing Manual, SP-66, with heights as required. Bar supports for concrete resting on earth shall be precast concrete briquettes having tie wires embedded therein, or INDIVIDUAL HIGH CHAIRS NO. HCP with welded plates on bottom as manufactured by HOHMANN & BARNARD, INC.

D. Threaded Reinforcing Steel Couplers: Lenton Threaded Standard or Transition Couplers with plastic internal coupler end protector and O-Ring, as manufactured at ERICO. Mechanical splice shall be capable of developing 125% of the yield point strength of the bar.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 MATERIAL STORAGE:

A. Reinforcing steel shall be stacked in tiers. Care shall be exercised to maintain all reinforcement free of dirt, mud, paint, rust, etc.

3.2 GENERAL:

A. Reinforcing steel of the sizes, shapes, lengths, spacing and other dimensions shown shall be placed where shown on the Drawings. Details of reinforcing shall conform to requirements shown on the drawings.




03 20 00 - 2

3.3 MARKING:

A. Plainly mark bars. Limit bundles to one size and one length.

B. Tag each bundle with durable tags.

3.4 CLEANING:

A. Thoroughly clean reinforcement of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil or other coatings which might tend to

reduce the bonding to the concrete.

3.5 BENDING:

A. Bend bars cold. Do not heat reinforcement.

B. Do not handle reinforcement by makeshift methods.

C. Do not use bars having kinks or bends not shown on the Contract Drawings.

3.6 PLACING:

A. Accurately place and securely saddle tie reinforcement with No. 18 gage black annealed wire to prevent displacement during concrete placement.

B. Hold reinforcement rigidly in place during the placing of the concrete by means of metal chairs or spacers.

C. Hold bars in concrete walls in position, and to proper clearance, by means of concrete or metal spacers made especially for the locations where spacers are required.

D. Hold bars in beams and slabs to exact location during placing of concrete by spacers, chairs, or other necessary supports.

3.7 CONCRETE COVERAGE:

A. Provide concrete coverage for reinforcing steel as shown on the Drawings.

B. Place reinforcement to conform to ACI 301 tolerances.

3.8 WELDING:

A. Do not weld reinforcing steel except where specifically indicated on the drawings.

B. For all bars indicated to be welded, provide bars which conform to ASTM A 706.

C. Conform welding of reinforcing steel to AWS D1.4.

END OF SECTION


Fort Bragg, North Carolina Issue for Bidding May 6,2016

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. STRUCTURAL STEEL: Section 05 12 23

B. REINFORCING STEEL: Section 03 20 00 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Comply with the provisions of the following latest codes, specifications and standards, except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings”. 2. ACI 311 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection”. 3. ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete”. 4. ACI 347 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork”. 5. ACI 304 “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete”. 6. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, “Manual of Standard Practice”.

B. The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified

requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

1.3 DRAWINGS:

A. Comply with applicable portions of ACI SP-66.

B. Show bar schedules, bending and placement, stirrup spacing, diaphragms of bent bars, arrangements of concrete reinforcement.

C. Refer to Section 01 30 00 - Submittals.

D. All Shop Drawings shall be reviewed and approved by Contractor before submitting to Architect/Engineer.

1.4 TESTING:

A. The Contractor shall pay for all designs of concrete mixes and breaking cylinders in connection with

the design mixes. All other concrete tests and/or controls, except when faulty concrete work has been placed and requires corrective measures, will be paid for out of Testing Allowance.

B. Submit one (1) copy each of test reports to Architect, to the Structural Engineer, and the contractor.

C. The Owner will select a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and submit test reports to the Architect and the Consulting Engineers. Tests will be paid for out of the Testing Allowance. Concrete shall be sampled and tested for quality control during the placement of concrete as follows: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C-172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C-94.




03 30 00 - 2

2. Slump: ASTM C-143: One test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one for each set of compressive strength test specimens.

3. Air Content: ASTM C-231, pressure method, one for each set of compressive strength test specimens.

4. Compressive Test Specimen: ASTM C-31, two sets of 3 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test unless otherwise directed. Mold and store one set of cylinders for laboratory cured test and if requested by the Architect/Engineer, one set for field-cure test.

5. Concrete Temperature: One test for each concrete load discharged and/or as needed when air temperature is 80 degrees F. and above and each time a set of compression test specimens are made.

6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C-39; one test for each 100 cu.yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day and for each 5,000 sq.ft. of surface area placed; one laboratory cured and one field cured specimen tested at 7 days, and at 28 days, with one laboratory cured, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

7. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used.

8. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu.yds., the strength tests may be waived by the Architect/Engineer, if in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.

9. When the strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protection and curing the in-place concrete.

D. Report test results in writing to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor on the same day that tests

are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of contractor, name of concrete supplier and truck number, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials. Compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7 day tests and 28 day tests.

E. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate the specific concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. The testing service shall conduct tests to determine the adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C-42 or by other methods as directed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS:

A. Cement: Portland Cement ASTM C-150, Type II unless otherwise acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

Use only one brand of approved cement throughout the project unless use of more than one approved brand is acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

B. Aggregates: 1. Fine Aggregate: Complying with ASTM C-33. 2. Coarse Aggregate: Complying with ASTM C-33.

C. Do not use Calcium Chloride unless authorized in writing by Architect/Engineer. D. Fly ash as a substitute for cement will be allowed unless otherwise indicated. Fly ash shall conform to

ASTM C618 Class C or F. Fly ash shall not exceed 20% of total cementitious material by weight




03 30 00 - 3

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS:

A. Deformed Reinforcing: Complying with ASTM A-615; of domestic manufacture, Grade 60.

B. Bar Supports: In compliance with Detailing Manual ACI SP-66, unless detailed otherwise on the

Drawings. Bar supports for exposed concrete to have plastic coated feet.

C. Tie Wire: No. 18 gage soft, annealed wire. 2.3 FORM MATERIALS:

A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or otherwise specified herein, construct forms of the

following materials. 1. Forms for Exposed Concrete: Plywood complying with U.S. Standards PS-1, “B-B (Concrete

Form) Plywood” Class 1, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with each piece bearing the legible trademark of an approved inspection agency.

2. Forms for Unexposed Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable materials. Provide lumber that is dressed on at least two (2) edges and one (1) side for tight fit.

B. Sleeves: Schedule 40 steel pipe.

C. Form Coatings: Commercial formulated form coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, nor

adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond adhesion, nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS:

A. Moisture Retaining Cover: Provide moisture retaining cover for curing concrete of any of the

following: 1. Waterproof paper complying with ASTM C-171. 2. Polyethylene sheeting complying with ASTM C-171. 3. Polyethylene coated burlap. 4. Liquid Membrane-forming Compounds: Curing compound complying with ASTM C-309, Type 1,

warranted by manufacturer not to deter bond of floor covering materials. Do not use liquid membrane-forming compounds when bond is required between hardened concrete in place and fresh concrete to be applied.

The following are approved manufacturers: 1. Sonneborn-Contech 2. A.C. Horn/W.R. Grace 3. Hillyard Chemical

B. Moisture Barrier: Clear polyethylene sheet not less than 10 mils thick, overlapped and continuously taped in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Chemical Bonding Agent: Film-Forming, Freeze-thaw resistant compound suitable for brush or spray application complying with Mil-B-19235.

2.5 JOINT MATERIALS:




03 30 00 - 4

A. Interior Concrete Slabs: Stree-lock, zip-cap, zip-strip or approved equal.

2.6 NON-SHRINK GROUT:

A. Submit specifications for approval.

B. Shall have 28 day compressive strength of not less than 7,500 psi.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORM CONSTRUCTION:

A. Construct forms to comply with ACI 347, to the exact dimensions shown, and as required to obtain

accurate alignment, location, grades and level and plumb work in finished structures. Build forms mortar-tight and with sufficient strength and rigidity to prevent bulging between supports or other deformation. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required.

B. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses and the like, to prevent swelling and to assure ease of removal.

C. Provide openings in forms to accommodate other work, including mechanical and electrical work. Accurately place and securely support items to be built into forms.

D. Form exposed corners and edges as shown, with PVC or rubber strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight joints.

E. Erect falsework and support, brace and maintain it to safely support vertical, lateral and asymmetrical loads applied until such loads can be supported by in-place concrete structures. Construct false work so that adjustments can be made for take-up and settlement.

F. Earth sides may be used for forming beams below finish grade if conditions are such that accurate size and shape may be obtained.

G. Provide wedges, jacks or camber strips to facilitate vertical adjustments. Carefully inspect falsework and formwork during and after concrete placement operations to determine abnormal deflection or signs of failure, make necessary adjustment to produce work of required dimensions.

H. Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of embedded items.

I. Install moisture barrier sheet according to manufacturer’s recommendations after forms are in place.

J. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chip, wood, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.

K. Coat and contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Thin form-coating compound only as recommended by the form-coating manufacturer. Prevent excess accumulation of form-coating or contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions.




03 30 00 - 5

L. Provide factory-fabricated form ties of adjustable length that are removable or snap-off and that are

designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. 3.2 NOT USED

3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT:

A. For details and methods of placement of reinforcement and supports, refer only to codes and

standards herein specified and to Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute’s recommended practice for “Placing Reinforcing Bars”.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Accurately position support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required.

D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2” beyond the last leg of continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.

3.4 CONCRETE:

A. Proportioning:

1. Weight and volume measurements:

a. Cement: One cubic foot bag considered as 94 pounds. b. Water: One gallon of water is considered 8.33 pounds. c. Aggregate: Use aggregate in amount consistent with required workability. When

moisture content changes, a redesign of mix will be necessary. 2. Determination of Maximum Content Allowable: The testing laboratory will establish strength of

concrete proposed for use, by tests made on the design mix, and the quantity of admixture required.

3. Proportion materials to produce concrete that will have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days as indicated on structural drawings. Proportion for minimum strength of 3,000 psi for concrete not otherwise indicated. Minimum five sacks of cement per cu.yd. of concrete, and maximum water/cement ratio of 0.55.

4. Proportion generally for minimum slump of 3 inches and maximum slump of 5 inches for slabs, walks and columns, and minimum of 5 inches for piers. Use maximum slump of 5 inches, unless otherwise noted.

5. Maximum Size of Coarse Aggregate as indicated on the structural drawings and as follows: a. The nominal maximum size of the aggregate shall not be larger than one-fifth of the

narrowest dimension between sides of form, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three-fourths of the minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars or between bars and forms whichever is least. In columns, the nominal maximum size of the aggregate shall be limited as above but shall not be larger than two-thirds of the minimum clear distance between bars.

b. Coarse aggregates in concrete of normal weight may be of one size for all concrete




03 30 00 - 6

placed in 1 day when quantities to be placed are too small to permit economical use of more than one mix design. When a single mix is so used, the maximum nominal size shall be as required for the most critical condition of concreting, in accordance with the requirements of the preceding section.

B. Mixing:

1. Concrete shall be ready-mixed in compliance with requirements of ASTM C-94. Furnish

Architect/Engineer with duplicate delivery tickets for each truck load. 2. Arrange for continuity of supply. Do not change supplier of ready-mixed concrete without specific

approval.

C. Air-Entraining Admixtures: 1. Air-entraining admixtures shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions except

as otherwise specified herein. 2. All concrete exposed to the exterior must be air-entrained. The use of air-entrainment on interior

concrete is a Contractor’s option. 3. If air entrainment is required in concrete of normal weight, the air content of the concrete shall as

a minimum, unless otherwise specified on the drawings, conform to ACI 318, Table 4.4.1, Total Air Content For Concrete Exposed To Cycles of Freezing and Thawing. The air content shall be determined by either of the ASTM standard methods of test.

D. Placing:

1. Inform Architect/engineer of placing schedule to show sufficient time, without delaying work, for

inspection prior to beginning of placement. Notify Architect/Engineer at least twenty-four (24) hours before placement.

2. Notify other craftsmen of the placing schedule to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other craftsmen in setting such work, as required.

3. Where form coatings are not used, thoroughly wet wood forms without bending, immediately before placing concrete.

4. Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. 5. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on

concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section.

6. Handle concrete from mixer or transport vehicle to place of final deposit in continuous manner as rapidly as practicable until given operation is completed. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms.

7. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24” and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

8. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with the recommended practices of ACI 309, to suit the type of concrete and project conditions.

9. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.

10. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straight edge and strike-off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

11. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations.




03 30 00 - 7

E. Weather Protection:

1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by low

temperatures, or winds in compliance with ACI 306. Do not place concrete when temperature is below 40 degrees F. except with specific approval.

2. When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, mix and place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. a. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel

temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

b. Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete. c. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix design. d. Concrete at time of placement must be below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled,

or chopped ice may be used to control concrete temperature.

F. Finish of Formed Surfaces: 1. Form orderly, even, symmetrical surfaces with a minimum of seams. 2. Form smooth finish on concrete surfaces to be exposed to view or covered with a coating

covering material that is applied directly to the concrete or bonded to the concrete such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting, etc.

3. Rough finish may be formed on concrete surfaces not exposed to view unless otherwise shown on drawings or otherwise specified.

4. Repair and patch defective areas of exposed formed concrete surfaces immediately after removal of forms. Cut out honeycombs, voids over 1/2” in diameter, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1”. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush with a coat of concrete bonding agent all surfaces to be patched. Patch with patching concrete of same type or class as the original adjacent concrete. Mix patching concrete with bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Place concrete to blend with adjacent concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

5. Smooth form concrete surfaces shall receive grout finish. Combine portland cement, fine sand, water and bonding agent. Proportion mix in accordance with recommendations of bonding agent manufacturer. Blend standard portland cement and white cement to match color of formed concrete. Provide trial color samples for Architect’s approval. Thoroughly wet concrete surface and apply grout uniformly by brushing or spraying immediately to wetted surfaces. Scrub surface with cork float or stone to coat surface and fill surface holes. Remove excess grout by scraping, followed by rubbing with clean burlap to remove any visible grout film. Complete any area in same day it is commenced, with the limits of any area being natural breaks in the finish surface.

G. Slab Finishes:

1. Apply trowel finish to all slab surfaces. Consolidate the concrete surface to the final hand

troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance of Ff = 30 and fl = 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-1155 unless otherwise noted. The dusting of dry cement and/or sand to take up excess moisture will not be permitted. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system.

2. Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and sidewalks and elsewhere as shown on Drawings. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen the concrete surface by brooming in direction perpendicular to the main traffic route.

3.5 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION:




03 30 00 - 8

A. Protect concrete from premature drying and excessive hot temperature, and maintain without drying

for a period of seven (7) days.

B. Protect concrete surfaces not covered by forms from loss of moisture by one of the following methods: 1. Moisture Retaining Cover: Cover all exposed concrete with moisture retaining cover. Lap sides

at least 3” and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive. Keep cover sealed during curing period. 2. Liquid Membrane: Apply two (2) coats of liquid membrane at the rate prescribed by

manufacturer. Apply second coat at right angle to first coat.

C. All concrete surfaces must be protected throughout the construction of the job to avoid discoloration or staining by other phases of the construction.

END OF SECTION



Polished Concrete Floor Finish

03 35 36 - 1

SECTION 03 35 36

POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Installation of polished concrete floor system for new and/or existing interior concrete floors by dry grinding, application of concrete densifier, and polishing with various size grit metal-bonded and resin-bonded diamonds to the scheduled specified minimum local and overall gloss values.

B. Removal of existing epoxy, ceramic, carpet, and/or vinyl composite tile floor finish, and all underlayment products where shown on drawings.

C. Application of chemical dye and complementary edge band treatment. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Division 09 – Finishes 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 1028 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.

B. ASTM D 523 – Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.

C. NFSA - National Floor Safety Institute; Test Method 101A; current edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: 1. Provide manufacturer's equipment product data sheets for:

a. Planetary grinder polishing equipment b. Planetary grinder HEPA dust collection equipment c. Hand tools d. Hand tool dust collection equipment e. Diamond tooling f. High speed propane burnisher g. Polyurea pump h. Joint cutting saw

2. Manufacturer’s chemical and product data sheets for:

a. Specified dye b. Liquid reactive surface densifier c. Liquid stain guard treatment d. Joint filler




03 35 36 - 2

e. Crack and spall repair product f. Self leveling, dye-able, polishable overlay product g. Grout coat, pin hole and small defect surface treatment

C. Installer’s Certification: 1. Provide list of 5 projects performed with last three years of similar type, size and complexity.

Submit project names, addresses, contacts and phone numbers for each project. General Contractor is to validate references and polisher’s capabilities prior to submitting bid to AAFES.

2. Applicator Qualifications: Submit letter of certification from each of the following manufacturers of products and equipment specified herein, stating that the applicator is a certified applicator of the system and is familiar with proper procedures and installation methods as required by the manufacturer. a. Planetary grinder system b. Liquid reactive surface densifier and stain guard treatment c. Joint filler, crack and spall repair products

D. Pre-Certified Installers

All bidding contractors must have completed our in house certification for this project. Below is a list of pre-approved applicators.

Company Name Number Region Covered

1) American Concrete Inc. 877-775-0030 U.S.A 2) Avalon Corporation 425-643-5667 Northwest 3) Bomanite of North Texas 800-492-2524 Southwest 4) Budget Maintenance Concrete 610-323-7702 Northeast 5) Diama-Shield 888-730-4075 North 6) Jeffco Concrete Contractors 800-226-2668 Southeast 7) K & J Concrete Polishing 865-971-1760 Southeast 8) Pacific Decorative Concrete 916-725-9269 West 9) Perfect Polish Inc. 877-917-4463 U.S.A 10) Polished Solution 843-200-5694 South 11) Stone Care of Texas 210-656-8019 U.S.A

Refer to specifications Division 1 for substitution qualifications. Any potential contractor substitution must have their complete submittal package submitted in writing a minimum of 10 days prior to bid date to the AAFES project manager for review and approval.


A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the Americans with Disabilities

Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAGs) for Buildings and Facilities; Final Guidelines, revisions, and updates for static coefficient of friction for walkway surfaces.

2. Environmental Requirements: Comply with current Federal and local toxicity and air quality regulations and with Federal requirements on content of lead, mercury, and other heavy metals. Do not use solvents in floor polish products that contribute to air pollution or impact food quality.

B. Pre-installation Meeting:

1. General contractor shall schedule and convene a pre-installation meeting at the project site before start of installation of polished concrete floor system.




03 35 36 - 3

2. Meeting to occur only after review and approval of required Sub-contractor submittals and completion of test panel mock-up, including specified grinding, polishing and dye, joint filling, spall and crack repairs, and specified overall gloss values.

3. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including:

a. AAFES Project Manager b. AAFES Store Manager of Assistant Manager c. Project Architect d. Owner’s Polishing Consultant e. General Contractor f. Polishing Subcontractor including Project Manager and Foreman

4. Meeting agenda to include (but not limited to): Review of existing conditions, surface preparation,

system installations, field quality control, protection, environmental requirements, coordination with other work, controls to limit damage from dust and field quality control methods and reporting.

1.6 MOCK-UP

A. Provide polished concrete floor finish mock-up, a minimum of 250 square feet, illustrating completed finish including dye, all specified liquid surface treatments and specified gloss levels.

Mock-up will include properly repaired surface spalls, slab joints and slab edge treatments including complementary edge banding.

B. Locate mock-up where directed by AAFES Project Manager.

C. Accepted mock-up will serve as standard to judge quality and workmanship of completed polished concrete floor finish.

D. Accepted mock-up shall remain as part of finished product.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Sequence application of concrete polishing after completion of other construction activities that would be damaging to the completed polished concrete finish.

B. Close areas to traffic during and after floor application for time period recommended in writing by manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT

2.1 EQUIPMENT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION

A. Floor Grinder: 1. Machinery manufacturer will be HTC, SASE, Concrete Polishing Solutions, Husqvarna, Diamatic or

PrepMaster 2. Type: Multi-orbital, planetary-action, opposing-rotational, 3 or 4 diamond-headed floor grinders. 3. Weight: 850 pounds or more. 4. Grinding Pressure: 600 pounds minimum.

B. Dust Extraction System and pre-separator for grinding/polishing:

Heavy-duty industrial HEPA filtration vacuum system, suitable for extracting and containing large quantities of fine concrete dust (minimum 350 CFM air flow) in conjunction with manufacturer recommended pre-separator: 1. HTC 86D 2. Pullman-Ermator T8600




03 35 36 - 4

3. SASE Bull 1250 4. Approved equal

C. Diamond Tooling for Coating Removal, Initial Grinding, and Preparing Floor for Polishing: 1. Metal Bonded Diamonds a. Grit Size: 40, 80, and 150.

D. Diamond Tooling for Polishing Concrete:

1. Resin Bonded, Phenolic Diamonds a. Grit Size: Transitional diamond equal to Raptor L3 by VMC, 100, 200, 400, 800 and 1500 or

equivalent. E. Grinding / Polishing Pads for Edges

1. Grit Size: 80, 100, 120, 200, 400, 800, 1500 and 3000. F. Hand Grinder with dust extraction attachment and pads.

G. Joint cutting saw with dust extraction attachment

1. The Mongoose, by Engrave-a-Crete 2. Dust Buggy, by US Saws 3. Hump Back, by Joe Due

H. Self-propelled shaver/leveler for slab surface demolition and leveling. 1. ShaveMaster, by VIC International Corporation 2. SuperShaver, by CPS

3. BMC 335 Shaver, by Diamatic

I. High speed propane burnisher 1. Minimum 27 inch head generating pad speeds of 1,500 RPM or higher. J. Diamond Impregnated Burnisher Pads 1. Twister Diamond Cleaning System Pads, by HTC 2. Diamond Polishing Pads, by Norton 3. SpinFlex Diamond Polishing Pads, by CPS

K. Applicator Pads and Equipment 1. Professional Mighty Mop 077, by Quickie 2. 24” Microfiber Wet Room Mop, by Rubbermaid 3. Fas-Trak Chemical Application System, by Fas-Trak Industries 4. Humm’V II, by Tuffy Systems, Inc. 2.3 MATERIALS

A. Penetrating Hardener/Densifier: Clear liquid reactive lithium-silicate based. 1. RetroPlate 99 by Advanced Floor Products. 2. FGS Permashine by L&M Construction Chemicals. 3. Consolideck LS, by Prosoco. 4. SureLock Densifier by Ameripolish 5. No Substitutions

B. Protective Surface Treatment (Stain Guard):

1. RetroGuard by Advanced Floor Products




03 35 36 - 5

2. FGS Stain Protection by L&M Construction Chemicals. 3. Consolideck LS Guard, by Prosoco. 4. SureLock Stain Protector by Ameripolish. 5. No Substitutions

C. Solvent Based dye 1. AmeriPolish Acetone Solvent Based Dye 2. No Substitutions

D. Joint Filler

1. RS 88 Polyurea in complementary darker color to match Dyed Polished Concrete, by Metzger McGuire

2. HT-PE85 Polyurea in complementary darker color to match Dyed Polished Concrete, by Hi-Tech Systems

3. SL/85 Polyurea in complementary darker color to match Dyed Polished Concrete, by VersaFlex Incorporated

4. Colors to be matched as closely as possible using a Sherwin Williams color chart. Manufacturer to produce product to match this color selection.

E. Low Viscosity Crack and Spall Repair

1. Rapid Refloor in complementary matching color, by Metzger McGuire 2. HT Spall-FX2 in complementary matching color, by Hi-Tech Systems 3. Quick-Mender in complementary matching color, by VersaFlex Incorporated 4. 10 Minute Mender or Matchcrete in complementary color, by Roadware 5. Colors to be reviewed and approved by AAFES Project Manager in mock-up.

F. Wide Area Surface Repairs

1. TRU Self Leveling, by CTS Cement Manufacturing Corporation 2. Diama-Top by Ardex Engineered Cements 3. Color after application of Specified Dye to be reviewed and approved by AAFES Project

Manager in mock-up

G. Pin Hole and Surface Pitting Grout Coat 1. GM 3000, by Husqvarna Construction Products 2. StarSeal Fusion, by Vexcon Chemicals, Inc 3. Diama-Fill, by Ardex Engineered Cements 4. Color after application of Specified Dye to be reviewed and approved by AAFES Project Manager in

mock-up.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine floor to receive polished concrete floor system.

B. Notify the Contracting Officer of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use prior to commencement of polishing.

C. Do not begin surface preparation or installation until conditions are corrected and approved.

D. Verify the Following for New Integral Color Overlays in Mud Beds

1. Floor Finish: Wide channel floated, smooth, pan, combination blade and plastic blade finished floor from edge to edge, with no rough areas.




03 35 36 - 6

2. Floor and Joints: a. Free of debris and excessive dirt, dust, clay, and mud. b. Dry.

3. Concrete Curing: Minimum 7 days disposable wet curing blankets or removable curing compound applied. Concrete shall be cured for 14-days minimum before start of grinding process.

4. Concrete Adjacent to Floor Penetrations: Troweled flat and level with surrounding concrete.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from the following: 1. Minimal accumulation of dust from grinding and polishing. 2. Contact with overspray of penetrating hardener / densifier. 3. Contact with overspray of protective surface treatment (stain guard)

4. Contact with overspray of water or solvent based dye treatment. 5. Contact with joint filler, crack or spall repair materials

B. On existing concrete floors, completely remove existing flooring, mastics, adhesives, self-leveling underlayment fillers and other foreign matter.

C. On existing concrete floors, remove the top ½ of an inch of existing joint material and replace with

approved joint filler and crack repair products.

D. Clean Surfaces: Remove dirt, dust, debris, oil, grease, curing agents, bond breakers, paint, coatings, and other surface contaminants which could adversely affect installation of polished concrete floor system.

E. Refill new concrete joints (including decorative joints) in accordance with Section 07900.

F. Repair all slab defects and joints in accordance with Section 03 35 40

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install polished concrete floor system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Aggregate Exposure:

1. Fine Aggregate: Mottled salt-and-pepper aggregate exposure.

C. Polished Concrete Floor System

1. Open Slab Surface: a. As required to provide a uniform final polish or removal of existing floor coatings, begin

grinding with 40 or 80-grit metal bond. Bids shall be based on starting initial cut with 40-grit metal diamonds. Expose coarse concrete aggregate when required to reach lows spots within floor surface.

b. Review condition of floor with AAFES Project Manager. Obtain approval from AAFES Project Manager if large coarse aggregate is required to be exposed to remove existing coatings, floor underlayment or slab deficiencies. Variations to the precise grinding, densifying, polishing, dying and stain guard application are anticipated, but must be discussed and approved in writing by the AAFES Project Manager prior to executing the work.

c. For new concrete floors, open-up concrete by grinding with 80-grit metal-bonded. d. Progressive edge grinding will be necessary with ½” of all vertical abutments, including walls,

cases, columns, posts and racking systems.




03 35 36 - 7

e. Joint filler and spall repairs shall be flush with surface after grinding and polishing steps. Additional passes along curled joints may be necessary to remove joint filler chatter.

2. Remove metal-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with progressively finer metal-bonded

diamonds, up to metal bond 150-grit.

3. Apply densifier a. Per manufacturer’s recommendations and the concrete’s acceptance of the product.

4. Floor Polishing: a. Remove 150-grit metal-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with a transitional diamond

per manufacturers recommendation b. Remove transitional resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 100-grit resin-

bonded diamonds. c. Remove 100-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 200-grit resin-bonded

diamonds. d. Remove 200-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 400-grit resin-bonded

diamonds. e. Remove 400-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 800-grit resin-bonded

diamonds. f. Remove 800-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 1500-grit resin-bonded

diamonds.

5. Apply stain guard

a. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions. b. Apply first coat per manufacturer’s recommendation (DO NOT OVER APPLY). c. Use applicator pad, pre-wetted with stain guard, to pull material out to create a thin film prior

to drying. d. Remove product completely from areas of over application, as evidenced by surface

streaking, and replace with unused stain guard. e. Apply second coat of stain guard at all high traffic areas identified on the drawings per

manufacturers instructions.

6. High speed burnish: a. After each application of stain guard is dry, burnish surface. b. Burnish using approved pads, at a slow movement pace using high speed machine with 400

or 800 grit diamond impregnated pads as required to achieve specified gloss requirements. c. Burnish with several passes. Make each progressive pass at 90 degrees from previous pass. d. Burnishing, pad type, and pace of forward movement shall combine to develop a minimum

floor surface temperature of 91-degrees F directly below the burnishing pad as continuously measured by the operator during installation.

D. Penetrating Dye

1. Mix dye in accordance with installer’s instructions. 2. Where shown on Architectural drawings, saw-cut reveal line around room periphery. Use

Mongoose concrete saw or similar to cut precise intercepts. Use tape and protection along saw cut to prevent main floor dye from penetrating concrete surface to receive edge band.

3. Apply 2-coats of AmeriPolish “Midnight Black” solvent based dye color within the edge band boundary.

4. Apply penetrating dye after 200 or 400-grit resin-bonded diamond-grinding step in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and approved mock-up.




03 35 36 - 8

5. Thoroughly auto-scrub surface clean of excess dye residue in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Repeat application of penetrating dye if due to porosity of floor or darker color is desired. Bids shall be based on providing 2 applications of Dye.

Design Standards are to be as follows:

1. New Construction- Polished Natural Colored Concrete, no integral color

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect completed polished concrete floor system with the Concrete Consultant, Contractor, and Installer.

B. Review procedures with Contracting Officer to correct unacceptable areas of completed polished concrete floor system.

C. Specular Gloss/Reflectance, ASTM D 523:

1. Perform polishing and burnishing work necessary to produce a Specified Overall Gloss Value (SOGV) ≥ 50 prior to applying protective surface treatment, SOGV ≥ 60 after applying protective surface treatment, Minimum Local Gloss Value (MLGV) ≥ 40 after applying protective surface treatment as measured using a Horiba IG-320 60 Degree Gloss Checker.

2. Gloss shall be considered as a quantitative value that expresses the degree of reflection when light hits the concrete floor surface. Gloss measurements will be taken independent of ambient lighting and will be taken within a sealed measurement window located beneath the test unit.

3. Collects 12 readings minimum, throw out low and high measurements and average remaining measurements. Average shall exceed SOGV. No single measurement shall be less than MLGV.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect completed polished concrete floor system from damage until Substantial Completion. 1. Do not allow vehicle and pedestrian traffic on unprotected floor. 2. Do not allow construction materials, equipment, and tools on unprotected floor. 3. Prohibit parking of vehicles on concrete slab.

4. If construction equipment must be used for application, diaper components that might drip oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquids.

5. No tire embedments (rocks, nails, screws, etc.) that will scratch or pit slab surface. 6. Prohibit pipe cutting using pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab. 7. Prohibit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slab. 8. Prohibit acids and acidic detergents from contacting concrete surfaces. 9. Cover concrete floors with drop cloths or use breathable drop cloths during painting. If paint is spilled

on concrete floor, remove paint immediately. 10. Protect slab surface from standing moisture for 72 hours to prevent re-emulsification of surface

treatment prior to cure

B. Immediately remove mortar splatter, spilled liquids, oil, grease, paint, coatings, and other surface contaminants which could adversely affect completed polished concrete floor system.

C. Repair damaged areas of completed polished concrete floor system to satisfaction of Contracting Officer.





STRUCTURAL STEEL

05 12 23 - 1

SECTION 05 12 23

STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE: Section 03 30 00

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of structural steel work is shown on drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required.

B. Structural steel is that work defined in AISC “Code of Standard Practice” and as otherwise shown on drawings.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following except as otherwise indicated: 1. AISC “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”. 2. AISC “Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings”,

including the “Commentary” and Supplements thereto issued. 3. AISC “Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A0325 or A-490 Bolts” approved by the

Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code”. 5. ASTM A-6 “General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and

Bars for Structural Use”.

B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS “Standard Qualification Procedure”. 1. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS

qualification tests within previous 12 months. 2. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor’s responsibility.

C. Testing of Welds: The Owner may require non-destructive weld tests performed by a testing

laboratory, of any welded assembly at any time. This requirement supercedes AWS 6.6.4, 6.6.5, and 6.7.1. 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all associated costs where defective welds are disclosed,

including handling, surface preparation, non-destructive testing and retesting of unacceptable welds and repair of defects.

2. Fabricator shall inform testing laboratory of the fabrication schedule of items that require testing and supervision with sufficient time to avoid delay in the work.




STRUCTURAL STEEL

05 12 23 - 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit producer’s or manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for the following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards). 1. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and

physical properties. 2. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. 3. Structural steel primer paint. 4. Shrinkage-resistant grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings prepared under supervision of a registered professional engineer, including complete details, schedules and diagrams for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by

standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other

anchorages to be installed by others. 3. Reproduction of structural construction documents for shop drawing submittals will not be

allowed. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time not to delay that work.

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

C. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS:

A. Plates and Bars: ASTM A-36, except where other type steel is indicated.

B. Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A-992, Gr. 50 for WF shapes; ASTM A-500, Gr. B for tubes; ASTM

A-53, Gr. B for pipes.

C. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A-500, Grade B. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized.

D. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Grade B.

E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM 307, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated. Provide either hexagonal or square heads and nuts, except use only hexagonal units for exposed connections.

F. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows:




STRUCTURAL STEEL

05 12 23 - 3

1. Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A-

325.

G. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code. For high-strength, low-alloy steel, provide electrodes, welding rods and filler metals equal in strength and compatible in appearance with parent metal joined.

H. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Fabricator’s standard rust-inhibiting primer. Complying with SSPC-Paint 13 or FS TT-P-636.

I. Non-Metallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CRD-C588, Type A, 7,500 psi minimum compressive strength. 1. Products: Provide non-metallic, non-shrink grout as manufactured by one of the following:

a. Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Company b. Crystex; L&M Construction Chemicals c. Masterflor 713; Master Builders d. Supreme Grout; Gifford-Hill e. Five Star Grout; U.S. Grout Corporation f. Upcon; Upco Chemical Division, USM Corporation g. Propak; Protex Industries, Inc.

2.2 FABRICATION:

A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest

extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated.

1. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence

which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 2. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of

finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other effects.

B. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections as indicated.

1. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated.

a. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for principal bolted connections. b. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only bolted connections of secondary framing to

primary members (including purlins, girts, and other framing members taking only nominal stresses) and temporary bracing to facilitate erection.

2. High-strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC “Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A-325”.

C. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and

methods used in correcting welding work.

D. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on approved shop drawings.

1. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated to receive other




STRUCTURAL STEEL

05 12 23 - 4

work. 2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes by burning.

Drill holes in bearing plates. E. Provide continuous steel angle support for metal deck canopies at building wall. Continuous angle to

be welded to clip angle supports embedded in masonry. Expansion bolts, grouted anchor bolts, etc. are not permitted.

2.3 SHOP PAINTING:

A. General: Shop paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded

in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2” of embedded areas only. DO NOT PAINT SURFACES WHICH ARE TO BE WELDED. All structural steel that is exposed to weather shall be galvanized. Any damage to galvanic material during field welding shall be repaired with tenemic paint.

B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits.

C. Painting: Provide a one-coat shop applied paint system complying with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) – paint System 7.01. 1. Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. 2. Use painting methods which result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed

surfaces. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Erector must examine areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector.

3.2 ERECTION:

A. Surveys: Employ a registered professional engineer or land surveyor, experienced in survey work, to

establish permanent benchmarks as shown and as necessary for accurate erection of structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Architect. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Architect.

B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds.

C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work.




STRUCTURAL STEEL

05 12 23 - 5

D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. 1. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to

accurate locations. 2. Refer to Division 3 of these specifications for anchor bolt installation requirements in concrete,

and Division 4 for masonry installation.

E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or

other adjusting devices.

F. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.

G. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases of plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.

H. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. 2. Splice members only where indicated on structural drawings. 3. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and

removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 4. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondary

members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

I. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted.

J. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to areas with same material as used for shop painting. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

3.3 QUALITY CONTROL:

A. The Owner may engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted

connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens

comply with requirements and specifically state any deviations therefrom. 2. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or

produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished. 3. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment; however, Architect reserves

the right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject material not complying with specified requirements.




STRUCTURAL STEEL

05 12 23 - 6

B. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and laboratory test reports have

indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor’s expense, as may be necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work.

END OF SECTION



COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 40 00 - 1

SECTION 05 40 00


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Load bearing formed steel stud exterior and interior framing 20 gage and heavier. 2. Cold formed steel cee-joists. 3. Cold formed steel stud header wall framing and bracing supported from roof structure. 4. Cold formed deep leg track (capture track) for interior nonload-bearing steel stud partitions.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 12 23 - Structural Steel: Connecting to structural building framing. 2. Section 06 10 53 - Rough Carpentry: Wood furring strips, plywood, and blocking.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 153 - Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated

(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM C 954 - Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal

Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in (2.84 mm) in Thickness. 4. ASTM C 955 - Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners

(Track), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases.

B. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Steel Sheet.

C. Gypsum Association (GA): 1. GA-201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings. 2. GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1. SSPC-Paint 20 Type I - Zinc Rich Primers - Inorganic.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of cold formed metal framing components with minimum five years documented experience.

B. Install system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.

C. Install system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.

D. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. Provide certification that welders employed in work have satisfactorily




05 40 00 - 2

passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. If recertification of welders is required, provide without additional cost to Owner.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store and protect with waterproof covering; ventilate to avoid condensation.

C. Where framing is stored outdoors, stack materials off ground, supported on level platform, fully protected from weather.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Unimast Incorporated, Franklin Park, IL (800) 969-4110. 1. Unimast framing component designations are used within this Section to identify framing types. 2. Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements metal framing

materials by alternate manufacturers equivalent to those specified are acceptable.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Interior and Exterior Load-Bearing Studs: ASTM A 653 and ASTM C 955; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped, punched for utility access, depth and gage as indicated on Drawings. 1. 358SN20 - 3-5/8 inch studs, 20 gage. 2. 358SN18 - 3-5/8 inch studs, 18 gage. 3. 358SN16 - 3-5/8 inch studs, 16 gage. 4. 358SN20 - 4 inch studs, 20 gage. 5. 358SN18 - 4 inch studs, 18 gage. 6. 358SN16 - 4 inch studs, 16 gage. 7. 600SN20 - 6 inch studs, 20 gage. 8. 600SN18 - 6 inch studs, 18 gage. 9. 600SN16 - 6 inch studs, 16 gage. 10. 800SN20 - 8 inch studs, 20 gage. 11. 800SN18 - 8 inch studs, 18 gage. 12. 800SN16 - 8 inch studs, 16 gage.

B. Interior and Exterior Load-Bearing Cee-Joists: ASTM A 653 Structural Quality; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped, depth and gage as indicated on Drawings. 1. 358SJ20 - 3-5/8 inch studs, 20 gage. 2. 358SJ18 - 3-5/8 inch studs, 18 gage. 3. 358SJ16 - 3-5/8 inch studs, 16 gage. 4. 358SJ20 - 4 inch studs, 20 gage. 5. 358SJ18 - 4 inch studs, 18 gage. 6. 358SJ16 - 4 inch studs, 16 gage. 7. 600SJ20 - 6 inch studs, 20 gage. 8. 600SJ18 - 6 inch studs, 18 gage. 9. 600SJ16 - 6 inch studs, 16 gage. 10. 800SJ20 - 8 inch studs, 20 gage. 11. 800SJ18 - 8 inch studs, 18 gage. 12. 800SJ16 - 8 inch studs, 16 gage. 13. 1000SJ16 – 10 inch studs, 16 gage.




05 40 00 - 3

C. Partition Floor Tracks and Runners: ASTM A 653 and ASTM C 955; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped; same depth and gage as studs; tight fit; solid web. 1. 20 Gage Studs: CR20 x stud size. 2. 18 Gage Studs: CR18 x stud size. 3. 16 Gage Studs: CR16 x stud size.

D. Capture Track: 1. 18 Gage Track: Standard steel track, ASTM C 955; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped;

CR18 x stud depth x 4 inch leg. a. Contractor's Option: Contractor may provide VertiClip by The Steel Network, Raleigh,

NC (888) 474-4876. VertiClip may be used for fastening studs to track. If this option is used, track may be 20 guage for all stud sizes.

2. 16 Gage Track: Fabricated bent plate, ASTM A 653, galvanized steel sheet, size, configuration, gage and fasteners as indicated on Drawings.

E. Load-Bearing Wall Furring and Partition Bracing: ASTM A 653 and ASTM C 955, galvanized sheet steel. 1. Studs:

a. 358SN20 - 3-5/8 inch studs, 20 gage. b. 358SN18 - 3-5/8 inch studs, 18 gage. c. 358SN16 - 3-5/8 inch studs, 16 gage.

2. Cold-Rolled Channels: 3/4 inch x 1/2 inch and 1-1/2 inch x 17/32 inch. 3. Clip Angles: 2 inches x 2 inches x 16 gage x 1/4 inch less than stud width or Bridge Clip by The

Steel Network (888) 474-4876.

F. Framing Attachment Angles: ASTM A 653 Structural Quality; galvanized sheet steel, size, shape and configuration as indicated on Drawings, 14 gage, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

G. Ceiling Joists and Runners: ASTM A 653 and ASTM C 955; galvanized sheet steel, cee shaped. 1. 600SJ20 - 6 inch joists, 20 gage. 2. 600CR20 - 6 inch runner track, 20 gage.

H. Flat Metal Straps and Plates: ASTM A 653; galvanized sheet steel, gage, shape, and configuration as indicated on Drawings. 1. Contractor's Option: In leiu of 2-inch continuous metal strap at capture tracks, Contractor may

provide BridgeClip by The Steel Network (888) 474-4876.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. Framing to Framing: ASTM C 954; 5/8 inch Type S-12 low-profile head corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws.

B. Framing to Attachment Angle Fasteners: #12 diameter pan head corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws.

C. Wall Floor Track Anchorage Device: Carbon steel wedge type expansion anchor; minimum 3/8 inch diameter x minimum 1-1/2 inch embedment. 1. Kwik Bolt KB II 38-3, by Hilti, Tulsa, OK (800) 879-8000. 2. Thrubolt WS-3822, by ITW Ramset/Red Head, Wood Dale, IL (708) 350-1558.

D. Wall Furring to Concrete or Masonry Wall Fasteners: Hex head sleeve anchors; minimum 1/4 inch diameter x minimum 1-1/8 inch embedment. 1. Slv Anch HX 5/16X2-1/2, by Hilti, Tulsa, OK (800) 879-8000. 2. Dynabolt HN-1413, by ITW Ramset/Redhead, Wood Dale, IL (708) 350-1558.




05 40 00 - 4

E. Furring Channel to Masonry or Concrete Surface Fasteners: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins of size to suit application.

F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.3.

G. Wood Furring, Blocking, and Plywood, Attached to Framing Fasteners: Specified in Section 06100.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: G90 coating class.

B. Primer: SSPC Paint 20, Type I, touch-up for galvanized surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine existing conditions and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive work. Verify that rough-in utilities are in-place and located where required. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Beginning of erection indicates acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION - STUD FRAMING

A. Install studs and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and, where gypsum board is attached to studs, install studs in accordance with GA-201 and GA-216.

B. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center, maximum, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

C. Align stud web openings horizontally.

D. Construct corners using minimum three studs.

E. Place studs as indicated on Drawings, minimum 2 inches from abutting walls.

F. Erect studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs not permitted.

G. Erect studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength to meet design requirements.

H. Install headers at partition openings using load-bearing cee joists.

I. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items.

J. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection.

K. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing.

L. Fasten studs adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners to top and bottom runner flanges in double-stud fashion with metal lock fastener tools. 1. Securely fasten studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door and borrowed-light frames. 2. Place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner with web-flange bent at each end, fasten with

minimum one screw per flange.




05 40 00 - 5

3. Position a cut-to-length stud (extending to top runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header.

M. Install bridging for stud partitions over 8 feet high at mid-height with 1-1/2 inch rolled channels through studs and screw attach in place using clip angles. Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a length of at least 8 inches and wire tie together.

N. Blocking: Screw attach wood blocking between studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware.

O. Touch up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.

P. Fastening: Fasten framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and schedule below, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

FASTENERS MINIMUM CONNECTION

Floor Track to Concrete ........................................................................... 1 Anchor at 36 inches

on center. Partition Stud to Floor Track .................................................................... 1 Screw each side at

flange. Stud Web to Stud Web ........................................................................... 2 Screws. Plates and Straps to Studs ...................................................................... 2 Screws. Lateral Bracing to Partition Stud Using clip Angles .................................. 2 Screws to stud and 2

Screws to cold rolled channel.

Runner to Header .................................................................................... 1 Screw at 16 inches on center, maximum 6 inches from each end.

Welded Connections ................................................................................ Indicated on Drawings.

3.3 INSTALLATION - JOIST FRAMING

A. Install joists and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing.

C. Place joists at locations and spacing as indicated on Drawings.

D. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.

E. Fastening: Indicated on Drawings.

3.4 INSTALLATION - CEILING JOISTS

A. Install joists and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and, where gypsum board is attached to joists, install joists in accordance with GA-201 and GA-216.

B. Ceiling Joist Spacing: 16 inches on center beginning from center of room unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

C. Install joists in direction of shortest span, parallel and level, with lateral bracing and bridging.




05 40 00 - 6

D. Install joists in one piece full length. Splicing of joists not permitted.

E. Install perimeter joist runner track sized to match joists. Attach joist runner track to wall framing with minimum 2 screws per stud and at corners and ends.

F. Attach joist ends to joist runner tracks with minimum 1 screw each side at each flange.

G. Install bridging at 48 inches on center beginning from center of room with 1-1/2 inch rolled channels screw attached to joists.

3.5 INSTALLATION - FURRING

A. Furring Channels: Attach vertically spaced at maximum 16 inches on center, unless otherwise shown on the drawings, to masonry and concrete surfaces with specified powder driven fasteners staggered 24 inches on center on opposite flanges.

B. Wall Furring: 1. Secure top and bottom runners to structure. 2. Space metal furring at maximum 16 inches on center unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

3.6 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Coordinate erection of studs with hollow metal door frames and overhead coiling door frames. 2. Coordinate installation of anchors, supports, and blocking for mechanical, electrical, and building

accessory items installed within framing.

B. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.3.


A. Inspect metal framing erection, placement, spacing, fasteners, welds, and connections to building.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION



Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 1

SECTION 06 10 00

ROUGH CARPENTRY

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 3. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 4. Wood furring and grounds. 5. Wood sleepers. 6. Utility shelving. 7. Plywood backing panels.


1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for elevated decks and other exterior construction made of wood.

2. Division 06 Section "Sheathing." 3. Division 31 Section "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to wood

framing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.




B. Retain "Fastener Patterns" Paragraph below for exposed framing if fastener locations are critical to appearance and fastener patterns are not shown on Drawings.

C. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing.

D. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

E. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Shear panels. 5. Power-driven fasteners. 6. Powder-actuated fasteners. 7. Expansion anchors. 8. Metal framing anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

1.4 MATERIALS

A. Wood Products, General:

1. The following products FSC-certified:

a. Dimension lumber framing. b. Laminated veneer lumber. c. Parallel strand lumber. d. Prefabricated wood I-joists. e. Rim boards f. Miscellaneous lumber.

2. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness

B. Wood-Preservative-Treated Lumber:

1. Preservative Treatment: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2, but Use Category UC3b for exterior construction and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

a. Preservative Chemicals: Containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

2. Application: Items indicated and as follows:




a. Items in contact with roofing or waterproofing. b. Items in contact with concrete or masonry. c. Framing less than 18 inches (460 mm) above ground in crawlspaces. d. Floor plates installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

C. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials:

1. Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces,

and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Application: Items indicated and as follows:

a. Framing for raised platforms. b. Concealed blocking. c. Framing for non-load-bearing partitions. d. Framing for non-load-bearing exterior walls. e. Roof construction. f. Plywood backing panels.

D. Miscellaneous Lumber:

1. Dimension Lumber: Construction or No. 2. 2. Utility Shelving: 15 percent maximum moisture content.

a. White, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or No. 2 Common (Sterling). b. Mixed southern pine, No. 1 c. Hem-fir, Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common. d. Spruce-pine-fir, Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common.

3. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content.

a. Mixed southern pine, No. 2. b. Hem-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common. c. Spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common. d. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common. e. Northern species, No. 2 Common. f. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common.

E. Plywood Backing Panels: Exterior, AC, fire-retardant treated.

F. Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel where exposed to weather, in ground contact, in contact with treated wood, or in area of high relative humidity.

G. Metal Framing Anchors:

1. Hot-dip galvanized steel for interior locations. 2. Hot-dip, heavy-galvanized steel for treated lumber and where indicated. 3. Stainless steel for exterior and where indicated.

H. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber insulation.




1.5 INSTALLATION

A. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: 1-by-3-inch nominal-size (19-by-63-mm actual-size) furring at 24 inches o.c.


Smoke Bomb Hill Mini Mall/Express Fort Bragg, North Carolina Issue for Bidding July 30, 2014

SECTION 07 84 13

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Firestopping materials.

B. Firestopping of all penetrations and interruptions to fire rated assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.

C. Documentation requirements in support of USGBC LEED certification credits indicated.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.

B. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.

C. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov.

D. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.

B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number.

C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.

D. LEED Report: Submit VOC content documentation for all non-preformed materials.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Certificate from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.

H. Qualification statements for installing mechanics.

I. LEED Submittals: 1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: For products having recycled content, provide documentation

indicating percentages, by weight, of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Identify each regional material along with the location of its harvest, extraction, or manufacture. Include material cost for each item.

3. Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, provide printed statement of VOC content confirming compliance with maximum allowable content.


A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs which provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock

Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at www.icc-

es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.

Firestopping 07 84 13 - 1


3. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above

substantiation exists.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and: 1. Approved by Factory Mutual Research under FM Standard 4991, Approval of Firestop

Contractors, or meeting any two of the following requirements:. 2. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type. 3. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type. 4. Licensed by authority having jurisdiction. 5. Approved by firestopping manufacturer.

D. Installing Mechanic's Qualifications: Trained by firestopping manufacturer and able to provide evidence thereof.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS

A. Provide environmentally preferable products (EPP) to the greatest extent possible. Provide products and materials that promote stewardship of the earth's resources, promote good indoor environmental quality, and promote efficiencies in operational performance. EPP's include products that have low VOC content, high recycled content, and are manufactured, fabricated, or extracted within 500 miles of the construction site.

2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES

A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: See Drawings for required systems and ratings.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.

B. Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant 1. Manufacturers:

a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.

C. Foam Firestoppping: Single component foam compound: 1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. b. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. c. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.



D. Fibered Compound Firestopping: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-

asbestos fibers: 1. Manufacturers:

a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. b. USG: www.usg.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.

E. Fiber Firestopping: Mineral fiber insulation used in conjunction with elastomeric surface sealer forming airtight bond to opening: 1. Manufacturers:

a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. b. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. c. USG: www.usg.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.

F. Firestop Devices - Wrap Type: Mechanical device with incombustible filler and sheet stainless steel jacket, intended to be installed after penetrating item has been installed: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com. b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures

G. Intumescent Putty: Compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com. b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.

H. Reusable Firestopping: Removable intumescent compressible shapes, pillows, or blocks specifically tested in removable configuration: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com. b. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. c. Nelson Firestop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com. d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.

I. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond.


Smoke Bomb Hill Mini Mall/Express Fort Bragg, North Carolina Issue for Bidding July 30, 2014 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings.

B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.

C. Install labelling required by code.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION




Joint Sealants

07 92 00 - 1

SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors. e. Perimeter joints of plumbing fixtures. f. Other joints as indicated.

2. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:

a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated.

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion testing.

B. Preconstruction field-adhesion testing.

1.3 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.



Joint Sealants

07 92 00 - 2

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to

maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to estab-

lish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint substrates.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.


A. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required.

1.7 MATERIALS

A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants:

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Stain Test: ASTM C 1248.

C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Comply with 21 CFR 177.2600, where applicable.

1.8 MATERIALS

A. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Joint Sealant:

1. Type: Single component. 2. Grade: Pourable. 3. Class: 100/50. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic.

B. Immersible Urethane Joint Sealant:

1. Type: Single component. 2. Grade: Pourable. 3. Class: 100/50. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic or immersible.



Joint Sealants

07 92 00 - 3

C. Immersible Polysulfide Joint Sealant:

1. Type: Single-component. 2. Grade: Pourable. 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic immersible.

D. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex.

E. Solvent-Release-Curing Joint Sealant: Acrylic.

F. Preformed Joint Sealant: Preformed silicone.

G. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex.

H. Joint-Sealant Backing: Cylindrical.

1.9 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable

to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for

use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following require-

ments: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and

at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed seal-ants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application

and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between

sealants and joint fillers or back of joints. E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly

contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning

or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Re-



Joint Sealants

07 92 00 - 4

move excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.


A. Field-adhesion testing.




Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 1

SECTION 09 22 16

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.3 MATERIALS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645. 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645. 3. Deflection Track.

D. Suspension Systems.




Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 2



Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 1

SECTION 09 29 00

GYPSUM BOARD

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Texture finishes.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Mockups for the following:

1. Levels of gypsum board finish for use in exposed locations. 2. Texture finishes.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

1.5 MATERIALS

A. Interior Gypsum Board:

1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. Temple-Inland. 6. USG Corporation.




B. Specialty Gypsum Board:

1. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

a. Thickness: 5/8 inch15.9 mm. b. Long Edges: Tapered.

2. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. a. Core: 5/8 inch15.9 mm, Type X. b. Long Edges: Tapered. c. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.

C. Tile-Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C1288 or 1325, with manufacturer’s

standard edges. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard. 2) Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. 3) National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. 4) USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

b. Thickness: 5/8 inch. c. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.

2. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the

following] available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) American Gypsum. 2) CertainTeed Corp. 3) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4) Lafarge North America Inc. 5) PABCO Gypsum. 6) Temple-Inland. 7) USG Corporation.

b. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

D. Trim Accessories: 1. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

a. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. b. Shapes:

1) Cornerbead. 2) LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 3) L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 4) U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. 5) Expansion (control) joint.

1.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.




C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,

use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-

type, sandable topping compound. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

E. Texture finishes:

F. Auxiliary materials: 1. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards

and manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering

gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 3. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch 0.84 to 2.84 mm thick.

b. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

4. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. a. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of

assembly. 5. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex

sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. 2) Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR AIS-919. 3) Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. 4) USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

6. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

1.7 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.




1.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.

5. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.



Tiling 09 30 00 - 1

SECTION 09 30 00

TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes porcelain and ceramic tile products on walls and floors. Substrates include cementitious backer board and concrete masonry at walls and at floors, concrete slabs-on-grade and suspended concrete slabs. Materials include the following:

1. Porcelain tile. 2. Ceramic tile. 3. Glazed wall tile. 4. Elastomeric Joint Sealant in tile fields. 5. Tile cleaner and sealer. 6. Mortar & Grout.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slab finishes specified for tile over concrete substrates.


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:

1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and other products specified.

B. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of grout showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and construction indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.

1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12 inches (300 mm) square, mounted on braced cementitious backer units, and with grouted joints using product complying with specified requirements and approved for completed work in color or colors selected by Architect.

2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required. 3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. 4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.


Tiling 09 30 00 - 2


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.

C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product:

1. Cementitious backer units. 2. Joint sealants. 3. Waterproofing.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Obtain a written receipt from the Owner’s Representative, to include in Closeout Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Basis of Specification is Dal Tile Company, American Olean and Crossville Ceramics products indicated in the ceramic tile installation schedules and in the Finishes Legends located on individual drawing sheets.


Tiling 09 30 00 - 3

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, and properties of the specified products, including color selection, products by the following will be considered if submitted before Bids are received in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders:

1. Tile Products:

a. American Marrazzi Tile, Inc. b. American Olean Tile Co. c. Dal-Tile Corporation. d. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. e. Mannington Ceramic Tile. f. Monarch Tile, Inc. g. Quarry Tile Company. h. United States Ceramic Tile Company.

2. Tile-Setting and -Grouting Materials:

a. American Olean Tile Company. b. Custom Building Products. c. Dal-Tile Corporation. d. DAP, Inc. e. Laticrete International, Inc.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles.

C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:

1. Match colors, textures, and patterns indicated by referencing manufacturer's standard designations for these characteristics.

2. Provide tile trim and accessories as indicated in the Schedule.

D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Porcelain Floor Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:

1. See Finishes Legend and Schedule on individual drawing sheets for description and location.


Tiling 09 30 00 - 4

B. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:


C. Porcelain “SlimLite” Wall Panels: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:


D. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with the following requirements:

1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable.

2. Shapes: As indicated on the Drawings or if not indicated, as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Provide coved base at unglazed floor tile. b. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose. c. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose/metal corner

trim as indicated in Finish Legends and on drawing sheets. d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except with coved base and cap

angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes. e. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of

tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide a reduction in thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 inch (12.7 to 6.35 mm) across nominal 4-inch (100-mm) dimension.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.1A and as specified below:

1. Latex additive (water emulsion) described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer for use with job-mixed Portland Cement and aggregate mortar bed.

a. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composed as follows:

1. Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of Portland Cement; dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water needs to be added at Project site.

a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2.

2.5 GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.4, composed as follows:


Tiling 09 30 00 - 5

1. Factory-Prepared, Dry-Grout Mixture: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to produce the following:

a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and narrower. b. Color: See Finish Schedule.

B. Floor Grout: Two-component, chemical resistant, non-saging epoxy grout which is water cleanable; grout shall comply with ANSI A118.3. Colors as indicated in Finishes Legend on individual drawing sheets. The following manufacturers and products are approved:

1. Laticrete International “Latapoxy SP-100 Stainless Epoxy Grout (Series 700)”. 2. Mapei, Inc. “Kerapoxy 400 100% Solids Epoxy Grout”. 3. Bostik Construction Products “Hydroment Colo-Poxy”. 4. Custom Building Products “100% Solids Epoxy Grout”.

2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

B. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes.

1. Provide at joints of ceramic wall tile and ceiling surface, around pipe penetrations, plumbing fixtures and trim.

2. Provide at perimeter of toilet room accessories such as grab bars, towel bars, paper and soap dispensers provided on or within walls in accordance with UBC, 1997 Edition, Section 807.1.2

C. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

1. Provide at control joints in floors where indicated, or if not indicated, over control joints in substrates and at 30-feet maximum spacing.

D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealants:

a. Dow Corning 786; Dow Corning Corporation. b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. c. Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant; Pecora Corp. d. Rhodorsil 6B White; Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. e. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco, Inc.

2. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealants:

a. Chem-Calk 550; Bostik. b. Vulkem 245; Mameco International, Inc. c. NR-200 Urexpan; Pecora Corp. d. THC-900; Tremco, Inc.


Tiling 09 30 00 - 6

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: White-zinc-alloy terrazzo strips, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide at top edge with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

D. Tile Sealer: Aqua Mix “Sealer’s Choice 15 Gold.”

1. Description: No-sheen, water-based penetrations sealer. 2. Application: Two coats in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.


Tiling 09 30 00 - 7

B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.

1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

F. Lay out tile wainscots (if indicated) to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint

Sealants."

H. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:

1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial Portland Cement, and latex-Portland Cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.


Tiling 09 30 00 - 8

3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards.

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:

1. Porcelain Tile: 1/4 inch.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.

3.5 WALL TILE INSTALLATION

A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards.

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:

1. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 2. Porcelain “SlimLite” Panels: 1/16”.

C. Exterior Corner Trim: Install at locations where tile wraps exterior corners to finished height of tile. Product as indicated in Finish Legend on individual drawing sheets.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout

manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.

B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.


Tiling 09 30 00 - 9

3.7 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Ceramic Tile Floor Installation. Comply with the following:

1. Tile Type: Porcelain tile over concrete slabs. Provide products according to the Finishes Legend on individual drawing sheet.

2. Provide according to TCA Installation Method F113, Thinset.

a. Latex Portland Cement mortar, ANSI A118.4. b. Latex Portland Cement grout, ANSI A118.6.

B. Ceramic Wall Tile over Cementitious Backer Units: Comply with the following:

1. Tile Type: Ceramic wall tile. Provide products according to the Finishes Legend on individual drawing sheets.

2. Provide according to TCA Installation Method W244.

a. Latex Portland cement mortar, ANSI A118.4. b. Latex Portland cement grout, ANSI A118.6.



Tiling 09 30 00 - 10



Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 1

SECTION 09 51 13

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.


1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for acoustical sealants.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AC: Articulation Class.

B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.

C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.

D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.

C. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations:

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following:




1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580.

2. UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel Ceilings."


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface per ASTM E 795.




2.3 WATER-FELTED, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING

A. Products: USG Interiors 562 Fissured.

B. Classification: Class A.

C. Color: White.

D. LR: .81.

E. NRC: .55.

F. CAC: 35

G. Edge Detail: Square.

H. Thickness: 5/8”.

I. Size: 2’ x 4’.

J. Location: See Finishes Legend and Finish Schedule on individual drawing sheets for location.


A. Products: USG Interiors 562 Fissured.

B. Classification: Class A.

C. Color: White.

D. LR: .81.

E. NRC: .55.

F. CAC: 35

G. Edge Detail: Square.

H. Thickness: 5/8”.

I. Size: 2’ x 2’.

J. Location: See Finishes Legend and Finish Schedule on individual drawing sheets for location.

2.5 WATER-FELTED, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS, VINYL LAMINATED FACE WITH SEALED BACK AND EDGES FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING

A. Products: USG Interiors Clean Room Climaplus

B. Color: White.




C. LR: .79.

D. NRC: 0.

E. CAC: 35.

F. Edge Detail: Square.

G. Thickness: 5/8”.

H. Size: 2’ x 4’.

I. Location: See Finishes Legend and Finish Schedule on individual drawing sheets for location. Retaining below risks a proprietary specification. Verify availability of antimicrobial treatment.


A. Products: USG Interiors Glacier 707.

B. Color: White.

C. LR: .70.

D. NRC: .65.

E. CAC: 35.

F. Edge Detail: Tegular.

G. Thickness: 5/8”.

H. Size: 2’ x 2’.

I. Location: Food Court Dining Room. See Finishes Legend and Finish Schedule on individual drawing sheets for location. Retaining below risks a proprietary specification. Verify availability of antimicrobial treatment.

2.7 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:




1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,

Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.

E. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces.

F. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in-place.

G. Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact-clip system designed to absorb impact forces against acoustical panels.

2.8 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Celotex Corporation 3. Chicago Metallic Corp. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Steel Suspension Systems:

1. USG DONN-DX Grid 15/16”.

C. Aluminum Suspension Systems:

1. USG DONN-DXLA 15/16”.

2.9 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Celotex Corporation; Architectural Ceilings Marketing Dept. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.

1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.

2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

2.10 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Products: See Section 07 92 00.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.


A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with UBC Standard 25-2 and seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported

directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system




to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

a. Pop rivets acceptable at 9/16” grid only. Painted to match grid.

D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings.

2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.

3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



Prototype Specification Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 1

SECTION 09 91 23

INTERIOR PAINTING

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

1. Wood. 2. Concrete. 3. Steel-primed. 4. Steel-not primed. 5. Steel-galvanized. 6. Gypsum board drywall.


A. Mockups for each color and finish.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1.4 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Products MPI listed.

B. VOC Content: Complying with LEED-NC Credit EQ 4.2.

C. VOC Content and Chemical Components: Complying with LEED-CI Credit EQ 4.2.

1.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: By Owner-engaged agency.

INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Wood-Painted

1. Glidden Professional a. Primer: Gripper Multi-Purpose Primer-Sealer 3210-1200. b. Finish: Diamond 350 Interior Acrylic Semi-gloss Enamel 1407V Series.

C. New Concrete

1. Sherwin Williams a. Primer: Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex Wall Primer B28W200. b. Finish: Pro Mar 200 Latex Egg-shell Enamel B20W200 Series.


Prototype Specification Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 2

D. Steel-Primed 1. Primer: Sherwin Williams - Pro-Cryl Universal Primer. 2. Finish: [ICI - Devflex 4206 - Interior / Exterior Waterborne Acrylic Semi-gloss.

Enamel (83XX)]

E. Steel - Not Primed 1. Primer: Sherwin Williams - Pro-Cryl Universal Primer. 2. Finish:

F. Steel-Galvanized

1. Primer: Sherwin Williams - Pro-Cryl Universal Primer. 2. Finish: [ICI - Devflex 4206 - Interior / Exterior Waterborne Acrylic Semi-gloss.

Enamel (83XX)]

G. Gypsum Board Drywall H. Semi-Gloss Finish (Low Odor - Low VOC)

1st Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Primer, B28W600 (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry)

2nd Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Semi-Gloss, B31-600 Series 3rd Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Semi-Gloss, B31-600 Series (4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)

I. Egg-Shell / Satin Finish (Low Odor - Low VOC) 1st Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Primer, B28W600 (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Eg-Shel, B20-650 Series 3rd Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Eg-Shel, B20-650 Series

(4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)

J. Low Sheen Finish (Low Odor - Zero VOC Finish) 1st Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Primer, B28W600 Series (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Low Sheen Enamel, B24-2600 Series 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Low Sheen Enamel, B24-2600 Series (4 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat)

K. Flat Finish (Low Odor - Low VOC) 1st Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Primer, B28W600 (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Flat, B30-600 Series 3rd Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Flat, B30-600 Series (4 mils wet, 1.8 mils dry per coat)




Wall and Door Protection

10 26 00 - 1

SECTION 10 26 00

WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of wall surface protection systems: 1. Wall protection systems, include, Contractor Furnished Contractor installed.

a. Corner guards.


A. Structural Performance: Handrails to resist uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) and concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN), not applied concurrently.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, fire-test-response characteristics, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection unit.

B. protection unit showing locations and extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Materials and Workmanship: Five years.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-resistant wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.



Wall and Door Protection

10 26 00 - 2

D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall protection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 PRODUCTS

A. Materials: 1. Adhesive VOC content of 70 g/L or less.

B. Corner Guards:

1. Surface-mounted, transparent-plastic type. 2. Surface-Mounted, Metal Type: Stainless steel. 3. Surface mounted, metal type at tile walls.

a. Product as indicated in Finish Legend on individual drawing sheets.




Food Service Equipment

11 40 00 - 1

SECTION 11 40 00

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT


A. Built in food equipment, walk-in refrigeration, hoods.

1.1 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary. B. Sections 01 10 17 and 01 10 18: Owner Furnished Equipment.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 22 Section - Plumbing Piping. B. Division 22 Section - Plumbing Specialties: Grease interceptor. C. Division 23 Section - Food Service Ventilation Systems

1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-resisting Chromium-nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. B. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. C. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural

(Physical) Quality. D. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. E. ASTM C1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. F. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. G. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association: appliances. H. NFPA 96 - Removal of Smoke and Grease Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking

Equipment. I. NGA - National Gas Association: appliances. J. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation: appliances.


A. Load Supporting Components: Reinforced frame support system and surfaces [where

indicated] so that surfaces may safely support a load of 200 lbs concentrated on one square foot (one sq m) in any area on the component surface, with no indentation showing on surface, and with permanent set not exceeding 0.005 inches (0.127 mm).




11 40 00 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate in large scale detail, fabricated equipment showing construction

methods, type and gage of metal, hardware and fittings, plan front elevation, a minimum of one cross-section, and utility requirements as to types and sizes and locations. Illustrate complicated parts of typical items in cut-away perspective. For control systems, indicate service connections, characteristics, and wiring diagrams.

C. Product Data: Provide data on appliances; indicate configuration, sizes, materials,

finishes, locations, and utility connections and locations. D. Samples: Submit two (2) samples, 6" x 6" inch in size illustrating equipment and finish. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions

requiring special attention. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed UL and specified

requirements.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 78 23. B. Operation Data: Provide operating data for the specified equipment. C. Maintenance Data: Provide lubrication and periodic maintenance requirement schedules.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work as follows: 1. Cooler and Freezer Units: Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

standards. 2. Electrical Wiring and Components and Self-contained Refrigeration Systems:

Conform to Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc (UL) standards. 3. Exhaust Hoods: NFPA 96. 4. Fabricated Equipment: Shall be installed in accordance with the following codes:

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association requirements, NGA - National Gas Association requirements, NSF - National Sanitation Foundation requirements.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

five (5) years experience.

1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for utility requirements. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters'

Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.




11 40 00 - 3

1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section

01 31 00.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Store products clear of floor in a manner to prevent damage. C. Coordinate size of access and route to place of installation.

1.12 SCHEDULING A. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Schedule Work to immediately follow installation of utilities and precede installation of

room finishes.

1.13 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with location and placement of utilities. Coordinate characteristics of

utilities with requirements of food service equipment.

1.14 WARRANTY A. Provide five (5) year warranty under provisions of Section 01 73 00. B. Warranty: Include replacement or repair of scheduled equipment, refrigerant and

compressors, including disconnection of defective unit, and connection of replacement unit.

1.16 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

A. Equipment Schedule: Refer to drawing. B. Provide rough-in hardware, supports and connections, attachment devices, closure trim,

and accessories.

1.17 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446, 1.25 oz/sq ft (380 g/sq m) galvanized coating. B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304 commercial grade, No. 4 finish. C. Sealants: Silicone, bacteria resistant type.

1.18 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Fabricate sheet material for work surfaces, facings, shelves, and drain boards of straight

lengths in one continuous sheet when less than 12 ft (3.5 m) in length. Fit and attach integral sinks. Weld metal joints for lengths over 12 ft (3.5 m).




11 40 00 - 4

B. Weld and form edges, ends, and joints smooth. Grind welds of stainless steel smooth

and flush ; polish to match adjacent surfaces. C. Cut and drill components for service outlets and fixtures. D. Fix leg mounted units by dowelling to floor with 1/4 inch (6 mm) stainless steel pins,

where vibration or oscillation is anticipated. E. Provide stainless steel legs with adjustable feet. Fasten legs to equipment securely and

rigidly. F. Install nylon button feet on bearing surface of any item positioned on a finished surface. G. Isolate rotating or reciprocating machinery to prevent noise and vibration. H. Provide indirect drain piping from equipment to terminate over nearest waste receptor. I. Accommodate site installation of other services or equipment. J. Shop assemble work where possible. K. Stainless Steel Fastenings and Fittings: Bolt and screw with countersunk flat heads at

visible or accessible surfaces. Use concealed fastenings where possible.

1.19 METAL WALL PANELS A. Trimark, custom stainless steel mill finish. Contact: Lisa Wood 816-746-5077.

1.20 FINISHES A. All Components: Shop pre-finish. B. Metal (Except Stainless Steel): Degrease and phosphate etch, prime and apply minimum

two coats factory baked epoxy enamel, color as selected. C. Stainless Steel: No. 4 finish. D. Bituminous Paint: Sound deaden internal surfaces of metal work and underside of metal

counters.

1.21 EXAMINATION

A. Verify ventilation outlets, service connections, and supports are correct and in required

location. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

1.22 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Insulate to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals.




11 40 00 - 5

C. Weld and grind joints in steel work tight, without open seams, where necessary due to

limitations of sheet sizes or installation requirements. D. Sequence installation and erection to ensure correct mechanical and electrical utility

connections are achieved. E. Cut, fit, and patch where necessary. Provide cutting and patching of items of this section

required for installation or services of equipment. F. Cut and drill components for service outlets, fixtures, and fittings. G. Use anchoring devices appropriate for equipment and expected usage. H. Provide sealant to achieve clean joint with adjacent building finishes and between abutting

components. 1.23 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 65 00. B. Adjust equipment and apparatus to ensure proper working order and conditions. C. Remove and replace equipment creating excessive noise or vibration.

1.24 CLEANING

A. Clean work under provisions of 01 71 00. B. Remove masking or protective covering from stainless steel and other finished surfaces. C. Wash and clean equipment. D. Polish glass, plastic, hardware and accessories, fixtures and fittings.

1.25 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 01 65 00. B. Test equipment prior to demonstration. C. At completion of work, provide qualified and trained personnel to demonstrate operation

of each item of equipment and instruct Owner in operating procedures and maintenance. D. Individual Performing Demonstration: Fully knowledgeable of all operating and service

aspects of equipment.

1.26 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work. B. Remove protective coverings from pre-finished work.





11 40 00 - 6

Smoke Bomb Hill Mini Mall/Express Fort Bragg, North Carolina

Qdoba Design Submittal 5-6-16

21 13 00 - 1

SECTION 21 13 00 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system.

B. Dry-pipe sprinkler system.

C. System design, installation, and certification.

D. Fire department connections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork. B. Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill.

C. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification.

D. Section 26 00 00 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Basic electrical wiring and connections.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2010.

B. FM - Factory Mutual Approval Guide.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

D. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

E. Warnock Hersey - Certification Listings. F. UFC 3-600-01, SEPT 26, 2006 Edition, Change 1, 14 July 2009

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide system to NFPA 13 occupancy requirements.

B. Flow test data as listed is given as a guideline for establishing the flow and pressure in this area. Flow test has been provided by the Fort Bragg Department of Public Works.

C. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support



21 13 00 - 2

requirements, and piping connections.

C. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling installation.

b. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls.

D. Submit shop drawings, product data, and hydraulic calculations to Installation Fire Marshal for

approval. Submit proof of approval to Contracting Officer. E. Partial submittals are not allowed. F. Half-size plans and documents are not allowed.

1.6 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Section 01 78 00 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified

requirements and code requirements.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13 and UFC 3-600-01 whichever is more stringent. Maintain one copy on site.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this

Work and licensed. The professional engineer shall stamp, sign, and date the plans and calculations prior to submittal for approval.

1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to UL.

B. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13, UFC 3-600-01, and special requirements of AAFES.

C. Equipment and Components: Bear UL label or marking.

D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or a testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose



21 13 00 - 3

specified and indicated. E. Perform work in accordance with the Fire Prevention Guide for Civilian Contractors. A copy of

this requirement will be provided along with the requirements for “Hot Work Permits”, “Digging Permits”, and “Emergency Reporting Procedures.”

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

B. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01 78 00 - Contract Closeout and 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data.

B. Provide extra sprinklers under provisions of NFPA 13. A written list of sprinkler types (including SIN) and their locations in the building shall be placed in a weatherproof compartment and maintained inside the spare sprinkler box.

C. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type.

D. Provide metal storage cabinet located adjacent to alarm valve.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SPRINKLERS

A. Suspended Ceiling:

a. Type: Semi-recessed quick response, pendant type with matching screw on escutcheon plate.

b. Finish: White factory applied. c. Escutcheon Plate Finish: White factory applied. d. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

B. Exposed Area Type:

a. Type: i. Quick response upright type. Install head guards where sprinkler is subject to

damage. ii. Quick response pendent type. Install head guards where sprinkler is subject to

damage. iii. Standard response uprights shall be installed under the back of house receiving

canopy, Express MPA cooler, and Denny’s outside eating canopy on the dry pipe valve system. There shall be no quick response sprinklers on a dry system.



21 13 00 - 4

b. Finish: Brass. c. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

C. Sidewall Type:

a. Type: Standard horizontal sidewall type with matching push on escutcheon plate. Head

guard as necessary. b. Finish: Brass. c. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass. d. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

D. Dry Sprinklers:

a. Type: Standard pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate. b. Finish: Brass. c. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass. d. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

E. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to automatically actuate electric alarm, with pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim; with test and drain valve.

B. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated red enameled gong with pressure alarm switch.

C. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts; rated

10 amp at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC. D. Dry Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Low differential, latched clapper valve with actuator, rubber

clapper seal, and external resetting ability. Valve shall be able to automatically actuate electric alarm, and include pressure alarm switch, air supervisory switches, high/low pressure switch, air maintenance device, plus test valves, drains and gauges.

a. Air maintenance device. b. Install a tank mounted air compressor sized according to NFPA 13 requirements and

system volume capacity. 115/230 volts, 60 Hz. E. Alarm air pressure switch: Pressure range of 10-100 psi with two SPDT contacts rated 10 amp at

125/250 VAC and 2.5 amp at 24 VDC. The switch enclosure shall be weatherproof.



21 13 00 - 5

F. Supervisory switches: Two SPDT each with rated capacity of 10 amp @ 125/250 VAC and 2.5 amp @ 24 VDC. The housing shall be weatherproof.

G. Fire Department Connections: Install within 150 feet of a fire hydrant.

a. Type: Wall mounted wall type polished brass finish mounted between 18” and 48” above

finished grade or freestanding type with chrome plated finish installed between 18” and 36” above finished grade.

b. Outlets: Two-way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust

cap and chain of matching material and finish. c. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip routed to outside. d. Label: "Sprinkler - Fire Department Connection".

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with NFPA 13, 24, 70, 72 and UFC 3-600-01, SEPT 26, 2006 edition, Change 1, 14 July 2009.

B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.

C. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.

D. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.

E. Center sprinklers in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable,

dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements.

F. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers.

G. Install air compressor on vibration isolators.

H. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.

I. Install guards on sprinklers where indicated. J. Do not stack risers until the underground fireline has been completely tested and flushed.

K. Hydrostatically test each system at 200 psi for two hours in the presence of the Fire Marshal and

Contracting Officer. Contractor shall provide a minimum 3 day notice to Fire Department Inspectors and Contracting Officer prior to final testing.

L. Pneumatically test the dry pipe system at 40 psi for 24 hours and witnessed by the Fire Marshal

and Contracting Officer. Loss of more than 1-1/2 psi during the 24 hour period shall require retesting after leak(s) are corrected.



21 13 00 - 6

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system. END OF SECTION



21 13 13 - 1

SECTION 21 13 13 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 09 90 00 - Painting: Preparation and painting of fire protection piping systems.

B. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification: Piping identification.

C. Section 21 13 00 - Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler systems design. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

B. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800.

C. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300.

D. ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250.

E. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

F. ASME B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.

G. ASTM A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.

H. ASTM A47 - Malleable Iron Castings.

I. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless.

J. ASTM A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.

K. ASTM A795 - Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel

Pipe for Fire Protection Use.

L. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.

M. AWS B2.1 – Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification, Level 3.

N. AWWA C110 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings.

O. AWWA C151 - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.

P. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

Q. NFPA 24 - Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances



21 13 13 - 2

R. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

S. UL 262 - Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service.

T. UL 312 - Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service.

U. UL 405 - Fire Department Connections. V. UFC 3-600-01, SEPT 26, 2006 edition, change 1, 14 July 2009.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections.

1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Section 01 78 00 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.

C. Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum 3 years experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to UL.

B. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13, 2010 edition and UFC 3-600-01, Sept 26 2006 edition, change 1, 14 July 2009.

C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code.

D. Valves: Bear UL label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked

on valve body.

E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION



21 13 13 - 3

A. Sections 01 50 00 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.

C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, ASTM A135, ASTM A795 Schedule 40 black or galvanized. Galvanized pipe shall be installed in dry pipe system and in areas where pipe is exposed to the outside environment.

a. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings. b. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.4, threaded fittings.

c. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings.

d. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock,

"C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. Gaskets in grooved couplings installed in dry pipe system shall be listed for dry pipe systems.

e. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-ring

pocked and O-ring, uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto pipe.

f. All pipe shall bear the manufacturer’s mark and listing label.

B. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151.

a. Fittings: AWWA C110, standard thickness. b. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket. c. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock,

"C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe.

d. All pipe shall bear the manufacturer’s mark and listing label and shall be clearly

visible from grade level when installed. 2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Conform to NFPA 13.

B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch (15 to 40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel,



21 13 13 - 4

split ring.

C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (80 mm): Cast iron hook.

F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. H. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete

pier or steel support.

I. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.3 GATE VALVES A. Under 2 inches (50mm):

a. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, solid wedge or disc, threaded ends.

B. Over 2 Inches (50 mm):

a. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre-grooved for mounting tamper switch,

handwheel, OS&Y, solid [rubber covered] bronze or cast iron wedge, [flanged] [grooved] ends.

C. Over 4 Inches (100 mm):

a. Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with bolted bonnet, solid bronze wedge,

flanged ends, iron body indicator post assembly. 2.4 GLOBE [OR ANGLE] VALVES

A. Up to and including 2 Inches (50 mm):

a. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable rubber disc, threaded ends, with backseating capacity, repackable under pressure.


a. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends,

renewable seat and disc. 2.5 BALL VALVES

A. Up to and including 2 Inches (50 mm):

a. Bronze two piece body, brass, chrome plated bronze, or stainless steel ball, teflon



21 13 13 - 5

seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, threaded ends with union.


a. Cast steel body,chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever

handle or gear drive handwheel for sizes 10 inches and over, flanged. 2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Bronze Body:

a. Stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded or grooved ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device.

B. Cast or Ductile Iron Body

a. Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc,

resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device.

2.7 CHECK VALVES

A. Up to and including 2 Inches:

a. Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat, threaded ends.

B. Over 2 Inches:

a. Iron body, bronze trim, swing check with rubber disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends with automatic ball check.

C. 4 Inches and Over:

a. Iron body, bronze disc, stainless steel spring, resilient seal, threaded, grooved end,

wafer, or flanged ends. 2.8 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball Valve: a. Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.



21 13 13 - 6

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems.

B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

E. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors.

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

G. Earthquake Bracing: a. Design in accordance with NFPA standards to withstand forces of geographical

region. b. Four-way bracing required at riser.

H. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

a. Install in accordance with NFPA 13. b. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. c. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe

movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

d. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

e. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide

multiple or trapeze hangers. f. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00.

Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

g. Provide surge restrainers on ends of branchlines.

I. Slope piping as required for dry pipe systems and arrange systems to drain at low points.

J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support

members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. Refer to Section 09 90 00.

K. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.

L. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve

penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.



21 13 13 - 7

M. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are

compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

N. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil

or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.

O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings after installation.

P. Provide supervised gate, ball or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service.

Q. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.

R. Provide wet inspector’s test connections as shown on plans or near system riser when

furthest point is located at an inaccessible area.

S. Provide dry inspector’s test connection at point furthest from riser. END OF SECTION

Smoke Bomb Hill Mini Mall/Express Fort Bragg, North Carolina Issue for Bidding May 6, 2016

Plumbing General Provisions 22 00 00 - 1

SECTION 22 00 00

PLUMBING - GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and DIVISION 01 of these specifications, which govern work under DIVISION 23. Refer to other sections of these specifications for additional related requirements.

1.2 SCOPE OF REQUIREMENTS

A. The work covered by Division 22 of the specifications shall include but not be limited to:

1. Furnishing all materials and supplying all labor, equipment and services to install the complete mechanical system as shown on the accompanied drawings and specified herein.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The contract documents including specifications and construction drawings are intended to provide all material and labor to install complete plumbing systems for the building.

B. Every effort has been made on the design to meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the Codes; therefore, unless Contractor before signing his Contract, shall have notified the Architect, in writing, of any items in conflict with said Codes, he shall thereafter make any minor adjustments necessary to meet said Codes at no cost to the Owner.

C. The Contractor shall refer to the architectural interior detail, floor plans, elevations, and the structural and other Contract Drawings and he shall coordinate his work with that of the other trades to avoid interference. The plans are diagrammatic and show generally the locations of the equipment and are not to be scaled; all dimensions shall be checked at the building.

D. The Contractor shall comply with the project close-out requirements as detailed in General Requirements of Division 01.

1.4 DESCRIPTION OF BID DOCUMENTS

A. Specifications:

1. Specifications, in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment.

2. Specifications are of simplified form and include incomplete sentences.

B. Drawings:

1. Drawings in general are diagrammatic and indicate sizes, locations, connections to equipment and methods of installation.

2. Scaled and figured dimensions are approximate and are for estimating purposes only.

3. Before proceeding with work check and verify all dimensions.

4. Assume all responsibility for fitting of materials and equipment to other parts of equipment and structure.

5. Make adjustments that may be necessary or requested in order to resolve space problems, preserve headroom, and avoid architectural openings, structural members and work of other trades.



6. If any part of Specifications or Drawings appears unclear or contradictory, apply to Architect or Engineer for his interpretation and decision as early as possible.

1.5 CODES PERMITS AND FEES

A. Mechanical work shall be in accordance with the following:

1. The latest edition of the International Building Code, International Mechanical Code, International Plumbing Code, International Fire Code, National Electric Code, American Disability Act and all applicable State and Local Codes and Ordinances.

2. The Contractor at his expense shall obtain permits and inspections required for the mechanical work on this project. Deliver all inspection certificates to the Owner’s Representative prior to final acceptance of the work.

3. Contractor shall pay all costs levied by utility companies and/or governing agencies associated with gas connections and include these costs within his bid. This shall include but not be limited to tap fees, service mains, meter, and vault charges.

1.6 DEFINITIONS

B. The terms “The Contractor”, when used in Division 22 shall mean the Contractor for mechanical work.

C. The term “Owners Representative” as used in Division 22 generally refers to the Architect or his designated representative in accordance with the General Conditions.

D. The term “Provide” shall mean furnish and install.

1.7 TEMPORARY WATER AND SEWER CONNECTIONS

A. Contractor WILL NOT make temporary water or sewer connections; this includes flow tests, flushing, sampling, or obtaining water for irrigation, dust control, etc. For temporary water and sewer connections, the Contractor shall apply for a connection permit through Old North Utility Services, Inc. (ONUS). ONUS will install a backflow prevention device and meter on all connections to the potable water system. If the Contractor requests the use of a fire hydrant and receives approval from the COR, a backflow prevention device and meter shall be installed by ONUS prior to use. Provider information is as follows:

Old North Utility Services, Inc. 110 N. Fourth St. Spring Lake, North Carolina 28390

Tel: (910) 495-1311 Fax: (910) 495-1310

1.8 SAFETY AND PROTECTION

A. Safety Measures: The Engineer has not been retained to provide design and construction services relating to the Contractor’s safety precautions, or means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement applies continuously and is not limited to normal working hours. Provide all required safety measures and consult with the State or Federal safety inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether compliance with State or Federal regulations exist.

B. Head protection: Where pipe hangers, equipment support angles, etc., are exposed in access ways for any maintenance, cover all such potentially injurious protrusions less than 7’-0” above the floor with padding; secure and permanently fasten, and finish to match adjacent finishes.



1.9 GUARANTEE

A. The plumbing equipment and installation shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance unless and individual item or specification is otherwise noted as longer. The Contractor shall make-good at his own expense all defects in his work, and/or equipment furnished by him, which shall develop at any time during the one year guarantee period and shall stand any expense of cutting and patching and repairing made necessary by his corrections of unsatisfactory work or equipment operation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTWORK AND PIPING COORDINATION

A. Prior to installation of the new Division 22 systems, the Contractor shall coordinate the proposed installation with the Architectural and Structural requirements, and all other trades (including HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, Ceiling Suspension and Tile systems), and provide reasonable maintenance access requirements.

B. Provide means of access to all valves, dampers, controllers, operable devices and other apparatus which may require adjustment or servicing.

C. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding all existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise the Owners Representative of any discrepancies between that indicated on the Drawings and that existing in the field prior to any installation. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the removal or relocation of installed systems that have been installed without prior notification of the Owners Representative.

2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data per the requirements of Section 013300 Submittals Procedures.

B. See individual Division 22 specification sections for additional submittal requirements.

C. Submittals of Product Data shall be bound in a black 3-ring binder with the project name on the cover. Data within this binder shall be arranged as follows:

1. Provide index tabs for each specification section in the same order and using the same name as appears in the Specifications.

2. Data shall be black and white, on 8 ½” x 11” or 11” x 17”, single, one-sided sheets suitable for copying. Diagrams and drawings larger than 11” x 17” shall be submitted in reproducible form (translucent bond paper).

3. Drawings and catalog data must be clean, neat copies. Fax material or other poor quality copies will not be acceptable.

D. If material or equipment is not as specified or submittal is not complete, it will be rejected. Only completed submittal including all applicable specification sections will be reviewed.

E. Indicate manufacturer, trade name and model number. Include copies of applicable brochure or catalogue material. Indicate sizes, types, model numbers, ratings, capacities and options actually being proposed.

F. Include dimensional data for roughing in and installation, and technical data sufficient to confirm that equipment meets requirements of drawings and specifications.

G. Include wiring, piping and service connection data, motor sizes complete with voltage ratings and schedules.

H. Submit five (5) copies of each shop drawing. The Engineer will retain one stamped copy, one will be provided to the Architect, one will be provided to the owner and a two stamped copies will be



returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for distribution of required number of reviewed copies to parties other than the Owner’s Representative(s).

I. LEED Submittals

1. Provide LEED submittals for water conserving plumbing fixtures.

2.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Division 01.

B. Keep on site, an extra set of drawings and specifications recording changes and deviations daily. Return these drawings to the Owner’s Representative at the completion of the Project. These drawings shall not be used for any other purposes.

2.4 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Refer to Section 017800 Closeout Submittals.

B. See individual Division 23 specification sections for additional Operating and Maintenance Manual requirements.

2.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING/STARTUP

A. Instruct the Owners representative(s) in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

B. Individuals present shall include Contractors, subcontractors and equipment factory representatives. These individuals shall assist in instruction and start-up.

C. Instruction period shall occur after final inspection when systems are properly working.

D. Prepare statement and check list to be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. This Statement shall read as follows:

“The Contractor, associated factory representatives and subcontractors, have started each system and the total system and have proved their normal operation to the Owner’s representative and have instructed him in the operation and maintenance thereof.” _________________________ _______________________ Owner’s Representative Contractor

2.6 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS – STANDARDS/CODES

A. Materials used under this Contract, unless specifically noted otherwise, shall be new and of the latest and most current model line produced by the manufacturer. Each item of equipment shall conform to the latest Standard Specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials and shall conform to any applicable standards of the United States Department of Commerce.

B. Instruct the Owners representative(s) in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in place when the Project is turned over to the Owner.

C. All electrically driven or connected equipment shall be provided with UL or equivalent label and/or listing in accordance with the requirements of the NEC.

D. All control panels shall be provided with UL or equivalent Label and/or listing in accordance with the requirements of the NEC an applicable local codes.

2.7 EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS



A. Refer to Section 012500 Substitution Procedures for product prior approval and substitution requirements.

B. Throughout these specifications and drawings, various materials, equipment, apparatus, etc., are specified or scheduled by manufacturer, brand name, type or catalog number. Such designation is to establish standards of desired quality and construction and shall be the basis of design and the bid.

C. Submit proposals to supply alternative materials or equipment in writing, in accordance with Section 012500 Substitution Procedures.

D. Equipment manufacturers listed in individual sections are approved alternatives for this project and are subject to requirements of drawings and specifications. Revisions required to adapt alternatives shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

E. Products furnished other than the (basis of design) shall have similar electrical characteristics as the scheduled or specified equipment. Contractor shall be responsible for any electrical changes caused by products not in accordance with this requirement.

2.8 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

A. Protect equipment and materials in storage on site, during and after installation until final acceptance. Leave factory covers in place and take special precautions to prevent entry of foreign material into working parts and duct systems.

B. Protect equipment with polyethylene covers and crates.

C. Operate, drain and flush bearings and refill with change of lubricant before final acceptance.

D. Protect bearings and shafts during installation. Grease shafts and sheaves to prevent corrosion. Provide extended nipples for lubrication.

E. Ensure that existing equipment is carefully dismantled and not damaged or lost. Do not re-use existing materials and equipment unless specifically indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LOCATIONS

A. Coordination of Division 22 equipment and systems to the available space, with other trades. The access routes through the construction shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

B. Drawings are diagrammatic. Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction of pipes and ducts, as required to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines and avoid structural, electrical, pipe and duct interference’s whether or not indicated on Drawings. Furnish fittings, etc., as required to make these offsets, transitions and changes in direction at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Determine exact route and location of ducts and coordinate and obtain approval for changes from the layout indicated on the drawings with the Owner’s Representative prior to fabrication.

D. Locations of equipment and devices, as shown on the drawings, are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of mechanical equipment to fit the available space and promptly notify the Owner’s Representative prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear.

E. All wiring, equipment, ductwork, tubing, etc., shall be concealed within building construction unless otherwise noted, or in mechanical rooms.



F. Arrange equipment to permit ready access to starters, motors, control components and to clear openings of doors and access panels.

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. All cutting and patching of new and existing construction required for the installation of systems and equipment specified in Division 22 shall be the responsibility of the Division 23 Contractor. All cutting shall be accomplished with masonry saws, drills or similar equipment to provide neat uniform openings.

B. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings and roof with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials. All patching shall meet the approval of the Owner’s Representative.

C. All cutting and patching made necessary to repair defective equipment, defective workmanship or be neglect of this Contractor to properly anticipate his requirements shall be included in Division 23.

D. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses or other structural members without the Owner Representative’s written approval.

E. Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavement, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit installation of work specified or indicated under this Division is responsibility of Division 23.

3.3 SCHEDULING

A. It is understood that while drawings are to be followed as closely as circumstances permit, the Contractor shall be responsible for installation of systems according to the true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. Anything not clear or in conflict will be explained by making application to Owner’s Representative. Should conditions arise where certain changes would be advisable, secure approval from Owner’s Representative for those changes before proceeding with work.

B. Coordinate with the work of various trades when installing interrelated work. Before installation of mechanical items, make proper provision to avoid interference’s. Changes required in work specified in Division 22 caused by neglect to do so shall be made at no cost to Owner.

C. Furnish and install inserts and supports required by Division 23 unless otherwise noted. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are an integral part of other Divisions of the Work to those involved in sufficient time to be built into construction as the Work proceeds. Locate these items and see that they are properly installed. Expense resulting from improper location or installation of items above shall be borne under Division 23.

3.4 PROJECT FINALIZATION & STARTUP

A. Upon completion of the equipment and systems installation and connections, the Contractor shall assemble all major equipment, factory representatives and subcontractors together for system start-up and Owner instructional period.

B. These individuals shall assist in start-up and check out of their systems and shall remain at the site until the system operation is acceptable and understood to the Owner's maintenance and/or operation personnel.

C. To provide acceptance of operation and instruction by the Owner's representative, the Contractor shall prepare a written statement of acceptance explaining same for the Owner's signature.

The statement should read as follows: "I, the Contractor, associated factory representative and subcontractor, have started each system and the total system and have proved their normal operation to the Owner's representative and have instructed him in the operation and maintenance thereof." ________________________ ___________________________



Owner's Representative Contractor

D. Copies of this acceptance shall be sent to the Engineer and the Architect and one copy shall be put in each maintenance manual.

3.5 PUNCH LIST PROCEDURES

A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative in wiring when the project is ready for punch lists. After punch lists are complete, written notice must be forwarded to the Owner’s Representative requesting final checkout.

B. At the time of final observation, the project foreman shall accompany the observation party and shall remove access panels as required, to allow complete observation of the entire mechanical system.



Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 00 - 1

SECTION 22 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 6. Supports and anchorages. 7. Access doors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and plumbing equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.


A. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.5 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.



1.6 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.

1.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1.8 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

1.9 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.



1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

1.10 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

N. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Section 07 72 00 "Firestopping" for materials.

O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

1.11 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.



D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

1.12 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

1.13 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

1.14 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.



1.15 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

1.16 ACCESS DOORS

A. Access doors to match surrounding surface, provided with recess to accept matching finish. Provide UL rated doors in fire rated construction.

B. Provide 12”x12” access doors for maintenance or adjustments purposes for all mechanical system components including valves, volume dampers, fire dampers, fire/smoke dampers, clean outs, traps and controls.

C. Refer to Section 08 31 00 "Access Doors and Panels”.




Plumbing Valves and Accessories 22 05 23 - 1

SECTION 22 05 23

PLUMBING PIPING VALVES AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. The Conditions of the Contract and applicable requirements of Division 1, "General Requirements", and Section 22 00 00, "Plumbing General Provisions", govern this Section.


A. Work Included: Provide plumbing piping valves and accessories as specified, and indicated.

B. Types: The types of plumbing piping valves and accessories required for the project include, but are not limited to:

1. Valves.

2. Strainers.

3. Unions.

4. Flanges.

5. Gaskets.

6. Flexible connections.

7. Gauges.


A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The model numbers listed in the Specifications establish a level of quality and material. The following manufacturers are acceptable, subject to compliance with the requirements of these Specifications.

1. General Valves:

a. Milwaukee.

b. Nibco.

c. Stockham Valves and Fittings.

d. Walworth Company.

2. Ball Valves:

a. Milwaukee.

b. Nibco.



3. Backflow Preventers/Pressure Reducing Valves:

a. Ames.

b. Febco.

c. Watts Regulator Company.

4. Check Valves:

a. Milwaukee.




b. Crane Company.



5. Strainers:

a. Milwaukee.

b. Nibco.



6. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:

a. Leonard.

b. Lawler.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Shop Drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Cut sheets on all valves, strainers, unions, flanges, gaskets, water meters, and gauges and thermometers, clearly showing all rating, capacities, and features.

2. Valve samples, when requested.

3. Additional information as required in Section 23 01 00.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Store plumbing piping valves and accessories in their factory-furnished coverings, and in a clean, dry indoor space which provided protection against the weather.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES:

A. General: All valves shall be similar to numbers listed. All similar type and size valves shall be products of one manufacturer.

B. Applications: Valve application shall be as follows:

Service Application Type

Domestic Water Shutoff Ball Shutoff Gate Shutoff Globe

Balancing Automatic Circuit Setter Check Silent Check

C. Pressure Ratings:

Service Location Rating

Domestic Water All Refer to Section 22 00 00

D. Insulated Piping: Stems on all valves installed in insulated piping shall be extended to allow adequate clearance between the operator and the insulation specified for the piping system when the valve is installed.




E. Flanges: Valve flanges and companion flanges for all valve applications shall be compatible with the valve rating and the system pressure at the point of application. Flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.1 and ANSI B16.10.

F. General Requirements:

1. All valves shall be of threaded or flanged type. No solder connected valves on water lines shall be used on this project. All bronze and iron body gate and globe valves shall be of one manufacture for each project. Manufacturers of other types may not be mixed on the same project; i.e., all butterfly valves shall be of the same manufacture, all ball valves shall be of the same manufacture, etc.

2. All valves at system points where the System Working Pressure (SWP) at the point of application, including appropriate pump shutoff head, does not exceed 150 psi, may use Class 150 valves.

3. All bronze gate valves for pressures up to 150 psi shall be ASTM B62 composition bronze. Bronze valves for pressures above 150 psi shall be ASTM B61 steam bronze. All bronze valves shall be union or screw over bonnet, rising stem type with ASTM B99 alloy 651 or ASTM B371 alloy 694 or equal stem material.

4. All bronze ball valves for pressures up to 300 psi shall be ASTM B62 composition bronze or ASTM B584 alloy 844.

5. All iron body valves shall have the pressure containing parts constructed of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. Stem material shall meet ASTM alloy 876 or ASTM 371 Alloy 876 silicon bronze or its equivalent. Gates and globes shall be bolted bonnet with OS&Y (outside screw and yoke) and rising stem design. A lubrication fitting shall be provided on yoke cap for maintenance lubrication of the yoke bushing.

6. All valves shall be repackable, under pressure, with the valve in the full open position.

7. All gate valves, globe valves, angle valves and shutoff valves of every character shall have malleable iron handwheels, except iron body valves 2-1/2" and larger which may have either malleable iron or ASTM A126 Class B, gray iron handwheels.

8. Packing for all valves shall be selected for the pressure-temperature service of the valve. It is incumbent upon the manufacturer to select the best quality, standard packing for the intended valve service. At the end of one year period spot checks will be made, and should the packing show signs of hardening or causing stem corrosion then all valves supplied by the manufacturer shall be repacked at no expense to the Owner with a packing material selected by the Owner.

9. Valves located with stem in horizontal position shall be drilled and tapped in accordance with MSS-SP-45 at Boss G to accommodate a drain valve.

G. Plumbing Valves For Domestic Water Service at or Less Than 150 PSIG:

1. Ball Valves:

a. Ball valves shall be two piece with a standard or full line size port chromium plated brass balls for domestic water, 316L stainless steel and stems and reinforced seats and stuffing box rings. All ball valves shall be designed to permit repacking while valve is in line. Valves shall be furnished with blowout proof stems.

b. Ball valves 2" and smaller shall be threaded body bronze or brass valves of a standard port design. Valves shall be rated for 300 psi WOG and shall conform to Federal Specification WW-V-35B. Valves shall be:

1) Milwaukee 20/22 Series. 2) Crane No. 9032 Series . 3) Nibco No. T-585 Series. 4) Stockham No. S-216-BR-R-T.

2. Gate Valves:

a. Valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be flanged bronze mounted Class 125 iron body, outside screw and yoke gate valves with bolted bonnets and solid wedges. Valves shall be rated for 200 psi WOG and shall conform to MSS SP-70 and shall be:

1) Milwaukee 100 Series. 2) Crane No. 465-1/2. 3) Nibco No. F-617-0.




4) Stockham No. G-623. 5) Walworth No. 8726-F.

3. Globe Valves:

a. Globe valves 2" and smaller shall be 300 psi WOG rated, all bronze globe valves with renewable-regrindable stainless steel plug disk and seat ring, union bonnet, and threaded connections. Valves shall conform to MSS SP-70 and shall be:

1) Milwaukee 500 Series. 2) Crane No. 14-1/2-P. 3) Nibco No. T-276-AP. 4) Stockham No. B 29. 5) Walworth No. 3237-P.

b. Angle and Y-pattern globe valves corresponding to the standard globe valve models specified above may be used where more-suited to the installation location.

c. Valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be flanged bronze mounted Class 125 iron body, outside screw and yoke globe valves with bolted bonnets and renewable seat and disc. Valves shall be rated for 200 psi WOG and shall conform to MSS SP-85 and shall be:

1) Crane No. 351. 2) Nibco No. F-718-B. 3) Stockham No. G-512. 4) Walworth No. 8906-F.

4. Check Valves:

a. Check valves 2" and smaller shall be Class 150 threaded bronze swing check valves with horizontal swing and replaceable discs. Valves shall be rated for 300 psi WOG and shall conform to MSS SP-80 and shall be:

1) Milwaukee 500 Series. 2) Crane No. 141. 3) Nibco No. T-433. 4) Stockham No. B-321.

b. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be flanged bronze mounted Class 150 iron body swing check valves with bolted bonnets and renewable seat and disc. Valves shall be rated for 200 psi WOG and shall conform to MSS SP-71, Type 1 and shall be:

1) Crane No. 373. 2) Nibco No. F-918-B. 3) Stockham No. G-931. 4) Walworth No. 8928-F.

c. All swing check valves shall be installed in vertical piping only. Allow adequate pipe clearance to allow for proper valve operation.

H. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer: Backflow preventers up to 2" shall be bronze body reduced pressure principal type with strainer and inlet and outlet gate valves, Watts 909 or an approved equal. Backflow preventers 2-1/2" and larger shall be all bronze or epoxy coated cast iron with strainer and inlet and outlet OS&Y gate valves, Watts 909 or an approved equal.

I. Flanges: Valve flanges and companion flanges for all valve applications shall be compatible with the valve rating and the system pressure at the point of application.

J. Valves for Gas Service:

1. Valves 2-1/2" and smaller Ball Valves, UL-AGA approved refer to Paragraph 2.1/G.1.

2.2 STRAINERS:

A. General: Water strainers shall be as follows:




1. 150 psig Working Pressure: 150 psig working pressure, 2" and smaller, shall be Muessco No. 351 or equal, 200 pounds WOG, bronze body with perforated 20 mesh stainless steel screen with cleanout and screwed ends. 150 psig working pressure, 2-1/2 through 24", shall be Muessco No. 751 or equal, 150 pounds WOG, perforated stainless steel screen with 1/16" perforations for sizes through 4", and 5/32" perforations for 5" and above, with blowdown connection, and Class 125 ANSI B16.1 flanged ends.

2. 300 psig Working Pressure: 300 psig working pressure, 2" and smaller, shall be Muessco No. 352 or equal, 400 pounds WOG, bronze body with perforated 20 mesh monel screen with cleanout and screwed ends. 300 psig working pressure, 2-1/2 to 24", shall be Muessco No. 752 or equal, 300 pounds WOG, perforated stainless steel screen with 1/16" perforations in sizes through 4", and 5/32" perforations for 5" and above, with blowdown connection, and Class 250 ANSI B16.5 flanges.

2.3 UNIONS:

A. General: Provide in lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings at points of connection to items of equipment and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made or so that equipment may be removed. Unions shall also be provided in welded lines at the connections to items of equipment, where flanges are not provided.

1. Unions in steel lines assembled with screwed fittings shall be malleable iron screwed pattern unions with bronze seats. Unions in copper or brass lines shall be all brass, threaded pattern unions. Where unions are required by the above in steel lines assembled by welding, they shall consist of two mating welding flanges.

2. Dielectric unions shall be used at all junctures of dissimilar metals.

3. Unions in 2" and smaller in ferrous lines shall be Class 300 AAR malleable iron unions with iron to brass seats, and 2-1/2" and larger shall be ground flange unions. Unions in copper lines shall be 125 pounds ground joint brass unions or 150 pounds brass flanges if required by the mating item of equipment. Companion flanges on lines at various items of equipment, machines and pieces of apparatus shall serve as unions to permit removal of the particular items. See particular Specifications for special fittings and pressure.

2.4 FLANGES:

A. General: All 125/150 pound and 250/300 pound ANSI flanges shall be weld neck and shall be domestically manufactured, forged carbon steel, conforming to ANSI B16.5 and ASTM A-181 Grade I or II or ASTM A-105-71 as made by Tube Turn, Hackney or Ladish Company. Slip on flanges will not be acceptable. Each fitting shall be stamped as specified by ANSI B16.9 and, in addition, shall have the laboratory control number stenciled on each fitting for ready reference as to physical properties and chemical composition of the material. Complete test reports may be required for any fitting selected at random. Flanges which have been machined, remarked, painted or otherwise produced domestically from imported forgings or materials will not be acceptable. The flanges shall have the manufacturer's trademark permanently identified in accordance with MSS SP-25. Submit data for firm certifying compliance with these Specifications. Gaskets used shall be ring form, dimensioned to fit accurately within the bolt circle, shall be 1/16" thick, Manville service sheet packing Style 60. Inside diameter shall conform to the nominal pipe size. Bolts used shall be carbon steel bolts with semifinished hexagon nuts of American Standard Heavy dimensions. All-thread rods will not be an acceptable for flange bolts. Bolts shall have a tensile strength of 60,000 psi and an elastic limit of 30,000 psi. Flat faced flanges shall be furnished where required to match flanges on pumps, check valves, strainers, and similar items. Only one manufacturer of weld flanges will be approved for each project.

2.5 GASKETS:

A. General: Gaskets shall be placed between the flanges of all flange joints. Such gaskets shall be ring form gaskets fitting within the bolt circle of their respective flanges. Gaskets shall be 1/16" thick Manville Service Sheet Packing Style 60. The inside diameter of such gaskets shall conform to the nominal pipe size and the outside diameter shall be such that the gasket extends outward to the studs or bolts employed in the flanged joint.

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:

A. General: Refer to Section 15250, "Vibration Isolation", for flexible connections.

2.7 GAUGES:




A. General: Provide gauges and thermometers for monitoring plumbing systems as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. Gauges: Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Trerice, Weksler, Moeller, or U.S. with 4-1/2" dial face, phenol case, stainless steel movement with Grade A phosphor bronze bourdon tube and micrometer-type calibration adjustment screw. Accuracy shall be 1/2 of 1% of full scale. Provide a Crane No. 88 or equal needle valve gauge cock in pressure tube to gauge. Gradation shall be one pound or less.

C. Range and Gradations: Gauges and thermometers shall be selected to give range and graduations best suited for quantities to be measured. Generally, gauges and thermometers shall be selected so that normal operating pressures and temperatures are not more than 2/3 nor less than 1/2 of the range; scale division shall be 2°F or less. Typical ranges for domestic cold water shall be 0°F to 100°F and for domestic hot water shall be 30°F to 240°F.

D. Gauge Locations: Provide pressure gauges at the following locations:

1. Suction side of each pump.

2. Discharge side of each pump.

3. As shown on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements.

B. Isolation Valves: Provide isolation valves in domestic water systems at each runout to a piece of equipment, each fixture, and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings.

C. Valve Stems: Install valves with stems pointed up, in the vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from a horizontal plane. All valves shall be located so as to make the removal of their bonnets possible. All flanged valves shown in the horizontal lines with the valve stem in a horizontal position shall be positioned so that the valve stem is inclined one bolt hole above the horizontal position. Screw pattern valves placed in horizontal lines shall be made up with their valve stems inclined at an angle of 30 degrees above the horizontal position. All valves must be true and straight at the time the system is tested for final acceptance. Valves shall be installed as nearly as possible in the locations as shown on and Drawings. Any change in valve location must be so indicated on the As-built Drawings.

D. Swing Check Valves: Swing check valves shall be installed in horizontal piping only.

E. Unions and Companion Flanges: Provide unions or companion flanges where required to facilitate dismantling of valves and equipment.

F. Strainer Blowdown: Provide a blowdown valve with hose connection and cap at each strainer for blowdown.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Refer to Section 23 03 00 for applicable painting, nameplates, and labeling requirements.



Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 53 - 1

SECTION 22 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Piping identification. 3. Valve tags.


A. Provide piping and equipment identification to assist in system start-up, commissioning and Owner operation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide product data and shop drawings in accordance with Section 220000 and 013300.

B. Product data: Equipment and pipe labels and valve tags.


A. Quality Standard for Piping Identification: ASME A13.1.

1.5 PRODUCTS

A. Equipment Labels: Plastic.

B. Warning Signs and Labels: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick with adhesive.

C. Pipe Labels: Pre-tensioned or Self-adhesive.

D. Stencils: Fiberboard or metal.

E. Valve Tags: Brass, 0.032-inch Stainless steel, 0.025-inch Aluminum, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness.

F. Warning Tags: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum, reinforced grommet and wire fasteners.

1.6 INSTALLATION

A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.


Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 53 - 2

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of

congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.




Plumbing Piping Systems 22 11 16 - 1

SECTION 22 11 16

PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The Conditions of the Contract and applicable requirements of Division 1, "General Requirements", and Section 22 00 00, "Plumbing General Provisions", govern this Section.


A. Work Included: Provide complete operating plumbing piping systems including pipe, tube, fittings, and appurtenances as indicated and in compliance with these Specifications. The Work of this Section shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Securing and installing plumbing services for the building.

2. A complete domestic hot and cold water distribution system.

3. A complete natural gas distribution system.

4. A complete sanitary soil waste and vent system.

5. Miscellaneous plumbing equipment and specialties required for a complete plumbing system as specified.

B. Plumbing Services: Extend all plumbing services necessary for the project as shown on the Contract Drawings to five outside the building or to the connection point provided by the Civil Engineering construction documents. Work related to plumbing services maybe shown on Plumbing, Civil, Architectural or other drawings in the Contract Documents. Plumbing services include, but are not limited to:

1. Installing all drainage systems with the proper slope as required by code.

2. Arranging with the gas company to have the necessary gas service and properly sized gas meter station located where shown on drawings.

3. Extending gas service from the gas meter station to the building entry.

C. Coordination: The Division 22 Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating plumbing services and site utility work as shown on the Contract Drawings with the General Contractor to determine what work is included in the scope of the Division 22 Contractor.

D. Applications: Applications of piping systems include, but are not limited to, the systems as listed below: WORKING OPERATING SYSTEM PRESSURE TEMPERATURES

Domestic Cold Water High 350 psig 55°F to 80°F Medium 300 psig 55°F to 80°F Low 150 psig 55°F to 80°F

Domestic Hot Water High 350 psig 90°F to 120°F Medium 300 psig 90°F to 120°F Low 150 psig 90°F to 120°F

Condensate Drainage -- 40°F to 60°F Sanitary Drainage -- -- Storm Drainage -- --




Natural Gas -- --

E. Basic Materials and Methods: Refer to Section 23 03 00 for additional plumbing piping system requirements.

F. Valves and Accessories: Refer to Section 22 10 00 for additional plumbing piping system components.

G. Vibration Isolation: Refer to Section 23 05 48, "Vibration Isolation", for piping system isolation.

H. Insulation: Refer to Section 23 07 00, "System Insulation", for piping system insulation.


A. Cast Iron Pipe Testing: All cast iron waste and vent pipe shall be 100% factory water pressure tested at 10 psig minimum pressure prior to application of the exterior coating. A certified factory test report shall be furnished to the Engineer with the pipe submittal.

B. Cast Iron Pipe Manufacturers: Cast iron pipe shall be as manufactured by Tyler Pipe or Charlotte Pipe and shall bear the CI mark indicating compliance with the CISPI quality assurance and inspection program.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Shop drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Cut sheets marked to clearly indicate all plumbing piping system materials.

2. Piping fabrication drawings for all main piping runs. Fabrication drawings shall include plan views and suitable elevations and shall include all accessories and equipment.

3. Additional items as required in Section 22 00 00.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver components in factory-fabricated water resistant packaging, as applicable.

B. Handle components carefully to avoid damages to components, enclosures, and finish.

C. Store components in a clean, dry space, and protect from weather.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS:

A. General: Provide pipe and tube of type, joint, grade, size, and weight (wall thickness, schedule or class) indicated for each service. Comply with applicable governing regulations and industry standards.

1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or ASTM A106 black or hot-dipped galvanized as specified. Piping shall be domestically manufactured by one of the manufacturers listed in the latest edition of the American Petroleum Institute (API) approved manufacturers listing.

2. Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Types "K", Type "L", or Type "M" copper water tube as defined by the Copper and Brass Research Association.

3. Ductile Iron Pipe: ANSI A21.51, Class 350 with bell and spigot ends for push-on joints.

4. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, most current edition.

5. Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI 301, most current edition.

2.2 PIPE/TUBE FITTINGS:

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class, and pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching pipe, tube, valve, and equipment connections. Where not otherwise indicated, comply with governing regulations, industry standards, and where applicable, with pipe manufacturer's instructions for selections.

1. Cast Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.1, Class 125 or Class 250, black or galvanized as specified, including bolting and gasketing.




2. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4 or ASTM A126, Class 125 or Class 250, black or galvanized as specified.

3. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150 or Class 300, black or galvanized as specified.

4. Malleable Iron Threaded Unions: ANSI B16.39, select for proper piping fabrication and service requirements including style, end connections, and metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze, or brass), plain or galvanized as specified.

5. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14.

6. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting, gasketing, and butt weld end connections.

7. Forged Steel Socket-welding and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, rated to match schedule of connected pipe.

8. Cast Iron Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.22 galvanized, recessed fittings with pitched threaded ends.

9. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe, except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1/2". Do not thread nipples full length (no all-thread nipples).

10. Wrought Copper/Bronze Solder-joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22 suitable for working pressure up to 250 psig.

11. Hubless Cast Iron Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301, most current edition, and comply with governing regulations.

12. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: ASTM A74, most current edition.

13. Compression Gaskets: ASTM C1563 for gasket testing and ASTM C564 for elastomeric compound.

14. Flanged Fittings: Comply with ANSI B16.15 for bolt-hole dimensioning, materials, and flange-thickness.

15. Flange Bolts: Bolts shall be carbon steel ASTM A307 Grade A hexagon head bolts and hexagonal nuts. Where one or both flanges are cast iron, furnish Grade B bolts. Cap screws utilized with flanged butterfly valves shall be ASTM A307 Grade B with hexagon heads.

16. Flange Bolt Thread Lubricant: Lubricant shall be an antiseize compound designed for temperatures up to 1000°F and shall be Crane Anti-Seize Thread Compound or approved equal.

17. Mechanical Joints for Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA/ANSI 21.11 with appropriate gaskets, nuts and bolts.

B. Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products:

1. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: 1/16" thick for all pipe size 10" and smaller and 1/8" thick for all pipe size 12" and larger. Ring-type shall be used between raised face flanges and full face-type between flat face flanges with punched bolt holes and pipe opening. Gaskets shall be Garlock Style 3400 compressed nonasbestos or equal.

2. Insulating (Dielectric) Unions: Provide dielectric unions at all pipe connections between ferrous and nonferrous piping. Unions shall be "Clearflow" waterway as made by Victaulic, "Delvin" as made by Pipeline Seal and Insulator Company or "EPCO" as made by Epco Sales, Inc. and shall have nylon insulation.

3. Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C564, neoprene, compression-type.

4. Push-on-joints: ANSI A21.11, rubber compression-type, "Tyton Joint" as manufactured by U.S. Pipe or equal.

5. Hubless Cast Iron Joints: Heavy duty couplings: Clamp all 125, Husky SD4000 or MG.

6. Solder: All solder used for sweating of water piping joints shall be 95/5 tin-antimony or tin-silver. All solder used for sweating of natural gas piping joints shall be phosphorous-free, non-lead bearing silver brazing solder with a melting point in excess of 1000°F.




7. Threadsealing Tape: Threadsealing tape used for plumbing piping applications shall be stretched or nonstretched teflon tape. Threadsealing tape used for natural gas piping applications shall be nonstretched 0.004" thick teflon tape and shall be yellow in color for identification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION:

A. General:

1. Industry Practices: Install pipe, tube, and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without failure or degradation of service. Install each run with a minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions or flanged connections to permit disassembly for maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. Coordinate piping locations with other trades to avoid conflict. Give ductwork preference unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.

2. Systems: Install piping parallel or perpendicular to lines of building, true to line and grade, and with sufficient hangers to prevent sags between hangers. Provide fittings at changes in direction. Piping in finished areas shall be concealed, except in mechanical rooms. Where pipes of different sizes join, provide reducing elbows, tees, or couplings. Bushings will not be acceptable.

3. Expansion and Contraction: Install loops, offsets, sizing joints, and expansion joints, as necessary, to avoid strain resulting from expansion and contraction of piping systems on fixtures and equipment.

a. Expansion Loops and Offsets: Provide expansion loops and offsets in piping systems for not less than one inch (1") expansion or contraction per 100'of pipe. Use Victaulic style 75 or 77 flexible type couplings on expansion loops in accordance with the latest Victauliv recommendations for expansion compensation.

4. Pipe Grading: Install domestic water piping to pitch down in the direction of flow for drainage. Grade storm, soil, and waste piping at 1/4" per foot whenever possible, and not in any case less than 1/8" per foot for pipe sizes 4" and larger, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. Grade vent piping at 1/4" per foot whenever possible, and not in any case less than 1/8" per foot toward vents. Grade gas piping at a minimum of 1/8" per foot toward condensation traps at connected equipment.

B. Steel Pipe: Ream steel pipe after cutting and before threading. Thread with clean-cut taper threads of length to engage all threads in fittings and leave no full-cut threads exposed after make-up. Use John Crane or approved equal teflon thread tape applied only to male threads to make-up joints.

C. Copper Pipe: Cut copper pipe square and ream to remove burrs. Clean fitting socket and pipe ends with sand cloth, No. 00 cleaning pads or wire brush. No acids shall be used to clean either pipe or fittings or as a flux in sweating joints. The use of drilled T connections is not permitted.

D. Final Connections to Equipment Furnished by Owner or Under Other Divisions of These Specifications: Where Drawings show equipment to be furnished under other Divisions of these Specifications or by the Owner, such equipment will be delivered to the site, uncrated, assembled, and set in-place under those other Divisions of these Specifications or under the separate contracts. Any required automatic control valves shall also be provided under those other Divisions of these Specifications or other separate contracts. Make all final connections of chilled water, hot water, condenser water, gas, domestic water, waste, and vent as shown. Provide valves, unions, strainers, check valves, and traps as required for proper operation of systems and equipment. Equipment not shown or noted on the piping drawings shall not be included in the scope of this requirement.

E. Excavation, Installation, and Backfill for Underground Pipe:

1. Layout: Pipes shall be laid and pipe joints made in presence of the Owner's Representative and field measurements, layouts, batter board alignment, grade establishments, and similar locations shall be performed by a Professional Engineer in the employ of the Contractor. The Contractor's engineer shall be on the job during all underground work. A "Bench-Mark" reference for use by the Contractor shall be provided by the Owner.

2. Pipe Grading: Lay and maintain all pipes at required lines and grades during the course of the Work to comply with the Drawings.




3. Trench: Excavate the trench to the depth required. Properly brace and dewater the trench and keep it free of water during installation, testing pipe, and backfilling. No water shall be discharged onto a street or freeway without approval by the Architect. Refer to Section 15100 for additional requirements.

4. Excavation: The trench shall be at least 18" wider than the maximum diameter of the pipe or largest bell and the pipe shall be laid in the center of the trench. The trench shall be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide for pipe cushions or supports as specified with a minimum backfill cover of 30". Trench width may be increased as required and piling left in place until sufficient compacted backfill is in place. Properly sheet and brace all open trenches to render them secure and remove all such sheeting and bracing before completing the backfill. Comply with local regulations or, in the absence thereof, with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. The quantity of excavation required to install sheeting and the installation and removal of sheetings and bracings will not be regarded as Extra Work. All costs incurred for this excavation and the installation of sheeting shall be included in the Contract Price. Refer to Section 23 03 00 for additional requirements.

5. Grading: Upon completion of excavation and prior to the laying of the pipe, the trench bottom shall be brought up to the required elevation with a pipe cushion, except where the cushion has been eliminated by the Engineer. Pipe cushions shall be select material deposited in the trench and shall be compacted, leveled off, and shaped to obtain a smooth compacted bed along the laying length of the pipe. Pipe cushion shall be as follows:

a. Stable, Firm Semidry Trench: Piping shall be laid on undisturbed earth, in a constant uniformly sloped trench. Laying space for hubs or mechanical joints shall be hand cut to 6" either side of the joint and stabilized sand poured and wet in to even with the natural earth trench bottom. The leakproof integrity test of the piping system shall be inspected by the Owner's Representative prior to covering the piping. Failure to notify the Owner's Representative for inspection prior to covering the piping will result in the piping being uncovered and the test being performed again. Where the slope of the trench is found to belly down along the line of piping, before joining, the pipe shall be removed from the trench and the belly converted to uniform slope by adding stabilized bank sand, wet down and slightly mounded to the center of the trench. The section of piping will then be "rolled" into place so with support uniform along its entire length. Where the slope of the trench is found to arch up along the line of piping, before joining, the pipe shall be removed from the trench and the arch converted to uniform slope by cutting the arch out. The section of piping will then be reset into place with support uniform along its entire length.

b. Wet Clay - Black Gumbo: Piping shall be laid in a constant, uniformly sloped trench. After shaping, the trench shall receive 3" minimum clean bedding sand, which shall be uniformly distributed on the trench bottom. Laying space for the hubs or mechanical joints shall then be hand removed and the piping placed on the setting bed with the weight of the piping distributed evenly on the setting bed over its entire length. The leakproof integrity test of the piping system shall be inspected by the Owner's Representative prior to covering the piping by the Engineer's agent. Failure to notify the Owner's Representative for inspection prior to covering the piping will result in the piping being uncovered and the test performed again.

c. Rock: Where rock is encountered, the trench shall be excavated to a minimum of 6" below the pipe elevation and then backfilled with bedding sand to provide a uniform layer for pipe support. Backfill shall be as indicated for Wet Clay - Black Gumbo.

d. Special Considerations: Where there are expansive soil conditions on the site, special precautions shall be taken to prevent pushing and breakage of underground piping. Precautions shall be in accordance with local installation techniques and may include carton forms or special pipe bedding.

6. Anchors: Cast iron pipes shall have concrete anchors at each change in direction and/or as directed. Any change in direction exceeding 15 degrees shall be anchored. Concrete anchors shall rest against solid ground with the required area of bearing on pipe and ground to provide suitable anchoring.

7. Backfill: Backfill trenches only after piping has been inspected, tested, and approved by the Architect. Place backfill material in the trench either by hand or approved mechanical methods. The compaction of backfill material shall be accompanied by tamping with hand tools or approved pneumatic tampers, by using vibratory compactors, by puddling, or by any combination of the three. The method of compaction shall be approved and all compaction shall be done to the satisfaction of the Architect. Backfill completely around pipe, including 18" above the pipe, with suitable bank sand, tamped in 4"




layers under, around, and over pipe. Water down backfill as required. The remainder of the backfill for pipes shall be select backfill material tamped at intervals of no more than 12" depths, to attain a 95% Proctor Compaction Density. All materials to be used as select material backfill shall be approved by the Architect. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the excavated material does not meet the requirements of select material, the Contractor shall be required to screen the material prior to its use as select material backfill. Material used in the upper portion of the backfill or subgrade shall not contain stone, rock, or other material larger than 6" in its longest dimension. No wood, vegetable matter, or other material, which in the opinion of the Architect is unsuitable, shall be included in the backfill. The upper 24" of backfill may be water jetted, if desired. Bring backfill up to finish grade identified on the Architectural Drawings, including additional backfill required to offset settlement during consolidation. When removal of unsuitable, excavated material creates a shortage of backfill material, the Contractor shall, at no change in Contract amount, furnish material as specified in this Section in the amount required to complete the backfill.

F. Pipe Fabrication Drawings:

1. Pipe fabrication drawings shall be submitted for all piping in the Mechanical Rooms and for all other areas requiring coordination with other trades.

2. Pipe fabrication drawings shall be double line drawings to scale on 1/4" scale building floor plans and shall indicate pipe size, fittings, valves, accessories, connections, system type, insulation, support requirements, pipe elevations and other information required for coordination with other trades and fabrication of piping.

3. Pipe fabrication drawings shall be coordinated with other trades and building construction prior to submittal for approval. Refer to Section 22 00 00 for additional shop drawing requirements.

G. Basic Materials and Methods: Refer to Section 22 05 00 for additional requirements related to plumbing piping.

3.2 PLUMBING SERVICES:

A. General: Install the various piping systems as described and as required by the local plumbing inspection department.

1. Slope domestic hot and cold water piping to drain and provide with hose valves (drain valves) at low points.

2. Install soil, waste, and vent piping with horizontal lines pitched in accordance with local codes, but in no case less than 1/4" per foot for pipe 3" and smaller and 1/8" per foot for pipe 4" and larger. Install soil, waste, and vent piping with hubs of each length of piping in the upstream position.

3. Make-up "Ty-Seal" or "Dual-Tite" gasketed joints using lubrication and joining tools as instructed by the manufacturers.

4. Torque "No-Hub" joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not install "No-Hub" joints below ground.

5. Provide chrome-plated piping at each fixture installed in a finished space. Install with proper strap wrenches to avoid marking or defacing.

6. Provide proper restraints on riser and stack offsets.

B. Plumbing Connections to Mechanical Equipment:

1. General: Provide necessary pipe and fittings. Make final connections to provide natural gas supply to mechanical equipment. Locate gas supply where shown and connect with suitable stop valves, check valves and bypass valves as applicable.

2. Gas Supply: Provide gas supply to boilers and kitchen equipment as indicated on Drawings.

3.3 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING SYSTEMS:

A. Interior Hot and Cold Water Piping:

1. Piping 3" and smaller, Type "L" copper tubing hard drawn joined using non-lead bearing solder, such as 95-5 silver or antimony solder (95% tin and 5% silver or antimony). Provide isolation fitting whenever dissimilar materials are used.




B. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide piping runouts to fixtures sized to comply with governing regulations. Where not otherwise indicated, provide runouts sized to comply with the following: lavatories - 1/2" hot, 1/2" cold; water closet flush valves - one and one half inch (1-1/2") cold; urinal flush valves - one inch (1") cold; drinking fountains - 1/2" cold. Provide each fixture with a shut-off valve for each supply line. All exposed lines shall be chromium-plated.

C. Water Hammer Arresters:

1. Water Hammer Arresters: At each hot and cold water supply pipe at each fixture, provide a properly sized Wade Shoktrol or approved equal sealed water hammer arrester.

3.4 UNDERGROUND DOMESTIC WATER PIPING:

A. Service Piping Three Inches and Larger: Class A, 150 AWWA ductile iron bell and spigot, push-on joint, pressure water pipe. Joints shall be of the push-on-type employing a molded rubber "O" ring gasket retained in a ring recessed into the inside of the bell per ANSI A21.1. All underground cast iron or ductile iron pipe shall be encased in black 8-mil thick, polyethylene plastic sheet, per ANSI/ AWWA, C105/A21.5-82, Method C. Pipe and joints shall be manufactured by Tyler Pipe and Foundry Company or equal. Coat pipe and fittings inside and outside with the manufacturer's standard coal tar enamel suitable for domestic water service.

B. Underslab Piping: Piping under the building slab for trap primers and equipment stubs shall be no larger than one inch (1") and shall be Type "K" soft drawn copper tubing. Piping shall be run continuous from slab penetration to penetration and there shall not be any fittings or connections below the slab. Piping shall have minimum 12" cover. Underground piping up to 3" above slab penetrations shall be protected as described herein below.

C. Underground Pipe Protection: Underground metallic water piping which is not coated with coal tar enamel shall be coated with 3M Scotchwrap Pipe Wrap Insulation No. 50, applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Machine wrapping of piping is acceptable. Concrete thrust blocks shall be poured at all turns and offsets of mechanical joint piping.

D. Water service piping shall not be installed under concrete slabs on grade.

3.5 SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM:

A. Waste and Vent Piping Underground: All underground waste and vent piping, including turns to the vertical to 12" above the grade floor slab, shall be constructed of service weight (SV) hub and spigot cast iron soil pipe and fittings with positive sealing elastomeric gasket joints. Elastomeric gaskets shall be installed using an approved gasket lubricant. Pour concrete thrust blocks at all below grade turns and offsets for waste piping 6" and larger.

B. Waste and Vent Piping Above Grade: Service weight (SV) cast iron pipe and fittings with positive sealing neoprene elastomeric compression type gasket joints. Elastomeric gaskets shall be installed using gasket lubricant. All horizontal stack offsets and elbows (4" and larger) shall be joint-strapped and supported using riser clamps and threaded rod.

C. Insulation: All condensate drains and related piping within the occupied spaces of the building, shall be insulated as specified in Section 23 07 00.

D. Cleanouts:

1. Locations:

a. At base of every drainage stack.

b. Upper terminal of each horizontal drainage pipe.

c. Each 90' length of horizontal straight run of drainage piping on the exterior, each 50’ length of horizontal straight run of drainage piping in the interior.

d. Where shown on Drawings.

e. As required by local code.

2. Size: Cleanouts shall be line size for piping up to 4" and 4" size for piping larger than 4".

3. Access: Provide access doors for access to cleanouts installed in concealed locations.

E. Fixture Connections:




1. Water Closets: Galvanized castable nipples.

2. Urinals: Copper or cast iron nipples with suitable adapters.

3. Lavatories: Copper or cast iron nipples with suitable adapters.

4. Service Sinks: Brass or cast iron nipples with suitable adapters.

5. Drinking Fountains: Copper or cast iron nipples with suitable adapters.

3.6 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM:

A. Code Compliance Products: Comply with local utility company and AGA regulations which require the products used for gas piping work to be selected from lists in certain published standards or coded as indicated.

B. Gas Piping: Gas piping, 2-1/2" and smaller, intended for operation at pressures less than 5 psig shall be ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black steel joined by Class 150 socket weld fittings except that Class 150, banded, black malleable iron, threaded fittings maybe used at valves and equipment connection.

C. Concealed Piping and Protection: Gas piping run concealed in walls, chases, or above ceilings shall be installed in a Schedule 20 welded steel sleeve vented to the outside atmosphere. Suitable internal spacers shall be provided. Inaccessible piping shall be all-welded connections. Socket type weld fittings may be used for sleeved gas piping.

D. Underground Piping: Gas piping installed below grade shall be coated with Republic Steel Corporation (US) "X-Tru-Coat" high density polyethylene extruded coating, factory-applied with a fluid mastic to a minimum thickness of 0.040". Field welds, joints, and fittings shall be protected with mastic undercoat and by wrapping at least two layers of "X-Tru-Tape" installed as instructed by manufacturer.

E. Gas Distribution System Drip Pipes: Drip pipes shall be provided throughout the gas piping systems for the purpose of accumulating moisture and condensate. They shall be sized no smaller than the gas main which they drain in each instance.

F. Gas Distribution System Fabrication Methods:

1. All interior gas piping shall, wherever possible, be installed so as to grade back toward the gas entry. In all cases where such grading is impracticable and it is necessary to grade the house piping away from the inlet, drip pipes of adequate capacity must be installed where traps are formed by such changes in grade. Drip pipes shall terminate a screwed pattern, malleable iron black cap. No drip pipes shall be used as outlets for the attachment of any fixture or gas appliance. Drip pipes must, moreover, be placed at the bottom of all vertical pipes which rise from and connect to the end of any horizontal pipe.

2. All branch outlet pipes shall be taken from the top or sides of running horizontal lines and not from the bottom. No crosses shall be installed in any horizontal gas line. No unions, gas cocks, or valves shall be used in any concealed location. Every gas cock and valve shall be accessible for inspection and repair.

3. The general arrangement of all gas piping shall be such that the number of threaded joints involved is reduced to an absolute minimum. If obstructions are encountered, pipe shall not be bent to circumvent such obstructions. Welding fittings shall be used for this purpose in the case of welded lines, and if threaded lines are involved, screwed fittings shall be used. Wherever gas pipes run through outside brick, stone, or other walls, the opening around the pipe shall be securely and rigidly sealed. Gas pipe sizes shall be at least one pipe size larger than the inlet of the gas appliance which they supply. No bushings shall be used in conjunction with any gas piping.

G. Gas Distribution System Protective Coating: Gas piping systems installed underground shall utilize pipe which has been factory coated with Scotchkote protective resin No. 212. All materials, surface preparation, application and testing shall conform to Federal Specification L-C-530 B-Type 2. Underground welded joints and fittings shall be coated with Scotchkote No. 306 epoxy resin and taped with vinyl Scotchwrap-50 brand tape. Flanged joints shall be given two coats of Koppers Company No. 300M Catalyzed Coal Tar Epoxy. Under no circumstances shall any backfilling operations be begun until these pipe protection operations have been completed.

3.7 CONDENSATE DRAINAGE:

A. General: Provide a condensate drain pipe to connect each cooling unit drain pan and secondary drain pan to extend to and discharge into an open-type drain in the plumbing system.




B. Assembly: Use Schedule 40, galvanized steel pipe made up with Class 125, galvanized, threaded fittings. Assemble fittings to form a trap with depth equal to or greater than operating pressure of the unit served. Drains shall be of the sizes indicated, but not less than the full size of the drain pan connection. Air handling unit drains shall have deep seal traps to permit unit pan drainage. Install a deep seal trap for each blow-through or draw-through air handling unit to maintain the water seal.

3.8 CHASE AND WALL PIPING SUPPORTS:

A. All piping whether sanitary or water shall be rigidly installed in all chases or walls. Test for rigidity shall be that the piping is virtually immovable by hand short of deforming the piping. Valve, stop and fixture penetrations thru chase or fixture mounting walls shall be firmly supported from just inside the wall or chase prior to penetration to the room-side of the chase or wall.

B. Support inside the chase or wall for Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping shall be accomplished by utilizing fixture carrier bolt-downs, "Uni-Strut" or similar structural bracing system, "U-bolts", nuts and lock-washers, all bolted to the floor and to the piping system.

C. Support for Water Piping or other similar service piping shall be accomplished by using a "system" designed for that purpose. An approved system shall consist of preformed steel supports which shall be installed between studs or joists and preformed nonmetallic pipe holder inserts which are designed to rigidly support or hold the piping to the steel supports.

D. In no case shall Sanitary Sewer Waste or Vent Piping depend on blocks, brick, stone or wood sleepers for its final support. In no case shall Water Piping or similar service piping depend on its final support on "tie-wires", soldering or brazing to metal studs or joists, copper tube soldered to risers and tied to joists or any other method which does not have the written approval of the Engineer. Piping improperly supported shall have improper supports promptly removed and replaced with specified supports at the direction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner and/or Architect/Engineer.

E. Support system shall be as manufactured by "Holdrite" or an approved equal.

3.9 CLEANING, FLUSHING, TESTING AND INSPECTING:

A. Cleaning: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems and prepare surface for application of any required coatings.

B. Piping Tests:

1. General: Blank off equipment during tests. Perform tests before piping is enclosed in walls, floors, partitions or in any other way concealed from view. Tests may be performed in sections. Tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer or Owner's Representative and local inspectors and results presented to the Engineer for acceptance and approval prior to concealing piping from view. Provide all necessary equipment for testing, including pumps and gauges. Refer to Section 15020 for additional requirements.

2. Domestic Water Systems: Test hot and cold water systems hydrostatically to a pressure of 150 psig or 1-1/2 times working pressure, whichever is greater, for a period of 24 hours. Repair all leaks, replacing materials as necessary, and repeat tests until systems are proven tight.

3. Soil, Waste and Vent Piping System: Test soil, waste, and vent piping by plugging all openings and filling system to height required by UH Plumbing Inspector, but not less than 10'above the level of the pipe being tested, for a minimum of 3 hours. Inspect all joints for leaks, repair all leaks found, and retest until piping is demonstrated to be free from leaks as evidenced by no perceptible lowering of the water level after 3 hours. In addition to water test, apply peppermint or smoke tests, if required by local code.

4. Natural Gas Piping System: Test natural gas piping with compressed air or nitrogen to a pressure of five times the expected service pressure, but not less than 100 psig, for a period of 24 hours. Repair all leaks, replacing materials as necessary, and repeat test until systems are proven absolutely tight. After all pneumatic testing of the entire gas piping system has been completed and all leaks have been repaired and at a time deemed suitable by the Owner's duly authorized representative, the Contractor shall have the gas supply turned on and the gas odorant chemical added by a representative of the gas company, as applicable. The Contractor shall then bleed gas from every riser and every runout until the odor of gas is present at every gas connection.

5. Flushing: Flush water piping systems with clean water following successful testing. Refer to Section 15100 for additional pipe cleaning and flushing requirements.




C. Disinfection of Water Systems: Disinfect hot and cold water systems as follows: Fill systems with water solution containing 50 ppm available chlorine; allow to stand for 8 hours, opening and closing all valves several times during this period; thoroughly flush; refill and place system in service; ensure a residual chlorine content of 0.2 ppm. Refer to Section 23 03 00 for additional requirements.

D. Cleaning and Adjusting: Thoroughly clean and disinfect all plumbing fixtures, including all exposed trim. Adjust all flush valves for proper flushing, but without excess use of water. Demonstrate to the Engineer that the entire plumbing system and all its components are functioning properly.

E. Inspecting: Visually inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, adequate hangers, supports, and inclusion of accessories and appurtenances.

F. Grooved Piping Installation: Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s (Victaulic) guidelines and recommendations. All grooved couplings, fittings, valves and specialties shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the grooved components. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be supplied by Victaulic. Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. A Victaulic factory trained field representative shall provide on-site training to contractor’s field personnel in the installation of grooved piping products. Factory trained representative shall periodically review the product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.

3.10 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Refer to Section 23 03 00 for applicable painting, nameplates, and labeling requirements.



Domestic Water Piping Sepcialties 22 11 19 - 1

SECTION 22 11 19

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following: 1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Pressure reducing valves. 4. Balancing valves. 5. Mixing valves. 6. Strainers. 7. Outlet boxes. 8. Hose stations. 9. Hose bibs and freeze-proof hydrants. 10. Water hammer arrestors. 11. Trap primers.


A. Provide domestic water piping system specialties in order to create a fully functional and serviceable system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: For each plumbing system specialty item.


A. Local and State Plumbing Codes and standards.

B. Plastic Piping Components: NSF 14.

C. Drinking Water System Components: NSF 61.

1.5 PRODUCTS

A. Vacuum Breakers:

1. Watts Regulator or equal.

2. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: 3. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: 4. Pressure vacuum breakers. 5. Spill-resistant vacuum breakers. 6. .

B. Outlet Boxes:


Domestic Water Piping Sepcialties 22 11 19 - 2

1. Guy Gray or equal. 2. Icemaker Outlet Boxes.

C. Hose Bibs with vacuum breaker: 1. Woodford or equal.

D. Wall Hydrants:

1. Woodford or equal.

2. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants: 3. Nonfreeze, Hot- and Cold-Water Wall Hydrants:

E. Post Hydrants:

1. Woodford or equal.

2. Nonfreeze, draining-type post hydrants.

F. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. PPP, Inc.

G. Trap-Seal Primer Valves: 1. PPP, Inc.

1.6 INSTALLATION

A. Install domestic water system specialties according to manufacturer’s recommendations and where required to meet established design standards and applicable codes.



Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 22 13 19 - 1

SECTION 22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


The general provisions of the Contract and the requirements of Section 22 00 00 apply to the Work specified in this Section.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

AA.. Provide all drains, accessories and specialties indicated on the Contract Drawings, as specified, and as required under Section 22 01 00 - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS, PLUMBING.

BB.. Model numbers listed are Smith. Comparable models by Zurn, Wade, Mifab, Josam, or Watts will be acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

AA.. Provide suitable clamping devices on all drains and cleanouts in floors and structures with waterproofing membranes.

BB.. Size of drains shall be as indicated on Drawings. Sanitary drains and Floor drains shall be minimum size of 3" unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Storm drains and Roof drains shall be minimum size of 4" unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Outlets shall be either caulked or no hub as required by piping used.

CC.. Set and adjust drains in lowest point of area being drained.

DD.. Provide sanitary drains and floor drains and/or traps with trap primers and minimum 3/4" trap primer connections where required by code and authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 DRAINS:

AA.. Floor Drains:

1. Toilet Rooms and Similar Locations: Smith 2010-P050-A05-NB Series cast iron two piece floor drain with seepage flange, reversible clamping collar, and 6" diameter Nikaloy strainer.

2. Can Wash: Smith 2120-G Series cast iron floor drain with seepage flange and galvanized tractor type cast iron grate.

3. Mechanical Rooms and Similar Areas: Drains Receiving Discharge and/or Drip Piping from Equipment: Smith 2110 B-PB Series cast iron floor drain with flange, see page openings, polished brass rim, clamping device, less top grate with metal internal bucket.

4. Floor Sink: Smith 3006-DBS-41 304 stainless steel 8" deep floor sink with 12" square top, double drainage flange, weepholes, stainless steel sediment bucket with internal dome strainer, clamping device and half grate.

5. Hub Drain: Cast iron drain with p trap, primer tap, cast iron or stainless perforated strainer in bottom of bell and round cast iron bell inlet (bell end of bell and spigot pipe). When installed in floors and structures with waterproofing membrane, provide drain with clamping device similar to Smith 1720 Series.



2.3 CLEANOUTS:

AA.. General: Install cleanouts at all bends, angles, at ends of all waste and sewer piping and as noted on Drawings. Bring all cleanouts up to grade or finished surface and make easily accessible. All cleanouts shall have extra heavy bronze plugs. For cleanouts in unpaved areas, install in 18" x 18" x 4" concrete pad with top flush with finished grade. For cleanouts in paving, sidewalks, etc., install flush with finished surface. All cleanout locations shall be coordinated with and approved by Architect prior to installation.

BB.. Materials:

1. Unfinished Areas and Chases: Smith 4420 Series cast iron ferrule with taper thread bronze lead seal plug.

2. Finished Walls: Smith 4435-NB Series cast iron caulking ferrule with countersunk slotted head bronze lead seal plug, square smooth finish Nikaloy access cover, 7" x 7" nickel brass frame with anchoring lugs.

3. Finished Floors: Smith 4023 series floor cleanout with adjustable extension housing, cast iron ferrule with taper thread bronze plug, scoriated secured round nickel bronze access cover and frame.

a. Tile Floors: Same as for "finished floors" except with square frame, 4043 series.

b. Inlay Floors: Same as for "finished floors" except with recessed cover, 4143 series.

2.4 FIXTURE SUPPORTS:

AA.. General:

1. Provide fixture supports for all water closets, lavatories, urinals, and other wall hung fixtures.

2. All foot supports on all types of fixture supports shall be the type that does not extend out from under the wall on which the fixture is mounted.

3. Construction and installation of the supports shall be as required to suite the job conditions, the space available, and the riser diagrams and details on the drawings.

BB.. Carriers:

1. Water Closet Carrier: Smith adjustable, horizontal or vertical closet carrier as required by waste piping. Provide cast iron adjustable extension and extension connector. (Plastic extensions and connectors are not acceptable.)

2. Lavatory Carrier Vitreous China Fixtures: Smith 0700 with concealed arms.

3. Lavatory Carrier Cast Iron Fixtures: Smith 750 with exposed arms.

4. Urinal Carrier: Smith 0637 with bearing plate.

5. Electric Drinking Fountain Carrier: Smith 0830 with bearing plate.

2.5 HYDRANTS:

AA.. Wall Hydrants: Woodford or equal - Non-freeze all bronze hydrant with renewable seats, integral backflow preventer/vacuum breaker, chrome face, loose key, 3/4" size.

BB.. Roof Hydrants: Woodford or equal – Non-freeze post hydrant with bronze operating parts, 3/4" size.



CC.. Hose Bibbs Inside Building: Woodford or equal - Chrome plated faucet with drain plug, integral vacuum breaker, removable handle, 3/4" size.

2.6 GARBAGE CAN WASHER:

AA.. Rough brass mixing faucet with vacuum breaker, renewable seats, swing spout with hose connection, and screwdriver stops in risers.

BB.. Install faucet in stainless steel box recessed in wall with stainless steel frame and door. Box shall have hinged door with keyed lock.

CC.. Faucet: Chicago No. 686VB.

2.7 TRAPS, DILUTION BASINS, WELLS, INTERCEPTORS, MANHOLES:

Provide the various traps, basins, wells, interceptors and manholes as shown on the drawings complete with all piping, manhole covers, rims for covers, grates, rim for grates, and concrete work.

2.8 VACUUM BREAKERS:

Provide where required by Code, Chicago Faucet Co. No. 892 1/2" IPS female inlet and outlet, polished chrome plated vacuum breakers.

2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS:

AA.. Provide and install backflow preventers where required by Code and authorities having jurisdiction. Backflow preventers shall be of the reduced pressure type with two independent check valves on each side of the relief valve, rising stem gate valves of type specified in these specifications on inlet and outlet, test cocks, all bronze construction, 175 PSI working pressure.

BB.. Backflow preventers shall be approved by Code and U.S.C. Cross Connection Control Laboratory and shall be U.L. listed.

CC.. Backflow preventers shall be installed in the horizontal position. When installed inside a building or structure, provide a factory made air gap fitting on the drain outlet with full size drain line to floor drain in nearest mechanical or equipment room.

DD.. Manufacturer: Watts Series 909 or comparable model by Hersey, Febco, Watts Regulator.

2.10 TRAP PRIMERS:

AA.. Provide and install trap primers where indicated on drawings and where required by code and authorities having jurisdiction.

BB.. Primer valves shall be installed in water supply lines to fixtures and equipment and shall be automatic, all bronze construction, removable and replaceable operating components, integral vacuum breaker, gasketed and removable top cover, 1/2" connections. Primer valves shall be all polished chrome plated.

CC.. Piping from finished surfaces to and from primer valves shall be polished chrome plated. Provide chrome plated escutcheons at each pipe penetration through wall. Drain piping shall extend in concealed spaces from primer valves to connections at drains and shall be minimum 1/2" type "L" copper. Where not possible to extend in concealed spaces, drain piping may run in floor. All drain piping in floor and all drain piping under a floor on grade shall be minimum 3/4" Type "K" seamless no joint copper from above floor to connection at drain.

DD.. Installation shall be in strict accordance with published manufacturer’s recommendations.

EE.. Manufacturer: Smith 2699 series or comparable model by Zurn, Wade, or Josam.


Plumbing Fixtures 22 40 00 - 1

SECTION 22 40 00

PLUMBING FIXTURES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Includes furnishing and installation of plumbing fixtures and related accessories.


A. Provide plumbing fixtures and all associated faucets, flush valves, traps, supplies, etc. as required to serve the building facilities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals

1. Submittals must include manufacturer’s cut sheets for all water-consuming plumbing fixtures and fittings (toilets, urinals, faucets, showerheads, etc.) highlighting maximum flow rates and/or flush rates. Include cut sheets for any automatic faucet-control devices.

2. Credit WE 3 - Water-Conserving Fixtures: Plumbing fixtures and fittings shall use in aggregate at least 40% less water than the water use baseline calculated for the building after meeting the Energy Policy Act of 1992 fixture performance requirements. Flow and flush rates shall not exceed the following):

a. Toilets: no more than 1.28 gallons per flush, otherwise be dual flush 1.6/0.8 gallons per flush, and have documented bowl evacuation capability per MaP testing of at least 400 grams.

b. Urinals: no more than 0.125 gallons per flush or use c. Lavatory Faucets: 0.5 gpm with automatic faucet controls d. Kitchen Sink Lavatories: 1.0 gpm


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

D. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

E. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3. 2. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 3. Water-Closet, Flushometer Valve Trim: ASSE 1037.



F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and/or sink faucets: 1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 5. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 6. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 7. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 8. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 9. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 10. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for shower faucets: 1. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASSE 1016. 2. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 3. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F 445. 4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 5. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444. 6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 7. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016. 8. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 9. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021. 4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 5. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. 6. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. 2. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 4. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499. 5. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 7. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 8. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

J. Quality Standard for Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: NFPA 70, Article 100.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Materials and Workmanship for Plumbing Fixtures and Accessories:

1. Commercial Applications: One year.

1.6 FAUCETS

A. Lavatory Faucets;



1. Sloan or equal - Sensor operated with transformer and integral mixing valve.

B. Sink Faucets;

1. Elkay or equal - Single control kitchen faucet without spray.

2. Fiat or equal - Service sink faucet with stops in shanks, vacuum breaker, hose-thread outlet and pail hook.

1.7 FLUSHOMETERS

A. Flushometers:

1. Sloan or equal - Flushometer for urinal and/or water closet fixtures. Include brass body with corrosion-resistant internal components, non-hold-open feature, control stop with check valve, vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polished chrome-plated finish on exposed parts.

a. Sensor operated: Automatic with manual override. b. Consumption: Water Sense labeled.

1.8 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats:

1. American Standard or equal - Commercial toilet seat for water closet fixture.

1.9 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers for Handicap Fixtures

1. ProWrap or equal - Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping.

1.10 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Water-Closet Supports;

1. Jay R Smith or equal - Combination carrier designed for accessible and/or standard mounting height of wall-mounting, water-closet-type fixture.

B. Urinal Supports;:

1. Jay R Smith or equal - Urinal carrier for wall mounting urinal fixture.

C. Lavatory Support:

1. Jay R Smith or equal - Lavatory carrier for wall mounting lavatory fixture.

1.11 INTERCEPTORS

A. Hair Interceptors:



1. Jay R Smith or equal - Manufactured unit with removable screens or strainer and removable cover; designed to trap and retain waste material.

1.12 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets, Wall Mounted:

1. American Standard or equal - Wall-mounting, top spud, vitreous china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation.

1.13 URINALS

A. Urinals:

1. American Standard or equal – Wall mounting, top spud, vitreous china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation.

1.14 LAVATORIES

A. Lavatories, Wall:

1. American Standard or equal - Wall mounting, vitreous china fixture.

B. Lavatories, Counter Mounting:

1. American Standard or equal – Counter mounting vitreous china fixture.

1.15 KITCHEN SINKS

A. Kitchen Sinks:

1. Elkay or equal – Double bowl, counter mounting, 18 gauge stainless steel kitchen sink.

1.16 SERVICE BASINS (MOP SINKS)

A. Service Basins:

1. Fiat or equal – Corner type, floor mounting, precast terrazzo fixture with rim guard.

1.17 FOOD SERVICE FIXTURES

A. Food service fixtures shall be defined by individual food service suite design.



HVAC General Provisions 23 00 00 - 1

SECTION 23 00 00

HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them.

C. Refer to Section 01 81 13 for all related LEED certification requirements pertaining to Division 23 scope of work.

D. Refer to Section 01 91 13 for all related Commissioning requirements pertaining to Division 23 scope of work.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Basic and supplemental requirements common to Fire Suppression, Plumbing and HVAC Work.


A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date.

B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project.

C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the Contract Documents.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. These definitions are included to clarify the direction and intention of these Specifications. For further clarification, contact the Architect/Engineer.

1. Concealed / Exposed: "Concealed" areas are those areas that cannot be seen by the building occupants. "Exposed" areas are all areas, which are exposed to view by the building occupants, including under counters, inside cabinets and closets, plus all mechanical rooms. “Exterior” areas are those that are outside the building exterior envelope and exposed to the outdoors.

2. Furnish: The term "furnish" is used to mean "supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.



3. Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at Project Site including the actual "unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

4. Provide: The term "provide" means "to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.


A. HVAC, Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Telecommunications, and Security contractors shall provide, from each vendor, a set of fully coordinated overhead drawings for all mechanical equipment, ductwork, electrical lighting, electrical equipment, air devices, conduit, piping, valves, boxes, hangers, sleeves, cables, cable tray, and all other items as required for installation of HVAC, Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Telecommunications, and Security systems. The contractor is responsible for ensuring all disciplines provide coordinating information and may submit one set of documents for all disciplines with each disciplines work represented by different colors of ink. The general contractor is also responsible for distribution of all comments to all disciplines. The following is required of these documents:

a. All documents are to have all architectural features and structural components shown in grey or black ink and shall include miscellaneous steel, structurally engineered equipment hangers and bracing for walls and doors, along with all equipment and components provided by other vendors that will affect the installation of all trades previously mentioned above.

b. All equipment is to be reference by a number to the product data submittals of that equipment for HVAC, Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Telecommunications, and Security systems and the drawings shall note equipment size by length, width, and height. Conduit diameter size, wire gauge and box sizes shall also have length, width, and height shown. All equipment clearance requirements shall have dashed lines shown, and the locations of access doors or points to all serviceable components shall be clearly defined by a symbol with clear space required for changing filters, etc. in distinguishable dash/dot lines

c. Shop drawings of Mechanical and electrical rooms shall be provided with the actual equipment being installed shown in length, width, and height, required clearances shown in dashed lines, service locations shown by a defined symbol, and all equipment that will require disassembly to be removed or replaced shall be noted as such.

d. Every sheet of the submittal document shall have the following statement indicated clearly and shall be signed by the subcontractor and general contractor prior to acceptance by the engineer, architect, or owner’s representative.

1) “All items shown on this sheet have been coordinated with connecting equipment from other disciplines to ensure that each component will fit within the space shown without requiring the modification of architectural or structural elements, and with clearance and service space as required for maintenance of this system.”

B. Fire Suppression, Plumbing and HVAC systems shall be coordinated with other systems and trades to include but not be limited to: Electrical systems, fire alarm, security systems, transport systems, telephone and data systems.



C. Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and proper relation of Contractor’s Work to the building structure and to the Work of all trades. The Contractor shall visit the premises and become thoroughly familiar with all details of the Work and working conditions, to verify all dimensions in the field, and to advise the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancy before performing any Work. Adjustments to the Work required in order to facilitate a coordinated installation shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner or the Architect/Engineer.

D. All dimensional information related to new structures shall be taken from the appropriate Drawings. All dimensional information related to existing facilities shall be taken from actual measurements made by the Contractor on the Site.

E. The Drawings are subject to the requirements of Reference Standards, structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of Work. Work shall be organized and laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. All exposed Work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted.

F. When the Drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe and ducts, the Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping and duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas.

G. Where core drilling of floor or wall penetrations is required, Work shall be performed in accordance with Division 03 Specifications. Where applicable Division 03 Specifications are not included in the Project, core drilling shall be in accordance with generally accepted standards, and be performed by licensed personnel where applicable.

H. Certify in writing that neither the Contractor nor any of Contractor’s subcontractors or suppliers will supply any materials that contain any asbestos in any form for this Project.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All equipment, ductwork, and materials shall be delivered to the Project Site clean and sealed for protection.

B. Take particular care not to damage the existing construction in performing Work. All finished floors, step treads and finished surfaces shall be covered to prevent any damage by workers or their tools and equipment during the construction of the Project.

C. Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust and dust/debris both before and after installation. Any equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final inspection must be cleaned of rust and repainted as specified elsewhere in these Specifications.

D. All material affected by weather shall be covered and protected to keep the material free from damage while material is being transported to the Site and while stored at the Project Site.



E. During the execution of the Work, open ends of all piping and conduit, and all openings in equipment shall be closed when Work is not in progress, and shall be capped and sealed prior to completion of final connections, so as to prevent the entrance of foreign matter.

F. All equipment shall be protected during the execution of the Work. All ductwork and equipment shall be sealed with heavy plastic and tape to prevent build-up of dust and debris.

G. All ductwork and air handling equipment shall be wiped down with a damp cloth immediately before installation to ensure complete removal of accumulated dusts and foreign matter.

H. All plumbing fixtures shall be protected and covered to prohibit usage. All drains shall be covered until placed in service to prevent the entrance of foreign matter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. All equipment installed shall have local representation, local factory authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts.

C. Responsibility for furnishing proper equipment and/or material and ensuring that equipment and/or material is installed as intended by the manufacturer, rests entirely upon the Contractor. Contractor shall request advice and supervisory assistance from the representative of specific manufacturers during the installation.

D. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new, free from all defects, suitable for the intended use and of the best quality of their respective kinds. Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the best standard practice for the type of Work involved. All Work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in their respective trades, and the installations shall provide a neat, precise appearance. Materials and/or equipment damaged in shipment or otherwise damaged prior to installation shall not be repaired at the job Site but shall be replaced with new materials and/or equipment.

E. Materials and equipment manufactured domestically are preferred when possible. Materials and equipment that are not available from a domestic manufacturer may be by a non-domestic manufacturer provided they fully comply with Contract Documents.

F. Prevention of Rust: Standard factory finish will be acceptable on equipment specified by model number; otherwise, surfaces of ferrous metal shall be given a rust inhibiting coating.

G. All above ceiling materials specified shall be plenum rated and / or meet the flame spread index as required by NFPA.



2.2 NAMEPLATES

A. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, and catalog number on a plate securely attached to the item of equipment. All data on nameplates shall be legible at the time of Final Inspection.

B. Nameplates shall be black laminated rigid phenolic with white core. Nameplate minimum size shall be 1 inch high by 3 inches long with 3/16-inch-high engraved white letters.

C. Nameplate Fasteners: Fasten nameplates to the front of equipment only by means of stainless steel self-tapping screws. Stick-ons or adhesives will not be allowed unless the NEMA enclosure rating is compromised, then only epoxy adhesive shall be used to attach nameplates.

D. Nameplate Information: In general, the following information is to be provided for the types of electrical components or enclosures supplied with equipment.

1. Individual Starters, Contactors, Disconnect Switches, and Similar Equipment: Identify the device, and voltage characteristics source and load served.

2.3 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES (ESCUTCHEONS)

A. Except as otherwise noted, provide stainless steel or chrome plated brass floor and ceiling plates around all pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., passing exposed through walls, floors or ceilings, in any spaces except underfloor and plenum spaces.

B. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe or against the insulation on lines that are insulated and positively secured to such pipe or insulation.

C. For finished ceiling installation, secure escutcheons to ceiling with escutcheon fasteners.

D. Plates will not be required for piping where pipe sleeves extend ¾-inch or more above finished floor.

E. Round and rectangular ducts shall have closure plates (not chrome plated) made to fit accurately at all floor, wall and ceiling penetrations.

2.4 ROOF PENETRATIONS AND FLASHING

A. Pipe, conduit and duct sleeves, pitch pockets and flashings compatible with the roofing installation shall be provided and installed for all roof penetrations by a contractor qualified in such Work. Installation shall comply with the Contract Documents and with FM General Data Sheets 1-28, 1-29, 1-31 & 1-49 along with the FM approval guide.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Cooperate with trades of adjacent, related or affected materials or operations, and with trades performing continuations of this Work in order to effect timely and accurate placing of Work and to coordinate, in proper and correct sequence, the Work of such trades.



B. The size of equipment indicated on the Drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine that the equipment proposed will fit in the space. Fabrication Drawings shall be prepared when required by the Architect/Engineer or Owner to indicate a suitable arrangement.

C. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves, motors, drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part.

D. Space Requirements:

1. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous Work in location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material which is not suitable in this respect.

2. Make changes in material and equipment locations of up to five (5) feet, to allow for field conditions prior to actual installation, and as directed by the Architect/Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Contractor shall note that the electrical design and Drawings are based on the equipment scheduled and indicated on the Drawings. Should any equipment be provided requiring changes to the electrical design, the required electrical changes shall be made at no cost to the Owner.

F. Connections for equipment other than Divisions 21, 22, 23:

1. Rough-in and provide all gas, air, water, steam, sewer, etc. connections to all fixtures, equipment, machinery, etc., furnished by the Owner and/or other trades in accordance with detailed rough-in Drawings provided by the equipment suppliers, by actual measurements of the equipment connections, or as detailed.

2. After the equipment is set in place, make all final connections and provide all required pipe, fittings, valves, traps, etc.

3. Provide all backflow preventers and air gap fittings required, using approved devices. In each service line connected to an item of equipment or piece of machinery, provide a shutoff valve. On each drain not provided with a trap, provide a suitable trap.

4. Provide all ductwork, transition pieces, etc., required for a complete installation of vent hoods, fume hoods, etc.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.

C. Piping may be run exposed in rooms typically without ceilings such as mechanical rooms, janitor's closets, tight against pan soffits in exposed "tee" structures, or storage spaces, but only where necessary. Shutoff and isolation valves shall be easily accessible.



D. All pipe, conduits, etc., shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. All ducts, pipes and conduits run exposed in machinery and equipment rooms shall be installed parallel to the building lines, except that piping shall be sloped to obtain the proper pitch. Piping and ducts run in furred ceilings, etc., shall be similarly installed, except as otherwise shown. All pipe openings shall be kept closed until the systems are closed with final connections.

E. Prior to the installation of any ceiling material, gypsum, plaster or acoustical board, the Contractor shall notify Owner’s Project Manager so that arrangement can be made for an inspection of the above-ceiling area about to be "sealed" off. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Owner at least five (5) calendar days prior to the inspection.

F. Precedence of Materials:

1. The Specifications determine the nature and setting of materials and equipment. The Drawings establish quantities, dimensions and details.

2. If interference is encountered, the following installation precedence of materials shall guide the Contractor to determine which trade shall be given the "Right of Way":

a. Building lines

b. Structural members

c. Structural support frames supporting ceiling equipment

d. Vacuum tube system

e. Soil and drain piping

f. Supply, return and outside air ductwork

g. Vent piping

h. Exhaust ductwork

i. HVAC water piping

j. Condensate piping

k. Fire protection piping

l. Laboratory gases

m. Domestic water (cold and hot, softened, treated)

n. Refrigerant piping

o. Electrical conduit

3. Coordinate fire suppression, plumbing and HVAC systems with transport systems as required to maintain transport system right-of-way.



3.3 TESTING

A. When any piece of mechanical equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, Contractor may do so, provided that Contractor properly supervises the operation, and has the Owner’s written permission to do so. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner, or date of Substantial Completion, whichever occurs first.

B. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly adjust, and complete all deficiency list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and performance certification will be the same date.

C. Before the Work is accepted, an authorized representative of the manufacturer of the installed materials and/or equipment shall personally inspect the installation and operation of manufacturer’s materials and/or equipment to determine that materials and/or equipment are properly installed and in proper operating order. The qualifications of the manufacturer’s representative shall be appropriate to the technical requirements of the installation. The qualifications of the manufacturer’s representative shall be submitted to the Owner for approval. The decision of the Owner concerning the appropriateness of the manufacturer’s representative shall be final. Testing and checking shall be accomplished during the course of the Work where required by Work being concealed, and at the completion of the Work. In addition, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer a signed statement from each manufacturer’s representative certifying as follows: "I certify that the materials and/or equipment listed below have been personally inspected by the undersigned authorized manufacturer's representative and is properly installed and operating in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations."

D. Check inspections shall include piping, equipment, heating, air conditioning, insulation, ventilating equipment, controls, mechanical equipment and such other items hereinafter specified or specifically designated by the Architect/Engineer.

E. The Contractor shall execute, at no additional cost to the Owner, any tests required by the Owner or the National Fire Protection Association, ASTM, etc. Standards listed. The Contractor shall provide all equipment, materials and labor for making such tests. The Owner will pay reasonable amounts of fuel and electrical energy costs for system tests. Fuel and electrical energy costs for system adjustment and tests, which follow Substantial Completion by the Owner, will be borne by the Owner.

F. Notify the Owner’s Project Manager and the Architect/Engineer in writing at least seven (7) calendar days prior to each test and prior to other Specification requirements requiring Owner and Architect/Engineer to observe and/or approve tests.

G. All tests shall have pertinent data logged by the Contractor at the time of testing. Data shall include date, time, personnel performing, observing and inspecting, description of the test and extent of system tested, test conditions, test results, specified results an other pertinent data. Data shall be delivered to the Architect/Engineer as specified under "Requirements for Final Acceptance." The Contractor or Contractor’s authorized job superintendent shall legibly sign all Test Log entries.

3.4 TRAINING

A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals and instruction shall be provided as specified under the Division 01 Section entitled “Project Closeout Procedures.”



B. Specific training and operating instructions for individual equipment components shall be as specified in the individual Specification Sections.

C. All equipment, piping, conduit, ductwork, grilles, insulation, etc., furnished and installed in exposed areas shall be cleaned, prepared and painted as specified in Division 09.




Variable Frequency Drives 23 05 13 - 1

SECTION 23 05 13

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Perform all Work required to provide and install a complete variable frequency motor drive (VFD) consisting of a pulse width modulated (PWM) inverter designed for use on a standard NEMA Design B induction motor.

B. The drive manufacturer shall supply the drive and all necessary controls as specified.




C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references:

1. Standard 519, IEEE Guide for Harmonic Content and Control.

2. ANSI/UL Standard UL508C, Underwriter’s Laboratories.

3. ICS 7.0, AC Adjustable Speed Drives, National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA).

4. IEC 16800 Parts 1 and 2.


A. Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three (3) years experience.

B. VFD and options shall be UL listed as a complete assembly. VFD’s that require the customer to supply external fuses are not acceptable.

C. VFD and options shall be tested to ANSI/UL Standard 508 and listed by a nationally recognized testing agency such as UL or ETL.

D. VFD and options shall comply with applicable requirements of the latest Standards of ANSI/UL, IEEE, and the NEC.




1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Submit product data for components and accessories.

2. All VFD’s for this Project shall be supplied by one manufacturer.

3. Submit Shop Drawings indicating outline dimensions, enclosure construction, lifting and supporting points, electrical one-line diagram, equipment electrical ratings, noise levels (including driven equipment) and total harmonic distortion (voltage and current).

4. Manufacturer shall provide terminal block to terminal block wiring diagrams coordinated with the Owner to provide a complete and functional operating system. Furnish detailed Drawings showing construction, dimensions, wiring diagrams, and installation procedures for Engineer’s approval.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

2. Submit training outline.

3. Furnish harmonic analysis verifying compliance with specified distortion levels.

4. Furnish a list of recommended spare parts.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to the Project Site under provisions of Division 01 and Division 20.

B. Accept products on Site in factory-fabricated protective container with factory installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.

C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. VFD shall be unconditionally warranted by the manufacturer for two (2) years from the date of Substantial Completion, not to exceed 30 months from date of shipment.

B. Warranty shall include all parts, labor, shipping, field service or technician time, labor or travel expenses, and verbal or written correspondence with the VFD manufacturer or VFD manufacturer’s representatives. Include correspondence which might be incidental to the proper installation and operation of the equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL





B. Furnish complete VFD controllers that convert incoming fixed frequency three-phase AC power into a variable frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of three-phase AC motors. The motor current shall closely approximate a sine wave. Motor voltage shall be varied with frequency to maintain desired motor magnetization current suitable for centrifugal pump and fan control and to eliminate the need for motor derating.

C. Contractor shall check equipment schedules on the Contract Drawings to determine if the VFD “bypass” switch option is required to allow the motor to run if the controller malfunctions. If the “bypass” switch option is not required, articles and statements in this section do not apply, and the Contractor shall provide one spare VFD for each equivalent horsepower motor or equipment power load indicated on the Contract Drawings.

D. VFD manufacturer shall verify compatibility of motor furnished on equipment. One controller shall control the speed of one motor with the exception being a wall fan technology system.

E. VFD shall convert 3 phase, 60 Hz utility power to adjustable voltage and frequency, 3 phase AC power for stepless motor speed control from 10 percent to 100 percent of the motor’s 60 Hz speed. Input voltage characteristics are 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz.

F. VFD shall include a converter section. The converter section shall convert fixed frequency and voltage AC utility power to a variable DC voltage. VFD’s that use silicon controlled rectifiers in the converter bridge shall also include 5 percent reactors. Isolation transformers are not acceptable in lieu of line reactors.

G. VFD shall include an inverter section. The inverter section shall invert the variable DC voltage into a PWM wave form; adjustable voltage and frequency output for stepless motor speed control.

H. Individual or simultaneous operation of VFD’s shall not add more than 5 percent total harmonic voltage distortion and no more than 5 percent total harmonic current distortion (per IEEE 516-1992) to the normal bus.

1. VFD manufacturer shall perform harmonic analysis based on the electrical one-line diagram.

2. The VFD manufacturer shall provide calculations specific to this installation, showing total harmonic voltage distortion is less than 5 percent.

3. Input line filters shall be sized and provided as required by the VFD manufacturer to ensure compliance with IEEE Standard 519. All VFD’s shall include a minimum of 5 percent impedance reactors, no exceptions.

I. VFD shall include a coordinated AC transient protection system consisting of 4-120 joule rated MOV’s (phase to phase and phase to ground), a capacitor clamp, and 5 percent impedance reactors.

J. Alternate Harmonics Specification:

1. Input line reactors and DC Bus filtered chokes (factory installed and wired in the drive enclosure) shall be provided to allow reliable operation on a typical commercial power distribution system and to minimize harmonics reflected onto the input line.

a. Shall not interfere with computer and other electronic systems in the building.

b. If not inherently protected, provide a suitable isolation transformer.

c. The system shall not produce spikes on the incoming line.




2. Any inverter that generates sufficient electrical line noise to interfere with operation of sensitive building equipment shall be field modified or replaced by the inverter supplier at no additional cost to the Owner.

K. EMI / RFI filters. All VFD’s shall include EMI/RFI filters. The onboard filters shall allow the VFD assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD shall meet product Standard EN 61800-3 for the First Environment restricted level.

L. Low voltage logic and 115V control circuits shall be electrically isolated from the power circuits. Signal circuit common shall be grounded.

M. VFD shall include a power ride-through feature to allow continuous operation up to a three-cycle line loss.

N. Two independently adjustable accel and decel ramps with 1 to 1800 seconds adjustable time ramps. Extended time periods are also acceptable.

O. VFD shall have full function output current limit adjustable from 10 to 100 percent. At the factory with compatible motor, provide at least three lock-out ranges (50 rpm maximum each), two of which can be used to correct any run test problems.

P. Components shall be pretested and complete VFD shall have full burn-in under full load for a minimum of 12 hours. Provide at least three lockout ranges (50 rpm maximum), two of which can be used to correct run test problems.

Q. Ambient noise generated by the VFD shall be limited to an amount equal to the system noise level as designated by the latest ASHRAE noise level guidelines for such equipment at each octave band. Noise level criteria at different octave bands and mid-frequencies shall be furnished with the submittal data.

R. VFD shall include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically reduce applied motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and audible motor noise.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Danfoss Graham.

B. ABB.

C. Yaskawa Electric.

2.3 ENCLOSURE

A. VFD shall be enclosed in a UL Listed Type 12 enclosure. Enclosure shall be UL listed as a plenum rated VFD. The VFD tolerated voltage window shall allow operation from a line of +30 percent nominal, and -35 percent nominal voltage as a minimum.

B. Environmental operating conditions: 0 to 40 degrees C continuous. VFD’s that can operate at 40 degrees C intermittently (during a 24-hour period) are not acceptable and must be oversized. Altitude from 0 to 3300 feet above sea level, less than 95 percent humidity, non-condensing. VFD’s without these ratings are not acceptable.

C. The following operator controls shall be located on the front of the enclosure:

1. Bypass Hand-Off-Auto.

2. Drive mode selector.




3. Bypass mode selector.

4. Bypass fault reset.

5. Provide the following indicating lights (LED type). In addition, provide test mode or push to test feature:

a. Power-on (ready).

b. Run enable (safeties) open.

c. Drive mode select damper opening.

d. Bypass mode selected.

e. Drive running.

f. Bypass running.

g. Drive fault.

h. Bypass fault.

i. Bypass H-O-A mode.

j. Automatic transfer to bypass selected.

k. Safety open.

l. Damper opening.

m. Damper end-switch made.

6. Provide the following relay (form C) outputs from the bypass:

a. System started.

b. System running.

c. Bypass overttide enabled.

d. Drive Fault.

e. Bypass fault (motor overload or underload-broken belt).

f. Bypass H-O-A position.

D. Digital inputs for the system shall accept 24V or 115VAC (selectable).

E. Customer Interlock Terminal Strip: Provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze, fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks shall remain fully functional whether the system is in Hand, Auto, or Bypass modes (not functional in fireman’s override 2). The remote start/stop contact shall operate in VFD mode.

F. Dedicated digital input that will transfer motor from VFD mode to bypass mode upon dry contact closure for fireman’s override. Two modes of operation are required:




1. The first mode forces the motor to bypass operation and overrides both the VFD and bypass H-O-A switches and forces the motor to operate across the line (test mode). The system will only respond to the digital inputs and motor protections.

2. The second mode operates as the first, but will also defeat the overload and singe-phase protection for bypass and ignore all keypad and digital inputs t the system 9run until destruction).

G. Include a “run permissive circuit” that will provide a normally open contact whenever a run command is provided (local or remote start command in VFD or bypass mode). The VFD system (VFD or bypass) shall not operate the motor until it receives a dry contact closure from a damper or valve end-switch. When the VFD system safety interlock (fire detector, freezestat, high static pressure switch, etc) opens, the motor shall coast to a stop and the run permissive contact shall open, closing the damper or valve.

H. Include Class 20 or 30 (selectable) electronic motor overload protection.

2.4 BYPASS

A. Furnish where indicated on the Drawings, a complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of an output contactor and bypass contactor. Overload protection shall be provided in both drive and bypass modes.

B. Bypass to be furnished, built, and mounted by the VFD manufacturer.

C. Provide an internal switch to select manual or automatic bypass.

D. Provide an adjustable current sensing circuit for the bypass to provide loss of load indication (broken belt) when in the bypass mode.

E. Door interlocked, padlockable disconnect that will disconnect all input power from the drive and all internally mounted options.

F. Fused VFD only disconnect (service switch). Fast acting fuses exclusive to the VFD – fast acting fuses allow the VFD to disconnect from the line prior to clearing upstream branch circuit protection, maintaining bypass capability. Bypass designs, which have no such fuses, or that incorporate fuses common to both the VFD and the bypass will not be accepted. The following contactor bypass schemes are not acceptable.

1. Door interlocked main input disconnect switch.

2. Power on light.

3. “Drive-off-bypass” manual mode selector switch.

G. The bypass shall incorporate an internally sourced power supply and shall not require an external power source.

2.5 DISPLAY / KEYPAD

A. All applicable operating values shall be capable of being displayed in engineering (user) units. A minimum of three (3) operating values from the list below shall be capable of being displayed at all times. The display shall be in complete English words (alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable):

1. Output frequency.




2. Motor speed (RPM, percent, or engineering units).

3. Motor current.

4. Calculated motor torque.

5. Calculated motor power (kW).

6. DC bus voltage.

7. Output voltage.

B. Keypad shall include a backlit LCD display. The display shall be in complete English words for programming and fault diagnostics (alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable). The keypad shall use the following assistants:

1. Start-up assistants.

2. Parameter assistants.

3. Maintenance assistant.

4. Troubleshooting assistant.

C. VFD shall have the same customer interface, including digital display, and keypad, regardless of horsepower rating. Keypad shall be removable, capable of remote mounting and shall allow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for start-up of multiple VFD’s.

D. Keypad shall include Hand-Off-Auto selections and manual speed control. The drive shall incorporate “bumpless transfer” of speed reference when switching between “Hand” and “Auto” modes. There shall be fault reset and “Help” buttons on the keypad. The Help button shall include “on-line” assistance for programming and troubleshooting.

E. Provide a built-in time clock with battery back-up in the VFD keypad. The time clock shall be used to date and time stamp faults and record operating parameters at the time of fault. If the battery fails, the VFD shall automatically revert to hours of operation since initial power up. The time clock shall also be programmable to control start/stop functions, constant speeds, PID parameter sets and output relays. The VFD shall have a digital input that allows an override to the time clock (when in the off mode) for a programmable time frame. There shall be four (4) separate, independent timer functions that have both weekday and weekend settings.

2.6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION

A. VFD shall have the capability of communicating with the building automation system (BAS) via an RS-485 serial port.

B. VFD shall be provided with protocol information specific to the selected BAS Provider and shall be pre-configured at the factory to provide automatic communications without the need for field programming.

C. VFD shall continue to provide serial communications regardless of how inverter is being controlled (“manual” mode via keypad, “automatic” mode via BAS, or “stopped” mode via either keypad or automatic BAS start/stop signal).

D. Serial communications capabilities shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Run/stop control speed set adjustment.




2. Proportional/integral or PID control adjustments.

3. Current limit.

4. Accel/decel time adjustments.

E. VFD shall have the capability of allowing the BAS to monitor the following feedback signals:

1. Process variable.

2. Output speed/frequency.

3. Current.

4. Torque.

5. Power (kW).

6. Operating hours.

7. Kilowatt hours (kWh).

8. Relay outputs.

9. Diagnostic warning and fault information.

F. VFD shall allow the BAS to control the drive’s digital and analog outputs and monitor all drive digital and analog inputs via the serial interface.

G. VFD shall be capable of providing the BAS with status signals for bypass operation and external safety trips via serial interface.

2.7 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Selector switch in the "off" position: controller run circuit shall be open and the system shall not operate.

B. Selector switch in the "manual" position: motor speed shall be controlled by the manual speed potentiometer.

C. Selector switch in the "auto" position: operation shall be via input 0 to 10 VDC or 4-20 mA signal with strategy output speed proportional to the input signal. If required into the controls strategy, VFD manufacturer shall furnish a pressure transducer mounted in the drive enclosure to convert a 3 to 15 psi pressure signal to a 0 to 10 VDC signal or 4-20 mA signal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Shop Drawings and as instructed by manufacturer.

C. Verify that required utilities are available, in the proper location, and ready for use.




3.2 INSTALLATION



C. Power wiring shall be completed by the Electrical Contractor in accordance with the recommendations of the VFD manufacturer as outlined in the installation manual.

3.3 TESTING

A. Manufacturer shall provide a factory trained technician to inspect, test and start-up the VFD and associated equipment and place the VFD into operation.

B. A harmonic test verifying the distortion level shall be included as part of Start-up and forwarded to the Owner. Any additional equipment, installation and equipment floor space required to meet the distortion level as set forth in the Specification, shall be borne by the VFD manufacturer.

3.4 TRAINING

A. Manufacturer shall provide for and present to the Owner, at no cost to the Owner, a training and troubleshooting course at the Owner’s location.

1. Provide two (2) hours orientation/start-up operation training for a minimum of two (2) people.




Motors 23 05 15 - 1

SECTION 23 05 15

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Perform all Work required to provide and install high efficiency single- and three-phase electric motors required for equipment supplied under this division of Work as indicated by the Contract Documents, with supplementary items necessary for proper installation. Refer to Electrical Drawings for motor starter sizes. Disconnect switches to be furnished in Division 26.

B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall furnish starters for HVAC Work. Motor starters shall be provided in accordance with Division 26 Specifications. Some motors furnished in mechanical equipment rooms shall have starters furnished and installed as part of Division 26. Coordinate with Division 26.

C. Motors rated at less than 250 Watts and intended for intermittent operation need not conform to these Specifications.




C. All materials, installation and Workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references:

1. AFBMA 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

2. AFBMA 11 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

3. ANSI/EEE 112 – Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.

4. ANSI/NEMA/ MG 1 – Motors and Generators.

5. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.

6. ANSI C19 – Industrial Control Apparatus.

7. NEMA ICS – Industrial Control and Systems.

8. UL 508 – Industrial Control Equipment.



Motors 23 05 15 - 2

9. ANSI/EEE 117 – Standard Test Procedure for Evaluation of Systems of Insulating Materials for Random Wound AC Electric Machinery.

10. ANSI/NEMA MG 2 – Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Use of Electric Motors.

11. ANSI/UL 674 – Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

12. ANSI/UL 1004 – Electric Motors.


A. Motors associated with variable frequency drives (VFD) shall be inverter-duty rated, and provided with grounded shaft or ceramic bearings to insulate shaft, and Class F 105 degrees C rise insulation. Ref. NEMA MG1 Part 31.

B. Conform to NFPA 70.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. All motors provided by the Contractor shall be of the same manufacturer unless they are an integral part of the piece of equipment to which they are attached.

B. Product Data: Provide the following information for each motor:

1. Manufacturer.

2. Rated full load horsepower.

3. Rated volts.

4. Number of Phases.

5. Frequency in Hertz.

6. Full load amperes (FLA).

7. Locked rotor amperes (LRA) at rated voltage or NEMA code letter.

8. Nominal speed at full load (rpm).

9. Service factor.

10. NEMA design letter.

11. NEMA machine type (ODP, WP-I, TEFC, etc.).

C. For motors one horsepower and larger, include the following additional information:

1. NEMA frame size.

2. NEMA insulation system classification. For motors required to be installed outdoors, include information showing compliance for outdoor application.

3. Maximum ambient temperature for which motor is designed.



Motors 23 05 15 - 3

4. Time rating.

5. Bearing type.

6. Efficiency at 50 percent, 75 percent and full load.

D. For motors 20 horsepower and larger, include the following additional information:

1. No load amperes.

2. Safe stall time.

3. Efficiency at 50 percent and 75 percent load.

4. Power factor at no load, 50 percent, 75 percent and full load.

5. Motor manufacturer’s recommended maximum power factor correction capacitor (kvar) that can safely be switched with the motor.

6. Expected value of corrected power factor at no load, 50 percent, 75 percent and full load.

7. Full load amperes with corrected power factor.

8. Maximum guaranteed slip at full load.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit operation and maintenance data including assembly Drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions.

F. Alternate Motors:

1. If a motor horsepower rating larger than indicated is offered as a substitute and accepted, provide required changes in size of conductors, conduits, motor controllers, overload relays, fuses, circuit breakers, switches and other related items at no change in the Contract price.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide minimum one-year manufacturer’s warranty including coverage for motors one horsepower and larger.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL


B. Electrical Service: Refer to Drawing schedules for required electrical characteristics.

C. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment and for temperature rise in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, Service Factor and motor enclosure type.



Motors 23 05 15 - 4

1. Totally Enclosed Motors: Design for a service factor of 1.00 and an 80 degrees C maximum temperature rise in the same conditions.

2. Explosion-Proof Motors: UL approved and labeled for hazard classification, with over temperature protection.

D. Visible Stainless Steel Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer’s name and model number, Service Factor, Power Factor, efficiency.

E. Electrical Connection: Provide adequately sized metal electrical connection box for conduit connection. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide metal electrical box for conduit connection.

F. Motors shall be built in accordance with the latest ANSI, IEEE and NEMA Standards and shall be fully coordinated with the equipment served, shall be of sizes and electrical characteristics scheduled and of approved manufacturer as listed below or of the same manufacturer as the equipment which they serve. Nameplate rating of motors shall match the characteristics scheduled.

G. All motors shall be designed for normal starting torque unless the driven machine requires high starting torque and shall be selected for quiet operation, free from magnetic hum.

H. All motors shall be provided with adequately sized electrical connection box for attachment of flexible conduit, unless bus duct connection is indicated. When motors are connected to driven equipment by the use of a V-belt drive, they shall be furnished with adjustable rails.

I. All air handling unit and chilled water pump motors shall be compatible with variable frequency drive controllers. Equipment manufacturer shall coordinate with VFD manufacturer to ensure compatibility. Characteristics of motors furnished on equipment shall be furnished to VFD manufacturer for review, prior to installing motor on equipment. VFD’s shall be furnished with driven equipment and shall be run tested as an equipment unit at factory prior to shipment. Submit run test report prior to shipping. F.O.B. of motors to factory shall be by the equipment manufacturer.

J. Motors shall be open drip-proof type, except where specifically noted otherwise.

K. Motors shall be energy efficient type.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of electric motors for HVAC equipment use, and their accessories, with minimum three (3) years documented product development, testing and manufacturing experience.

1. Baldor - Super E – NEMA Premium Efficiency.

2. Marathon - NEMA Premium Efficiency.

3. Century - NEMA Premium Efficiency.

4. Reliance - NEMA Premium Efficiency.



Motors 23 05 15 - 5

2.3 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current.

C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.

D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings.

E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.

F. Single phase motors, shall be less than 3/4 horsepower and shall be permanent split phase, capacitor start, induction run, 120 volt, 60 hertz motors with dripproof enclosures except as hereinafter specified. These motors shall have built-in thermal overload protection and shall be rated for temperature rise as hereinbefore specified for 3-phase motors.

2.4 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.

C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.

D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, minimum Service Factor as specified herein, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector.

E. Single phase motors shall be less than 3/4 horsepower and shall be permanent split phase, capacitor start, induction run, 120 volt, 60 hertz motors. These motors shall have built-in thermal overload protection with automatic reset and shall be rated for temperature rise as hereinbefore specified for 3-phase motors.

2.5 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.

C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.

D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.

E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors shall have two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds.

F. Enclosures shall be of the open dripproof type with a service factor as specified herein and Class B insulation rated at 90 degrees C temperature rise measured above 40 degrees C room ambient condition at full load, unless otherwise noted.



Motors 23 05 15 - 6

G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.

H. Single phase motors, in general, shall be less than 3/4 horsepower and shall be permanent split phase, capacitor start, induction run, 120 volt, 60 hertz motors. These motors shall have built-in thermal overload protection and shall be rated for temperature rise as hereinbefore specified for 3-phase motors.

2.6 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS

A. Enclosures shall be of the open drip proof type with a service factor as specified herein and Class B insulation rated at 90 degrees C temperature rise measured above 40 degrees C room ambient condition at full load, unless otherwise noted.

B. All motors 3/4 horsepower and larger, unless smaller motors are indicated to be supplied as 3-phase, shall be 3-phase and shall be squirrel cage high efficiency induction type with standard NEMA frame sizes.

C. Three phase motors not connected to variable frequency drives are to be protected for phase loss and phase unbalance protection.

D. Motors 1 HP and larger shall have integral frames.

E. Starting Torque: Between one and one and one-half times full load torque.

F. Starting Current: Six times full load current.

G. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pullout Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics.

H. Design, Construction, Testing and Performance: Conform to ANSI/NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors.

I. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.

J. Testing Procedure: In accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112, Test Method B. Load test motors to determine freedom from electrical or mechanical defects and compliance with performance data.

K. Motor Frames: NEMA standard T-frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.

L. Bearings:

1. Ball or roller type, double shielded with continuous grease relief to accommodate excessive pressure caused by thermal expansion or over lubrication.

2. All motor bearings shall be factory prepacked with a nondetergent lubricant and shall be provided with lubrication fitting arranged to provide easy access when installed on the driven apparatus except as noted hereinafter.

3. Permanently lubricated factory-sealed motors may be provided in fractional horsepower sizes only where they are an integral part of a piece of approved apparatus.



Motors 23 05 15 - 7

4. All bearings shall be designed for L-10, 40,000 hour minimum life hours of continuous service. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt centerline at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.

M. Sound Power Levels: Refer to ANSI/NEMA MG 1.

N. Part Winding Start (Where Indicated): Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressure with rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel. Bearings shall be double shielded with waterproof non-washing grease.

O. Nominal Efficiency: Meet or exceed values as scheduled at load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112.

P. Nominal Power Factor: Meet or exceed values as scheduled at load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112.

Q. Motors one horsepower and larger shall be provided with a copper frame grounding lug of hydraulic compression design, for installation by the electrical subcontractor.

2.7 STARTING EQUIPMENT

A. Each motor shall be provided with proper starting equipment. Starting equipment shall be furnished by this Division.

B. Relays and equipment supplied by this Contractor shall be integral with electrical equipment supplied.

2.8 RATING

A. Speed and Size: Speed and approximate horsepower ratings are specified in equipment Specification Sections or are indicated on the Drawings. Furnish motors sufficiently sized for the particular application and with full-load rating not less than required by the driven equipment at specified capacity. Size motors so as not to overload at any point throughout the normal operating range.

B. Voltage:

1. Single phase: 115 volts for 120-volt nominal system voltage.

2. Three phase: 200 volts for 208-volt nominal system voltage.


4. Three phase: 230/460 volts for 240/480-volt nominal system voltage.




Motors 23 05 15 - 8

C. Frequency: 60 Hertz.

D. Efficiency: Provide energy-efficient motors meeting the requirements of NEMA MG1-12.55A, Table 12Y and MG 1.41.3. Efficiency to be determined by testing in accordance with NEMA MG 112.53 using IEEE 112A – Method B.

E. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1-12.47 but not less than those indicated per the Table below.

F. Table: NEMA Open Motor Service Factors:

Horsepower

3600 RPM

1800 RPM

1200 RPM

900 RPM

1/6 – 1/3 1.35 1.35 1.35 1.35 ½ 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.15 ¾ 1.25 1.25 1.15 1.15 1 1.25 1.15 1.15 1.15

1.5-150 and above 150

1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Single-phase motors for shaft mounted fans shall be split phase type.

B. Single-phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers shall be permanent split capacitor type.

C. Single-phase motors for fans shall be capacitor start, capacitor run type.

D. Motors located in exterior locations and in direct drive axial fans, roll filters, humidifiers and draw-through air units shall be totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy-sealed type.

3.2 INSTALLATION



C. Properly install and align motors after installation on the driven equipment.

D. Motor feeders shall be free of splices. In special cases when splice-free feeders are impractical, splices may be allowed given prior written approval from the Owner.

E. Use crimp-on, solderless copper terminals on the branch circuit conductors. For motors 20 horsepower and larger, use 5300 Series 3M motor lead splicing kit or approved equal.

F. When the motor and equipment are installed, the nameplate must be in full view.



Motors 23 05 15 - 9

3.3 TESTING

A. General: Provide all necessary instruments, labor and personnel required to perform motor inspection and testing.

B. Inspection: Inspect all motors for damage, moisture absorption, alignment, freedom of rotation, proper lubrication, oil leaks, phase and rotation and cleanliness, and report any abnormalities to Owner before energizing.

C. Tests: Motor full load current and full load voltage shall be measured. Motor phase loss and phase unbalance protection shall be tested. Motor Test Report forms included at the end of this Section shall be completed and submitted prior to Substantial Completion.

D. Energizing: After installation has been thoroughly checked and found to be in proper condition, with thermal overloads in motor controllers properly sized and all controls in place, energize the equipment at system voltage for operational testing.

E. Motor Test Report Form:

DATE SHEET OF PROJECT NAME PROJECT NO. MOTOR DESIGNATION , LOCATION HP , FLA , LOCATION PHASE LOSS AND PHASE UNBALANCE PROTECTION INSULATION CLASS SERVED FROM PANEL/MCC MEASURED CONDITIONS TEMPERATURE: degrees F RELATIVE HUMIDITY: % CURRENT (AMPS): ∅A , ∅B , ∅C VOLTAGE (VOLTS): ∅B , ∅BC , ∅CA ∅AN , ∅BN , ∅CN




Motors 23 05 15 - 10


Hangers and Supports 23 05 29 - 1

SECTION 23 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY

A. Perform all Work required to provide and install supports, hangers, anchors, sleeves and bases for all pipe, duct, equipment, system components and accessories, indicated by the Contract Documents with all supplementary items necessary for complete, code compliant and approved installation





1. International Mechanical Code.

2. International Plumbing Code.

3. International Fuel Gas Code.

4. ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping.

5. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

6. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

7. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.

8. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

9. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

10. MSS SP-90 - Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports.

11. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

12. NFPA 14 - Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.

13. UL 203 - Pipe Hanger Equipment for Fire Protection Service.



14. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

15. Underwriters Laboratories Standards and Listings.


A. Materials and application of pipe hangers and supports shall be in accordance with MSS-SP-58 and SP-69 unless noted otherwise.

B. Support and sleeve materials and installation shall not interfere with the proper functioning of equipment.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for structural integrity of all hangers, supports, anchors, guides, inserts and sleeves. All structural hanging materials shall have a minimum safety factor of five.

D. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer experienced in performing Work of this Section who is experienced in installation of Work similar to that required for this Project and per the minimum requirements of MSS SP-89. Field welding of supports shall be by certified welders qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX using welding procedures per the minimum requirements of MSS SP-58.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog data including code compliance, load capacity, and intended application.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of components.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed Drawings of all shop or field fabricated supports, anchors and sleeves, signed and sealed by a qualified State of Texas registered professional engineer. Indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication details and all loads exceeding 250 pounds imposed on the base building structure.


A. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Maintain in place until installation.

C. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hangers and Supports:

1. Anvil International.



2. Kinder.

3. Cooper B-Line.

4. C & S Mfg. Corp.

5. Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite

6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

7. Power Strut.

B. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

C. General:

1. Refer to individual system and equipment Specification Sections for additional support requirements. Comply with MSS SP-69 for support selections and applications that are not addressed within these Specifications.

2. Utilize hangers and supports to support systems under all conditions of operation, allowing free expansion and contraction, and to prevent excessive stresses from being introduced into the structure, piping or connected equipment.

3. All pipe supports shall be of the type and arrangement to prevent excessive deflection, to avoid excessive bending stresses between supports, and to eliminate transmission of vibration.

4. Design hangers to impede disengagement by movement of supported pipe.

5. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.

6. Wire or perforated strap iron will not be acceptable as hanger material.

7. Hanger rods shall be threaded on both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded, complete with adjusting and lock nuts.

8. Fasteners requiring explosive powder (shooting) or pneumatic-driven actuation will not be acceptable under any circumstances.

9. Plastic anchors or plastic expansion shields will not be permitted under any circumstances.

10. Hangers and clamps supporting and contacting individual non-insulated brass or copper lines shall be copper or copper plated. Where non-insulated brass or copper lines are supported on trapeze hangers or channels, the pipes shall be isolated from these supports with approved flexible elastomeric/thermoplastic isolation cushion material to completely encircle the piping and avoid contact with the channel or clamp. Plastic tape is not acceptable.

11. Hangers and clamps supporting and contacting glass piping shall be in accordance with the piping manufacturer’s published recommendations and shall be fully lined with minimum 1/4 inch neoprene padding. The padding material and the configuration of its installation shall be submitted for approval.



12. Hangers and clamps supporting and contacting plastic piping shall be in accordance with the piping manufacturer’s published recommendations and shall be factory coated or padded to prevent damage to piping.

13. Field fabricated supports shall be constructed from ASTM A36/A36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

D. Finishes: All ferrous hangers, rods, inserts, clamps, stanchions, and brackets on piping within interior non-corrosive environments, shall be dipped in Zinc Chromate Primer before installation. Rods may be galvanized or cadmium plated after threading, in lieu of dipping zinc chromate. All hangers and supports exposed to the weather, including roofs and building crawl space areas, shall be galvanized or manufactured from materials that will not rust or corrode due to moisture. All hangers and supports located within corrosive environments shall be constructed from or coated with materials manufactured for installation within the particular environment.

E. Vertical Piping: Supports for vertical riser piping in concealed areas shall utilize double bolt riser clamps, with each end having equal bearing on the building structure at each floor level. Two-hole rigid pipe clamps or four-hole socket clamps with washers may be used to support pipe directly from adequate structural members where floor-to-floor distance exceeds required vertical support spacing and lines are not subject to expansion and contraction. Supports for vertical riser piping at floor levels in exposed areas (such as fire protection standpipe in stairwells) shall be attached to the underside of the penetrated structure utilizing drilled anchors, two hanger rods (sized as specified), and socket clamp with washers.

F. Trapezes: Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevation and grade, they may be supported on manufactured channel, suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members including suspension rods shall be properly sized for the quantity, diameters, and loaded weight of the lines they are to support.

G. Ductwork: All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with SMACNA recommendations for the service involved. Horizontal ducts supported using galvanized steel bands shall extend up both sides and onto the construction above, where they shall turn over and be secured with bolts and nuts fitted in inserts set in the concrete, bolted to angles secured to the construction above, or secured in another approved manner.

H. Terminal Units:

1. Terminal units weighing up to 150 pounds shall be supported by four (4) 1 inch wide sheet metal straps with ends turned under bottom of unit at corners.

2. Each band shall be secured by not over 3/4 inch in length, 1/4 inch diameter sheet metal screws – two (2) on bottom of unit and one (1) on each side.

3. The other strap end shall be attached to the structure by 1/4 inch diameter threaded bolt into the concrete insert or into drilled-hole threaded concrete expansion anchor.

4. Where interference occurs, overhead of the box, not allowing direct vertical support by straps, provide trapeze channels suspended by 1/4 inch diameter galvanized threaded rods providing such channels do not block access panels of units.

5. Terminal units weighing more than 150 pounds shall be supported per the terminal unit manufacturer’s installation instructions using threaded rod and hanger brackets located per manufacturer’s drawing.



I. Fixture and Equipment Service Piping:

1. Piping at local connections to plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be supported to prevent the weight of the piping from being transmitted to fixtures and equipment.

2. Makeshift, field-devised methods of plumbing pipe support, such as with the use of scrap framing materials, are not allowed. Support and positioning of piping shall be by means of engineered methods that comply with IAPMO PS 42-96. These shall be Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite support systems, C & S Mfg. Corp. or Owner-approved equivalent.

3. Supports within chases and partitions shall be corrosion resistant metal plate, clamps, angles or channels, and aligned with structure in the vertical or horizontal position. Plastic supports are not allowed unless approved by Owner.

4. Horizontal supports within chases and partitions that are attached to studs shall be attached at both ends. Drywall shall not be relied upon to support the piping.

5. Supports for plumbing fixture water service piping within chases and partitions may be attached to cast iron drain and vent pipe with approved brackets and pipe clamps.

6. Piping exposed on the face of drywall shall be supported with corrosion resistant metal channels that are attached to wall studs. Drywall shall not be relied upon to support the piping.

7. Piping supported from the floor shall utilize corrosion resistant metal channels or brackets that are anchored to the floor slab.

8. All water piping shall be isolated from building components to prevent the transmission of sound.

9. All copper or brass lines shall be isolated from ferrous metals with dielectric materials to prevent electrolytic action. Plastic tape is not an acceptable isolation material.

J. Inserts:

1. Cast-in-place concrete inserts shall comply with MSS-SP-69, U.L. and F.M. approved, and sized to suit threaded hanger rods.

2. Inserts shall have malleable iron case with galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. Suitable concrete inserts for pipe and equipment hangers shall be set and properly located for all pipe and equipment to be suspended from concrete construction. If the inserts are later found not to be in the proper location for the placement of hangers, then drilled anchors shall be installed. Drilled anchors in concrete or masonry shall be submitted for the approval.

3. Manufactured inserts for metal deck construction shall have legs custom fit to rest in form valleys.

4. Shop fabricated inserts shall be submitted and approved by Owner prior to installation.



5. Inserts shall be of a type that will not interfere with structural reinforcing and that will not displace excessive amounts of structural concrete.

K. Pipe Shields: Provide pipe shields in accordance with insulation manufacturer’s published recommendations. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.

L. Housekeeping Pads:

1. Provide minimum 4 inch reinforced concrete pads with chamfered corners and equipment bases for all outdoor equipment on grade, floor mounted equipment in mechanical rooms, floor mounted air handling units, and where shown on Drawings.

2. Housekeeping pads shall extend minimum of 4 inch on all sides beyond the limits of the mounted equipment unless otherwise noted.

3. Provide galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete pads or on concrete slabs of the size and number recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

2.03 PIPE AND DUCT PENETRATIONS

A. General:

1. Seal penetrations through all rated partitions, walls and floors with U.L. tested assemblies to provide and maintain a rating equal to or greater than the partition, wall or floor.

2. Inside diameter of all sleeves or cored holes shall provide sufficient annular space between outside diameter of pipe, duct or insulation to allow proper installation of required fire and water proofing materials and allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.

3. Exposed ceiling, floor and wall pipe penetrations within finished areas (including exterior wall faces) shall be provided with chrome plated, brass or stamped steel, hinged, split-ring escutcheon with set screw or snap-on type. Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings. In exterior, damp, or corrosive environments, use Type 302 stainless steel escutcheons.

B. Floor Pipe Penetrations:

1. Seal penetrations through all floors to provide and maintain a watertight installation.

2. Sleeves cast in the slab for pipe penetrations shall be Schedule 40 steel, ASTM A53, with 2 inch wide annular fin water-stop continuously welded at midpoint. Entire assembly shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Water-stop shall be same thickness as sleeve.

3. Cored holes in the slab for pipe penetrations shall be provided with a Schedule 40 steel, ASTM A53, sleeve with 2 inch wide annular fin water-stop continuously welded at point on sleeve to allow countersinking into slab and waterproofing. Entire sleeve assembly shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Water-stop shall be same thickness as sleeve.



4. All sleeves shall extend a minimum of two inches above finished floor.

5. Where job conditions prevent the use of a sleeve that extends two inches above the slab, Link-Seal mechanical casing seals manufactured by Thunderline Corporation may be installed to provide a watertight penetration. Mechanical casing seals can be used only for relatively small diameter pipe penetrations. Verify that slab thickness allows proper installation of the link-seal assembly and the required fire stopping prior to applying this exception.

C. Wall Penetrations:

1. Where piping or ductwork passes through non-rated partition, close off space between pipe or duct and construction with gypsum wallboard and repair plaster smoothed and finished to match adjacent wall area.

2. Pipe penetrations through interior rated partitions shall be provided with adjustable prefabricated U.L. listed fire rated galvanized sheet metal sleeves having gauge thickness as required by wall fire rating, 20 gauge minimum.

3. Pipe penetrations through exterior walls and walls below grade shall be provided with “Link-Seal” mechanical casing seal manufactured by Thunderline Corporation.

4. Ductwork penetrations through rated partitions, walls and floors shall be provided with sleeves that are manufactured integral with the damper assembly installed.

D. Flashing:

1. Coordinate flashing material and installation required for pipe and duct roof penetrations with Owner and roofing Contractor.

2. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter-flashing where ductwork penetrates exterior walls. Seal penetration water and air tight.

3. Provide acoustical flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms, with materials and installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for sound control.

E. Roof Curbs: Coordinate roof curb material and installation with Owner and roofing Contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Conduct a pre-installation meeting prior to commencing Work of this Section to verify Project requirements, coordinate with other trades, establish condition and completeness of substrate, review manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

3.02 INSTALLATION




B. Application, sizing and installation of piping, supports, anchors and sleeves shall be in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

C. Provide for vertical adjustments after erection and during commissioning, where feasible, to ensure pipe is at design elevation and slope.

D. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, permitting freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

E. Install hanger so that rod is vertical under operating conditions.

F. Supports, hangers, anchors, and guides shall be fastened to the structure only at such points where the structure is capable of restraining the forces in the piping system.

G. The load and spacing on each hanger and/or insert shall not exceed the safe allowable load for any component of the support system, including the concrete that holds the inserts. Reinforcement at inserts shall be provided as required to develop the strength required. Contractor shall be responsible for engaging a structural engineer as required for design and review at support systems.

H. Do not hang pipe, duct or any mechanical/plumbing item directly from a metal deck or locate on the bottom chord of any truss or joist unless approved by the Structural Engineer of Record.

I. All supports shall be designed and installed to avoid interference with other piping, hangers, ducts, electrical conduit, supports, building structures, equipment, etc.

J. Piping supports shall be independent from ductwork supports. Combining supports is not permitted.

K. Provide all supporting steel required for the installation of mechanical equipment and materials, including angles, channels, beams, etc. to suspended or floor supported tanks and equipment. All of this steel may not be specifically indicated on the Drawings.

L. All piping and ductwork supports shall be designed and installed to allow the insulation to be continuous through the hangers.

M. Adjustable clevis hangers shall be supported at rods with a nut above and below the hanger.

N. All hanger rods shall be trimmed neatly so that 1 inch of excess hanger rod protrudes beyond the hanger nut. In the event a rod is intentionally but temporarily left excessively long (for sloped or insulated lines for example), the Contractor shall take appropriate measures to protect the pipe or other materials from damage.

O. Install hangers to provide minimum ½ inch space between finished covering and adjacent structures, materials, etc.

P. Horizontal and vertical piping in chases and partitions shall be supported to prevent movement and isolated from the supports to prevent transmission of sound.

Q. Locate hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

R. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.

S. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Riser piping is defined as vertical piping extending through more than one floor level.



T. Support vertical piping with clamps secured to the piping and resting on the building structure or secured to the building structure below at each floor. Use method of securing the vertical risers to the building structure below in stairwells and exposed locations. Installation of riser clamps and welded steel riser supports shall not allow weight of piping to be transmitted to floor sleeves. Exception: Schedule 40 steel floor sleeves with continuously welded 2 inch minimum water-stop ring.

U. Steel Bar Joists: Hanger rods shall be secured to angle irons of adequate size; each angle shall span across two or more joists as required to distribute the weight properly and shall be welded or otherwise permanently fixed to the top of joists.

V. Steel Beams: Where pipes and loads are supported under steel beams, approved type beam clamps shall be used.

W. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

X. Inserts:

1. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

2. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

3. Install anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install anchors according to manufacturer's written instructions..

Y. Flashing:

1. Coordinate all roof flashing with requirements of Division 07.

Z. Pipe Shields:

1. Provide shields at each hanger supporting insulated pipe.

2. Provide shields of the proper length to distribute weight evenly and to prevent compression of insulation at hanger.

3. Install shield so that hanger is located at the center of the shield.

4. Attach shield to insulation with adhesive to prevent slippage or movement.

AA. Equipment Anchor Bolts:

1. Foundation bolts shall be placed in the forms when the concrete is poured, the bolts being correctly located by means of templates. Each bolt shall be set in a sleeve of sufficient size to provide ½ inch clearance around bolt.



Vibration Isolation 23 05 48 - 1

SECTION 23 05 48

VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Perform all Work required to provide and install inertia bases and vibration isolation indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for their proper installation.





1. ASHRAE - Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves.


A. Provide for vibration isolation supports for all equipment, piping and ductwork indicated herein. The transmission of perceptible vibration, structural borne noise or objectionable air borne noise to occupied areas by equipment installed under this Contract will not be permitted. Install vibration isolators as specified herein or shown on the Drawings or otherwise required to prevent the transmission of vibration which would create objectionable noise levels in occupied areas.

B. The vibration isolation supplier must be a firm capable of dealing effectively with vibration and noise characteristics effects and criteria; and one that can provide facilities and capabilities for measuring and evaluating the aforementioned disturbances.

C. Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load condition.

D. Provide vibration isolation devices, from a single manufacturer or supplier who will be responsible for complete coordination of all phases of this Work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Submit Shop Drawings, installation instructions, and product data.



2. Indicate vibration isolator locations, with static and dynamic load on each, on Shop Drawings and described on product data.

3. Contractor shall furnish complete submittal data, including Shop Drawings, which shall indicate the size, type and deflection of each isolator; and the supported weight, disturbing frequency and efficiency of each isolator proposed; and any calculations and other information as may be required for the Architect/Engineer to check the isolator selection for compliance with the specification.

B. Record Documents:

1. Indicate inertia bases on Shop Drawings, including dimensions.

2. All steel bases and concrete inertia bases shall be completely detailed, and shall show completely any reinforcing steel that may be required to provide a rigid base for the isolated equipment. Further, the submittal data shall clearly indicate outlined procedures for installing and adjusting the isolators and bases mentioned above.

3. Submittals on riser isolation system shall show initial and final loads on the structure at each support point, initial and final deflection of each isolator, amount and direction of each deflection change, total expansion and contraction of each riser and operating temperature of 180 degrees F in the riser.

4. Riser diagrams shall be prepared by the vibration isolation manufacturer and submitted for approval. These diagrams shall show initial and final spring deflections, amount and direction of deflection changes, overall expansion and contraction of the riser, and operating temperature of the medium.

5. Submittal data shall include certification that the riser system has been examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the design proposed when installed in accordance with submittal and these Specifications.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Provide manufacturer’s recommended maintenance procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL


B. All vibration isolators and bases shall be designed for and treated for resistance to corrosion.

C. Steel components shall be PVC coated or phosphated and painted with industrial grade enamel. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc-electroplated or cadmium plated.

D. All isolators exposed to the weather shall have steel parts hot-dip galvanized or zinc-electroplated plus coating of Neoprene or Bitumastic paint. Aluminum components for outdoor installation shall be etched and painted with industrial grade enamel.



E. Required spring deflections for isolators supporting various items of equipment are shown on the Drawings or tabulated elsewhere in these Specifications, but in no case shall be less than one inch. Springs shall be capable of 30 percent over-travel before becoming solid.

F. Where height-saving brackets for side mounting of isolators are required, the height-saving brackets shall be designed to provide for an operating clearance of 2 inches under the isolated structure and designed so that the isolators can be installed and removed when the operating clearance is 2 inches or less. When used with spring isolators having a deflection of 2-1/2 inches or more, the height-saving brackets shall be of the pre-compression type to limit exposed bolt length between the top of the isolator and the underneath side of the bracket.

G. All isolators supporting a given piece of equipment shall limit the length of the exposed adjustment bolt between the top and base to a maximum range of 1 inch to 2 inches.

H. All isolators supporting a given piece of equipment shall be selected for approximately equal spring deflection.

I. Isolators for equipment installed outdoors shall be designed to provide adequate restraint due to normal wind conditions and to withstand wind load of 55 pounds per square foot applied to any exposed surface of the equipment without failure.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Amber Booth.

B. Korfund Dynamics.

C. Consolidated Kinetics.

D. Mason Industries.

2.3 ISOLATION BASES

A. Type SFB: A structural steel fan and motor base with NEMA standard motor side rails and holes drilled to receive the fan and motor. The steel members shall be adequately sized to prevent distortion and misalignment of the drive.

B. Type CPF: Concrete inertia base, consisting of full depth perimeter steel pouring form, 3000 psi concrete reinforcing bars welded in place, bolting templates with anchor bolts and height-saving brackets for side mounting of the isolators. The base shall be sized with a minimum overlap of 4 inches around the base of the equipment. Fan bases are to be supplied with NEMA standard motor slide rails.

C. The bases for pumps shall be sized to support the suction elbow of end suction pumps and both the suction and discharge elbows of horizontal split-case pumps. The bases shall be T-shaped where necessary to conserve space.

D. Structural bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of welding slag and primed with zinc-chromate or metal etching primer. A finish coat of industrial grade enamel shall be applied over the primer.

2.4 ISOLATOR TYPES

A. Isolator types and required deflections are specified under "Application." Isolator type designations are Amber Booth designators. The isolators shall comply with the following descriptions for each type required on the Project.



1. Type XL: Aluminum-housed, adjustable, spring mounting having telescoping top and bottom sections separated by resilient inserts of Neoprene or other suitable material to limit horizontal motion. The inserts shall be permanently lubricated to minimize vertical friction. Steel or cast iron housings may be used if they are hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. A Neoprene pad having a minimum thickness of ¼ inch shall be bonded to the baseplate.

2. Type SW: Adjustable, freestanding, open-spring mounting with combination leveling bolt and equipment fastening bolt. The spring mounting to baseplate and compression plate must be rigid. The neoprene pad with a minimum thickness of ¼ inch is bonded to the baseplate. A minimum horizontal-to-vertical spring rate of 1.0 is required.

3. Type BS: Spring hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box, coil spring, spring retainers, neoprene-impregnated fabric washer and steel washer.

4. Type BSA: Spring hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box capable of 200 percent minimum overload without visible deformation, coil spring, spring retainers, neoprene impregnated fabric washer and steel washer. Incorporate a 30 degree angularity feature that will permit up to a 15 degree misalignment of the hanger rod from the vertical without shorting out to the hanger box.

5. Type BSR: Combination spring and rubber hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box, coil spring, spring retainers and elastomeric mounting designed for ½ inch deflection.

6. Type BSRA: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box capable of 200 percent minimum overload without visible deformation, coil spring, spring retainers and elastomeric element. Incorporate a 30 degree angularity feature that will permit up to a 15 degree misalignment of the hanger rod from the vertical without shorting out to the hanger box.

7. Type RSW: Adjustable spring isolator as describe for Type SW with the addition of a fabricated steel housing suitable for recessing into a concrete inertia block. The housing has a side access.

8. Type PBS: Spring hanger as described for Type BS with the addition of a load transfer plate to hold the equipment or piping at a fixed elevation during installation and to permit transferring the load to the spring after installation.

9. Type PBSA: Spring hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box capable of 200 percent minimum overload without visible deformation, with the addition of a load transfer plate to hold the equipment or piping at a fixed elevation during installation, and to permit transferring the load to the spring after installation, a coil spring, spring retainers, neoprene impregnated fabric washer and steel washer. Incorporate a 30 degree angularity feature that will permit up to a 15 degree misalignment of the hanger rod from the vertical without shorting out to the hanger box.

10. PBSR: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger as described for Type BSR with the addition of a load transfer plate to hold the equipment or piping at a fixed elevation during installation and to permit transferring the load to the spring after installation.



11. Type PBSRA: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box capable of 200 percent minimum overload without visible deformation, with the addition of a load transfer plate to hold the equipment or piping at a fixed elevation during installation, a coil spring, spring retainers and elastomeric element. Incorporate a 30 degree angularity feature that will permit up to a 15 degree misalignment of the hanger rod from the vertical without shorting out to the hanger box.

12. Type CT: Adjustable, open-spring isolator having one or more coil springs attached to a top compression plate and a base plate. A neoprene pad with a minimum thickness of ¼ inch is bonded to the base plate. The spring assembly must fit within a welded steel enclosure consisting of a top plate and rigid lower housing, which serves as a blocking device during installation. The isolator includes restraining bolts for connecting the top plate and lower housing to prevent the isolated equipment from rising when drained of water.

13. Type SP-NRE: Pad-type mounting consisting of two layers of 3/8 inch thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pads bonded to a 16 gauge galvanized steel separator plate. Size pads for approximately 20 to 40 psi load and a deflection of 0.12 to 0.16 inch.

14. Type BRD: Elastomeric hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box and an elastomeric isolation element of neoprene. A high-quality synthetic rubber may be used if it contains antiozone and antioxidant additives. The elements are designed for approximately ½ inch deflection and loaded so that the deflection does not exceed 15 percent of the free height of the element.

15. Type TRK: For static pressure of 3 inch water or greater, provide a set of spring-loaded thrust resistors (two or more) installed across the flexible duct connection on the fan discharge, designed to limit the movement of the fan. Coil spring static deflection capabilities of thrust resistors shall equal those of the isolators supporting the equipment up to a maximum of 2 inches.

16. Type RVD: An elastomeric mounting having a steel baseplate with mounting holes and a threaded insert at top of the mounting for attaching equipment. All metal parts shall be completely embedded in the elastomeric material. Mountings shall be designed for approximately ½ inch deflection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



C. Install motor driven equipment with vibration isolators.

D. Set steel bases for one-inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base. Set concrete inertia bases for 2 inch clearance. Adjust equipment level.



E. Isolate pumped water-piping systems with spring-type vibration isolators to produce a floating mechanical system. Provide spring isolators on piping connected to isolated equipment as follows: Static deflection for the two supports closest to equipment on each pipe connected to the equipment shall be equal to the deflection of isolated equipment. All other supports for horizontal piping shall have a minimum operating deflection of ¾ inch with a capability of an additional 50 percent travel to solid.

F. All open-type spring isolators shall be restrained as recommended by the manufacturer.

G. Pumps:

1. Each centrifugal pump and its driving motor shall be mounted on a common inertia base and the base, in turn, shall be mounted on the scheduled vibration isolator type to prevent transmission of vibration and noise to the building structure.

2. In general, all inertia bases shall be formed and poured in place onto a hard, flat surface from which the base can be separated when cured. The base shall be shimmed, using flat material, to the intended final height prior to equipment mounting and piping connection.

3. After piping connections are made and the system filled with water and ready to put into service, the isolator adjustment bolts shall be extended until the shim blocks can be removed. Isolators may then be backed down slightly to restore the intended height. The locknuts should then be tightened on the isolators. Jack bolts shall be trimmed to a length that will allow no more than 1 inch of additional height adjustment. After final adjustment, the inertia base shall not support any piping load. All springs supporting piping that is connected to a piece of isolated equipment shall be sized for static deflection equal to that of the isolated equipment.

H. Piping:

1. Floor mounted supports shall have the same type of isolator or media as is used for the nearest isolated equipment connected to the piping.

2. The pipe hanger system shall have provisions for all piping to be shimmed or blocked in place until all connections are made and the system filled with water; then, the isolators adjusted to support the weights and the shim blocks removed.

3. The first three support points from a piece of isolated equipment shall be of the positioning type and provide not less than the static deflection of the equipment isolators.

4. All springs supporting piping shall be capable of an additional ½ inch deflection prior to complete compression and springs supporting vertical risers shall have provisions for limit stops.

5. Support risers up through 16 inches at every third floor, and risers 18 inches and over at every second floor. All supports for risers must have a deflection capability at least four times the anticipated expansion and contraction. Install temporary anchors as required to permit preadjustment of springs in the risers. Furnish permanent limit stops to prevent excessive vertical motion of risers in the event risers are drained. Wall sleeves for takeoffs from risers shall be sized for insulation outside diameter plus two times the calculated thermal movement to prevent binding.



I. Resilient Sleeves: Resilient sleeves shall be provided at all points where equipment room walls, floors or ceilings are penetrated by ducts, piping or refrigerant line, etc.

J. Fans and Air Handling Units: Such units shall have electrical flexible connections not less than 36 inches long and the flexible duct connections with a free length of not less than 8 inches.

K. Ductwork: Isolate all high pressure ductwork within each equipment room and to a minimum of 50 feet from fan with Type BS hangers or Type SW floor supports, sized for ¾ inch deflection.

L. To prevent excessive transfer of piping load from floor to floor, all water riser support springs shall have a deflection capability of four times the expansion or contraction to be accommodated by the support with the additional runout capability to absorb the movement. Isolators supporting steam and diesel engine exhaust risers shall be selected for deflections equal to two times the anticipated thermal movement at the support point. Riser isolation system shall be designed such that it supports the riser in tension, eliminating the need for guides; requires no anchors; and has a zero movement point at or near the center to divide thermal movement approximately in half, thus reducing vertical movement of horizontal pipe takeoffs.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. The following is a schedule of equipment on a typical project that requires vibration isolation and base isolators of the types specified. Refer to Drawings for equipment scheduled for the Project. Any equipment, system or condition that may be altered, added, or changed; or that is not specifically described in the Contract Documents shall be isolated in a manner specified for similar equipment, system or condition in order to comply with these Specifications.

Equipment Type

Isolator Type/ Minimum Deflection (Inches)

Base Type

Air Handling Units Floor Mounted – Up to 15 HP

SW 2”

N/A

Floor Mounted – 15 HP and Over SW2.4” N/A Suspended – Up to 15 HP PBSRA 2” SFB Suspended – 15 HP and Over PBSRA 3.5” SFB High pressure Fan Sections SW 2” with TRK 3.5 CPF Fan Coil Units – Suspended PBSRA 1” N/A Fan Powered Terminal Units Not Internally Isolated

PBSRA 1” N/A

Centrifugal Fans Class I and II – Up to 54-¼ inch Diameter Up to 15 HP

SW 2”

SFB (If required)

Class I and II – 60-inch Diameter and Over, 15 HP and Over

SW 4.5” SFB (If required)

Class III – All sizes SW 3.5” with TRK 2” CPF Arrangement # 3 Fans SW 4.5” SFB Vent Sets: Floor Mounted – Up to 15 HP SW 1.5” SFB (If required) Suspended – Up to 15 HP PBSRA 1.5” SFB (If required) Compressors CT 1.5” N/A Engine Driven Generators: Skid Mounted

CT 3”

N/A



Equipment Type

Isolator Type/ Minimum Deflection (Inches)

Base Type

Exhaust Pipe PBSRA 3” N/A Pumps : Up to 5 HP

RSW 0.5”

CPF

5 HP to 10 HP RSW 1” CPF 10 HP and Over RSW 2” CPF

B. Piping Application:

1. Type PBSRA for hangers in all horizontal piping at equipment; except at connections to risers use BS.

2. Type SW for all floor supports of floor supported piping at equipment or stanchion.



Piping and Equipment Identification 23 05 53 - 1

SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Perform all Work required to provide and install Owner’s equipment tags, valve tags, stencils, and pipe markers indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation.

B. Contractor shall make it possible for Owner’s personnel that will operate and maintain the equipment and systems in this Project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, ductwork, etc., by marking them.

C. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using equipment tags as hereinafter specified. The tagged item of equipment shall correspond to the same number as shown on the Drawings.





1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

2. NFPA 99 – Standard for Health Care Facilities.

3. NFPA 13 – Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

4. NFPA 14 – Installation of standpipe and Hose Systems.

5. International Plumbing Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Provide manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product.




1. Submit valve schedule complete with asset number, building number, room number, valve tag numbering system, valve function, valve type, area served, year installed, manufacturer, model number, size, rated pressure, temperature rating and normal position.

2. Valve schedule shall be developed utilizing Owner’s valve schedule template. Provide Owner with electronic version (Microsoft Excel) of the final approved valve schedule at or before Project Closeout.


1. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL


2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Equipment Tags, Valve Tags, Markers, and Tacks:

1. Marking Systems, Inc.

2. Seton Name Plate Company.

3. W.H. Brady Company.

4. Graphic Products, Inc.

2.3 EQUIPMENT TAGS

A. Description: 3” x 4” vinyl label, 3.0 Mil self adhesive vinyl similar to DuraLabel Pro. Label color shall be black text on a white background. The label shall contain the following information per the template, described in Attachment “B”:

1. Equipment name: Per Owner’s Equipment Naming convention and as listed in Contractor’s Equipment List/Matrix.

2. Function

3. Area served

4. Asset number: Number provided by Property Manager upon request.

5. Asset number bar code

B. All scheduled equipment shall be identified with an Equipment Tag.

C. Refer to Specification Section 01 91 00, General Commissioning Requirements for a detailed description of Equipment List/Matrix information.



2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve tags shall conform to ANSI A13.1-1981 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems", refer to Attachment “A” for abbreviation and label color designations.

B. Valve tags shall be ABS plastic tags: Injected molded ABS plastic, 3.375” X 4.75” with self adhesive vinyl label, similar to DuraLabel Pro, affixed to valve tag. Each tag shall be attached to its valve with one tie strap.

C. Vinyl Label: 3.0 Mil self adhesive vinyl similar to DuraLabel Pro. Label color shall be as per the standard designated colors listed in the attachment to this specification. The label shall contain the following information as per template, refer to Attachment “B”:

1. Valve name: refer to Attachment “C” for valve tag naming convention

2. Function

3. Area served

4. Asset number: Number provided by Property Manager upon request.

5. Asset number bar code

D. Each valve shall be named as per attached valve tag naming convention, refer to Attachment “C”.

E. In addition to valve tags, valves at water headers and steam PRV stations, valves associated with condensate, gas, water meters, and other valves as specified shall be tagged with standardized color coded plastic tags. Each tag shall be attached to its valve with one tie strap. These tags shall be 2-½ inches wide by 1-½ inches high with these color codings:

1. Red = normally closed.

2. Green = normally open.

3. Blue = open in winter, closed in summer.

4. Yellow = closed in winter, open in summer.

F. Valve Tag Fasteners: Single ABS plastic tie strap.

2.5 PIPE AND DUCT MARKERS

A. Round Pipe and Duct Markers shall conform to ANSI A13.1-2007 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems", refer to Attachment “A” for abbreviation and label color designations. Arrow markers must have same ANSI background colors as their companion pipe markers, or be incorporated into the pipe identification marker.

B. Rectangular Duct Stencils shall conform to ANSI A13.1-2007 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems", refer to Attachment “A” for abbreviation and label color designations. Letter height shall be a minimum of 1-1/4”. Stencil material shall be fiber board; Stencil paint shall be exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel. The following rectangular duct systems shall be stenciled:

1. Kitchen Hood Exhaust.



C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.

D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Heat sealed or heat shrink, spring fasteners, clips or snap-on, are acceptable.

E. Underground Plastic Pipe markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

F. Pipe markers and arrow markers also shall be provided for all piping systems.

G. Use Seton Setmark Type SNA or Brady snap-on type identification for all piping systems, up through 6 inch. For piping systems larger than 6 inches, use Seton or Brady strap-on markers or similar by Marking Services, Inc.

2.6 LOCATER TACKS FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATED ABOVE LAY-IN CEILING

A. Description: Steel with ¾-inch diameter color-coded head.

B. Color code as follows:

1. Yellow - HVAC equipment fan-coil units, exhaust fans and terminal units.

2. Red - Fire dampers/smoke dampers.

3. Green - Plumbing valves, gas/vacuum valves.

4. Blue - Heating/cooling valves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



C. Install plastic tape, and pipe markers completely around pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Locate markers on the two (2) lower quarters of the pipe where view is unobstructed.

E. Locate tacks on the ceiling grid.

3.2 VALVE TAGS

A. Contractor(s) shall provide and install valve tags on all valves installed within this Project, except check valves; valves within fabricated equipment units; faucets; hose connections; needle valves; gauge cocks; HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units.



3.3 APPLICATION OF MARKERS AND STENCILS

A. Piping runs throughout the Project including those above lift-out ceilings, under floor and those exposed to view when access doors or access panels are opened shall be identified by means of pipe markers and/or stencils. Concealed areas, for purposes of this identification section, are those areas that cannot be seen except by demolition of the building elements. In addition to pipe markers and/or stencils, arrow markers shall be used to indicate direction of flow.

B. As a minimum, locate pipe markers and/or stencils as follows:

1. Provide a pipe marker at each valve to indicate proper identification of pipe contents. Where several valves exist on one (1) header, it is necessary to mark only the header.

2. Every 20 feet in exposed and concealed areas on all piping systems. Provide at least one (1) pipe marker in each room on all piping systems.

3. At each branch or riser take off on piping systems, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

4. Provide a pipe marker or stencil and an arrow marker at every point of pipe entry or exit where the pipe penetrates a wall, floor, service column or enclosure.

5. At access doors, manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

6. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

C. Provide an arrow marker with each pipe marker pointing away from the pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

D. Provide a double-ended arrow marker when flow can be in either or both directions.

E. Indicate delivered water temperature on domestic hot water supply and return lines.

F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.

G. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

H. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

I. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with plastic nameplates.

J. Tag automatic controls, instruments and relays. Key to control schematic.

K. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves, fan coil units, dampers or other concealed equipment above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.

L. Identify pipe utilizing copper press fittings with markers stating, “Press-Fit” adjacent to each content identification marker.

M. Identify medium pressure gas piping (14 inches water column to 5psi) with the statement, “WARNING – ½ to 5psi NATURAL GAS”.

N. Identify right and left nipple and coupling union assemblies with the statement “Right/Left Nipple/Coupling”.



ATTACHMENTS: “A” - Label Abbreviations, Background and Text colors

Mechanical Piping System Abbreviations and Letter/Label Coloring

Pipe Contents Label Abbreviation Label Colors (Background/Text)

Mechanical Condensate CD Green/White Attachment “B” – Bar Code Tag Layout

3” X 4” TAG Font Description and Height

FACILITIES MANAGEMENT TAG

AHU-13-4

Function: Air Handling Unit 13-4

Area Served: G15.3531

Mainsaver Asset # FM11261

This is not an Institutional Tag

FONT HT Arial 9

Arial Bold 18

Arial 14

Arial 16

Arial 16

BC C39 3 to 1 Medium 28

Arial 9



Attachment “C” – Valve Tag Naming Convention • The first set of characters are system type designators. (Number of letters will vary per system type)

X X X X X - X X X X - X X X

System Type Abbreviation (See Attachment “B” for abbreviations) • A dash shall separate each set of characters.


Placeholder

• The middle set of characters are the building designator.


Building Designator (Contact Owner’s Project Manager for building number)

• A dash shall separate each set of characters.


Placeholder

• The last set of characters are sequential valve tag numbers.


Sequential Valve Tag Number (Number of digits will vary based on quantity of valves installed)

Below is an Example for a Chilled Water Supply Valve:

C H W S - 1 0 0 B - 9

NOTE: NO TWO VALVE TAGS SHALL HAVE THE SAME NAME OR ASSET NUMBER. OBTAIN VALVE TAG NAMES FROM OWNER’S PROPERTY MANAGER WHEN INSTALLING VALVES WITHIN EXISTING SYSTEMS.



System Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 05 93 - 1

SECTION 23 05 93

SYSTEM TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




C. Refer to Section 01 91 13 for all related Commissioning requirements pertaining to Division 23 scope of work.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of the air conditioning systems and related ancillary equipment will be performed by a technically qualified TAB Firm hired by the general contractor.

B. TAB Firm shall be capable of performing the TAB services as specified in accordance with the Contract Documents, including the preparation and submittal of a detailed report of the actual TAB Work performed.

C. TAB Firm shall check, adjust, and balance components of the air conditioning system which will result in optimal noise, temperature, and airflow conditions in the conditioned spaces of the building while the system equipment is operating economically and efficiently. This is intended to be accomplished after the system components are installed and operating as specified in the Contract Documents. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to place the equipment into service. Variable air volume systems shall be balanced in accordance with AABC Standard, Latest Edition or NEBB Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems (Latest Edition).

D. Liaison and Early Field Inspection:

1. TAB Firm shall act as a liaison between the Owner, Architect and Contractor. TAB Firm shall perform the following reviews (observations) and tests:

a. During construction, review all HVAC submittals such as control diagrams, air handling devices, etc., that pertain to the ability to satisfactorily balance systems.

b. Test at least one or at least 10 percent of the variable volume terminal units if the number of units are greater then twenty (20), for casing and damper leakage when the shipment arrives at the Project Site. All testing (except for the initial terminal units) shall be performed at the Project Site.

2. During the balancing process, as the TAB Firm discovers abnormalities and malfunctions of equipment or components, the TAB Firm shall advise the Contractor in writing so that the condition can be corrected by the Contractor prior to finishing the TAB scope of Work. Data from malfunctioning equipment shall not be recorded in the final TAB report.







1. AABC - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems.

2. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau, Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems.

3. ASHRAE HVAC Applications Chapter 37: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

4. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 111: Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Buildings, Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.

5. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute CODE ATC-105.


A. TAB Firm shall have operated a minimum of five (5) years under TAB Firm’s current name and shall be in good standing with the State of North Carolina, Franchise Tax Board. TAB Firm shall submit full incorporated name, Charter Number, and Taxpayer's I.D. Number for proper verification of TAB Firm's status.

B. TAB Firm’s personnel performing Work at the Project Site shall be either professional engineers or certified air and water balance technicians, who shall have been permanent, full time employees of the TAB Firm for a minimum of six (6) months prior to the start of Work for this Project.

C. TAB firm shall have a background record of at least five (5) years of specialized experience in the field of air and hydronic system balancing and shall possess properly calibrated instrumentation.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. The activities described in this Section shall culminate in a report to be provided in quadruplicate (4), individually bound and also provided electronically to the Contractor to be presented to the Owner. Neatly type and arrange data. Include with the data, the dates tested, personnel present, weather conditions, nameplate record of test instrument and list all measurements taken after all corrections are made to the system. Record all failures and corrective action taken to remedy incorrect situation. The intent of the report is to provide a reference of actual operating conditions for the Owner's operations personnel.

B. All measurements and recorded readings (of air, water, electricity, etc.) that appear in the report must have been made at the Project Site by the permanently employed technicians or engineers of the TAB Firm.

C. At the Owner’s option, all data sheets tabulated each day by TAB Firm personnel shall be submitted for review and sign-off by the Owner’s Construction Inspector. Those data sheets, as initialed by Owner’s Construction Inspector, shall be presented as a supplement to the final TAB report.

D. Submit reports on electronic forms approved by the Owner and Architect/Engineer which will include the following information as a minimum:

1. Title Page:



a. Company name.

b. Company address.

c. Company telephone number.

d. Project name.

e. Project location.

f. Project Manager.

g. Project Engineer.

h. Project Contractor.

i. Project identification number.

2. Instrument List:

a. Instrument.

b. Manufacturer.

c. Model.

d. Serial number.

e. Range.

f. Calibration date.

g. What test instrument was used for.

3. Fan Data (Supply and Exhaust):

a. Identification and location.

b. Manufacturer.

c. Model.

d. Air flow, specified and actual.

e. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual.

f. Inlet pressure.

g. Discharge pressure.

h. Fan RPM.

4. Air Handler / Rooftop Unit Return Air/Outside Air Data (If fans are used, provide fan data as noted above):


b. Design return air flow.

c. Actual return air flow.



d. Design outside air flow.

e. Return air temperature.

f. Outside air temperature.

g. Required mixed air temperature.

h. Actual mixed air temperature.

5. Electric Motors:

a. Manufacturer.

b. Horsepower/brake horsepower.

c. Phase, voltage, amperage, nameplate, actual.

d. RPM.

e. Service factor.

f. Starter size, heater elements, rating.

6. V-Belt Drive:


b. Required driven RPM.

c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM.

d. Belt, size and quantity.

e. Motor sheave, diameter and RPM.

f. Center-to-center distance, maximum, minimum and actual.

7. Duct Traverse:

a. System zone/branch.

b. Duct size.

c. Area.

d. Design velocity.

e. Design air flow.

f. Test velocity.

g. Test air flow.

h. Duct static pressure.

i. Air temperature.

j. Air correction factor.



8. Air Monitoring Station Data:


b. System.

c. Size.

d. Area.

e. Design velocity.

f. Design air flow.

g. Test velocity.

h. Test air flow.

9. Variable or Constant Volume Terminal Unit Test Sheet:

a. Identification number.

b. Room number/location.

c. Terminal type (FP if fan powered) and / or (SDVV, SDCV, DDVV, DDCV), and (HWRH or ERH if reheat coil is used).

d. Terminal size.

e. Area factor.

f. Design velocity.

g. Design maximum and minimum air flow.

h. Test (final) velocity.

i. Test (final) maximum and minimum air flow.

j. For DDC instrumentation: Measure and record computer readout and calibration factor at the final measurement conditions.

k. Air dry bulb temperature at the discharge of the terminal unit.

10. Pump Data:


b. Manufacturer.

c. Size/model.

d. Impeller size.

e. Service (CTW, CHW, CDW, HW, etc.).

f. Developed head pressure and BHP at design flow rate.

g. Developed head pressure and BHP at actual flow rate.



h. Pump discharge pressure.

i. Pump suction pressure.

j. Total operating head pressure at final balance.

k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressure.

l. Shut off, total head pressure.

m. Pressure differential settings.

n. Fluid temperature.

11. Cooling Coil Data:


b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Manufacturer.

e. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual.

f. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual.

g. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual.

h. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual.

i. Water pressure flow, design and actual.

j. Water pressure drop, design and actual.

k. Entering water temperature, design and actual.

l. Leaving water temperature, design and actual.

m. Air quantity CFM design, and CFM actual.

n. Air pressure drop, design and actual.

o. Sensible Btu/hr design, and actual.

p. Total Btu/hr design, and actual.

12. Heating Coil Data:


b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Manufacturer.

e. Air flow, design and actual.



f. Entering air temperature, design and actual.

g. Leaving air temperature, design and actual.

h. Air quantity CFM design, and CFM actual.

i. Air pressure drop, design and actual.

j. Sensible Btu/hr design, and actual.

k. Electric heat kW, number of stages, kW per stage – specified and actual (if applicable).

13. Sound Level Report:

a. Location (Location established by the Engineer).

b. Baseline background NC curve for eight (8) bands – with equipment off.

c. Operating NC curve for eight (8) bands – with equipment on.

14. Vibration Test on equipment having 10 horsepower motors or greater:

a. Location of points:

1) Fan bearing, drive end.

2) Fan bearing, opposite end.

3) Motor bearing, center (if applicable).

4) Motor bearing, drive end.

5) Motor bearing, opposite end.

6) Casing (bottom or top).

7) Casing (side).

8) Duct after flexible connection (discharge outlet).

9) Duct after flexible connection (suction inlet).

b. Test readings:

1) Horizontal, velocity and displacement.

2) Vertical, velocity and displacement.

3) Axial, velocity and displacement.

c. Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration.

d. Unusual conditions at time of test.

e. Vibration source (if non-complying).

15. Control verification indicating date performed and any abnormalities identified:

a. Point Location/Description.



b. EMS Readout (Setpoint and Actual).

c. Actual Readout.

d. Interlocks.

e. Safeties:

1) VSD Normal Operation.

f. Alarms.

g. Sequences of Operation.

16. Include in the appendix all submittals for air handling units, pumps, fans, heat exchangers, energy recovery units control system, etc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 AIR BALANCE

A. When systems are installed and ready for operation, the TAB Firm shall perform an air balance for all air systems and record the results. The outside, supply, exhaust and return air volume for each air handling unit, supply fan and exhaust fan and the supply, exhaust or return air volume for each distribution device shall be adjusted to within +/- 5 percent of the value shown on the Drawings. Air handling unit and fan volumes shall be adjusted by changing fan speed and adjusting volume dampers associated with the unit. Air distribution device volume shall be adjusted using the spin-in tap damper for flexible duct connected devices and the device opposed blade damper (OBD) for duct connected devices. Air distribution devices shall be balanced with air patterns as specified. Duct volume dampers shall be adjusted to provide air volume to branch ducts where such dampers are shown.

B. The general scope of balancing by the TAB Firm shall include, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Filters: Check air filters and filter media and balance only systems with essentially clean filters and filter media. The Contractor shall install new filters and filter media prior to the final air balance.

2. Blower Speed: Measure RPM at each fan or blower to design requirements. Where a speed adjustment is required, the Contractor shall make any required changes.

3. Ampere Readings: Measure and record full load amperes for motors.

4. Static Pressure: Static pressure gains or losses shall be measured across each supply fan, cooling coil, heating coil, return air fan, air handling unit filter and exhaust fan. These readings shall be measured and recorded for this report at the furthest air device or terminal unit from the air handler supplying that device. Static pressure readings shall also be provided for systems, which do not perform as designed.

5. Equipment Air Flow: Adjust and record exhaust, return, outside and supply air CFM(s) and temperatures, as applicable, at each fan, blower and coil.



6. Coil Temperatures: Set controls for full cooling and for full heating loads. Read and record entering and leaving dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures (cooling only) at each cooling coil, heating coil and reheat coil at each VAV terminal unit. At the time of reading record water flow and entering and leaving water temperatures (In variable flow systems adjust the water flow to design for all the above readings).

7. Zone Air Flow: Adjust each HVAC VAV terminal unit and VAV air handling unit for design CFM.

8. Outlet Air Flow: Adjust each exhaust inlet and supply diffuser, register and grille to within + 5 percent of design air CFM. Include all terminal points of air supply and all points of exhaust. Note: For Labs and rooms that are negative exhaust air flow shall be set to design + 10 percent and supply to design - 5 percent. Positive areas will have opposite tolerances.

9. Pitot Tube Traverses: For use in future troubleshooting by Owner, all exhaust ducts, main supply ducts and return ducts shall have air velocity and volume measured and recorded by the traverse method. Locations of these traverse test stations shall be described on the sheet containing the data.

10. Maximum and minimum air flow on terminal units.

3.2 SOUND VIBRATION AND ALIGNMENT

A. Sound: Read and record sound levels at up to fifteen (15) locations per floor in the building as designated by the Architect/Engineer. All measurements shall be made using an Octave Band Analyzer. All tests shall be conducted when the building is quiet and in the presence of the Architect/Engineer, at the Architect/Engineer’s option.

B. Vibration: Read and record vibration for all water circulating pumps, air handling units, and fans which have motors larger than 10 horsepower Include equipment vibration, bearing housing vibration, foundation vibration, building structure vibration, and other tests as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Readings will be made using portable IRD (or approved equal) equipment capable of filtering out various unwanted frequencies and standard reporting forms. Maximum vibration at any point listed above, or specified, shall not exceed one mil on fans and one mil on pumps unless otherwise specified. Equipment manufacturer shall rectify all systems exceeding vibration tolerances.

3.3 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

A. In the process of performing the TAB Work, the Contractor shall:

1. Work with the Building Automation System (BAS) Provider and Owner to ensure the most effective total system operation within the design limitations, and to obtain mutual understanding of intended control performance.

2. Verify that all control devices are properly connected.

3. Verify that the intended controllers operate all dampers, valves and other controlled devices.

4. Verify that all dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller; open, closed, or modulating.

5. Verify the integrity of valves and dampers in terms of tightness of close-off and full-open positions. This includes all duct-mounted dampers, dampers in terminal units, and fire/smoke dampers.



6. Observe that all valves are properly installed in the piping system in relation to direction of flow and location.

7. Observe the calibration and operation of all controllers.

8. Verify the proper application of all normally opened and normally closed valves.

9. Observe the locations of all thermostats and humidistats for potential erratic operation from outside influences such as sunlight, drafts, or cold walls.

10. Observe the locations of all sensors to determine whether their position will allow them to sense only the intended temperatures or pressures of the media. BAS Provider will relocate sensors as deemed necessary by the TAB Firm or Contractor.

11. Verify that the sequence of operation for any control mode is in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and Specifications. Verify that no demand for simultaneous heating and cooling occurs at the terminal units.

12. Verify that all controller setpoints meet the Contract Documents.

13. Check all dampers for free travel.

14. Verify the operation of all interlock systems.

15. Perform variable volume system verification to assure the system and system components track with changes from full flow to minimum flow.



Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 1

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCTWORK INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Perform all Work required to provide and install ductwork insulation and jackets indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation.





1. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

2. ASTM C168 - Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation Materials.

3. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

4. ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.

5. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

6. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material).

7. ASTM C1104 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Water Vapor Sorption of Unfaced Mineral Fiber Insulation.

8. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts.

9. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.

10. ASTM C1338 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings.

11. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.



12. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

13. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

14. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.

15. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

16. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

17. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.

18. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

19. ASTM E2336 - Standard for Grease Ducts.


A. All ductwork requiring insulation shall be insulated as specified herein and as required for a complete system. In each case, the insulation shall be equivalent to that specified and materials applied and finished as described in these Specifications.

B. All insulation, jacket, adhesives, mastics, sealers, etc., utilized in the fabrication of these systems shall meet NFPA for fire resistant ratings (maximum of 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed ratings) and shall be approved by the insulation manufacturer for guaranteed performances when incorporated into their insulation system, unless a specific product is specified for a specific application and is stated as an exception to this requirement. Certificates to this effect shall be submitted along with Contractor’s submittal data for this Section of the Specifications. No material may be used that, when tested by the ASTM E84-89 test method, is found to melt, drip or delaminate to such a degree that the continuity of the flame front is destroyed, thereby resulting in an artificially low flame spread rating.

C. Application Company Qualifications: Company performing the Work of this Section must have minimum three (3) years experience specializing in the trade.

D. All insulation shall be applied by mechanics skilled in this particular Work and regularly engaged in such occupation.

E. All insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with these Specifications and with factory printed recommendations on items not herein mentioned. Unsightly, inadequate, or sloppy Work will not be acceptable.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Provide product description, list of materials, “k” value, “R” value, mean temperature range, and thickness for each service and location.


1. Submit under provisions of Division 01.




1. Samples: When requested, submit three (3) samples of any representative size illustrating each insulation type.

2. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures that ensure acceptable standards will be achieved. Submit certificates to this effect.


A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to the Project Site under provisions of Division 01 and Division 20.

B. Deliver materials to Site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer’s identification including product thermal ratings and thickness.

C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

D. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and insulation cements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL


2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. CertainTeed Corporation.

B. Johns Manville Corporation.

C. Knauf Corporation.

D. Owens-Corning.

E. Armacell North America.

F. Unifrax 1 LLC. (FyreWrap)

2.3 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Type D1: Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C553 and ASTM C1290; commercial grade; 'k' value of 0.25 at 75 degrees F; 1.5 lb/cu ft minimum density; 0.002 inch foil scrim kraft facing for air ducts.

B. Type D2: Rigid glass fiber; ASTM C612, Class 1; 'k' value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; 3.0 lb/cu ft minimum density; 0.002 inch foil scrim kraft facing for air ducts.

C. Type D3: Ductliner (to be used in return air sound boots only), flexible glass fiber; ASTM C1071; Type II, ‘k’ value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; 3.0 lb/cu ft minimum density; coating air side for maximum 4,000 feet per minute air velocity. The airstream surface must be protected with a durable acrylic surface coating specifically formulated to:

1. Be no more corrosive than sterile cotton when tested in accordance with the test method for corrosiveness in ASTM C665.



2. Absorb no more than 3 percent by weight when tested in accordance with the test method for moisture vapor sorption in ASTM C1104.

3. Not support the growth of fungus or bacteria, when tested in accordance with the test method for fungi resistance in ASTM C1071, ASTM C1338, ASTM G21, and ASTM G22.

4. Show no signs of warpage, cracking, delaminating, flaming, smoking, glowing, or any other visibly negative changes when tested in accordance with the test method for temperature resistance in ASTM C411.

5. Have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with the test method for surface burning in ASTM E 84.

6. Meet the sound absorption requirements when tested in accordance with the test method for sound absorption in ASTM C423.

7. Show no evidence of continued erosion, cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination when tested in accordance with the test method for erosion resistance in UL181.

2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesives: Waterproof vapor barrier type, meeting requirements of ASTM C916; Childers CP-82.

B. Finish: Vapor barrier finish coating, Childers CP-11.

C. Jacket: Pre-sized glass cloth, minimum 7.8 oz/sq yd.

D. Type D4 Insulation Adhesive: Fire resistive to ASTM E84, Childers CP-82.

E. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage self-adhesive pad.

F. Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh.

G. Tie Wire and Wire Mesh: Annealed steel, 16 gage.

H. Stainless Steel Banding: 3/4-inch wide, minimum 22 gage, 304 stainless.

I. Armaflex 520 or 520 BLV contact adhesive.

J. Armatuff 25 white seal seam tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

C. Maintain required ambient temperature during and after installation for a minimum period of 24 hours.

3.2 INSTALLATION





C. Extend duct insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

D. Provide external insulation on all round ductwork connectors to ceiling diffusers and on top of diffusers as indicated in the Ductwork Insulation Application and Thickness Schedule and the Drawings. Secure insulation to the top of ceiling diffusers with adhesive that meets NFPA 90A and 90B 25/50 requirements, and vapor barrier or tape to match jacket. Do not insulate top of ceiling diffuser if it is used in ceiling return air plenum or in an open space with no ceiling.

E. Flexible and Rigid fiberglass insulation (Types D1 and D2) application for exterior of duct:

1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket.

2. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use 4-inch wide strips of adhesive on 8-inch centers and mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping.

3. Insulate standing seams and stiffeners that protrude through the insulation with 1-1/2 inch thick, unfaced, flexible blanket insulation. Cover with glass cloth and coat with vapor barrier finish coating.

4. On circumferential joints, the 2-inch flange on the facing shall be secured with 9/16 inch outward clinch steel staples on 2-inch centers, and taped with minimum 3-inch wide strip of glass fabric and finish coating.

5. Cover seams, joints, pin penetrations and other breaks finish coating reinforced with glass cloth.

F. Duct Liner (Type D3) application for interior of return air sound boots:

1. Secure insulation with 100 percent coverage of lagging adhesive, pins and clips not more than 18 inches on center.

2. Secure bottom of duct insulation using alternate single and double clips. The first pin will secure the insulation and the second clip will be used to secure the cladding. Isolate the exterior clip from the cladding by using two 1/8 inch closed cell neoprene (Armaflex) washers on either side of the cladding. Predrill holes in cladding and avoid contact with pin during installation.

3. For round duct, secure insulation with 100 percent coverage of lagging adhesive. Secure cladding with 3/4 inch, 0.020 inch stainless steel bands on 12-inch centers.

4. For joints and overlaps, fold cladding to form a double thickness hem 2 inches minimum. Seal with a non-shrink, non-hardening sealing compound.

3.3 INSPECTION

A. Visually inspect the completed insulation installation per manufacturers recommended materials, procedures and repair or replace any improperly sealed joints.

B. Where there is evidence of vapor barrier failure or “wet” insulation after installation, the damaged insulation shall be removed, duct surface shall be cleaned and dried and new insulation shall be installed.



3.4 DUCTWORK INSULATION APPLICATION AND THICKNESS SCHEDULE

Ductwork System

Application

Insulation Type

Insulation Thickness

Supply Air (Hot, Cold, Combination)

Outside of Mechanical Rooms D1 2"

Inside of Mechanical Rooms D2 1-1/2"

Return Air, Relief Air, and Exhaust Air All D1 1"

Outside Air Treated and Untreated D1 2"

Supply Air Diffusers Top of Diffuser D1 2"

Return Air Sound Boots/Elbows All D3 1"



Piping Insulation 23 07 19 - 1

SECTION 23 07 19

HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Perform all Work required to provide and install piping insulation, jackets and accessories indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation.





1. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

2. ASTM C168 - Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation Materials.

3. ASTM C177 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded- Hot-Plate Apparatus.

4. ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.

5. ASTM C335 - Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.

6. ASTM C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.

7. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

8. ASTM C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.

9. ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.

10. ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.

11. ASTM C578 - Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.

12. ASTM C585 - Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).



13. ASTM C591 - Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation.

14. ASTM C610 - Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.

15. ASTM C921 - Jackets for Thermal Insulation.

16. ASTM C1126 - Faced or Unfaced Rigid Celluar Phenolic Thermal Insulation.

17. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

18. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed Cell Foam).

19. ASTM D2842 - Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

20. ASTM C795 - Insulation For Use Over Austenitic Steel.

21. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

22. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

23. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

24. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Concealed: Areas that cannot be seen by the building occupants.

B. Interior Exposed: Areas that are exposed to view by the building occupants, including underneath countertops, inside cabinets and closets, and all equipment rooms.

C. Interior: Areas inside the building exterior envelope that are not exposed to the outdoors.

D. Exterior: Areas outside the building exterior envelope that are exposed to the outdoors, including building crawl spaces and loading dock areas.


A. All piping requiring insulation shall be insulated as specified herein and as required for a complete system. In each case, the insulation shall be equivalent to that specified and materials applied and finished as described in these Specifications.

B. All insulation, jacket, adhesives, mastics, sealers, etc., utilized in the fabrication of these systems shall meet NFPA for fire resistant ratings (maximum of 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed ratings) and shall be approved by the insulation manufacturer for guaranteed performances when incorporated into their insulation system, unless a specific product is specified for a specific application and is stated as an exception to this requirement.

1. Certificates to this effect shall be submitted along with Contractor’s submittal data for this Section of the Specifications.

2. No material shall be used that, when tested by the ASTM E84-89 test method, is found to melt, drip or delaminate to such a degree that the continuity of the flame front is destroyed, thereby resulting in an artificially low flame spread rating.



C. Application Company Qualifications: Company performing the Work of this Section must have minimum three (3) years experience specializing in the trade.

D. All insulation shall be applied by mechanics skilled in this particular Work and regularly engaged in such occupation.

E. All insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with these Specifications and with factory printed recommendations on items not herein mentioned. Unsightly, inadequate, or sloppy Work will not be acceptable.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Provide product description, list of materials, “k” value, “R” value, mean temperature range, and thickness for each service and location.

2. Samples: When requested, submit three (3) samples of any representative size illustrating each insulation type


1. Indicate procedures that ensure acceptable standards will be achieved. Submit certificates to this effect.


A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer’s identification including product thermal ratings and thickness.

B. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

C. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and insulation cements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL


2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Insulation:

1. Owens-Corning (Type P1).

2. Certainteed Corporation (Type P1).

3. Johns Manville Corporation (Type P1).

4. Knauf Corporation (Type P1).

5. Dow Chemical Company (Type P2).



6. Armstrong/Armacell (Armaflex) (Type P3).

7. RBX Industries/Rubatex (Type P3).

8. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC (Type P4).

9. Resolco International by (Insul-Phen) (Type P5).

10. FOAMGLAS (Cellular Glass) by Pittsburgh Corning (Type P6).

B. Jackets:

1. Childers Products Company.

2. PABCO.

3. RPR Products, Inc.

4. Alpha.

5. Venture Tape Corporation

6. Foamglas

2.3 INSULATION

A. Type P1: Fiberglass preformed insulation; ASTM C 547; minimum 3.0 lb/cu ft density, ASTM C335,'k' value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; noncombustible.

B. Type P2: Molded closed cell polyisocyanurate insulation; ASTM E96, maximum water vapor transmission rating of 0.005 Perm-In; ASTM C518, 'k' value of 0.20 at 75 degrees F; ASTM D2842, water absorption value of 0.05 lb/ft2.

C. Type P3: Elastomer, closed cell, flexible, insulation; ASTM E96; maximum vapor transmission rating of 0.20 perms; ASTM C 518; 'k' value of 0.27 at 75 degrees F.

D. Type P4: Mineral Wool; ASTM C 547; preformed insulation high temperature insulation; 'k' value of 0.35 at 300 degrees F.

E. Type P5: Phenolic closed cell, ASTM C1126 rigid foam, 2.2 lbs. nominal density, CFC free; ASTM C518, 'k' value of 0.13 at 75 degrees F. (Note material thickness limit is 3 inches as tested in accordance with ASTM E84).

F. Type P5A: Phenolic closed cell insulation; ASTM E96, maximum water vapor transmission rating of 0.02 Perm-In; ASTM C1126 rigid foam, 3.75 lbs. nominal density, CFC free; ASTM C518, 'k' value of 0.16 at 75 degrees F. (Note material thickness limit is 3 inches as tested in accordance with ASTM E84).

G. Type P5B: Phenolic closed cell insulation; ASTM E96, maximum water vapor transmission rating of 0.02 Perm-In; ASTM C1126 rigid foam, 5.0 lbs. nominal density, CFC free; ASTM C518, ‘k’ value of 0.21 at 75 degrees F. (Note material thickness limit is 3 inches as tested in accordance with ASTM E84).

H. Type P6: Cellular Glass, ASTM C552, 7.5 lbs./cu.ft, density, ASTM E96 (Wet Cup Method) 0.00 water vapor perm , ASTM C518 ‘k’ value of 0.29 at 75 degrees F.



2.4 JACKETS

A. Jacket Materials:

1. Factory Applied Jackets: White kraft bonded to reinforced foil vapor barrier with self-sealing adhesive joints.

2. PVC Jackets: UL listed 25/50 rated per ASTM E 84, UV resistant, minimum insulation thickness 0.020 inches for piping outside diameters up to 18 inches and 0.030 inches for i piping outside diameters above 18 inches. Standard manufactured PVC cover fittings cover system consisting of one-piece, pre-molded, PVC covers with fiberglass inserts manufactured from 20-mils thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant. Use ultraviolet resistant adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.

3. Fiberglass Cloth Reinforcing Mesh: #10 glass cloth with minimum weight of 3.9 ounces per square yard.

4. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B 209; 0.020 inch thick; smooth finish with factory applied moisture barrier.

5. Stainless Steel Jackets: Type 304 stainless steel; 0.010 inch thick; smooth finish.

6. Factory Applied Jacket (like Alpha Style: VR-RHD): Provide factory applied ASJ White triple ply laminate polypropylene, mold resistant, metallized polyester vapor barrier film backing.

7. Venture 1577 W/U, 0 perm and mold resistant jacket material, 5 ply laminate with 6 mil film on with adhesive on one side.. This mold resistant jacket is to be used with Phenolic closed cell insulation used for applications where Type 5A and 5B insulation is used on existing chilled piping being repaired or being modified.

B. Interior Concealed Applications:

1. Type P1 Insulation: Provide factory applied ASJ white kraft foil vapor barrier.

2. Type P3 Insulation: Finish coat is not required.

3. Type P4 Insulation: Cover with a canvas jacket, Adhesive Prime Coat # CP-52 and Childers #CP-50A HV2 lagging adhesive.

4. Type P5 and P5A, 5B Insulation: Provide Venture jacketing material on piping where condensation can occur or where it is used on existing, equipment drain piping transporting chilled condensate form cooling coils, and roof storm drain piping transporting cold rain water from the building roof.

5. Type P5 Jacketing material is not required when insulation is used on hot water piping.

6. Type P6 Insulation: Provide Pittcoat 404 or pre-molded PVC covers per manufacturer’s recommendations. Jacketing material is not required when this type of piping insulation is concealed within a piping chase.

C. Interior - Exposed Applications:

1. Type P1, and P2 Insulation: Provide factory applied ASJ white kraft foil vapor barrier. Also finish with canvas jacket or #10 glass membrane with Childers CP-50 or approved equal finish. Apply sizing for finish painting. Verify jacket is suitable for applications.



2. Type P3 Insulation: Finish coat is not required.

3. Type P4 Insulation: Cover with a canvas jacket and Childers CP-50 lagging adhesive.

4. Type P5 Insulation is used on hot water piping: Provide factory applied ASJ white kraft foil vapor barrier

5. Type P5 and P5A Insulation: Provide Venture jacketing material on piping where it is used on existing equipment drain piping transporting chilled condensate form cooling coils, and roof storm drain piping transporting cold rain water from the building roof where condensation can occur.

6. Type P6 Insulation: Provide triple ply laminate polypropylene, mold resistant with a metal foil and polyester vapor barrier film backing.

7. All exposed insulated piping within six feet of the floor shall be protected with an aluminum or stainless jacket material to protect the insulation jacketing material from being torn or punctured.

D. Exterior Applications:

1. Insulate piping system as indicated under Interior - Exposed Applications, prior to final jacket installation.

2. Provide electric heat tracing for all exterior small bore piping 2 inch and smaller where water may be susceptible to freezing due to intermittent flow conditions.

3. Final jacket cover shall be aluminum or stainless steel jacket having integral moisture barrier with seams located at 2 or 10 o'clock position of horizontal piping. All laps must be minimum 2 inches.

4. Type P1 Insulation: Finish with #10 glass membrane and Childers CP-11, prior to the final jacket installation.

5. P6 Insulation for above ground installations: Provide (50 mil thickness) self sealing nonmetallic bituminous compound reinforced with glass fiber membrane with 1 mil aluminum top film jacketing. Metal jacketing is required where the film jacketing material is exposed to ultraviolet rays.

6. P6 Insulation for underground installations: Provide factory applied (50 mil thicknesses) self sealing membrane bituminous compound reinforce with glass fiber. Metal jacketing material is not required for buried pipe.

2.5 INSERTS SUPPORTS AND SHIELDS

A. Application: Piping ½ inch diameter or larger for all systems except direct buried.

B. Shields shall be made of galvanized steel or made of black iron painted on both sides with a minimum two coats of aluminum paint. Required metal shield sizes are as follows:

Nominal IPS (inches)

Metal Thickness (gage)

Minimum Lengths of Shield (inches)

½ to 1½ 18 12 2 14 12 2-½ to 6 12 16 8 and above 10 20



C. Depending on the type of pipe support design, stainless steel bands or aluminum bands may be

required to keep shield material next to the jacketing material.

D. Inserts for shields shall be manufactured of 7.5 lb/cu. ft. density cellular glass or 5.0 lb/cu. ft. density cellular phenolic insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Provide factory fabricated inserts with integral galvanized pipe saddles. Inserts shall be the same thickness as the adjacent insulation.

2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation Bands: 3/4 inch wide; 0.007 inch thick galvanized steel when exposed to interior environment, .010 inch thick stainless steel or 0.015 inch thick aluminum when exposed to harsh humid interior environment or outside environment.

B. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum or 0.010 inch thick stainless steel to match jacket.

C. Insulating Cement: ASTM C 195; hydraulic setting mineral wool; Ryder One-Coat.

D. Sealants: Use at valves, fittings and where insulation is terminated. Brush apply sealant to end of insulation and continue along pipe surface. Provide Childers CP-70/CP-76 or equivalent sealant.

E. Adhesives: Use to adhere the longitudinal lap seam of vapor barrier jackets and at butt joints between insulation or fitting covers. Provide Childers CP-82 or approved equal as general purpose adhesive. Use Childers CP-97 fibrous adhesive for calcium silicate or when adhering pipe saddles and shields to the insulation.

F. Primers: Provide Childers CP-50 diluted 50 percent with water or Pittcoat 300 primer thinned with mineral spirits to cover insulating cements prior to finish coating.

G. Finish: Provide Childers CP-30 L.O. as a general purpose finish to coat the longitudinal seams and butt joints of vapor barrier jackets or glass cloth jackets. Use Childers CP-50 reinforced with glass cloth as an adhesive and sizing for canvas and in other locations as indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that piping has been pressure tested before applying paint and insulation materials.

B. Thoroughly clean all surfaces to be insulated as required to remove all oil, grease, loose scale, rust, and foreign matter. Piping must be completely dry at the time of application of primer paint. Painting on piping where condensation is occurring on the pipe surface is strictly prohibited.

C. Provide primer coat on all piping, to include field welds and over factory applied paint/coating, in total compliance with Contract Documents and compatible with and approved by the insulation manufacturer. Painting must be completed and approved prior to installation of insulation. Paint shall be applied in accordance with the paint manufactures instructions, environment, and pipe surface temperatures.

3.2 INSTALLATION




B. Installation of insulation and jacket materials shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions.

C. Handle and install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions in the absence of specific instructions herein.

D. On exposed piping, locate insulation cover seams with the ridge of the lap joint is directed down.

E. Exposed Insulated piping within six feet of the floor shall be protected with an aluminum or stainless jacket material to protect the insulation.

F. Insulate fittings, joints and valves with molded insulation of the same material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Open voids and cracks insulation shall be kept at a minimum when placing insulation on abnormal or irregular shapes. Use closed cell or recommended fill material as instructed by the insulation manufacturer to close openings.

G. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, floors, and other pipe penetrations.

H. Provide dams in insulation at intervals not to exceed 20 feet on cold piping systems to prevent migration of condensation or fluid leaks. Indicate visually where the dams are located for maintenance personnel to identify and also provide dams at butt joints of insulation at fittings, flanges, valves, and hangers.

I. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, flanges and strainers. Use closed cell insulation on cold piping system flexible connections, expansion joints and unions, bevel and seal ends of insulation and continue sealant a minimum of 4 inches along the piping, unless stated otherwise.

J. For hot piping conveying fluids 180 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. Continue sealant a minimum of 4 inches along the piping.

K. All sections of molded pipe covering shall be firmly butted together. Where an insulation covering is applied, it shall lap the adjoining section of insulation by at least three inches (3 inches). Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly beveled and finished. All materials used shall be fire retardant or nonflammable.

L. Where vapor barriers are required, the vapor barrier shall be on the outside. Extreme care shall be taken that the vapor barrier is unbroken. Joints, etc., shall be sealed. Where insulation with a vapor barrier terminates, seal off with vapor barrier continuous to the surface being insulated. Ends shall not be left raw.

M. Where pipe chases are tight, adequate provision shall be made at the rough-in stage using offset fittings or other means (except springing the pipe) to ensure that insulation can be applied throughout the length of the pipe.

N. Paint exposed pipe insulation per Specification 09 91 00.

O. Where canvas finish is specified, use lagging adhesive to prevent mildew in securing canvas. Do not use wheat paste. In addition, cover all canvas insulation with a fire retardant coating. Where canvas finish is specified, use lagging adhesive to prevent mildew in securing canvas. Do not use wheat paste. In addition, cover all canvas insulation with a fire retardant coating.

1. On canvas jacketed systems where seam joints at fittings are rough, they shall be covered with an application of insulating cement and smoothed with a trowel before the canvas is applied with adhesive. The canvas must be free of wrinkles and have a smooth, neat appearance.



P. INSERTS, SUPPORTS, AND SHIELDS

1. Shields

a. Install between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. Curved metal shields shall be used between the hangers or support points and at the bottom of insulated pipe.

b. Hangers shall support the load of the insulated pipe section on the outside of the insulation and shall not be in direct contact with the pipe.

c. Manufacturer shall be responsible to size the length of shield required to prevent insulation from breaking.

d. Provide rigid insulation at each support point, a minimum of 2 inches longer than shield length.

e. Curved metal shields shall be designed to limit the bearing stress on the insulation to 35 psi and shall be curved to fit up to mid-perimeter of the insulated pipe.

2. When installing phenolic insulation provide a 5 lb. density insert of same thickness and contour as adjoining 3.75 lb. density insulation, between the support shield and piping, and under the finish jacket, on piping 1½ inch diameter or larger, to prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Provide inserts for 180-degree arc and not less than 2 inches more than the length of the pipe support shield or minimum 12 inches long (whichever is greater). Adhere the pipe support shield to insulation with a UL approved adhesive that meets E-84 requirements.

3. Seal all insulation at supports, protrusions and interruptions. Maintain vapor barrier with finish coat.

3.3 PIPING INSULATION APPLICATION AND THICKNESS SCHEDULE

A. In no case shall installed piping insulation have insulation thicknesses that are less than what is required by local energy codes and ASHRAE 90.1 (whichever is more stringent), based on comparable insulation conductivity values at the specified mean rating temperature.

B. Type 5A and 5B insulation is only used where it is being replaced on existing pipe and thickness of the replacement insulation shall match the existing insulation thickness.

Piping Systems

Location

Type

Pipe Size

Insulation Thickness

Cold Condensate Drain Lines

Interior P5 P6

All Sizes 4” & Smaller 6” & Larger

3/4” 1” 1-1/2”

Interior Concealed

P3 P6

All Sizes All Sizes

3/4” 1"

Refrigerant Suction Piping (35 Degrees F – Nominal) All P3 2-1/2” & Smaller 1-1/2"


Sequence of Operation for Controls 23 09 93 - 1

SECTION 23 09 93

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR CONTROLS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide the engineering and documentation required to obtain the sequence of operation for each system as described herein.

B. Systems include:

1. All Rooftop unit controls - General 2. Rooftop unit – VAV with terminal units 3. Rooftop unit – Single zone Variable Air Volume 4. VAV terminal units 5. Exhaust fans 6. Kitchen Equipment 7. Miscellaneous monitoring and recording 8. Safety controls 9. Installation requirements 10. Completion requirements

C. All instruments, room sensors and thermostats shall be field calibrated. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED BUT SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

The operating equipment, devices, and system components required for the building automation system are specified by Section 23 55 11 “Building Automation System". Control diagrams and point schedules of certain devices are shown on the Drawings.

1.3 EXTENT OF WORK

The extent of this building automation system work is as shown on the Drawings and in schedules, and by the control performance requirements specified in this Section.

BAS shall provide the provision of labor, materials, documentation and services required to implement the hereinafter described sequence of operations along with the point definitions shown on the Drawings.

BAS control sequences shall execute only when the associated hands/off/auto motor control switches are in the auto position. Safety interlocks such as firestats, freezestats, smoke and fire detectors and interlocked dampers shall be wired by this subcontractor such that they are operational when the HOA switch is in both the HAND and AUTO position. Any safety interlocks shall not be overridden by BAS.

Connect Building Automation System to Ft. Bragg central LonWorks energy management system. Coordinate installation of controls with base representative.



1.4 EQUIPMENT FAILURE DEFINED

A piece of equipment shall be considered to have "failed" in the event that its status, as monitored by the BAS does not correspond with the BAS commanded status.

Whenever the BAS commanded and monitored statuses are different, an alarm shall be generated and the system associated with that piece of equipment shall be shut down and placed in manual mode without affecting the action of any safety or protection interlocks. Start-up of the system shall only be possible following a manually entered start command. The system shall not be started by automatic BAS generated commands.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

A. Software Installation: Provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up and debug all system software as described in this section. This includes any operating system software or other third party software necessary for successful operation of the system.

B. Database Configuration: Provide all labor to configure those portions of the

database that are required by the points list and sequences of operation. C. Status Reports: Configure status reports for the owner including those listed below:

1. Each rooftop unit (RTU) 2. Each exhaust fan 3. Miscellaneous equipment and systems

D. Documentation: As built software documentation shall include the following: 1. Descriptive point lists 2. Application program listing 3. Application programs with comments 4. Printouts of all reports 5. Alarm list

E. Alarms: All monitors or control functions identified by the Owner as a critical alarm shall

be programmed to report to the hard copy printers in the security office and control room, with instructions for appropriate action. Coordinate verbiage with Owner.

F. Graphics: complete color graphics are required. See requirements in sequences

following.



2.2 GRAPHICS

A. Furnish custom color graphic of each system in this project. Graphic shall be unique to each system reflecting actual component makeup.

B. Graphic representation shall allow a “point and click” format to access each controlled

or monitored activity for readout, trending or adjustment. C. All point numbering of each system component shall include its location by room

number, using the Architect’s floor plan number system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ALL ROOFTOP UNIT (RTU) CONTROLS - GENERAL

A. Coordination of RTU Sequences: Ensure that refrigeration system and heating coil controls have common inputs and do not overlap in function.

B. Maintain unit trend data for a period of 1 year after completed systems start-up.

System trend data shall be used to support commissioning. Hyperlink dynamic trend plots of the following points to their respective graphics for enhanced loop tuning. Trend the following points information to facilitate commissioning and documentation of system performance:

C. Operator Station Display: Indicate the following on operator workstation display

terminal individual system graphic (Provide one graphic per RTU) 1. System on-off indication. 2. System occupied/unoccupied mode. 3. Supply fan on-off indication. 4. Exhaust fan on-off indication. 5. Outside-air-temperature indication (dry bulb). 6. Outside air humidity 7. Heating-coil air-temperature indication. 8. Supply-fan discharge air-temperature set point. 9. Supply-fan discharge air temperature

10. All safety and off-normal alarm. 11. Hand-off-auto status of controller 12. Return air temperature 13. Return air humidity 14. System Mode: Occupied, Unoccupied, Convention 15. Variable frequency drive alarm status 16. Variable frequency drive speed output 17. Variable frequency drive speed reading 18. Relief air damper position 19. Return air damper position 20. Outdoor air damper position 21. Energy Recovery Wheel status (if equipped)

3.2 ROOFTOP UNIT – VAV WITH TERMINAL UNITS

A. The system is a variable air volume, packaged DX cooling, electric heat.



B. Discharge Air Control (Cooling Mode): the refrigeration system and modulating hot

gas reheat will modulate to maintain the discharge air temperature at setpoint (55°F, Adj.). Occupied space temperature control shall be provided by the VAV terminals.

C. Discharge Air Control (Heating Mode): the gas furnace section will modulate to

maintain the discharge air temperature at setpoint (55°F, Adj.). Occupied space temperature control shall be provided by the VAV terminals.

D. Supply fan shall run continuous in occupied mode. E. Static Pressure Control: the supply fan will modulate via variable frequency drive to

maintain the duct static pressure at setpoint. F. System shall have occupied/unoccupied time adjustable programming through

BAS.

G. In unoccupied mode, the unit will cycle as necessary to maintain setback temperatures.

H. Energy recovery wheel shall cycle with supply fan operation in unoccupied mode, and run continuously in occupied mode. Energy recovery wheel shall de-energize during economizer mode.

I. Outside air control: The RTU shall be provided with airflow monitoring station (FMS)

mounted in OA intake. The FMS shall provide an analog signal of the OA CFM to the BAS. The motorized OA and return air (RA) dampers shall be modulated to maintain the OA setpoint. BAS shall generate an alarm if OA CFM value deviates from design air setpoint by more than 10%.

J. System shall be capable of 100% outside air enthalpy-based economizer mode. “On”

setpoint shall be adjustable via BAS.

K. Safety:

1. All of the safety devices are manual reset; the device that has tripped must be manually reset before restarting the air handling unit.

2. If a temperature low limit switch senses a temperature below setpoint the supply fan will be shutdown.

3. If a fire alarm shutdown contact is provided, the supply fan will be shutdown when triggered.

4. If a high static pressure switch located after the supply fan senses a discharge pressure that is greater than the high static limit setpoint, the supply fan will be shutdown.

L. Shutdown: when the unit is shutdown by either a stop command or system safety the

unit will be set as follows: 1. Supply fan will be off. 2. Exhaust fan will be off. (If equipped) 3. Supply fan VFD will be commanded to 0%.



4. Exhaust fan VFD will be commanded to 0%. (If equipped) 5. Energy recovery wheel will be commanded off. (If equipped) 6. Outside air damper will close. 7. Return air damper will open

3.3 ROOFTOP UNIT – SINGLE ZONE VARIABLE AIR VOLUME

A. Occupied cooling mode - supply fan (single zone VAV):

a. When the unit controller is in the occupied mode, the supply fan shall operate continuously. The building automation system (BAS) shall continuously monitor the temperature of the zone being served by the single-zone VAV system.

i. The temperature in the zone shall be maintained by varying the quantity of air delivered to the zone, rather than by varying the discharge air temperature.

ii. The air handler discharge air temperature setpoint shall be 55°F (adjustable). The air handler shall modulate its cooling capacity to maintain a constant discharge air temperature.

iii. The zone temperature shall be used as an input to the DDC controller on the air handler to be used to determine the volume of air, in cfm, that is to be delivered to the zone.

1. On a decrease in cooling load in the zone, the air handler shall reduce the volume of air being delivered to the zone to satisfy the zone temperature setpoint. (min. 30% adj.)

2. On an increase in cooling load in the zone, the air handler shall increase the volume of air being delivered to the zone to satisfy the zone temperature setpoint. (max. Design airflow)

B. Occupied heating mode –supply fan (single zone VAV): a. When the unit controller is in the occupied mode, the supply fan shall operate

continuously. The building automation system (BAS) shall continuously monitor the temperature of the zone being served by the single-zone VAV system.

i. The temperature in the zone shall be maintained by varying the quantity of air delivered to the zone, rather than by varying the discharge air temperature.

ii. The air handler discharge air temperature setpoint shall be 85°F (adjustable). The air handler shall modulate its heating capacity to maintain a constant discharge air temperature.

iii. The zone temperature shall be used as an input to the DDC controller on the air handler to be used to determine the volume of air, in cfm, that is to be delivered to the zone.

1. On a decrease in heating load in the zone, the air handler shall reduce the volume of air being delivered to the zone to satisfy the zone temperature setpoint. (min. 30% adj.)

2. On an increase in heating load in the zone, the air handler shall increase the volume of air being delivered to the zone to satisfy the zone temperature setpoint. (max. Design airflow).

C. System shall have occupied/unoccupied time adjustable programming through BAS.

D. In occupied cooling mode, unit shall be capable of supply air temperature setback (65°F, adj.). BAS shall monitor space humidity sensors and reset discharge air temperature to 55°F (Adj.) when humidity in space exceeds 60% RH (Adj.).



E. In unoccupied mode, the unit will cycle as necessary to maintain setback temperatures. F. Energy recovery wheel shall cycle with supply fan operation in unoccupied mode, and run

continuously in occupied mode. Energy recovery wheel shall de-energize during economizer mode.

G. Outside air control: The RTU shall be provided with airflow monitoring station (FMS)

mounted in OA intake. The FMS shall provide an analog signal of the OA CFM to the BAS. The motorized OA and return air (RA) dampers shall be modulated to maintain the OA setpoint. BAS shall generate an alarm if OA CFM value deviates from design air setpoint by more than 10%.

H. System shall be capable of 100% outside air enthalpy-based economizer mode. “On”

setpoint shall be adjustable via BAS. I. Safety:

1. All of the safety devices are manual reset; the device that has tripped must be

manually reset before restarting the air handling unit. 2. If a temperature low limit switch senses a temperature below setpoint the supply fan

will be shutdown. 3. If a fire alarm shutdown contact is provided, the supply fan will be shutdown when

triggered. 4. If a high static pressure switch located after the supply fan senses a discharge

pressure that is greater than the high static limit setpoint, the supply fan will be shutdown.

J. Shutdown: when the unit is shutdown by either a stop command or system safety the unit

will be set as follows: 1. Supply fan will be off. 2. Exhaust fan will be off. (If equipped) 3. Supply fan VFD will be commanded to 0%. 4. Exhaust fan VFD will be commanded to 0%. (If equipped) 5. Energy recovery wheel will be commanded off. (If equipped) 6. Outside air damper will close. 7. Return air damper will open

3.4 VAV TERMINAL UNITS WITH ELECTRIC HEATING COIL

A. A terminal controller shall be provided for each terminal unit. B. On a call for cooling from space temperature sensor, the controller shall modulate

electric damper actuator from minimum scheduled air flow to maximum air flow to maintain setpoint.

C. Furnish terminal controller, control transformer and pressure sensor to unit

manufacturer for factory mounting and wiring. D. Controllers shall be connected to Network Master Controllers to allow remote



temperature monitoring and adjustment from operator’s workstation. E. On a call for heating, the damper modulates to heating CFM and the controller

energizes the electric heat. The SCR-controlled electric heating coil shall be modulated to maintain zone temperature set point.

3.5 EXHAUST FANS

A. Reference Exhaust Fan Schedule on drawings.

B. Fans designated to be controlled by BAS shall operate continuously on their respective occupied cycle and stop on unoccupied cycle. Coordinate occupied time schedule with Owner/Engineer during commissioning.

C. Program times of the fans may be modified by the operator through the

controller. 3.6 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT (HOODS / EXHAUST FANS / MAKEUP AIR UNITS)

A. Reference mechanical schedules and floor plans on construction documents. The following sequence of operations is provided by Captive Aire and is provided below for reference. Controls system shall monitor all available points of the Demand Control Ventilation System, via LonWorks network interface card.

B. Preparation Time mode: Turn on the cooking appliances and allow Temperature to rise. The exhaust fans will automatically be energized in Preparation Time mode at first (Supply off). The factory set Prep activation point is 5 degrees above kitchen room temperature. LIGHTS will automatically be turned on as well. LIGHTS can be turned ON and OFF manually by pressing the LIGHTS button. Manual method: The FANS button can be pressed to energize the exhaust fans in Preparation Time mode (supply off).

C. Full Modulation: As the cooking appliances heat up, the system will go into modulation mode with supply fan ON. The factory set activation point for modulation is 10 degrees above kitchen room temperature. This function allows the system to meet the requirements of IMC 507.2.1.1, which require exhaust fans to activate when cooking is occurring. The fans take a few seconds to come up to speed; this setting is programmed into the panel for a soft motor startup to prolong the fan motors. The VFDs should all indicate 48Hz. Once the cooking process begins, the VFDs will begin to modulate typically between 48 Hz and 60 Hz based on the Duct temperature. This results in a 20% reduction in airflow when operation is in low speed, which is equivalent to a 48% reduction in electrical consumption by the fan motors. For every exhaust fan, there are two possible factory settings for the temperature control: 450°F rated hoods are programmed for a modulation range of 5°F, while the 600-700°F rated hoods are programmed for a modulation range of 45°F. All temperature ranges are adjustable as needed for the application. Manual Method: The PREP OFF button can be pressed to go into modulation mode and energize the supply fan. VFDs for all fans will typically run at 48 Hz to start with and modulate based on temperature from that point on.

D. Max Air Flow: By manually pressing the MAX AIR button, the fans will run at High Frequency, typically 60 Hz for a factory set time of 30 minutes. This time is adjustable under the Misc Options section of the configuration menu. Once the time period has expired or if the MAX AIR button is pressed again, the VFDs will go back to operating



based on the duct temperature.

E. Cool Down mode: The fans will go into Cool Down mode when the duct temperature goes below the activation point minus the temperature hysteresis of 2 degrees. For example, if the activation temperature is at 85 °F and the hysteresis is set to 2°F, Cool Down mode will start at 83°F. In Cool Down mode, the exhaust fans will run at the same speed than in Preparation Time mode and the supply fans will turn off. NOTE: The hysteresis timer, factory set at 30 minutes, is used to prevent the fans from cycling on and off too often due to small appliances generating just enough heat to turn on the fans but not enough to keep them ON for a long time. The Hysteresis Timer will maintain the fans on after they have been activated by temperature for a minimum time set by this timer, even if the temperature in the duct cools back down. Manual Method: If the duct temperature is in the Cool Down mode range, the Hysteresis timer can be bypassed by pressing the FANS button.

F. Fans Off: If the system was in automatic operation, the fans will turn off when the duct

temperature goes below the Prep activation point minus the temperature hysteresis of 2 degrees. For example, if the Prep activation temperature is at 80°F and the temperature hysteresis is set to 2°F, then the fans will turn off at 78°F. NOTE: The Prep hysteresis timer, factory set at 30 minutes, is used to prevent the fans from cycling on and off too often due to small appliances generating just enough heat to turn on the fans but not enough to keep them ON for a long time. The Hysteresis Timer will maintain the fans on Cool Down mode after they have been activated by temperature for a minimum time set by this timer, even if the temperature in the duct cools back down. Manual Method: If the duct temperature is below the Cool Down mode range, the Hysteresis timer can be bypassed by pressing the FANS button. This will also turn the lights off. If the temperature never went above the Prep activation point and the fans were turned on only by pressing the FANS button, the pressing the FANS button will directly turn off the fans.

3.7 MISCELLANEOUS MONITORING AND RECORDING

A. Temperature Alarms: Monitor temperatures in the following rooms and alarm as indicated: electric rooms (high), IDF/MDF/Comm. rooms (high).

B. Misc. Equip: Interface with all manufacturers’ provided interface cards and monitor and

control all points possible. Equipment includes domestic hot water heater systems and walk-in coolers/freezers.

C. CO2 Sensors: Monitor all CO2 sensors and generate an alarm to the BAS when

conditions vary by 10% or more from the design value. (750PPM, Adj.) D. Utility Metering: Monitor all meters, including but not limited to; Water meter, gas meter,

electric meter, and electric hot box. Monitor status, usage, and rate of usage and general alarm signals to BAS.

3.8 SAFETY CONTROLS

A. For each supply fan and exhaust fan handling over 2000 CFM, or additionally required by code, high temperature thermostats shall be located in the air stream. When the air temperature exceeds 125 degree F, the air-handling unit fan motor shall be de-energized.



Where ionization smoke detectors are provided under Division 26, the high temperature thermostats may be omitted.

B. For RTU’s serving areas protected with fire smoke dampers, RTU shall be interlocked with FSD so that RTU de-energizes upon the activation of the fire damper. BAS shall generate alarm indicating that unit has de-energized and FSD has been activated.

3.9 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Installation Requirements: Each space thermostat and temperature sensor shall be labeled as to the terminal device controlled.

3.10 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS

A. The contractor shall fully check out systems to insure all sequences are working in accordance with the specification.

B. After the contractor has fully checked out the system and proven its operation, a letter

shall be sent to the Engineer certifying this checkout and requesting a date to demonstrate the systems in front of the Engineer or Owner’s representative.

C. Note that all systems and terminal units shall be demonstrated to the full

satisfaction of the engineer/owner. D. Testing and Follow-up demonstration of Variable Air Volume Terminal Units

1. Operate the thermostat and unit actuator of each terminal unit through the full

operating range. 2. Assure that absolute full primary air supply shutoff is obtained from

thermostat operation when scheduled. 3. Assure heat operates when sequenced.

E. Upon successful completion of demonstrations with the Engineer, schedule and perform training of the Owner’s maintenance personnel.



Ductwork 23 31 00 - 1

SECTION 23 31 00

DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Perform Work required to provide and install ductwork, flexible duct, hangers, supports, sleeves, flashings, vent flues, and all necessary accessories as indicated in the Contract Documents. Provide any supplementary items necessary for proper installation.





1. ASHRAE - Handbook of Fundamentals; Duct Design.

2. ASHRAE - Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment; Duct Construction.

3. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.

4. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

5. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

6. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.

7. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality.

8. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.

9. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

10. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.

11. NFPA 96 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooling Equipment.


Ductwork 23 31 00 - 2

12. NFPA 45 – Laboratory Ventilating Systems and Hood Requirements.

13. SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

14. SMACNA – Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards.

15. SMACNA – Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards.

16. SMACNA – HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

17. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.

18. Engineering Design Manual for Air Handling Systems, United McGill Corporation (UMC).

19. Assembly and Installation of Spiral Ducts and Fittings, UMC.

20. Engineering Report No. 132 (Spacing of Duct Hangers), UMC.

21. AWSD1.1 American Welding Society Structural Welding Code.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Pressure

1. 2 inch W.G. Pressure Class: Ductwork systems up to 2 inch w.g. positive or negative static pressure with velocities less than or equal to 1500 fpm.

B. Medium Pressure

1. 3 inch W.G. Pressure Class: Ductwork systems over 2 inch w.g. and up to 3 inch w.g. positive or negative static pressure with velocities less than or equal to 2500 fpm.



C. High Pressure

1. 10 inch W.G. Pressure Class: Ductwork systems over 6 inch w.g. and up to 10 inch w.g. positive or negative static pressure with velocities greater than 2500 fpm.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Provide the following information for each sheet metal system furnished on the Project:

a. System name and type.

b. Duct system design pressure.


Ductwork 23 31 00 - 3

c. Duct material.

d. Duct gage.

e. Transverse joint methods.

f. Longitudinal seam type.

g. Sealant type.

h. SMACNA rectangular reinforcement type.

i. SMACNA intermediate reinforcement type.

j. SMACNA transverse reinforcement type.


1. Submit Shop Drawings on all items of ductwork, plenums, and casings including construction details and accessories specified herein in accordance with Division 01. Ductwork construction details and materials used for duct sealant, flexible connections, etc. shall be submitted and approved prior to the fabrication of any ductwork.

2. Draw ductwork Shop Drawings on minimum 1/4 inch equal to one foot scale building floor plans and shall indicate duct sizes, material, insulation type, locations of transverse joints, fittings, ductwork bottom elevation, offsets, ductwork specialties, fire and fire/smoke dampers, and other information required for coordination with other trades. Clearly designate fire and fire/smoke partitions on the Shop Drawings. Detail Drawings for mechanical rooms and air handling unit locations shall be submitted at a minimum scale of 1/4 inch equal to one foot.

3. Coordinate with all other trades and building construction prior to submitting Shop Drawings for review. Indicate location of all supply, return, exhaust, and light fixtures from approved reflected ceiling plans on Shop Drawings.


A. Deliver products to the Project Site and store and protect products under provisions of Division 01 and Division 20.

B. Protect materials from rust both before and after installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. All ductwork shown on the Drawings, specified or required for the air conditioning and ventilating systems shall be constructed and erected in a first class workmanlike manner.

B. The Work shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the Project Substantial Completion date against noise, chatter, whistling, vibration, and free from pulsation under all conditions of operation. After the system is in operation, should these defects occur, they shall be corrected as directed by the Owner at Contractor’s expense.


Ductwork 23 31 00 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL


2.2 APPLICATION

A. Ductwork systems shall be constructed in accordance with the following Materials as a minimum standard. Refer to Drawings for any deviation from this Table.

AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL MINIMUM PRESSURE CLASSIFICATION (1)

Supply and Return Systems: Single Zone AHU Supply Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure Mixed Air (AHU Plenum) Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure AHU Discharge/Vertical Supply Riser Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure Vertical Supply Riser to Terminal Unit Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure Terminal Unit Connection Metal Flexible Duct As Specified Terminal Units to Supply Air Device Galvanized Steel (2) Low Pressure Return Air Device to Return Distribution Galvanized Steel (2) Low Pressure Return Air Distribution Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure Return Air Distribution/Vertical Riser Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure Exhaust Systems: Exhaust Air Device to Exhaust Distribution

Galvanized Steel (2) Low Pressure

Exhaust Air Distribution Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure General Exhaust Vertical Riser to Fan Epoxy Coated

Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure

B. Notes to Table:

1. Positive pressure unless noted otherwise in Table.

2. Air device connections may be made with insulated flexible duct as specified herein.

3. Verify minimum pressure classification per NFPA 96 requirements.

2.3 DUCTWORK MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION

A. All ductwork indicated on the Drawings, specified or required for the air conditioning and ventilating systems shall be of materials as hereinafter specified unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. All air distribution ductwork shall be fabricated, erected, supported, etc., in accordance with all applicable standards of SMACNA where such standards do not conflict with NFPA 90A and where class of construction equals or exceeds that noted herein.

B. Ductwork shall be constructed of G-90 coated galvanized steel of ASTM A653 and A924 Standards.

C. Minimum gage of round, oval or rectangular ductwork shall be 26 gage per SMACNA Standards.

D. All duct sizes shown on the Drawings are clear inside dimensions. Allowance shall be made for internal lining, where specified, to provide the required free area.


Ductwork 23 31 00 - 5

E. All holes in ducts for damper rods and other necessary devices shall be either drilled or machine punched (not pin punched), and shall not be any larger than necessary. All duct openings shall be provided with sheet metal caps if the openings are to be left unconnected for any length of time.

F. Except for specific duct applications specified herein, all sheet metal shall be constructed from prime galvanized steel sheets and/or coils up to 60 inches in width. Each sheet shall be stenciled with manufacturer's name and gage.

G. Sheet metal must conform to SMACNA sheet metal tolerances as outlined in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards."

H. Where ducts are exposed to view (including equipment rooms) and where ducts pass through walls, floors or ceilings; furnish and install sheet metal collars around the duct.

I. Spin-in fittings shall be as specified under Section 23 33 00 – Ductwork Accessories.

J. Duct Sealing: All ductwork, regardless of system pressure classification, shall be sealed in accordance with Seal Class A, as referenced in SMACNA Standards. All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations shall be sealed.

1. All seams and joints in shop and field fabricated ductwork shall be sealed by applying one layer of sealant, then immediately spanning the joint with a single layer of 3 inches wide open weave fiberglass scrim tape. Sufficient additional sealant shall then be applied to completely embed the cloth.

2. Sealant shall be water based, latex UL 181B-M sealant with flame spread of 0 and smoke developed of 0. Sealants shall be similar to Hard Cast Iron Grip 601, Ductmate Pro Seal or Design Polymerics DP 1010.

3. Scrim tape shall be fiberglass open weave tape, 3 inches wide, with maximum 20/10 thread count, similar to Hardcast FS-150.

4. Sealer shall be rated by the manufacturer and shall be suitable for use at the system pressure classification of applicable ductwork.

5. Except as noted, oil or solvent-based sealants are specifically prohibited.

6. For exterior applications, “Uni-Weather” (United McGill Corporation) solvent-based sealant shall be used.

2.4 RECTANGULAR AND ROUND DUCTWORK

A. Metal gages listed in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards are the minimum gages which shall be used. Select metal gage heavy enough to withstand the physical abuse of the installation. In no case shall ductwork be less than 26 gage per SMACNA Standards.

B. All longitudinal seams for rectangular duct shall be selected for the specified material and pressure classification. Seams shall be as referenced in SMACNA Standards.

C. Longitudinal seams in laboratory hood exhaust ducts shall be welded.

D. All transverse joints and intermediate reinforcement on rectangular duct shall be as shown in SMACNA Standards. Transverse joints shall be selected consistent with the specified pressure classification, material, and other provisions for proper assembly of ductwork.


Ductwork 23 31 00 - 6

E. Spiral round duct and fittings shall be as manufactured by United McGill Sheet Metal Company or approved equivalent. All fittings shall be factory fabricated, machine formed and welded from galvanized sheet metal.

F. Joints in spiral duct and fittings shall be assembled, suspended, sealed, and taped per manufacturer’s published assembly and installation instructions.

G. Contractor may use DUCTMATE or Ward Industries coupling system, as an option, on rectangular ductwork. The DUCTMATE or Ward Industries system shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.5 CONICAL BELLMOUTH FITTINGS AND TAPS

A. Conical bellmouth fittings shall be made from 26-gage G-90 coated galvanized steell. Two-piece construction with a minimum overall length of 6 inches and factory sealed for high-pressure requirements. Average of loss coefficient for sizes 6, 8 and 10 shall be less than 0.055.

B. Provide each fitting with minimum 24-gage damper plate with locking quadrant operator and sealed end bearings. Damper blade shall be securely attached to shaft to prevent damper form rotating around shaft. Shaft shall be extended to clear insulation.

C. Provide a flange and gasket with adhesive peel-back paper for ease of application. The fittings shall be further secured by sheet metal screws spaced evenly at no more than 4 inches on center with a minimum of four (4) screws per fitting.

D. Conical bellmouth fittings shall be Series 3000G as manufactured by Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. or Buckley Air Products, Inc., “AIR-TITE”.

2.6 CASINGS AND PLENUMS - 2 INCH W.G. PRESSURE CLASS

A. All 2 inch w.g. pressure class casings and plenums for mixed air plenums shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA Standards.

B. All casings shall enclose the filter and automatic dampers as shown on the Drawings. Casings shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal erected with three-foot center maximum standing seams reinforced with ¼-inch bars. The casing shall be stiffened on three-foot centers maximum with angle irons tack welded in place.

C. All openings to the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent any air leakage. Access doors shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and shall be air tight, double skin insulated construction with frames welded in place. Doors shall be rubber gasketed with #390 Ventlok gasketing and equipped with fasteners equal to Ventlok #310 latches and #370 hinges that can be operated from both the inside and the outside.

D. Casings shall be anchored by the use of angle irons sealed and bolted to the curb and floor of the apparatus casing. Casings shall be tested and provided tight at a pressure of three inches water column.

E. Insulate per Section 23 07 13.

2.7 CASINGS AND PLENUMS – 6 INCH W.G. PRESSURE CLASS

A. Shall enclose filters and automatic dampers at air handling unit systems. Casings shall be constructed of cellular, standing seam panels with 3 inch deep reinforced “hat” sections as manufactured by metal deck manufacturers and as described in SMACNA Standards.


Ductwork 23 31 00 - 7

B. All openings to the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent air leakage. Install access doors for easy access to equipment. Access doors shall be air tight, double skin insulated construction with frames welded in place. Doors shall be rubber gasketed with #390 Ventlok gasketing and equipped with fasteners equal to Ventlok #310 latches that can be operated from both the inside and outside. Hinges shall be equivalent to Ventlok #370.

C. Anchor casing by the use of galvanized angle irons sealed and bolted to the curb and floor of the apparatus casing as indicated in SMACNA Standards.

D. A fan discharge diffuser plate shall be located on the fan discharge and shall be constructed of 10 gage steel perforated plate installed in 6 inch channel iron frames (8.2#) rigidly supported to withstand the fan discharge velocity. Perforations shall be 3/8 inch (0.375 inch) staggered on 11/16 inch centers (27 percent open area). One section shall be hinged to provide an access door between the discharge side of the fan and the entering side of the coils. After fabrication of the diffuser plate, coat with rust-resistant paint. After installation, touch up diffuser plate and paint channel iron frames with rust-resistant paint.

E. Provide sufficient access openings to allow access for maintenance of all parts of the apparatus. Access door size shall be as large as feasible for the duty required.

F. Insulate per Section 23 07 13.

2.8 ELBOWS RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Construct elbows as follows in order of preference:

1. Long radius, unvaned elbows.

2. Short radius, single thickness vaned elbows.

3. Rectangular, double thickness vaned elbows.

B. Long radius elbows shall have a centerline radius of not less than one and one-half (1-1/2) times the duct width. Short radius elbows shall have a centerline radius of not less than one times the duct width.

C. Contractor shall have the option to substitute short radius vaned elbows, but shall request the substitution at the time of submittal of Product Data.

D. Provide turning vanes in all rectangular elbows and offsets.

E. Job fabricated turning vanes, if used, shall be fabricated of the same gage and type of material as the duct in which they are installed. Vanes must be fabricated for same angle as duct offset. Submit Shop Drawings on factory fabricated and job fabricated turning vanes.

F. All turning vanes shall be anchored to the cheeks of the elbow in such a way that the cheeks will not breathe at the surfaces where the vanes touch the cheeks. In most cases, this will necessitate the installation of an angle iron support on the outside of the cheek parallel to the line of the turning vanes.

G. In 90-degree turns that are over 12 inches wide in the plane of the turn, provide and install double thickness vanes on integral side rails. For ducts under 12 inches in width, use single thickness vanes. The installation of the turning vanes shall be as described for single thickness vanes. On other types of turns or elbows, single thickness trailing edge vanes shall be used.


Ductwork 23 31 00 - 8

2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCT

A. Flexible duct shall be used where flexible duct connections are shown on the Drawings to air distribution devices and terminal units and as scheduled under “Ductwork System Applications.

B. Acoustical Flexible Duct to Diffusers, Grilles, and Terminal Units:

1. Maximum flex duct length 6’-0” (six feet), installed with no more than 90 degrees of bend to diffusers and grilles. Where longer duct runs or more bends are necessary, provide rigid round ductwork.

2. Maximum flex duct length 2’-0” (two feet), installed as a straight run to the inlet of the terminal units.

3. Acoustical flexible duct shall be manufactured with an acoustically rated CPE inner film as the core fabric, mechanically locked by a corrosion-resistant galvanized steel helix.

4. Core shall be factory pre-insulated with a total thermal performance of R-3.5 or greater. Outer jacket shall be a fire retardant polyethylene vapor barrier jacket with a perm rating not greater than 0.10 per ASTM E 96, Procedure A.

5. Duct shall be rated for a minimum positive working pressure of 6 inches w.g. and a negative working pressure of 4 inches w.g. minimum.

6. Temperature range shall be –20 degrees F to 250 degrees F.

7. Duct must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., as Class I Air Duct, Standard 181, and meet GSA, FHA and other U. S. Government standards; flame spread less than 25; smoke developed less than 50.

8. Acoustical flexible duct shall be similar to Flexmaster Type 8M for construction and acoustical performance standards.

C. Metal Flexible Duct:

1. May be used for terminal unit connections from sheet metal ductwork where shown on the Drawings.

2. Maximum length 2’-0” (two feet), installed in straight runs only. Where longer duct runs or direction changes are necessary, provide rigid round ductwork.

3. Duct shall be constructed of 0.005 inch thick 3003-H14 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B209. Duct shall be spiral wound into a tube and spiral corrugated to provide strength and flexibility.

4. Core shall be factory pre-insulated with a total thermal performance of R-3.5 or greater. Outer jacket shall be fire retardant metalized vapor barrier jacket of fiberglass reinforced aluminum foil, with a permeance rating not greater then 0.05 per ASTM E96, Procedure A.

5. The duct shall be rated for a minimum positive and negative working pressure of 10 inch w.g.

6. Temperature range shall be –40 degrees F to 250 degrees F.


Ductwork 23 31 00 - 9

7. Duct must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., as Class I Air Duct, Standard 181, and meet GSA, FHA and other U. S. Government standards; flame spread less than 25; smoke developed less than 50.

8. Metal flexible duct shall be similar to Flexmaster triple lock Type TL-M.

2.10 HOUSE VACUUM TUBING

A. Thin wall steel tubing gages and material types shall be as listed below:

1. Up to 3”: 16 ga. straight tubing, galvanized internal/external

2. 4” to 6”: 14 ga. straight tubing, galvanized internal/external

B. Couplings: Gasketed zinc-plated steel band type compression couplings (uniform compression of all joint surfaces) shall be used for joining pipe. Design Basis: “Original” Morris compression coupling manufactured by Morris Coupling Company. Provide with stainless steel gasket protectors to prevent the gasket from being drawn into the pipe. Joints shall be assembled per manufacturer’s published assembly and installation instructions.

C. Provide long sweep elbows at changes in direction of piping (standard radius elbows will not be accepted). Provide standard 90 degree tee fitting at changes in direction of main trunk line and provide an accessible “plug” in the “cleanout” opening of the tee to allow pipeline to be routinely cleaned.

D. Provide piping system grounding to building steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



C. Cleanliness:

1. Before installing ductwork, wipe ductwork to a visibly clean condition.

2. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork and duct taps to prevent construction dust or contaminants from entering ductwork system. Seal ends of ductwork prior to installation to keep ductwork interior clean. Remove closures only for installation of the next duct section.

3. During duration of construction, maintain the integrity of all temporary closures until air systems are activated.

D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers, controllers and other devices. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. Sleeve of pitot tube opening shall be no more than one inch long. Opening shall be one inch wide to accept pitot tube.


Ductwork 23 31 00 - 10

E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.

F. Slope underground ducts to plenums or low pump out points at 1:500. Provide access doors for inspection.

G. Coat buried, metal ductwork without factory jacket with one coat and seams and joints with additional coat of asphalt base protective coating.

H. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door in closed position.

I. All visible welds in ductwork between biosafety cabinets, canopy hoods and fume hoods and the ceiling shall be ground and polished.

J. Slope duct toward grilles for moisture-laden ducts. Provide drain and trap at elbow of main moisture exhaust duct system.

K. Flexible Duct:

1. The terminal ends of the duct core shall be secured by compression coupling or stainless steel worm gear type clamp.

2. Fittings on terminal units and on sheet metal duct shall have flexible duct core slipped over duct and coupling or clamp tightened, then connection sealed with sealant. Insulation of flexible duct shall be slipped over connection to point where insulation abuts terminal unit or insulation on duct.

3. These insulation connections shall be sealed by embedding fiberglass tape in the sealant and coating with more sealant to provide a vapor barrier.

L. Support flexible ducts as per SMACNA standards to prevent sags, kinks and to have 90 degree turns.

M. Hangers and Supports:

1. All ductwork supports shall be in accordance with Table 4-1 (rectangular duct) and Table 4-2 (round duct) of the SMACNA Standards, with all supports directly anchored to the building structure.

2. Rectangular duct shall have at least one pair of supports on minimum 8’-0" (eight feet) centers. All horizontal round and flat oval ducts shall have ducts hangers spaced 10’-0" (ten feet) maximum.

3. Lower attachment of hanger to duct shall be in accordance with Table 4-4 of the SMACNA Standards.

4. Vertical ducts shall be supported where they pass through the floor lines with 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch angles for duct widths up to 60 inches. Above 60 inches in width, the angles must be increased in strength and sized on an individual basis considering space requirements.

5. Hanger straps on duct widths 60 inches and under shall lap under the duct a minimum of 1 inch and have minimum of one fastening screw on the bottom and two on the sides.


Ductwork 23 31 00 - 11

6. Hanger straps on duct widths over 60 inches shall be bolted to duct reinforcing with 3/8 inch bolts minimum.

3.2 DUCTWORK SYSTEM CLEANING

A. If the system has been operated without scheduled filters or if the integrity of temporary closures has been compromised, Contractor shall have ductwork cleaned according to National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) Standards by a Certified Regular Member of the NADCA.

B. Before turning the installation over to the Owner, Contractor shall certify that the air handling systems have only been operated with scheduled filters in place. Otherwise, Contractor shall present evidence that the ductwork was cleaned as required above.

3.3 TESTING

A. All medium and high pressure duct systems (positive or negative) shall be pressure tested according to SMACNA test procedures (HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual). Notify Owner minimum seven (7) calendar days in advance of leakage testing.

1. Design pressure for testing ductwork shall be determined from the maximum pressure generated by the fan at the nominal motor horsepower selected.

2. Total allowable leakage shall not exceed 1 percent of the total system design airflow rate.

3. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage.

4. Leaks identified during leakage testing shall be repaired by:

a. Complete removal of the sealing materials.

b. Thorough cleaning of the joint surfaces.

c. Installation of multiple layers of sealing materials.

5. The entire ductwork system shall be tested, excluding connections upstream of the terminal units (i.e. ductwork shall be capped immediately prior to the terminal units, and tested as described above).

6. After testing has proven that ductwork is installed and performs as specified, the terminal units shall be connected to ductwork and connections sealed with extra care. Contractor shall inform the Owner when joints may be visually inspected for voids, splits, or improper sealing of the joints. If any leakage exists in the terminal unit connections/joints after the systems have been put into service, leaks shall be repaired as specified for other leaks.

B. All low-pressure duct systems (positive or negative) shall be inspected for visible and audible signs of leakage.

1. Leaks identified by inspection shall be repaired by:

a. Complete removal of the sealing materials.

b. Thorough cleaning of the joint surfaces.

c. Installation of multiple layers of sealing materials.


Ductwork 23 31 00 - 12

2. Discrepancies found during testing and balancing between duct traverses and diffuser/grille readings shall result in re-inspection, repair and retest until discrepancies are eliminated.

C. Ductwork leakage testing and/or inspection shall be performed prior to installation of external ductwork insulation.



Ductwork Accessories 23 33 00- 1

SECTION 23 33 00

DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Perform all Work required to provide and install the following ductwork accessories indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation.

1. Airflow control dampers and spin-in fittings.

2. Fire dampers, smoke dampers, and combination fire and smoke dampers.

3. Flexible duct connections.

4. Duct access doors.

5. Screens

6. Duct test holes.

7. Guy wire systems.





1. AMCA 500D – Laboratory Method of Testing Dampers for Rating.

2. AMCA 500L – Laboratory Method of Testing Louvers for Rating.

3. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:



1. Provide product data for shop fabricated assemblies including, but not limited to, volume control dampers, duct access doors, and duct test holes. Provide product data for hardware used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL


2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Dampers:

1. Greenheck.

2. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.

3. Nailor Industries.

4. Prefco.

5. Ruskin.

B. Regulators, Locking Quadrants:

1. Ventfabrics.

2.3 AIR FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Furnish and install dampers where shown on the Drawings and wherever necessary for complete control of airflow, including all supply, return, outside air, and exhaust branches, "division" in main supply, return and exhaust ducts, and each individual air supply outlet. Where access to dampers through a permanent suspended ceiling (gypsum board) is necessary, the Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location of the access doors.

B. Dampers larger than three (3) square feet in area shall be controlled by a self-locking splitter damper assembly.

C. Volume damper blades shall not exceed 48 inches (48") in length or twelve inches (12") in width and shall be of the opposed interlocking type. The blades shall be of not less than No. 16 gage galvanized steel supported on one-half inch (1/2") diameter rust-proofed axles. Axle bearings shall be the self-lubricating ferrule type.

D. Volume dampers and other manual dampers shall be carefully fitted, and shall be manually controlled by damper regulators as follows:

1. On exposed uninsulated ductwork the locking quadrant shall be made with a base plate of 16-gage cold-rolled steel and a heavy die cast handle designed with a 3/8 inch bearing surface. A 1/4 inch-20 zinc plated wing nut shall firmly lock the handle in place.



2. On exposed externally insulated ductwork the regulator shall be 4-1/4 inch diameter, for 1/2 inch rod, designed for use on duct with insulation thickness specified for duct, and shall have four (4) 3/16 inch holes provided to rivet or screw regulator to the duct surface. The flange that covers the raw edge of the insulation shall be high enough so that it slightly compresses the insulation and holds insulation in place. The handle shall be 3/8 inch above the flange, and shall easily turn without roughing up the insulation.

3. On concealed ductwork above inaccessible ceilings, the regulator shall be 2-5/8 inch diameter chromium plated cover plate that telescopes into the base, for 1/2 inch rod. Regulator shall be cast into a box for mounting in ceilings. Base shall be 1-1/2 inch deep. The cover shall be secured by two screws that can be easily removed for damper adjustment.

4. Furnish and install end bearings for the damper rods on the end opposite the quadrant.

E. Spin-in fittings may be used for duct taps to air devices and shall include dampers on all duct to air devices (diffusers and grilles) even though a volume damper is specified for the air device. Spin-in fittings shall be similar to Flexmaster FLD with BO3 including a 2 inch buildout, nylon bushings, locking quadrant similar to Duro Dyne KR-3, and a 3/8 inch square rod connected to the damper with U-bolts. Spin-in fittings shall be sealed at the duct tap with sealant as specified herein. Determine location of spin-in fittings after terminal units are hung or after location of light fixtures are confirmed to minimize flexible duct lengths and sharp bends.

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Where ducts connect to, flexible connections shall be made using “Flexmaster TL-M” or “Ventglas” fabric that is temperature-resistant, fire-resistant, waterproof, mildew-resistant and practically airtight, weighing approximately thirty ounces (30 oz.) per square yard.

B. Material used outdoors shall be resistant to ultra-violet sunrays. There shall be a minimum of one-half inch (1/2-inch) slack in the connections, and a minimum of two and one-half inches (2-1/2-inch) distance between the edges of the . This does not apply to air handling units with internal isolation.

2.5 ACCESS DOORS

A. Furnish and install in the ductwork, hinged rectangular, pressure relief, or round "spin-in" access doors to provide access to all fire dampers, mixed air plenums, steam reheat coils (install upstream), automatic dampers, etc.

B. Where ductwork is insulated, access doors shall be double skin doors with one inch (1") of insulation in the door.

C. Where duct size permits, doors shall be eighteen inches (18") by sixteen inches (16"), or eighteen inches in diameter, and shall be provided with Ventlok No. 260 latches (latches are not required in round doors).

D. Latches for rectangular doors smaller than 18 inch x 16 inch shall be Ventlok No. 100 or 140.

E. Doors for zone heating coils shall be Ventlok, stamped, insulated access doors, minimum 10 inch x 12 inch, complete with latch and two (2) hinges, or twelve inches (12") in diameter.

F. Round access doors shall be "Inspector Series" spin-in type door as manufactured by Flexmaster USA.



G. Doors for personnel access to ductwork shall be nominal twenty-four inches (24") in diameter. Doors may be fabricated in a local approved sheet metal shop in accordance with SMACNA Standards.

H. Where access doors are installed above a suspended ceiling, this Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location of ceiling access doors.

2.6 SCREENS

A. Furnish and install screens on all duct, fan, etc., openings furnished by this Contractor which lead to, or are located outdoors.

B. Screens shall be No. 16 gage, one-half inch (1/2") mesh in removable galvanized steel frame.

C. Provide safety screens meeting OSHA requirements for protection of maintenance personnel on all fan inlets and fan outlets to which no ductwork is connected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



C. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing.

D. Provide all dampers furnished by the BAS Provider in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instruction and requirements of these Specifications.

E. Provide fire dampers, and combination fire and smoke dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

F. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhausts ducts where indicated. Install dampers so that they will open freely.

G. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. Cover connections to medium and high pressure fans with leaded vinyl sheet, held in place with metal straps.

H. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after duct mounted filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch (200 x 200 mm) size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch (450 x 450 mm) size for shoulder access, and as indicated.

I. Provide duct test holes where indicated and where required for testing and balancing purposes.

1. Furnish and install Ventlok No. 699 instrument test holes in the return air duct and in the discharge duct of each fan unit.

2. Install test holes in locations as required to measure pressure drops across each item in the system, e.g., outside air louvers, filters, fans, coils, intermediate points in duct runs, etc.



J. Access doors as specified elsewhere shall be provided for access to all parts of the fire and combination fire and smoke dampers. Doors shall open not less than 90 degrees following installation and shall be insulated type where installed in insulated ducts.

K. Install each fire and combination fire and smoke damper square and true to the building. The installation shall not place pressure on the damper frame, but shall enclose the damper as required by UL555 and UL555S.

3.2 TESTING

A. Activation of damper shall be accomplished by manually operating the resettable link, disconnecting the linkage at the fire damper fusible link, and manually operating the fire/smoke damper through the pneumatic or electronic controls as appropriate.

B. Failure of damper to close properly and smoothly on the first attempt will be cause to replace the entire damper assembly.



Centrifugal Fans 23 34 16 - 1

SECTION 23 34 16

CENTRIFUGAL FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Perform all Work required to provide and install the following fans indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation.

1. Backward inclined/backward curved centrifugal fans.

2. Motors and drives

3. Fan accessories.





1. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

2. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

3. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.

4. ACMA 203 - Fan Application Manual - Field Performance Measurements.

5. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.

6. AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.

7. ACMA 803 - Site Performance Test Standard - Power Plant and Industrial Fans.

8. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.

9. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.





A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.

B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.

C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.

D. Performance Base: 50 feet above sea level.

E. Temperature Limit: Maximum 300 degrees F.

F. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Submittal data for approval for all fans of every description furnished under this Section of these Specifications.

a. Provide literature that indicates dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance, gages and finishes of materials, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

b. Fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. The recommended range of operation shall be stable.

c. Fans shall be capable of operating stably at reduced loads imposed by means of variable speed drives, inlet guide vanes or controlling pitch of fan blades.

d. Data on sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity.

e. Data on special coatings and construction where applicable

f. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

g. All data on fan accessories.


1. Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 01 and Division 20.

B. Accept products on Site in factory-fabricated protective containers or coverings, with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.

C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.



D. Check and maintain equipment on a monthly basis to ensure equipment is being stored in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended practices. Additionally, during each check, fans and motors shall be rotated and greased and shafts shall be left approximately 180 degrees from that of previous month. Maintain storage records that indicate these maintenance requirements have been met.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL


B. Select fans such that they do not increase motor size, increase noise level, or increase tip speed by more than 10 percent, or increase inlet air velocity by more than 20 percent, from specified criteria. Provide fans capable of accommodating static pressure variations of plus or minus 10 percent.

C. Statically and dynamically balance fans to eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas.

D. Coat all parts of fan housing, blades, etc., exposed to corrosive air stream with specified material to handle environmental conditions.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Chicago.

B. Greenheck.

C. Loren-Cook.

D. Peerless.

E. Twin City.

2.3 WHEEL AND INLET

A. Backward Inclined/Backward Curved: Single width, single inlet, steel or aluminum construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy backplate, backwardly inclined or curved blades welded or riveted to flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast steel hub riveted to backplate and keyed to shaft with set screws and key.

2.4 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF EXHAUSTER

A. Backward inclined fan wheel with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor and drive assembly; 16 gage aluminum birdscreen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets; secured to roof curb with cadmium plated or stainless steel bolts and screws.

B. Roof Curb: Roof curb shall be coordinated with Owner and Contractor.

C. Backdraft Damper: Gravity activated or motorized as indicated. Where type is not indicated on Drawings or Specifications provide gravity-activated damper. Aluminum construction, felt edged with nylon bearings.

D. Upblast exhausters shall have integral drain trough



2.5 HOUSINGS

A. Utility Vent Set/Backward Inclined Centrifugal: Heavy gage steel, air-tight lock seam with scroll panel material formed and embedded into the side panels or continuously welded for AMCA 99 designated Class I and II fans, and continuously welded only for Class III. Spot welded construction is not acceptable. Fan housing shall be field rotatable with an integral discharge flange. Housing shall be adequately braced, designed to minimize turbulence with spun inlet bell and shaped cut-off. Housing and bearing supports shall be welded structural steel construction designed to prevent vibration and rigidly support the shaft and bearings.

B. Factory-Applied Finishes:

1. Interior: Enamel or prime coating for steel. Prime coating is not required for aluminum housings.

2. Exterior (Outdoor): Prior to assembly with minimum 6 mil saltwater-resistant, thermally-fused polyester coating (color selected by Architect). Coating is not required for aluminum housings.

2.6 MOTORS AND DRIVES

A. Motors: As indicated, in total compliance with Section 20 05 13 - Motors.

B. Bearings: L-10 life at 200,000 hours self-aligning, ball or roller bearings.

C. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way, protectively coated with lubricating oil. Provide 316 stainless steel shafts for fume hood or corrosive applications.

D. V-Belt Drive: All v-belt drives shall be designed for a minimum of 50 percent overload. Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 15 horsepower and under, selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position. Fixed sheave for 20 horsepower and over. Where more than one belt is required, matched sets shall be used. Include an additional set of drives for each fan to be used for final adjustments. After correct speed has been determined with variable sheave, provide fixed sheaves.

E. Belt Guard: All belt drives shall be furnished with belt guards. Fabricate to SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards; of 12 gage 3/4-inch diamond mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Inlet/Outlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid.

B. Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll with quick opening latches and gaskets.

C. Weatherproof Housing: Provide weatherproof housing for motor and drive where fans are exposed to the weather. Housing shall be of the same material and construction as the fan housing.

D. Drain: Provide scroll drain on all fans.

E. Shaft Seals: Provide housing shaft seals for fume hood exhaust fans.

F. Cooling Wheel: Provide shaft seal and cooling wheel between housing and bearing on fans with operating temperatures higher than 250 degrees F.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated and fan has been test run under observation.

D. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. .

E. Install flexible connections specified in Section 23 33 00 between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one-inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.

F. Install fan restraining snubbers as required. Refer to Section 20 05 48. Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating.

G. Provide an extra set of fixed sheaves as required for final air balance.

H. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.

I. Pipe scroll drains to over nearest floor or roof drain.

J. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans where indicated.

3.2 PAINTING

A. Provide fans with factory finish in accordance with the manufacturer's standard. Touch up scratches and marks from handling and placement of equipment with masking enamel to match manufacturer's color.

B. Where exhaust fans are required to have epoxy or Heresite coating, have units factory finished with required number of coats prior to shipping to the Project Site.

C. Refer to Division 09 for Site-applied finishes.




THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


Air Outlets and Inlets 23 37 00 - 1

SECTION 23 37 00

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Perform all Work required to provide and install diffusers, diffuser boots, registers/grilles, louvers, louver penthouses, roof hoods, and goosenecks indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation.





1. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.

2. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

3. ARI 890 – Rating of Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies.

4. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.

5. SMACNA 1035 - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.


A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70.

B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Submit product data and Shop Drawings, indicating type, size, location, application, noise level, finish, and type of mounting.

2. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submitting product data.




1. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL


B. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be as scheduled on the Drawings Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be provided with sponge rubber or soft felt gaskets where noted on the Drawings Grilles, slot diffusers and laminar flow bars shall not be internally insulated. If a manufacturer other than the one scheduled is used, the sizes shown on the Drawings shall be checked for performance, noise level, face velocity, throw, pressure drop, etc., before the submittal is made. Selections shall meet the manufacturer’s own published data for the above performance criteria. The throw shall be such that the velocity at the end of the throw in the five (5) foot occupancy zone will not exceed 50 fpm nor be less than 25 fpm except where indicated otherwise. Noise levels shall not exceed those published in ASHRAE for the type of space being served (NC level). In the vicinity of lab hoods, terminal velocity at face of hood shall not exceed 20 fpm.

C. Locations of air distribution devices on Drawings are approximate and shall be coordinated with other trades to make symmetrical patterns and shall be influenced by the established general pattern of the lighting fixtures or architectural reflected ceiling plan, but primarily located to maintain proper air distribution. Where called for on Drawings, grilles, registers and diffusers shall be provided with deflecting devices and manual dampers. These grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be the standard product of the manufacturer, and subject to review by the Architect.

D. Provide a frame compatible with the type of ceiling or wall in which the devices are installed. Refer to Architectural Drawings for exact type of ceiling specified.

E. Coordinate color and finish of the devices with the Architect.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers:

1. Titus Products.

2. Price Industries.

3. Nailor Industries.

B. Louvers:

1. Ruskin.

2. Greenheck.

3. Arrow.

C. Roof Hoods:



1. Greenheck.

2. Cook.

3. Acme.

2.3 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Rectangular, full louvered face, directional, removable multi-core type diffuser to discharge air in 360-degree pattern. Neck size shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. Provide filler panels, where required, for directional throw diffusers.

B. Fabricate frame and blades of extruded aluminum with factory baked enamel, off-white finish.

C. Provide multi-louvered equalizing grid .where noted on Drawings

D. Provide round neck connection as scheduled on Drawings.

2.4 SQUARE PANEL FACE SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR CEILING DIFFUSER

A. Architectural diffuser with a square panel centered within a square housing similar to the Titus OMNI model. Drawings that depict two-way and three-way throw options are achieved with the use of filler panel (where required) for directional throw diffusers.

B. Opposed blade volume dampers shall be provided with the diffuser, if scheduled on the Drawings. The volume damper design shall be similar to the Titus AG-75.

C. Although the manufacturers show this model being used only as a supply air device, this same diffuser can also be used as a return air device. The neck connection shall be the largest available neck size provided by the manufacturer.


2.5 ROUND FACE SUPPLY AIR CEILING DIFFUSER

A. Architectural diffuser with a round panel centered within a round housing similar to the Titus R-OMNI model. Drawings that depict two-way and three-way throw options are achieved with the use of filler panel (where required) for directional throw diffusers.

B. Opposed blade volume dampers shall be provided with the diffuser, if scheduled on the Drawings. The volume damper design shall be similar to the Titus AG-75.

C. Although the manufacturers show this model being used only as a supply air device, this same diffuser can also be used as a return air device. The neck connection shall be the largest available neck size provided by the manufacturer.


2.6 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Streamlined blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4-inch spacing, with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face.

B. Fabricate 1-inch margin frame with concealed mounting.



C. Fabricate of steel with minimum 20 gage frames and minimum 22 gage blades, steel and aluminum with minimum 20 gage frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.

D. Opposed blade damper with removable key operator, operable from face shall only be provided with the grille when it is scheduled on the Drawing.

2.7 CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Fixed series of cubes comprised of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1-inch aluminum strips.

B. Fabricate one-inch margin aluminum frame.

C. Fabricate of aluminum with factory baked enamel finish.

D. Provide square uniform height plenum for ducted return and exhaust application of scheduled neck size.

2.8 CEILING LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSERS

A. Continuous linear flow bar slot with adjustable vanes for left, right, or vertical discharge, with volume control. Provide slot width, length and number of slots as scheduled on the Drawings.

B. Fabricate of aluminum extrusions with factory baked enamel finish.

C. Provide support clips and gasket as required for ceiling system.

D. Provide alignment strips for hairline joints and end caps where the slot terminates. Provide mitered corners.

E. Provide black matte finish for all interior exposed-to-view components.

F. Provide externally insulated supply air plenum by diffuser manufacturer.

G. Provide return slot diffuser same as supply, except without the adjustable vane control. Provide return air plenum for ducted return where indicated on Drawings.

2.9 CEILING LINEAR EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES

A. Streamlined blades with 90-degree one-way deflection, 1/8-inch x 3/4-inch on 1/4-inch centers.

B. Fabricate 1-inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting.

C. Fabricate of steel with 22 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.

D. Opposed blade damper with removable key operator, operable from face shall only be provided with the grille when it is scheduled on the Drawing.

2.10 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES – SEVERE DUTY

A. Streamlined 40-degree fixed blades, at 1/2-inch spacing, with horizontal front blades.

B. Fabricate 1-1/4-inch margin frame with vandal-proof screws.



C. Fabricate totally of steel with minimum 18 gage frames and minimum 14 gage blades with factory baked enamel finish.

2.11 ROOF HOODS

A. Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA 1035, 1-inch classification Duct Construction Standards.

B. Fabricate of galvanized steel, minimum 16 gage base and 20 gage hood, or aluminum, minimum 16 gage base and 18 gage hood; suitably reinforced; with removable hood; birdscreen with 1/2-inch square mesh for exhaust and 3/4-inch for intake, and factory prime coat finish.

C. Roof curb shall be coordinated with Owner and roofing Contractor.

D. Hood outlet area shall be minimum two times the throat area.

2.12 GOOSENECKS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA 1035, 1-inch classification, of minimum 18 gage galvanized steel.

B. Roof curb shall be coordinated with Owner and roofing Contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



C. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, reflected ceiling plans, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

D. Install air outlets and inlets to ductwork with airtight connection.

E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. The use of extractors or scoops at duct take-off to diffusers, grilles and registers is not allowed.

F. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Division 09.

G. Provide all specialties and frames for air distribution devices as required for proper installation in ceiling type as indicated on Architectural Drawings. Provide all cutting and patching of T-bars, gypsum board, and other ceiling systems as required for installation of air devices.




THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


Filters 23 40 00 - 1

SECTION 23 40 00

FILTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Perform all Work required to provide and install filters, housings and frames and filter gauges necessary for proper installation in air handling unit and fan coil unit systems. For special filter systems, refer to Section 23 40 13.





1. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.

2. ARI 850 - Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment.

3. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter.

4. ASHRAE 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.

5. ASHRAE 62 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.

6. IEST RP-CC001 - HEPA and ULPA Filters.

7. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

8. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

9. UL 586 - High Efficiency, Particulate Air Filter Units.

10. UL 900 - Air Filter Units.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. IEST: Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology.

B. HEPA: High Efficiency Particulate Air.


Filters 23 40 00 - 2

C. MERV: Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value.

D. ULPA: Ultra-Low Penetration Air.


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three (3) years documented experience, who issues complete catalog data on total product. Performance characteristics shall be published in the manufacturer’s literature.

B. Where installation instructions are not included in the Contract Documents, the manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed. All equipment affected by altitude shall be rated to operate at the altitude where it is installed.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Submit Shop Drawings, product data and installation instructions, including airflow, pressure drop, and MERV rating.


1. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide specified filters for temporary use during construction, and replace with new filters when the differential pressure is at 70 percent of dirty filter reading.

B. Replace filters at start of Commissioning and again at final acceptance by Owner.

C. Furnish one (1) extra set of new filters for each filter bank after Substantial Completion, including but not limited to the following:

1. Replaceable throwaway.

2. Replaceable dry type medium and high efficiency.

3. High efficiency caissons.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL


B. In general, all capacities and characteristics are shown in schedules on the Drawings. Reference shall be made to the schedules for such information. Capacities shown are minimum capacities. Variations in capacities of scheduled equipment supplied under this Contract will be permitted only with the written direction of Owner.

C. All equipment shall be shipped to the Project Site with not less than a prime coat of paint or as specified hereinafter.


Filters 23 40 00 - 3

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. American Air Filter.

B. Calgon Carbon Corporation.

C. Camfil-Farr.

D. Flanders-Precisionaire.

E. Koch Filter.

F. Purafil, Inc.

G. Columbus Industries, Inc.

2.3 FILTERS

A. All medium efficiency air filters shall be listed as Class 1 in accordance with UL 900 and shall be tested and reported in accordance with ASHRAE Test Standard 52.1 and ASHRAE Test Standard 52.2. Dust spot efficiencies listed are results when tested by ASHRAE Standard 52.1. MERV values listed are results when tested by ASHRAE Standard 52.2.

B. Type F2: Sectional, renewable, medium efficiency media filter.

1. Media: Adhesive coated glass fiber media pads.

2. Frame: Enclosing sectional frame shall be 18-gage galvanized steel, with 11-gage wire retainers, and equipped with a quick opening mechanism for changing filter media.

3. Rating: Initial resistance no greater than 0.10-inches w.g. at 300 fpm face velocity and 0.21-inches w.g. at 500 fpm. Filter shall have a dust spot efficiency of 25-30 percent and shall be equal to a MERV 8 filter.

4. Thickness: 2-inches.

C. Type F3: Disposable, dry type, high efficiency efficiency, pleated media panel filter.

1. Media: Nonwoven cotton and synthetic blend media, formed into a uniform radial pleat. Provide industry standard sizes as required for installation.

2. Frame: Provide filter media in permanent removable frames with corrosion resistant welded wire grid bonded to the downstream side of the media. Media shall be fully bonded to frame to prevent air leakage.

3. Rating: Initial resistance no greater than 0.39-inches w.g. at 500 fpm face velocity. MERV 13, dust spot efficiency of 80-90 percent.

4. Thickness: 4-inches unless otherwise noted on the Contract Documents.

2.4 FILTER BANK HOUSINGS

A. Standard Side Access Housing for 2-inch and Smaller Pre-Filters: 2-inch pre-filters shall be housed in standard air handling unit (AHU) manufacturer tracks in the low velocity angled position. Refer to air handling unit Specifications for pre-filter housing section information.


Filters 23 40 00 - 4

B. Side Access Housing For Filters over 2-inches Nominal Depth:

1. Housing Construction:

a. Housing shall be fabricated of not less than 16-gage galvanized steel with pre-drilled standing flanges to facilitate attachment to air handling unit or other equipment.

b. Housing shall be equipped with hinged access doors at both ends, and provision for receiving filters of any manufacturer without alteration to the housings. Doors are to be fitted with positive sealing, heavy duty multiple latches and with sponge neoprene gaskets.

c. Housings shall incorporate a permanent polypropylene filter sealing gasket provision for sealing the filters against leakage around the filters.

d. Housing shall have a static pressure tap to allow the installation of a static pressure gauge to evaluate the pressure drop across a single filter or any combination of installed filters.

2. Filter Tracks: Extruded aluminum channels capable of receiving multiple stages of 6-inch or 12-inch filters, and 2-inch deep panel type pre-filters and/or after filters as specified on Drawings.

3. Performance: Leakage of housing to ambient rated airflow less than 1-percent at 3.0-inches w.g. Air filter bypass around filters shall be les than 1/2 of 1-percent at rated airflow.

2.5 FILTER GAUGES

A. Direct Reading Dial: 3-1/2 inch diameter diaphragm actuated dial in metal case. Provide vent valves, black figures on white background, front calibration adjustment. The range of the scale shall be no greater than 1 inches w.g. above the filter manufacturer’s recommended final resistance for the type of filter to which the gauge is being applied, 2 percent of full-scale accuracy. Provide with adjustable signal flag.

B. Accessories: Static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4-inch aluminum tubing, 3-way vent valves.

C. Refer to Division 25 for transmitting sensor requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



C. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with neoprene gaskets. This is a minimum standard. If more stringent gasketing is required for a particular filter application, the more stringent gasketing will govern.


Filters 23 40 00 - 5

D. Install static pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount on outside of filter housing or filter plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and level. Where a prefilter is specified immediately upstream of a high-efficiency filter, the differential pressure taps shall be installed across each filter.

E. Provide differential pressure sensor at filter bank assembly for filter type F4 and higher.

F. Install in conformance with UL 900.

G. Assemble high pressure units by welding/bolting sections together. Refer to air handling unit Specifications for assembly of manufactured air units and assemble filter banks in similar fashion.

H. Do not operate fans, air handlers, etc., for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated and fan has been test run under observation.

I. Provide three (3) sets of filters for all HVAC equipment. Construction filters shall be removed prior to occupancy. Coordinate storage of filters with facilities maintenance personnel.

3.2 TESTING

A. Verify the proper installation of the filter housings and filters. Inspect thoroughly for proper fit and seal of all filters, especially filters of 60 percent or greater efficiency, comparing relative tightness of seal to that specified.

B. Visually inspect filters below 99 percent specified efficiency for proper installation and limited leakage.

C. Filters of 99 percent and above specified efficiency shall be tested by subjecting the installed filter and filter installation to a DOP "Challenge" as specified in the Institute of Environmental Standard (IES), IES-RP-CC-001-86, "HEPA Filters."

1. Testing shall be witnessed and certified by the TAB Firm and hood certification firm (see Testing and Balancing Specification Section).

2. Certification shall be performed utilizing a dry silica challenge of a minimum of 300,000 particles (a portion of which shall be as small as 0.10 micron) per cubic foot. Particle concentration measurement will require at least one laser particle counter (Particle Measuring System Model PMS 110 or equal). Counter shall have been calibrated in accordance with IES-RP-CC-013-86-T, "Equipment Calibration or Validation Procedures." Leakage shall be limited to no greater than that recommended by IES-RP-CC-001-86.



Building Automation System 23 62 13 - 1

SECTION 23 55 11

BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS ARE TO BE INCLUDED AS IF WRITTEN HEREIN:

A. Section 23 00 00 – HVAC General Provisions

B. Section 23 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment

C. Section 23 05 53- Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

D. Section 01 91 13 - Commissioning


A. Control Equipment

B. Software

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASHRAE 85- Automatic Control Terminology for Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning

B. ASME MC85.1 -Terminology for Automatic Control

C. NEMA EMC1 -Energy Management Systems Definitions

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Ensure terminology used in submittals conforms to ASHRAE 85


A. Automatic temperature control field monitoring and control system using field programmable micro-processor based units.

B. Central and remote hardware, software, and interconnecting wire and conduit.

C. Terminal unit controls for variable air volume terminals, radiation, reheat coils, unit heaters, fan coils, pneumatic or electric unless indicated otherwise.

D. Damper Motors and Valve Operators: Electronic.



1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations, and trunk data conductors.

2. List of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device.

3. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, and operator notations.

4. System configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections.

5. Descriptive data and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application software.

C. Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include for all manufactured components.

1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS


B. Accurately record actual location of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors.

C. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.

D. Include data specified in "Submittals" in final "Record Documents" form.

1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


B. Include interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed system with identified and numbered, system components and devices.

C. Include keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.

D. Include inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances.

1.09 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Siemens, Automated Logic, or owner-approved equal.



B. Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum years as approved by manufacturer.

C. Design system software under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed at the place where the Project is located.

1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene a conference one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Division 01.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting the work of this Section.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Division 01.

B. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components in other systems.

C. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units.

D. Ensure system is completed and commissioned.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Division 01.

B. Warranty: Include coverage for field programmable micro-processor based units.

1.13 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE

A. This system specified under this section of the specifications shall be guaranteed from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service for a period of twenty-four (24) months from the date of acceptance by the Owner. If, during that period, any of the factory equipment or material provided in the system is found to be defective in material or workmanship, it shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall require the temperature and humidity controls' manufacturer to submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner of his ability to make repairs or replacements to this system from local shop experienced personnel facilities.



B. Upon completion of the installation, the control trades shall thoroughly inspect, check, adjust, calibrate, and make ready for use all devices and sensors comprising the building control system and certify that they are installed and functioning in accordance with their "as Built" drawings. For quality control, all building automation sensors, transmitters, actuators, control valves, etc, shall be calibrated by the controls contractor using instruments certified or traceable to NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology). The instruments, meters, signal generators, anemometers, etc shall be certified to be calibrated within the last six (6) months prior to start of project. All loops for temperature control, and fluid flow control in DDC controller, PLC's (Programmable Logic Controller) shall be tuned for an underdamped response of a system with second-order lag as defined and illustrated in ISA Handbook (Instrument society of America) Volume II, Section ISA-S51.1-1979. For pressure control in air handlers and hydronic systems with adjustable speed drives, control loops shall be tuned for an overdamped response such that there shall be only a small amount of overshoot or no overshoot at all of controlled variable.

C. Unless otherwise negated in other contract documents or in project specifications the Controls contractor shall submit to the Owner calibration or setup data sheets of sensors, transmitters, actuators, valves, meters and other related measurement and control instruments showing zero and span, input and output signals, controller action, ranges, and coefficients as the case may be.

D. Unless otherwise negated in other contract documents or in project specifications the Controls contractor shall submit to the Owner a tuning report of controller loops showing final settings of P =Proportional (Gain), I =Integral (Auto Reset), and D =Derivative (Rate)

1.14 DRAWINGS AND MANUALS

A. Shop Drawing submittals prior to installation shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Certified drawings showing overall dimensions of completed assemblies only, with weights, mounting requirements and parts lists.

2. Cut sheets on all equipment showing adjustment capabilities, performance criteria and accuracy limits for each specific application.

3. Floor plan drawings showing proposed locations of all wall-mounted panels, control air and communication cable risers, workstation and control air filter dryers.

4. Wiring diagrams showing all components and how those components are interfaced.

5. Labeling system for equipment and cable.

6. A complete software description, graphics software with the graphics for the sample labs, internet communication link description, data management software description and sample user call-up programs that could be used with the first four sample labs.



B. The control trades shall be required to submit shop drawings of the control system covered under work of this Section complete with specification data sheets for all devices and instrumentation for owners approval prior to starting work. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with AutoCAD "as built" of the system. The AutoCAD "As-Built" drawings referred to in this section shall indicate, show, explain, in complete detail the sequence of events during startup, normal operation, power failure, resumption of normal power, and system under emergency power. The description of the sequence of operation shall specifically identify all software commands, software algorithms, and software acronyms associated with any input/output signal relating to driving a mechanical or electrical device, calculating setpoints(s), resetting events or sequences, etc. The "As-Built" schematic diagram illustrations will contain but shall not be limited to wiring terminations, terminal block connections, power wiring and grounding terminations, electrical or mechanical interconnection of devices, pneumatic connections and pneumatic ports. Bill of Materials showing device name or tag number, manufacturer, manufacturers model number description of device and device function. Other pertinent information such as fail position of controlled devices (relays, control valves, dampers, damper actuators), setpoints high and low alarm limits, time functions (time delay, start time, stop time, etc) be provided in the "As-Built Drawings".

C. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of six (6) copies of Owner operating and service manuals covering the entire system and six (6) copies of the blackline "as built" drawings.

1.15 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General:

1. The Contractor shall provide all openings and install all receptacles required forthermostat bulbs and sensing elements in mechanical equipment. The mechanical trades shall make penetrations and install temperature wells, valves, pressure sensing devices, etc., in piping systems. The mechanical trades shall install all dampers.

2. All switches, panels, etc., furnished and/or installed by control trades shall be identified by means of plates using acronyms as indicated in System 1/0 summary made of plastic, suitably engraved; embossed or punched plastic tape will not be acceptable.

3. Connect Building Automation System to Ft. Bragg central LonWorks energy management system (EMS). Coordinate installation of controls with base representative. Provide read/write access to points possible.

B. Work Included:

1. Control and control interlock wiring and other necessary devices such as relays and auxiliary contactors necessary to accomplish sequences, automation and interlocks specified in this section shall be provided by this control subcontractor.

2. Motor starters, switches, outlet boxes, breakers and other material and devices necessary to accomplish power wiring are specified in Division 27 -Electrical.

3. Division 27 shall provide 120 VAG power wiring, raceway, receptacles, etc., "power supply" source at local control panels (LCP). Dedicated power source is provided for temperature control system installer's use in electrical rooms and other locations throughout the buildings. Refer to electrical drawings. This contractor shall route 120V and 24V power wiring to the panels, controllers, etc., as necessary from this dedicated power source.



4. Section 23 55 11 Work:

a. All electrical wire, cable, fittings, conduit, etc., associated with the systems under

this Section of the specifications and not indicated above to be provided under Division 27 shall be furnished and installed complete under this section of the specifications. All work shall be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA, National Electrical Code and Division 27 requirements. Wiring shall be terminated by connecting to control devices, or to a local control panel with numbered terminal strips. All wiring shall be color-coded and shall be tagged for future identification.

b. All electrical work included under this general building control section shall be complete with labor and materials and shall include but not be limited to the following broadscope definition:

1) All control wiring, conduit, etc., in building, and in control panels, etc., which interconnect electronic control devices, sensors, transmitters, coils, relays, etc.

2) Wiring, conduit, etc. from the high and low static switches, low and high temperature cutout switches and air damper end switches to the motor starter for emergency shutdown.

3) All other control wiring required by the sequence of operation,

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DDC CIRCUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. General: All control wiring to be installed within a metal raceway system under work of this

Section shall conform to specification Division 27 requirements. Control wiring raceway shall be a minimum of 3/4" trade size with 40% maximum conductor/cable fill in all raceways.

B. Communications Circuits (see paragraph 3.07 for additional criteria):

1. All trunk circuits originating at the control panels and terminating at the remote controllers shall be wired or routed in a series path (daisy chained), linking one controller to the other. Trunk wiring with branch or star configurations are totally unacceptable. Communications wiring polarity must be observed throughout the trunk and continuous wire size shall be maintained throughout the trunk.

2. Cables shall not be installed closer than six feet (6 ft) from building power transformers or run parallel within six feet (6 ft) of electrical, 460 volt or higher voltage power feeder cables. Care shall be taken to route the cable as far from interference generating devices as possible.

3. All shields shall be grounded (earth ground) at one point only, to eliminate ground loops.

4. Trunk communications cable for network cable shall be 18 AWG stranded, twisted pair, shielded with drain which shall be installed by the controls contractor and terminated under this section.



C. Sensor Control Wiring shall be provided under 23 55 11: Use only stranded conductors. All wiring sizes specified herein for analog inputs, analog outputs, digital inputs and digital outputs shall apply to the BAS system.

1. RTD wiring shall be 3-wire or 4-wire twisted, shielded, 18 gauge minimum. Splices not permitted. Belden 8770 or equal (3-wire).

2. Thermistor wiring shall be minimum 18 gauge, twisted pair, shielded. Splices not permitted. Belden 2760 or equal.

3. Other analog inputs shall be a m1mmum 18 gauge, twisted pair, shielded. Splices not permitted. Belden 8760 or equal.

4. Binary control function wiring shall be minimum of 16 gauge. Belden 9409 or equal.

5. Binary input wiring shall be a minimum of 18 gauge. Wiring installed in areas of high levels of electrical interference such as electrical vaults shall be shielded. Belden 8760 or equal (shielded)

6. Wiring for air terminal box controller/room Sensor SM2-RS shall be 6-conductor,twisted, shielded, 22 gauge minimum. Splices not permitted. Alpha 5196 or equal.

7. Wiring for 120V line voltage control to motor interlock/shutdown to be minimum of 12 gauge and shall be in raceway separate from control wiring.

2.02 CONTROL VALVES

A. General:

1. Magnetic valves up to 4 inch shall be sized for a 3 to 5 psi differential drop. Valves shall be packless, electrically modulated by 0-1 OVDC or 0-20VDC or 0-20V Phase Cut control signals and actuated by a magnetic core. Valves shall have a rangeability (stroke, CV) of 500:1, linear characteristics (stroke, CV), proportional type of operation, with a maximum allowable leakage of 0.05% CVs (two-way) and maximum allowable leakage of 2% CVs when used in a 3-way connection. Valve body material shall be cast iron, seat and inner valve material shall be chrome nickel steel. Valves shall be equipped with handwheel to allow manual stroking of valve during absence of control power. All valves up to 2 inch shall be supplied with NPT threaded connections, 2-1/2 inch and larger shall be flanged.

2. Minimum wire size for all control wiring between controller and magnetic valve shall be #12 AWG. Magnetic valves 2 inch up to 4 inch shall require a 24 VAC, 120 watt amplifier module to linearly drive each valve. The amplifier module shall be capable of converting the phase cut output signals of the DOC controller in order to overcome line losses and be able to modulate the valve to its full stroke. 3. Spring/diaphragm actuated control valves 1 inch to 6 inch shall be rotary type. Quick change trim for anti-cavitation or low -noise trim or reduced trim or abrasion sleeve shall be a standard valve feature. All trims shall use a 90 degree plug rotation, disassembly, inspection, and reassembly of the trims shall be accomplished without disturbing the packing, linkage or positioner calibration. Valve shall be equipped with a top mounted handwheel for manual actuation. Valves shall be rated to operate with pressure drops from 150 to 1400 psi. All valve positioners shall be electro-pneumatic (1/P) type, capable of accepting universal input signals, 4 to 20 milliamp is preferred.



B. 1/2 inch to 4 inch: Valves shall be equipped with a handwheel, or manual positioner mounted adjacent to valve, to allow manual positioning of valve in the absence of control power (excluding terminal unit values).

C. 8 inches to 20 inches: Valves shall be spring/diaphragm actuated, rotary type (preferred)or globe type. Valve positioners shall be electro-pneumatic type (1/P). The positioner shall operate with an electro-mechanical signal transducer and with the force balance principle an electromagnetic coil internally converts the electronic input signal (4-20ma) into a proportional pneumatic signal. Valve body shall be flanged, ANSI rated (Classes 150,300,600).

D. Valve Constant (CV) Charts: Control drawings shall indicate the valve constant (CV rating) of all valves used so that the valve pressure drop may be used for balancing and performance tests. Submittal data shall also state calculated shut-off pressure for each valve.

2.03 DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Electronic damper operators shall be fully proportioning and shall be either push-pull or rotor as required. Motors shall be of the low voltage synchronous type and shall be nonoverloading at a continuous stall. Provide each motor with rust protection. Control signal shall be 0-20 VDC 2-wire phase cut, or three point floating as required. Provide spring return for normally open/closed positioning. The minimum actuator impedance shall be 800 ohms even when more than one actuator is connected or parallel. They shall be of ample size to develop a torque 50% greater than required by the load imposed on them (15 inch-pounds minimum) and shall conform to all requirements of sequence descriptions specified or scheduled.

2.04 CURRENT SENSING SWITCHES

A. Run status for fans as listed in the sequence of operation as noted on the Drawings or required shall be indicated by current sensing switches.

B. Each current sensing switch shall include two solid-state switches with independently adjustable operating thresholds, responsive to AC current flow through the switch sensor. Switches shall be powered by induction from the circuit being monitored. The current sensing switches shall be installed in each motor starter (either in Motor Control Center or stand-alone device).

C. Switches shall be Hawkeye 708 solid state or an approved equal.

2.05 TEMPERATURE SENSORS/THERMOSTATS

A. Temperature Sensors:

1. Room temperature sensors shall be of the "treated "thermistor type for accuracy. Thermistors shall be treated with series and parallel resistors to fix the span, provide linearity, and ensure interchangeability. Untreated thermistors are not acceptable. Resolution shall be 1 degree fahrenheit for display and control. Repeatability shall be 0.25 degrees F.

2. All other sensors may be resistance temperature detector. RTD shall be either 3 wire 1000 ohm platinum RTD, or 2-wire 1000 ohm platinum RTD. Overall accuracy shall be +/-0.5 degrees F.



3. Combination temperature and humidity sensors shall have thermistor and hydrostatic plastic elements mounted in a common enclosure.

B. Thermostats (where applicable):

1. Thermostats provided shall control within +/-1 degree Fahrenheit of the temperature setting at the Thermostats location, unless otherwise specified.

2. Remote bulb type thermostats shall have fully compensated liquid filled capillaries and shall be completely job adjustable, both as to control point and sensitivity. Sensing elements shall be secured in the controlled medium streams so as to respond to the overall temperature within the duct or pipe.

3. Thermostats located in public areas (as indicated on plans) shall be sensor type only, and non-adjustable.

C. Insulating bases shall be provided for thermostats where indicated on the drawings, where subject to extreme temperatures, and for all sensors and thermostats which are mounted on the inside surface of a wall which is exposed to outside ambient temperatures.

D. Low Limit Thermostats (Switch) Manual reset, double block switch action (one normally open and one normally closed contact), remote bulb (20 foot long sensing element to respond to the lowest temperature to which one (1) foot portion of the element may be subjected) thermostat switch. Thermostat shall be located in the plenum between the pre-heat and the chilled water coil where air handling units are equipped with a pre-heat coil and shall be located on the cooling coil air inlet on units not equipped with pre-heat coils. When temperature sensed drops below 36 degrees F. (adjustable) the thermostat shall cause the outside air dampers to close, de-energize the supply fan and provide a separate alarm signal to the DOC Controller.

2.06 PRESSURE SENSORS

A. All pressure sensors shall be sized to withstand 100% over-range without damage and to hold calibrated accuracy when subjected to a momentary 40% over-range input.

B. Pressure measurement accuracy for all pressure sensors shall be within 1% of the span over an ambient operating temperature of 30 degrees to 140 degrees F.

C. Pressure transmitters shall provide a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 0 to 20 MA output signals.

2.07 PRESSURE SWITCHES

A. Static pressure switch to be a manual reset, double-block (with one normally open and one normally closed) static pressure switch to sense the discharge or low suction pressure of the AHU supply and return fans. The pressure switch shall stop its respective fan on reaching a predetermined (adjustable) setting and shall provide a separate alarm to BAS.

B. Fluid differential pressure switch contacts shall be snap action type. Sensor assembly shall operate automatically and reset automatically when conditions return to normal. Pressure sensing elements shall be bourdon tubes, bellows, or diaphragm type.



2.08 SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed under Division 27 of these specifications as an integral part of the fire alarm system. Interlock wiring between fans starters, damper actuators, low/high limit, and fan shut-down relays, shall be furnished and installed under work of this Section. It shall be the responsibility of fire alarm system installer to insure that such detectors are provided in all locations dictated by NFPA Standard 90A and other governing criteria and installed in an environment not to exceed normal operating temperature and humidity tolerances according to manufacturers specifications.

2.09 START-STOP CONTROL

A. Remote DDC start-stop control shall be provided on all motors indicated in the lnpuUOutput Summary.

B. Magnetic motor starters, starter control transformers and interposing starter relays are to be provided as directed per Section 20 05 13.

C. All control and sensing wiring from the motor starters to the main DOC panel is to be provided under work of this Section.

2.10 VAV ROOFTOP UNIT DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLER

A. General: The VAV RTU shall be provided with individual, dedicated DCC controllers. The DCC controllers shall be completely stand alone for all required control functions and cannot be shared by other air handling units, other mechanical or electrical equipment. Monitoring and control functions of the DCC controller shall be strictly limited to the dedicated or assigned air handling unit. The use of available inputs or outputs of the DCC controller for other purposes other than controlling and monitoring the air from the controls contractor or general contractor.

B. Control trade shall mount and make all field device wiring termination's to DDC controller "back pans" and terminal strips. Control trades to provide connection to this DDC controller and shall assist in field test verification of all wiring circuits and control devices for signal strength, reliability, repeatability, accuracy and compatibility with the DDC processor.

C. All control functions specified under air handling unit sequence of operation in the lnput Output Summary Matrix shall be provided and terminated in the DDC Controller.

2.11 FACILITIES CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM POINT DESCRIPTION

A. The following devices and associated wiring, etc. are to be furnished and installed under work of this Section. The point type noted in the I/O Summary indicated the corresponding device described below. The catalog numbers indicated constitute the type, product quality, material and desired operating features.

B. Point Type 1 - StartStop: Connect remote control wiring to motor starter control circuits in motor control Center, at separately-mounted starter locations, or a variable speed drives required. All StartStop circuits shall require HOA switches, electrically wired for Manual or Automatic operation.

C. Point Type IB - High Limit Sensor: Averaging type, auto-reset.



D. Point Type 2 - Motor Current Sensing: Connect to dry contacts of current sensing relay.Motor current sensing CT, transducer and relay assembly to be rated at 150% of motor full load current, field adjustable, initially set for contact closure of 30% full load.

E. Point Type 3 - Low Limit Sensor: Averaging type, man-reset.

F. Point Type 4- Differential Pressure Transmitter- Water: With range to match application, 0-5 VDC output signal, stainless steel construction, complete with mounting bracket and power supply.

G. Point Type 5 - Contact Closure: Connect to auxiliary contacts and remote signal terminal points which have been installed under work of this Section, other Division 23 sections or Division 27. Control closure shall represent activation of process or alarm condition as required by the specified System function.

H. Point Type SA- Pressure Transmitter- Water: With range to match application, 0-5 VDC output signal, stainless steel construction, complete with mounting bracket and power supply.

I. Point Type 6 - Differential Pressure Switch: Provide a differential pressure switch to monitor the differential pressure status across a piece of equipment. Design and sensitivity shall match application with SPOT contacts to make/break from a field adjustable differential pressure setting.

J. Point Type 7 Hi/Low static cutout switch with manual reset.

K. Point Type 8c - Temperature Sensors/Transmitter: Platinum wound resistance thermal detector (RTD), 3-wire, 1000 ohms at 32 degrees F, 0.0385 ohms/ohms/degrees C.

1. Immersion Sensor: Hy-Cal Engineering No. RTS-S737 -P, all to be provided with matching stainless steel immersion well fitting.

2. Duct Averaging: 1000 ohm avg.

3. Outside Air Sensors: Viasala HMO 30YB.

4. Space Sensors.

L. Point Type ba - Pressure Transmitter - Air: With range to match application. 0-5 VDC output signal, complete with mounting bracket and power supply.

M. Point Type lob - Differential Pressure Transmitter - Air: With range to match application, 0-5 VDC output signal, complete with mounting bracket and power supply.

N. Point Type 11 - Duct Smoke Detector: Specified and wired in Division 27.

O. Point Type 12 - Pulse Accumulation: Connect to pulse generators that have been installed under work of this Section, other Division 23 sections or Division 27.

P. Point Type 14- Transmitter- VSD Control: Provide signal wiring between transmitter and DDC panel or between variable frequency drive (VSD) and DOC panel.

Q. Point Type 15 - Variable Speed Status Indication: Provide necessary voltage isolation relay contacts and all connections from contacts to the DOC controller panel to report speed, drive normal run status and by-pass run status at variable frequency settings and control points.



R. Point Type 16 - Actuator Control: Provide 0-20 volt, 3-conductor, control signal wiring between valve damper actuator motor and the DOC controller.

S. Point Type 17 - Open/Close: Connect 16 gauge 2-conductor wire between damper and/or valve actuator and DOC controller

T. Point Type 18 - Flow Transmitter: Provide ultrasonic type as manufactured by Balance Master or accepted substitution.

U. Point Type 22- Flow Switch.

V. Point Type 23 - Single Point Flow Sensor.

2.12 MONITORING:

A. All components shall conform to manufacturer's standard materials and components as published in their product information, designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer, and as required for the application indicated or required. These Specifications shall be considered minimum standards in all situations.

B. Provide electric-pneumatic or pneumatic-electric switches and electrical devices that are UL-

Iisted and of a type meeting current and voltage characteristics of the project.

C. System Capacity: The LMDA system shall have adequate capacity to accommodate the existing DDC system (load from the existing computer that the new computer will be replacing), the new work included in this contract and 15% growth capability.

D. Electrical junction boxes:

1. This contractor shall install junction boxes, conduit and cable, 20 amp, single pole, 120 volt circuit breakers in existing emergency panels and all mounting accessories necessary to serve the labs in the related building sections.

2. NEC: The entire electrical installation shall be per the NEC. Retain qualified electricians for all electrical work.

E. LOCAL CONTROL (interface) PANELS:

1. Type: Provide interface control panels with suitable brackets for wall mounting. Locate panels as noted on the drawings.

2. Construction: Install manufacturer's standard panel for use above the ceiling, totally enclosed on all four sides, with hinged door and keyed lock, with manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish and color.

3. UL-Iisting: Provide UL-Iisted cabinets for use with line voltage devices.

4. Panel-mounted Equipment: Include relays, electronic boards, automatic switches, and other devices required for the interface with all future or planned lab systems. Mount devices with adjustments accessible through the front of the panel.



5. Provide all panels with all related components that will be necessary to interface with and monitor all planned labs as described on the plans issued with this RFP.

6. Provide a data outlet for each panel for connection to the laptop computer.

F. SOFTWARE (GENERAL)

1. Software packages shall include, but not be limited to:

a. Windows based graphics package that allows the users to easily build graphics from an established library of symbols and functions or using an AutoCad graphics file as a base and placing active data points on the graphics.

b. All necessary software to facilitate the display of active data on the graphics developed with the graphics package and the use of windows, graphics and pointer to move through the screen views to a building, floor, area, system and component each of which may display active data or project information.

c. Alarm management software that reports, logs and notifies (AutoDial) a designated pager of the alarm.

d. Data management software that facilitates the development of historic data trends and historic data files for use by other Windows based data manipulation programs.

e. Internet data distribution programs to allow the use of Internet browsers with the proper passwords to view current system data related to authorized spaces.

G. Alarm Management

1. Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm reports to operator devices and memory files. Each DOC panel shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to noncritical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DOC panel's ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at a PC workstation or local 1/0 device, or communications with other panels on the network. Alarm acknowledgments shall be displayed on all terminals. Unacknowledged alarms shall not prevent operator from performing other tasks.

a. First in, first out handling of alarms in accordance with alarm priority ranking is required with buffer storage for a minimum of 20 alarms in case of simultaneous multiple alarms. Alarm handler shall be active in both the Signed On and Signed Off modes to assure that alarms will be processed even though an operator is not currently signed on.

H. Historical Data and Trend Analysis

1. A variety of historical data collection and data base management utilities shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the following ways.



a. Continuous Point Histories: Standalone DOC panels shall store Point History Files for all analog and binary inputs and outputs. The Point History routine shall continuously and automatically sample the value of all analog inputs. Samples for all points shall be stored for the past day (minimum) to allow the user to immediately analyze equipment performance and all problem-related events for the past day. Point History Files for binary input or output points and analog output points shall include a continuous record of changes or commands for each point.

b. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall also be assignable to user defineable trends for the purpose of collecting operator-specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of one (1) minute to 2 hours, in one (1) minute intervals, shall be provided. Each standalone DOC panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 5000 data samples.

c. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data capability for all input and output points shall be stored at the Standalone DOC panels, and uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired or per a programmer schedule. Uploads shall occur based upon user-defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers become full. All trend data shall be available in disk file form for use in third party personal computer applications. Data shall be stored in ASCII format or an ODBC compliant format, in addition to any other common formats provided.

d. Trend report shall allow the operator to randomly select points to berecorded and the time interval at which samples are to be taken. Time interval shall be assignable from 1 to 60 minutes. It shall be possible to assign up to ten variables to a trend report. Trend report assignments are to be made directly through the operators terminal. A numeric listing of the points to be trended along with a complete English group and point description shall be printed out as a trend header at the start of the report. Following the header the trend report number shall be listed followed by the column headers one through ten with appropriate engineering unit abbreviations; i.e., "DEG" or "PSI" printed under the column head number. At each specified interval, the selected data shall be printed under the column headers one through ten. If, on an alarm printer, a trend is interrupted by a higher priority activity such as an alarm, it shall finish the line being printed then immediately print the alarm.

2. Bar charting capability shall be provided. It shall be possible to extract data from the historical database and format the data into meaningful full color bar chart displays.

a. Up to seven variables per chart.

b. Each bar to have a specified width and color fill.

c. Each bar shall be assigned a title to be displayed at the bottom of the chart. Titles shall appear in the same color as the associated bar.

d. Bar charts to be provided are as noted in the 1/0 summary.

3. Curve Plot Capability: Curve plot capability is to be provided allowing up to seven variables to be displayed simultaneously. Data to be displayed is to be extracted from the historical data base.

a. Each curve plot shall have a specifiable color.



b. The independent (X) axis of the plot shall be defined as time or as an analog variable.

c. Curve plots to be provided are as noted in the 110 summary.

I. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays

1. Color graphic floor plan displays, and system schematics for each piece of mechanical

equipment, including all components of the systems airflow and temperature control systems, shall be provided to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition.

2. The operator interface (existing campus laptops) shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or text-based commands (user's option).

3. Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values, and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall automatically update at intervals not to exceed 30 seconds to represent current conditions without operator intervention.

4. The windowing environment of the PC operator workstation shall allow the user to simultaneously view several graphics at the same time to analyze total system operation, or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress.

5. Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays.

6. The system supplier shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, VAV terminals, RTU, filters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols.

7. The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device in conjunction with a graphics development program to allow the user to perform the following:

a. Define symbols.

1) Position and size symbols.

2) Define background screens.

3) Define connecting lines and curves.

4) Locate, orient and size descriptive text.

5) Define and display colors for all elements.

6) Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points or other displays.

J. Reports



1. Reports shall be generated and directed to one of the following: workstation displays, printers, or disk. As a minimum, the system shall provide the following reports:

a. All points in the network.

b. All points in a specific controller.

c. A listing of a user-defined group of points in the network. There shall be no limit to the number of user-defined groups

d. All points currently in alarm.

e. All points in hardware override.

f. All disabled points.

g. All weekly schedules.

h. All or selected point attributes, including, but not limited to:

i. Values

j. Setpoints

k. Alarm Limits

l. Statistics

m. Run Times

n. All programmed holidays and associated schedules.

o. All disabled alarms.

p. All active, unacknowledged alarms.

q. All active, acknowledged alarms.

r. Any and all other controller operating parameters.

2. Reports shall be provided for specific point types, for each logical point group, for user-

defined groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the hardware configuration of the control system or communications network.

3. The system shall allow for the creation of custom report point groups that shall be capable of including points from multiple controllers. Systems limiting point report displays to only a single controller's point database shall not be accepted.

4. The number of custom reports or display groups shall be limited by the amount of available system memory.

5. Selection of a single menu item, tool bar item, or tool bar button shall print any displayed report on the system printer for use as a building management and diagnostics tool.



K. Password

1. Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation control, display, and database manipulation capabilities as he or she deems appropriate for each user, based on an assigned password.

2. Each user shall have the following: a user name; a password, and an access level (from 1 - 5).

3. The system shall allow each user to change his or her password at will.

4. When entering or editing passwords, the system shall not echo the actual characters for display on the monitor.

5. A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported as follows:

a. Level 1 = Data Access and Display

b. Level 2 = Level 1 and Operator Overrides

c. Level 3 = Level 2 and Database Modification

d. Level 4 = Level 3 and Database Generation

e. Level 5 =All privileges, including Password Add/Modify

6. A minimum of 100 unique passwords, including user initials, shall be supported.

7. Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for their respective passwords. Display of menu selections shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on.

8. The system shall automatically generate a report of log-on/log-off and system activity for each user. Any action that results in a change in the operation or configuration of the control system shall be recorded, including: modification of point values, schedules or history collection parameters, and all changes to the alarm management system, including the acknowledgment and deletion of alarms.

9. User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving the operator workstation logged on.

L. SPECIAL TOOLS:

1. Furnish to the Owner not less than two sets of tools necessary to service and maintain tamperproof panels and/or any other such items requiring special tools.

M. Warranties and guarantees

1. Product warranties and guarantees



a. Warranty shall commence upon the date of owner beneficial use and extend through the construction period for the overall project plus twentyfour months after the completion of the scope of work.

b. The warranty length shall be based on the total project completion and specific lab completions relative to each interface. During the warranty period the manufacturer shall repair any defects in materials or system performance, at no cost to the owner.

c. The manufacturer shall provide an option to extend the warranty for an additional 3 years to Baylor for all materials installed during this scope of work.

PART 3 - PRODUCTS

3.01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

A. Provide a project manager who shall, as a part of his duties, be responsible for the following activities:

1. Coordination between work under this Section, and all other trades, Owner, local authorities and the design team.

2. Scheduling of temperature control system and manpower, material delivery equipment installation and checkout

3. Maintenance of temperature control system and construction records such as project scheduling, manpower planning, and AutoCAD drawings for project coordination and as-built drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION METHODS

A. Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, rough-in drawings and equipment details. Install electrical components and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable Division 27 sections of these specifications.

B. The term "control wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit, and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric or electronic control devices.

C. Install control wiring system in conduit for electric/electronic control systems. Conceal wiring, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed.

D. Number-code or color-code conductors appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system.

E. All line voltage power wiring required because of substitution of equipment specified in this section, shall be provided by this section.

F. AI electrical grounding of mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, instrumentation and control devices shall be per manufacturers recommendation and instruction, and all applicable codes and Div 27 specifications.



3.03 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE

A. General: The system installation shall be complete and tested for proper operation prior to acceptance testing for the Owner's authorized representative. A letter shall be submitted to the Architect requesting system acceptance; and provide documentation certifying that the Contractor, Owner's Construction Inspector, and Owner's operating personnel have witnessed the commissioning of each system and agree that each system is installed and operates as specified. This letter shall certify all controls are installed and the software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Acceptance testing will commence at a mutually agreeable time within ten (10) calendar days of request. Upon completion of field testing and system commissioning, the controls contractor shall demonstrate to the owner the entire sequence of operation in all phases such as startup procedures normal operation, power failure, resumption of normal power, system response and operation during emergency power. Only when all systems have been successfully tested, demonstrated and verified by the owners representative shall be accepted.

1. Prior to acceptance, all DDC zone and local controllers shall be tested via a functional point to host testing, as follows:

a. All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, start/stop) and the operation of the device controller to be verified.

b. All analog input channel devices shall be verified for accuracy over the entire span of the device when possible and documented at what points of the span were checked and calibrated.

c. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the field device and observing the appropriate change of displayed value.

d. Automatic control operation shall be verified by documentation of the changing of the set point and observing a smooth and timely system response.

e. Time event and set point schedules shall be verified before acceptance testing.

B. Field Equipment Test Procedures: The Contractor shall provide documentation of their testing and provide documentation with the technicians' initials for each point tested. All problems shall be added to a punch list for correction. The Contractor shall be responsible for rescheduling retesting after correction of deficiencies. Coordinate with Section 23 05 93 TAB.

C. Workstation Test Procedures: The system Workstation test procedures shall be as follows:

1. Communication with each DDC Zone and Local Controller shall be demonstrated.

2. Operator commands will be explained and demonstrated.

3. Control sequences shall be demonstrated for proper operation.

4. All available system reports and logs shall be demonstrated at the System Workstation.

5. Correct system start-up and shutdown procedures shall be demonstrated.

6. All controllers shall be demonstrated to operate in a standalone mode.



D. As-Built Documentation: After a successful acceptance demonstration, the Contractor shall submit as-built drawings of the completed project for final approval. After receiving final approval, supply six (6) complete 11 x17 as-built drawing Sets, together with AutoCAD diskettes to the owner.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit three (3) copies of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following in each manual:

1. Manufacturer's catalog data and specifications on all sensors, transmitters, controllers, control valves, damper actuators, gauges, indicators, terminals, and any miscellaneous components used in /1/ this system and the DDC System.

2. An Operator's Manual that will include detailed instructions for all operations of this system and the DDC System.

3. An Operator's Reference Table listing the addresses of all connected input points and output points. Settings shall be shown where applicable.

4. A Programmer's Manual that will include all information necessary to perform programming functions.

5. A language manual that will include a detailed description of the language used and all routines used by the system.

6. Flow charts of the control software programs utilized in the Temperature Control System.

7. Complete program listing file and parameter listing file for all programs.

8. A copy of the warranty.

9. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions.

10. Recommended spare parts list.

F. The Contractor of this section shall be required to participate in the Fire Alarm System checkout to ensure that the HVAC sequence of operation are responding to the requirements of the Fire Alarm System in all buildings.

3.04 TRAINING

A. Contractor shall provide to the Owner for approval a training class program prior to any

scheduled training. The program shall include materials, instructor's qualifications, and proposed schedule for the two 4-hour courses.

B. Training sessions shall be provided for the Owner's personnel by factory trained control engineers and technicians. A minimum of 4 bound copies of training materials shall be provided for the two courses.

C. The Contractor shall conduct two (2) four (4) hour training course for the designated owners' personnel in the maintenance and operation of the control system. Training shall include but not be limited to applications to the actual systems and devices to be controlled.

D. The courses shall include instruction on specific systems and instructions for operating the installed system to include as a minimum:



1. HVAC system overview

2. System Operating Procedure

3. Programming Procedure

4. Maintenance Procedures

3.05 WARRANTY

A. The entire control system shall be warranted to be free from defects in both material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years of normal use and service from the date of acceptance of the system.




Common Work Results for Electrical Systems 26 05 00 - 1

SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 01 Specification sections, apply to this section.

B. Division 07, Penetration Firestopping.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This performance specification section provides the minimum requirements for a complete and operational electrical system for an the Exchange Retail Store and Mall. The electrical and low-voltage systems shall include but are not limited to all design, equipment, materials, labor, installation, documentation, testing and services necessary to furnish and install a complete, operational the Exchange Retail Store and Mall to include but are not limited to the following functions:

1. Store Sales Area. 2. Administration Area. 3. Freezers and Coolers. 4. Exchange food and other vendors, equipment and all connections to same. 5. Communications IT Spaces and Hubs and horizontal data cabling not exceeding 90 meters

and incoming building service cabling and fiber optic for both public and government services.

6. Electrical Rooms and Equipment Rooms for panels, sub-distribution and fire alarm/mass notification.

7. Lighting and Control System to meet current Exchange, UFC, Energy Codes and LEED Requirements and state and local codes.

8. Fire Alarm/Mass Notification System to meet UFC Standards. 9. Security Intrusion System. 10. Public Address System. 11. Primary medium voltage cabling, underground duct bank, and pad mounted-oil-filled

transformers for new electrical services to building. B. Section Includes:

1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation 2. Grout, concrete 3. Access doors and frames 4. Common electrical installation requirements 5. Fire stopping 6. Cleanup/Touchup paint 7. Safety conditions 8. AF/AI material and equipment 9. EXCHANGE furnished, Contractor installed equipment




1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals. 1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce

headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other

installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. 5. To maintain access and keep passageways clear.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,

masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished

surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section ‘Access Doors and Frames’.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping

specified in Division 07 Section ‘penetration Firestoppping’. 1.6 CODES AND CRITERIA

A. Systems will be designed to comply with the following:

1. International Building Code as modified by UFC 1-200-01 2. International Energy Conservation Code 3. International Fire Alarm Code 4. National Electric Code 5. ASHRAE Standard 90.1, 2004 Energy Standards for Buildings 6. Americans with Disability Act (ADA) 7. ANSI/TIA 942 – Telecom Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers 8. UFC 3-400-01 Energy Conservation 9. UFC 3-501-03N Electrical Engineering Preliminary Considerations 10. UFC 3-520-01 Interior Electrical Systems 11. UFC 3-530-01 Interior and Exterior Lighting and Controls 12. UFC 3-55-03 FA Electrical Power Supply and Distribution 13. UFC 3-550-03N Power Distribution Systems




14. UFC 3-560-01 Electrical Safety, O&M; with Change 2 15. UFC 3-580-01 Telecommunications Building Cabling Systems Planning and Design 16. UFC 3-600-01 Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities 17. UFC 3-600-02 O&M: Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Fire Protection System 18. UFC 4-010-01 DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standard for Buildings 19. DoD 5200.1-R DoD Information Security Program 20. DCID 6/9 Physical Security for Sensitive Compartmented Information Facilities 21. JAFAN 6/9 Physical Security Standards for Special Access Program Facilities (DOS) 22. Real Estate Standards

1.7 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, non-metallic aggregate grout, non-corrosive, non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

1.9 CONCRETE

A. Cast-in-Place concrete for Lighting pole bases, housekeeping pads, transformer pads, etc. shall be the responsibility of each section of Division 26.

B. Cast-in-Place concrete shall comply with Division 03 requirements.

1.10 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Access panels shall be the responsibility of each related section of Division 26. All access doors on the project are to be the product of one manufacturer and are to meet the requirements of Division 08 Section ‘Access Doors and Frames’. Closely coordinate the type of access doors and locations with all other Divisions.

B. Where required for access to hidden junction boxes or other Division 26 equipment, the doors

shall be sized as necessary to provide proper working clearance. Provide access door at all roll-up gate motors above gypboard ceilings.

C. Provide identification tags for all Division 26 access doors.

1.11 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit

for wall-mounting items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange

and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of

both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. F. All material and equipment shall be installed symmetrical, level, plumb, parallel and perpendicular

to other building systems and components, except where otherwise indicated.




G. Use ‘waterguard’ compound for all watertight seals to outside or freezer/coolers.

1.12 UTILITIES

A. Power: Coordinate requirements with Base or Fort requirements and local servicing utility. B. Telephone: Coordinate requirements with Base or Fort requirements and local servicing utility.

1.13 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’.

1.14 CLEANUP

A. Removal of refuse, debris, cuttings, packaging, cartons, etc. for work provided under Division 26 shall be the responsibility of each related section of Division 26.

B. Cleanup shall be done continually during construction, at sufficient frequency to eliminate hazard

to the public, occupants, workmen, the premise and adjacent property. C. Before acceptance of the installation, carefully clean cabinets, panels, boxes, wiring devices,

cover plates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces of apparatus shall be removed and new finish equal to the original applied.

1.16 TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Touch up or repair of factory finishes that are scratched or marred in shipment or installation shall be the responsibility shall be the responsibility of each related section of Division 26.

B. Thoroughly clean damaged areas and provide primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the

degree of damage at each location. C. Follow paint manufacturer’s written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and

application of successive coats. D. Repairs shall be made to the satisfaction of the Government and Contracting Officer.

1.17 SAFETY CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The duty of the Contracting Officer to conduct construction observations of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's performance measures, in, on, or near the construction site.

B. Furnish, erect and maintain all barricades, guard structures, warning signs, detour signs, lights

and flares as may be required to protect and safeguard from injury or damage. C. Provide bracing, scaffolding, guard rails and protective devices necessary to protect workmen

and personnel from personal injury due to electrical installations while on the jobsite.




D. Contractor shall be liable for all damage and injury occurring to the Government’s property on or in the adjacent areas of the work, or which shall occur to any person or property whatsoever by reason of the negligence of the Contractor or any of his employees, or sub- Contractors, or of any breach or violation of the provisions of this agreement, or of any of his duties or obligations under the contract.

E. Temporary power used for construction shall be ground fault protected.

1.18 EXCHANGE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A. Certain items of equipment will be furnished and installed by EXCHANGE. See drawings references to (AF/AI).

1. See Division 10.

B. The Contractor shall provide coordinate and cooperation with personnel installing Exchange furnished materials and equipment, should overlap of work occur.

1.19 TYPICAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (AF/AI)

A. Equipment or material to be furnished and installed by Exchange but not limited to, is as follows and as indicated on the drawings:

1. All store shelving and fixtures. 2. Check-out fixtures in. 3. Close circuit (CCTV) video security system equipment and wiring 4. Graphic signage. 5. Microwaves, refrigerators, washer and dryer 6. Safes, printers, meat slicer, cash registers, etc. 7. ATM Machines

8. Dry storage shelving 9. ELCC Communications and Center Equipment (as indicated) 10. Slotwall 11. EAS Merchandise Detectors 12. Signage 1.20 FINAL CONNECTIONS

A. All final electrical connections to Exchange furnished and installed equipment shall be made by the Electrical Contractor as part of the construction contract. The electrical contractor shall provide all conduit, wire, J-boxes, and miscellaneous equipment necessary and make the equipment operational.

B. The Contractor shall adjust all wire sizes and breakers, and disconnect sizes, at no extra cost to

the Owner. This cost shall be included in the Bid for connection to all EXCHANGE provided equipment.

1.21 EXCHANGE FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A. The material noted below will be furnished by the Exchange and shall be installed and made operational by the Contractor. See drawing references to (AF/CI). The Contractor shall provide for and cooperate with personnel furnishing the designated material.




B. Provide all conduit and wire to equipment. Electrical Contractor shall field verify nameplate rating prior to pulling in wire and purchasing and installation of disconnects, breakers, etc. after all equipment is on site and ready for installation.

C. Provide cost in bid to adjust all breakers, conduits, wire size, disconnect sizes either direction

larger or smaller to equipment after equipment is on site.

1.22 DELIVERY

A. Contractor shall unload, handle, store, protect, uncrate, assemble, set in final position, align, join, and level all Exchange-furnished material, and shall make all utility connections thereto. Exchange will provide supervision for installation of the material. Electrical Contractor shall field verify nameplate ratings of the equipment prior to pulling in wire and making final connections. Contractor shall adjust wire sizes and breaker disconnect sizes (either direction larger or smaller) at no extra cost to the Owner. This cost shall be included in Bid.

1.23 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (AF/CI)

A. Contractor shall install and make connections but not limited to the following Exchange furnished items at locations indicated on drawings:

1. Walk-in coolers and freezers 2. ELCC Communications Center Equipment (as indicated) 3. Sales Area cornice (gondolas) fixtures with Contractor provided lamps

B. Execution

1. Provide matching receptacles, three phase and single phase for all cord plug equipment. Provide and include different receptacle combinations from Exchange documents for equipment being furnished with different plug and amp ratings than cut sheet furnished during design. Include cost in bid.

2. Equipment Branch Circuits: Provide different breakers to make connections to Exchange

equipment with different amp rating. Install in finished walls and ceilings. Include cost in bid. 3. Provide labor and material to pull out new wiring to Food Court equipment that doesn’t match

equipment and replace with new wire to match amp rating or to meet NEC. Allow the cost of conduit wire to be replaced due to mis-matched equipment and difference in Exchange equipment. Include cost in bid.

C. Walk-In Coolers and Freezers:

1. Contractor shall provide all conduit and wire to and make all freezer and cooler condenser

connections plus provide and install phase protection on condensers. Normal electrical requirements for cooler and freezer condensing units, 208-230/60/3; freezer evaporator coils 208-230/60/1 and cooler evaporator coils 115/60/1.

2. Contractor shall provide conduit and wire between condensers and freezers, condensers and

coolers or reach-in units. 3. Contractor shall provide a separate 3/4” conduit between each condenser and the evaporator

units with 6#12 for control wiring or per Shop Drawing.




4. Contractor shall provide separate 120 volt circuits to each evaporator unit per shop drawing 3#10-3/4”C or per Shop Drawing.

5. The Contractor shall provide conduit and wire 3#10-3/4”C or per final Shop Drawing and

make all connections to all light switches with pilot lights, temperature control, light fixtures, door heaters, drain pipe and provide heat tape on drain with thermostat for a complete and working system.

6. Contractor shall provide an electrician and allow 40 hours for field connections per Exchange

freezer/cooler supplier requirements for each unit. END OF SECTION 26 05 00



Low Voltage Power Conductors-Cables 26 05 19 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-tions, Division 01 Specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables


1. Division 27 Section ‘Communications Horizontal Cabling’ for cabling used for voice and data

circuits. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Ar-ticle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intend-ed use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 and UL. C. Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site shall not be

used. 1.6 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

1.7 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES




A. Unified Facilities Criteria UFC 3-520-01, June 10, 2002 Edition, paragraph 6-2.4 allows aluminum conductors #4 and larger. For Navy projects do not specify aluminum conductors for interior dis-tribution circuits of 600 volts and less. All feeders from pad mounted transformer to main service switchboards shall be copper only, with compression connectors.

B. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. American Insulated Wire Corporation; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 5. Southwire Company.

C. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. D. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN, or XHHW. In arctic

conditions use only XHHW conductor insulation outside of building or underground or be-low slab.

E. Multi-conductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground

wire. Allowed by UFC 6.2.1, June 10, 2002 Edition. Do not install Type MC Cable without get-ting approval of local state electrical inspector or Fort of Base approval. Unified Facilities Criteria UPF 3-520-01, June 10, 2002 Edition, paragraph 6-2.1 allows MC Cable for branch circuit wiring. All bid prices shall be based on conduit and wire. MC Cable shall be submit-ted as a deduct cost to EXCHANGE and the Government.

1.8 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type and class for application and service indicated.

1.9 SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated ‘wall pipe’, equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,

with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inche

(1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application. D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping speci-

fied in Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’. 1.10 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between

sleeve and cable. C. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. In-

clude type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.




D. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. E. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or stainless steel of

length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing ele-ment.

1.11 ALUMINUM SUBSTITUTION

A. All calculations, distribution feeders and circuits shall be based on the use of copper conductors. All mechanical equipment feeders are to be copper only. All bid pricing shall be copper only. Provide credit back for aluminum substitution. Aluminum may be substituted for copper, for feeders #4 and larger under the following conditions:

1. Aluminum conductors shall be compact stranded, AA-8000 series aluminum-alloy conductors

equal to Alcan STABILOY or reviewed equal. 2. The conductor ampacity of the substituted aluminum conductor shall equal to or exceed the

copper conductor ampacity. 3. Aluminum conductor ampacity shall be as shown in the 75 degree C column of NEC Table

310.16. 4. All aluminum conductors shall be terminated with UL approved compression connectors. Pri-

or to termination all exposed ends that contact compression lugs shall be cleaned and coated with an oxide-inhibiting compound.

5. Aluminum Conductor Terminations in mechanical compression lugs shall utilize a compres-

sion connector with a stranded copper pigtail equal to T&B Bi-Pin. 6. Terminations on bus or lugs shall utilize one or two hole compression lugs. 7. Aluminum substitution is at the risk of the Contractor. All equipment requiring copper connec-

tions and feeders to meet UL Listing requirements or manufacturer's recommendations shall be fed from the overcurrent device to the unit with copper conductors. It shall be the contrac-tor’s responsibility to verify that aluminum feeders are acceptable for the equipment being served with the manufacturer.

8. Splicing on copper pigtails on an aluminum wire is prohibited unless rated for splicing to alu-

minum.

9. As allowed under Unified Facilities Criteria, UFC 3-520-01 1.12 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

Conductors for remote control, alarm and signal circuits, Class 1, 2, and 3 shall be stranded un-less specifically indicated otherwise.

C. Aluminum Conductors: From UFC 2.9.1.2.




D. Color Coding: UFC 2.g.2, 262000 page 24 or from master specifications. E. Minimum conductor sizes to be as follows:

Lighting and power branch circuits #12 AWG Min Control circuits for motors and generators #14 AWG Min Grounding Conductor #12 AWG Min

F. Provide conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20 degrees C (68 degrees F).

.1.13 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS.

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN or XHHW, single conductors in raceway. B. Feeders Exposed or Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-

THWN or XHHW, single conductors in raceway. Metal-clad cable, Type MC as allowed by NFPA 70.

C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, Below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN

or XHHW, single conductors in raceway. D. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN or XHHW, single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad

cable, Type MC and listed for cable tray use. E. Branch Circuits Concealed Below Slab on Grade, in Concrete, in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions:

Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC as allowed by NFPA 70.

F. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-

steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. G. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. H. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, power-limited cable, concealed in build-

ing finishes, Power-limited tray cable, in cable tray. 1.14 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended maxi-mum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will

not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to walls, ceilings and surfaces of exposed struc-

tural members. Conceal all exposed cable from view and follow structural contours where possi-ble.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section ‘Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems’.

1.15 CONNECTIONS




A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or

better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150mm).

1.16 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping speci-fied in Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed

openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16

inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). 2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and one or

more sides equal to, or great than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies un-

less openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces. G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) annular clear space between sleeve and cable un-

less sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with ap-proved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve

and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Divi-sion 07 Section ‘Joint Sealants’.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and

floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’.

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing

units applied in coordination with roofing work.




M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve

seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25 mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron ‘wall pipes’ for sleeves. Size sleeves to

allow for 1-inch (25 mm) annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1.17 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and

size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assembly mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing ele-ments to expand and make watertight seal.

1.18 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore origi-nal fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’.


A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test

service entrance and feeder conductors. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Ac-

ceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Remove and replace any defective wire or cable. END OF SECTION 26 05 19



Grounding-Bonding 26 05 26 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:

1. Underground distribution grounding. 2. Common ground bonding with lightning protection system

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Test wells 2. Ground rods 3. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 4. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals:

1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells based on NFPA 70B.

a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do not.

b. Include recommended testing intervals.





A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

1.5 MANUFACTURERS: subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: 1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. ERICO International Corporation 3. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 4. ILSCO 5. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group.

1.6 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

C. Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles:

1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper. 2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-treated fir or

cypress or cedar.




D. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50 mm) in cross

section, unless otherwise indicated; with insulators.

1.7 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. CADWELD® or approved equal.

D. Compression connectors of types recommended by manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

1.8 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: copper-clad, 3/4 inch by10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter.

B. Chemical-Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, charged with non-hazardous electrolytic chemical salts.

1. Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches (1200 mm) long.

2. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.

1.9 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. Equipment ground conductors shall be green insulated, unless otherwise noted.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum to meet NFPA 70B.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.

2. Duct bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when indicated as part of duct bank installation.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.




D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch (25 mm), minimum, from wall 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of

doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus.

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

1.9 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install four ground rods and ground ring around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from the foundation. Verify grounding requirement with local military base electrical shop and Contracting Officer. Change grounding to meet local Base standards.

1.10 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:




1. Feeders and branch circuits.

2. Lighting circuits.

3. Receptacle circuits.

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

6. Flexible raceway runs.

7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.

9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-era power panels and power-distribution units.

10. All raceways.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and het-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment and components.

E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AQWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a l/4-by-2-by-12 inch (6-by-50-by300 mm) grounding bus.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.




H. Metal and Wood Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

1.11 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. The resistance to ground shall be measured using the Fall-of-Potential method described in IEEE Std. 81. The maximum resistance of a driven ground rod shall not exceed 25 Ohms under normal dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with two rods, add additional rods on 10 ft centers.

C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Division 26 section ‘Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems’, and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.

1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. Make exothermal welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer’s written recommendations. Wels which are ‘puffed up’ or show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable, nor are welds that break when hit with a hammer.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building’s main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.




2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

4. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.

F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

G. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart.

H. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, using a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.

1. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.

I. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit. Use only where lightning protection systems are required by Base or Authorities Having Jurisdiction.


A. Testing Agency: Government will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by Fall-Of-Potential method according to IEEE 81.




3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

D. Resistance: Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system shall not exceed 5 Ohms under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 Ohms, contact Contracting Officer to witness additional testing until 5 Ohms is obtained.

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, promptly reduce ground resistance.




Raceway Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.


1. Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior duct banks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:




1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.

C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

D. Source quality-control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFC cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Electri-Flex Co. 5. O-Z Gedney; a unit of general Signal. 6. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1; UL 6

1. Rigid threaded zinc-coated steel conduit.

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6; UL 1242

1. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)

D. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit or IMC.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.

E. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.




2. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, compression type. [Use steel for south NAVFENGCOM projects].

3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch (1 mm), with

overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

H. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

1.7 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Arnco Corporation. 3. Condux International, Inc. 4. ElecSYS, Inc. 5. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 6. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

C. LFNC: UL 1660

D. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC3, match to conduit type and material.

E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

1.8 OPTICAL FIBER/COMMUNICATIONS CABLE RACEWAY AND FITTINGS


1. Arnco Corporation. 2. Endot Industries Inc. 3. IPEX Inc. 4. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible type, approved for plenum, riser, or general-use installations.

1.9 METAL WIREWAYS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. G.E. 3. Eaton Corporation. 4. Square D; Schneider Electric.




B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type, screw-cover type, or flanged-and-gasketed type, rated for location installed.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

1.10 SURFACE RACEWAYS


1. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 2. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 3. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: UL5 two-piece, painted, totally enclosed galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer’s standard enamel finish in color or as selected by EXCHANGE.

1. A full compliment of fittings shall be provided as required for a complete raceway system, including but not limited to, flat, internal and external elbows, tees, entrance fittings, cover clips, wire clips, support clips and end caps. The fittings shall match the base and cover. All fittings shall be supplied with a base where applicable. Transition fittings shall be available to adapt to an existing flush wall box.

2. Device fittings with faceplate and ID labels shall be available to mount stand and devices and device faceplates in single gang configurations.

1.11 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. EGS/Appleton Electric. 2. Hoffman. 3. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 4. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 5. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 6. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 7. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

B. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

E. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.




F. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum or galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

J. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

1.12 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray or Green. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open or closed bottom,

unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load

rating consistent with enclosure 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.", "TELEPHONE.", “FIBER” or as applicable for

each service. 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for

secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and

pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.

C. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:




1. Armorcast Products Company. 2. Carson Industries LLC. 3. CDR Systems Corporation. 4. NewBasis.

1.13 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated ‘wall pipe’, equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch (1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’.

1.14 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

B. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable products by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Cal Pico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seals and Insulator, Inc.

1.15 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC or RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC as allowed by local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, EMT or as allowed by local

Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40 or 80-PVC, direct buried.




4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R or 4. 6. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:

a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for

Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit or IMC. Includes

raceways in the following locations or as otherwise indicated:

a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit, IMC or EMT, with weathertight fittings.

6. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental

Air: Plenum-type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway in EMT.

7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser-type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway in EMT

8. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or

Communications Cable: General-use, optical fiber/communications cable raceway, plenum-type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway in EMT

9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless

steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch (16-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.




2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.

1.16 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which only two bends are allowed..

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded under Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Change from Type EPC-40-VC to rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor.

4. All raceway shall be 12” to 18” minimum below slab, seal around barrier.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Install pull cords in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Identify each end to indicate destination.

L. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Unless otherwise noted, install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:

1. 3/4-inch (19 mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet (15

m).




2. 1-Inch (25-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet (23 m).

3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

N. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C), and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m).

1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)] temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature

change. c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70

deg C) temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change.

3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

O. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

P. Recessed Boxes on Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

Q. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.




R. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

1.17 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit.

2. Install backfill and compact in 6” lifts. 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction.

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building

entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at

building entrances through the floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit

horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

c. Tape wrap all rigid steel conduits and elbows below grade.

1.18 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a minimum of 6” level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.




F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

1.19 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floors and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm)

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide ¼ inch (6.4 mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section ‘Joint Sealants’ for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’.

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.




M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25 mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron ‘wall pipes’ for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25 mm) annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1.20 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

1.21 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section ‘Penetration Firestopping’.

1.22 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer.




Identification 26 05 53 - 1

SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products. 9. Device plate identification

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. All material and equipment supplied under this contract shall be identified with an Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) label.




F. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

G. Comply with State adopted electrical codes.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

1.6 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on a white field 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm) high

letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

G. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends.




1.7 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

1. Black letters on a white field, or per NEC. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high

letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

1.8 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

1.9 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.




D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

1.10 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

1.11 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.

3. Detectable tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading

when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.

2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.

3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE,

1.12 IDENTIFICATION TAGS AND LABELS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment Identification Tags: Two-ply phenolic plastic, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, beveled edges, double stick tape. Black field with ½” high white letters.

1.13 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:




1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT

OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."

3. Flash protection markings as required by NEC.

1.14 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

1.15 DEVICE PLATE LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Engraved plate with 1/4 inch (6.4mm) high lettering filled with enamel paint. Black for normal systems, red for emergency systems.

B. Accessible Junction and Pull Boxes Within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system, system voltage and circuit number within. Boxes located in accessible ceilings shall have permanent marker pen on outside cover plate, approximately ½ inch (12.5m) high letters, black for normal systems, red for emergency.

1.16 CABLE TIES

A. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2 MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black.




1.17 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

1.18 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Provide identification as required by NEC and State adopted codes to indicate series ratings, flash protection, disconnecting means, or other information required by Code.

G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

H. Wraparound Marker Labels: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

I. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

J. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line detectable warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

K. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

L. Provide identification plates for all disconnect switches which identify the circuit source (panelboard and circuit number) that supplies the disconnect, per NEC and all adopted State code requirements.




M. Equipment Identification, Emergency Systems: All boxes and enclosures, for Article 700 NEC systems larger than six inches by six inches, including transfer switches, generators, and power panels for emergency systems and circuits must be permanently identified with an identification plate that is substantially orange in color. All other device and junction boxes for emergency systems and circuits must be substantially orange in color, both inside and outside.

N. Provide warning signs for rooms, which contain wiring over 600 volts per NEC requirements. Screw signs to the outside of the room door.

O. Where a building or structure is supplied by more than one service, identify the location of all services with permanent plaques per NEC Article 230.

1.19 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase and pre-printed labels identifying circuit numbers and panel designations.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral: White

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral: Gray

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive-backed phase and voltage tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals.

D. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl or Snap-around labels. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals.




E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags or marker tape to conductors and list source.

F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used

by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

H. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

I. Warning Labels for Indoor or Outdoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Phenolic engraved signs with 1/2” high letters.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system and voltage phase and where fed from. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of all

electrical equipment.

J. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

K. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used.

L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved phenolic plastic tags self-adhesive. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.




Switchboard/panelboard’ nameplates: center the nameplate near top of each switchboard/panel section. Label text to include:

- Equipment name, i.e. “Panel XXX” - Equipment voltage, phase, wire, i.e. “480Y/277V, 3PH, 4W+G” - Source, i.e. “Fed from panel XXX”

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved phenolic plastic tags self-adhesive and

mechanically attached with No. 4 chrome round head screws.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

e. Mount tags top and centered on outside of covers and doors.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Substations. h. Motor-control centers. i. Enclosed switches. 200A and above j. Enclosed circuit breakers, 200A and above k. Power transfer switches l. UPS equipment

N. Equipment Function Labels: On each electrical component associated with the control or disconnecting means of a pieced of equipment, install unique designation labels consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules and operation and maintenance of the equipment serviced. Match other equipment labels.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label b. Outdoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay

2. Equipment to be labeled:

a. Enclosed circuit breakers, 100A or less b. Safety switches, 100A or less c. Enclosed controllers. d. Variable-speed controllers. e. Push-button stations. f. Contactors. g. Remote-controlled switches, manual starters, timer switches, dimmer modules,

and control devices.




h. Battery-inverter units. i. Battery racks. j. Monitoring and control equipment.

O. Provide engraved plates or phenolic plastic nameplates at all switches installed for control of fans, pumps, remotely located lighting, illuminated signs, switched receptacles, contactors or other applications noted on the drawings.




Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 1

SECTION 26 09 23

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Outdoor and indoor photoelectric switches. 2. Indoor occupancy sensors. 3. Outdoor motion sensors. 4. Emergency shunt relays. 5. Wall box dimmers 6. Circuit control hardware


1. Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls" for low-voltage, manual and programmable lighting control systems.

2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy

sensors, and manual light switches. C. All areas and rooms shall have automatic and manual controls.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. PIR: Passive infrared.

C. BAS: Building Automation System.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.




C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

E. Manufacturer shall substantiate conformance to this specification by supplying the necessary documents, performance data and wiring diagrams. Any deviations to this specification must be clearly stated by letter and submitted.

F. Submit a lighting plan clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product, location and orientation of each sensor.

G. Submit any interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper wiring.

H. Submit standard catalog literature which includes performance specifications indicating compliance to the specification.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Products supplied shall be from a manufacturer that has been continuously involved in the manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five years.

C. All components shall be UL Listed, offer a five year warranty and meet all state and local applicable code requirements.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.7 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES


1. Intermatic, Inc. 2. Novitas, Inc. 3. TORK. 4. Touch-Plate, Inc. 5. Watt Stopper (The).

B. Description: Solid state, with SPST or DPST dry contacts (as required) rated for 1800 VA to operate connected load, relay, or contactor coils; complying with UL 773.

1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lx), with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.




2. Time Delay: 30-second minimum, to prevent false operation.

3. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type.

4. Mounting: Conduit body

5. Adjustable exposure shield

6. Slide sensor adjustment, die cast weatherproof housing. ½” threaded stem and six-inch

color coded #16 AWG wire leads.

1.8 INDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES


1. Intermatic, Inc. 2. Novitas, Inc. 3. TORK. 4. Touch-Plate, Inc. 5. Watt Stopper (The).

B. Ceiling-Mounted Photoelectric Switch: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate relay unit, to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye. Cadmium sulfide photoresistors are not acceptable.

1. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

2. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A

tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

3. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 10 to 200 fc (108 to 2152 lx), with an adjustment for turn-

on and turn-off levels within that range. 4. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling, with deadband

adjustment. 5. Indicator: Two LEDs to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.

C. Skylight Photoelectric Sensors: Solid-state, light-level sensor; housed in a threaded, plastic fitting for mounting under skylight, facing up at skylight; with separate relay unit, to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye. Cadmium sulfide photoresistors are not acceptable.

1. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.






3. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1000 to 10,000 fc (10 800 to 108 000 lx), with an

adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range. 4. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling, with deadband

adjustment. 5. Indicator: Two LEDs to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.

1.9 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Hubbell Lighting. 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 3. Novitas, Inc. 4. Sensor Switch, Inc. 5. TORK. 6. Watt Stopper (The).

B. System Description:

1. The objective of this section is to ensure the proper installation of the occupancy sensor based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after 30 minutes time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area.

2. The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate all conditions of space

utilization and all irregular work hours and habits.

3. Contractor shall warrant all equipment furnished in accordance to this specification to be undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in conformance with the specifications. The suppliers obligation shall include repair or replacement, and testing without charge to the Government, all or any parts of equipment which are found to be damaged, defective or non-conforming and returned to the supplier. The warranty shall commence upon the Government’s acceptance of the project. Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one year.

4. The Contractor shall be responsible to locate and install the occupancy sensors per the

selected manufacturer’s recommendations, to accomplish the intended automatic control for the areas indicated.

C. Product Requirements

1. Unit will be a line voltage occupancy sensor in either 120 volt or 277 volt and be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems and rated motor loads.

2. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No

automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.




3. Have readily accessible user adjustable controls for up to 15 minute time delay and sensitivity. Controls shall be recessed to limit tampering.

4. Be equipped with a bypass manual override for use in the event of a sensor failure. When

the bypass is utilized, lighting shall divert to the load side wall switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering.

5. Have a method of indication to verify that motion is being detected during testing and that

the unit is working.

6. Unit will be constructed of high impact plastics to assure vandal resistance.

7. For areas requiring multiple detectors, provide additional sensors, power packs, splitters, slave relays and harness cable as required.

8. If the device emits ultrasonic radiation as a signal for sensing occupants within an area,

the device shall have had a Radiation Safety Abbreviated Report submitted to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health, Federal Food and Drug Administration, under 21 Code of Federal Regulations, Section 1002.12 (1996).

9. If the device emits microwave radiation as a signal for sensing occupants within the area,

the device shall comply with all applicable provisions in 47 Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 2 and 15 (1996), and have an approved Federal Communications Commission Identifier that appears on all units of the device.

C. Dual technology occupancy sensors shall meet the following additional requirements:

1. Unit shall combine air transducer ultrasonic detection with passive infrared detectors to insure maximum detection ability.

2. Unit will be capable of detecting occupancy in an area of up to 2000 sq.ft. with no

detectable blind spots.

3. Unit will require no special hardware to complete installation on either a suspended or inaccessible ceiling.

4. Unit will have an accessible adjustable time delay of 30 seconds to 15 minutes

depending on application.

5. Unit will have an easily accessible sensitivity adjustment for all applications.

6. Unit will have a convenient shunt provision to by-pass the sensor in case of failure so lighting and HVAC may be operated manually.

7. Unit will employ a programmable dip switch to select sensing modes as dictated by

environmental factors.

8. Unit will employ a programmable dip switch to allow either detection technology to be independently configured.

9. Where specified, sensors shall offer day lighting foot-candle adjustment control and be

able to accommodate dual level lighting.

10. Unit shall have an additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally Closed and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, data logging and other control options.




Sensors utilizing separate components or specially modified units to achieve this function are not acceptable.

D. Wall sensors shall meet the following additional minimum requirements:

1. Unit shall be capable of detection of occupancy at desktop level up to 300 square feet, and gross motion up to 1000 square feet.

2. Unit shall accommodate loads from 0 to 800 watts at 120 volts; 9 to 1200 watts at 277

volts and shall have 180° coverage capability.

3. Unit shall have no leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto/Off mode, for safety purposes and shall have voltage drop protection.

4. Unit shall be dual technology only.

5. Unit shall be installed for manual ‘ON’, auto ‘OFF’ operation.

E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection or PIR and ultraphonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area

of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

F. Wall switch sensor with integral relay. Dual technology with two circuit capability for a/b switching sensors. Manual ‘ON’, auto ‘OFF’ operation unless specified otherwise.

1.10 OUTDOOR MOTION SENSORS (PIR)


1. Hubbell Lighting. 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 3. Novitas, Inc. 4. Sensor Switch, Inc. 5. TORK. 6. Watt Stopper (The).

B. Passive-infrared type, 120/277V, weatherproof, adjustable time delay up to 15 minutes, 180-degree field of view, and 110-foot (34m) detection range. Minimum switch rating: 1000W incandescent, 500 VA fluorescent.




C. Performance Requirements: Suitable for operation in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 130 deg F (minus 40 to plus 54 deg C), rated as rain-tight according to UL 773A.

1. Operation: Turn lights on when sensing infrared energy changes between background and moving body in area of coverage; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

2. Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outdoor junction box. b. Relay: Internally mounted in a standard weatherproof electrical enclosure.

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

3. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure. 4. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 1 to 20 fc (11 to 215 lx); keep lighting off

during daylight hours.

D. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm).

E. Detection Coverage: 110 foot (34 m) with a field of view of 180 degrees.

F. Lighting Fixture Mounted Sensor: Suitable for switching lamp/ballast within fixture at voltage rated.

G. Individually Mounted Sensor: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.



2. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal

operation of the sensor.

1.11 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY

A. Description: Normally closed, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual or automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924.

1. Coil Rating: 120 or 277 V as required.

1.12 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."




B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multi-conductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 22 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multi-conductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 16 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

1.13 WALL BOX DIMMERS A. Wall box dimmers shall be the quality as defined below and compatible with the dimming

ballasts provided in the various dimming fixtures: 1. Solid State Triac Dimming: Dimmers shall utilize solid-state triacs rated for a minimum of

150% of the control’s rated capacity. 2. Surge Protection: Dimmer shall be tested to withstand voltage surges of up to 6000V and

current surges of 200A without damage. Controls shall meet ANSI/IEEE Standard C62.41-1980.

3. Filtering Network: Dimmer shall utilize large toroidal chokes to minimize radio frequency

interference. 4. Air-Gap Switch: Dimmer shall totally disconnect power from the load in Off position by an

accessible air-gap switch, such that there is no leakage current present at fixtures. 5. Heat Transfer: Dimmer shall incorporate full-sized heat sinks to transfer heat away from

integral components, reducing operating temperatures. 6. Power Failure memory: Dimmer shall restore light to same level set prior to power failure. 7. Voltage Compensation: Dimmer shall include voltage compensation to stabilize light output

from variations in the AC line-voltage. Dimmers in which the light output is not held constant with varying AC line-voltage shall not be acceptable.

8. Listing: Dimmer shall be solid state, UL listed specifically for each required load. 9. Electrostatic discharge Protection: Dimmer shall not be susceptible to damage or loss of

memory due to 16K volt static discharges. 10. Smooth Continuous Dimming: Dimmer shall provide flicker-free and continuously variable

control of light intensity.

11. Three-Way Locations: Dimmer shall be capable of operating in either three-way switch location.

12. Device and coverplate finish to match wall switches on project.

13. Size dimmers for connected load.

14. Where dimmers are ganged together, provide a single multi-gang coverplate.

1.14 CIRCUIT CONTROL HARDWARE




A. Control units shall be complete with an isolated load switching control relay and low voltage transformer.

B. Relay contacts shall have ratings of:

13A – 120 VAC Tungsten 20A – 120 VAC Ballast 20A – 277 VAC Ballast C. Control wiring between sensors and control units shall be Class II, 18-24 AWG, stranded UL

Classified, PVC insulated or Teflon jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums, where applicable.

1.15 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. In exterior applications, locate photocell in an area devoid of artificial light which may cause false on/off. Select location not subject to tampering. Verify location with Contracting Officer prior to rough-in.

B. Contractor’s work to include all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system, as described herein.

C. Contractor/Supplier shall examine all general specification provisions and drawings for related electrical work required as work under Division 26.

D. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to locate and aim sensory in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Rooms shall have 90 to 100 percent coverage to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the rooms. The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. The Contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective rooms.

E. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain installation diagrams from the manufacturer or an authorized factory representative, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria.

F. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. The Contractor shall also provide, at the Government’s facility, the training necessary to familiarize the Government’s personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems.

G. Adjust the time delay on all sensors for 15 minutes.

H. All switches associated with the occupancy sensor are to be wired in series, on the load side of the sensor. Switches are not to be wired so that the sensor can be bypassed. They can only operate the light fixtures while the sensor is detecting occupancy.




I. Where sensor wiring is exposed it shall be installed in conduit.

1.16 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

B. For multiple exterior lighting circuits, provide contactors mounted in a separate matching, lockable enclosure.

1.17 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm).

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

E. Provide all associated wiring required for control of exterior lighting circuits.

1.18 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Perform the following field service and commissioning inspections:

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.

Set sensitivity to detect motion and/or sound immediately upon room entry and from anywhere within the space to be covered. Set timer to turn off lights 15 minutes after occupancy is not detected.




B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.

C. Provide commissioning reports to Government and Contracting Officer.

1.20 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1.21 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control system specified in Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls."

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Government's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

C. Factory Commissioning: It shall be the manufacturer’s responsibility to verify all proper adjustments and train Government’s personnel to ensure Government’s satisfaction with the occupancy system. This service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Government. Include all cost in the Division 26 Bid.

1.22 CONTROL OF EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Control of exterior lighting fixtures shall be provided as follows:

1. Security Lighting Circuit(s): Dusk to dawn operation. Control device is to be the Division 26 provided network lighting controls.

2. General Lighting Circuit(s): Dusk to selected shut off time operation. Control device is to

be the Division 26 provided network lighting controls.

1.23 FACTORY COMMISSIONING

A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely commissioned by the manufacturer’s factory authorized technician who will verify all adjustments and sensor placement to ensure a trouble-free occupancy-based lighting control system. This service is to be included in the electrical bid.

B. Lighting Control Acceptance: Before a new lighting system serving a building, space, or site is operated for normal use, all indoor and outdoor lighting controls serving the building, space, or site shall be certified as meeting the Acceptance Requirements for Code Compliance. A Certificate of Acceptance shall be submitted.



Network Lighting Control 26 09 43 - 1

SECTION 260943

NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Digital Lighting Controls

2. Relay Panels

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles

2. Section 265100 – Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps, and Ballasts: Fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts.

3. Section 235511 – Integrated Automation Building integrator shall provide integration of the lighting control system with Building Automation Systems.

4. Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section

5. Electrical Sections, including wiring devices, apply to the work of this Section.

C. Control Intent – Control Intent includes, but is not limited to:

1. Defaults and initial calibration settings for such items as time delay, sensitivity, fade rates, etc.

2. Initial sensor and switching zones

3. Initial time switch settings

4. Task lighting and receptacle controls

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE)

B. Underwriter Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

C. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

D. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)




E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

F. WD1 (R2005) - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices.

G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. 20 – Plug Load Controls 2. 916 – Energy Management Equipment. 3. 924 – Emergency Lighting

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION & OPERATION

A. The Lighting Control and Automation system as defined under this section covers the following equipment:

1. Digital Occupancy Sensors – Self-configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) communications.

2. Digital Switches – Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton on/off, dimming, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications.

3. Handheld remotes for personal control – One-button dimming, two-button on/off, or five-button scene remotes provide control using infrared communications. Remote may be configured in the field to control selected loads or scenes without special tools.

4. Digital Daylighting Sensors – Single-zone closed loop, multi-zone open loop and single-zone dual-loop daylighting sensors with two-way active infrared (IR) communications can provide switching, bi-level, tri-level or dimming control for daylight harvesting.

5. Digital Room Controllers – Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two or three relay plenum-rated controllers for on/off control. Selected models include 0-10 volt or line voltage forward phase control dimming outputs and integral current monitoring capabilities.

6. Configuration Tools – Handheld remote for room configuration and relay panel programming provides two way infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device / room from up to 30 feet away. Unit to have Organic LED display, simple pushbutton interface, and allow bi-directional communication of room variables and occupancy sensor settings. Computer software also customizes room settings.

7. Digital Lighting Management (DLM) local network – Free topology, plug-in wiring system (Cat 5e) for power and data to room devices.

8. Digital Lighting Management (DLM) segment network – Linear topology, BACnet MS/TP network (1.5 twisted pair, shielded,) to connect multiple DLM local networks for centralized control

9. Network Bridge – provides BACnet MS/TP-compliant digital networked communication between rooms, panels and the Segment Manager or




building automation system (BAS) and automatically creates BACnet objects representative of connected devices.

10. Segment Manager – provides web browser-based user interface for system control, scheduling, power monitoring, room device parameter administration and reporting.

11. Programming and Configuration software – Optional PC-native application capable of accessing DLM control parameters within a room, for the local network, via a USB adapter, or globally, for many segment networks simultaneously, via BACnet/IP communication.

12. LMCP Digital Lighting Management Relay Panel – provides up to 8, 24, or 48 mechanically latching relays. Relays include a manual override and a single push-on connector for easy installation or removal from the panel. Panel accepts program changes from handheld configuration tool for date and time, location, holidays, event scheduling, button binding and group programming. Provides BACnet MS/TP-compliant digital networked communication between other lighting controls and/or building automation system (BAS).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals Package: Submit the shop drawings, and the product data specified below at the same time as a package.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Composite wiring and/or schematic diagram of each control circuit as proposed to be installed.

2. Show exact location of all digital devices, including at minimum sensors, room controllers, and switches for each area on reflected ceiling plans. (Contractor must provide AutoCAD format reflected ceiling plans.)

3. Provide room/area details including products and sequence of operation for each room or area. Illustrate typical acceptable room/area connection topologies.

4. Network riser diagram including floor and building level details. Include network cable specification and end-of-line termination details, if required. Illustrate points of connection to integrated systems. Coordinate integration with mechanical and/or other trades.

C. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions.

D. Include data for each device which:

1. Indicates where sensor is proposed to be installed.

2. Prove that the sensor is suitable for the proposed application.





A. Manufacturer: Minimum [10] years experience in manufacture of lighting controls.


A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive equipment:

1. Ambient temperature: 0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F).

2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide a five year limited manufacturer’s warranty on all room control devices and panels.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer:

1. WattStopper

a. System: Digital Lighting Management (DLM)

2. Basis of design product: WattStopper Digital Lighting Management (DLM) or subject to compliance and prior approval with specified requirements of this section, one of the following:

a. Intelligent Lighting Controls, Inc.

b. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc.

c. Lighting Control & Design, Inc.

2.2 DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS

A. Furnish the Company’s system which accommodates the square-footage coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors, switches, daylighting sensors and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters.

2.3 DIGITAL WALL SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wallbox mounted passive infrared PIR or dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic) digital occupancy sensor with 1 or 2 switch buttons.

B. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide scrolling LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following:

1. Digital calibration and pushbutton configuration for the following variables:




a. Sensitivity – 0-100% in 10% increments

b. Time delay – 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments

c. Test mode – Five second time delay

d. Detection technology – PIR, Dual Technology activation and/or re-activation.

e. Walk-through mode

f. Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network.

2. Programmable control functionality including:

a. Each sensor may be programmed to control specific loads within a local network.

b. Sensor shall be capable of activating one of 16 user-definable lighting scenes.

c. Adjustable retrigger time period for manual-on loads. Load will retrigger (turn on) automatically during the configurable period of time (default 10 seconds) after turning off.

d. On dual technology sensors, independently configurable trigger modes are available for both Normal (NH) and After Hours (AH) time periods. The retrigger mode can be programmed to use the following technologies:

i Ultrasonic and Passive Infrared

ii Ultrasonic or Passive Infrared

iii Ultrasonic only

iv Passive Infrared only

3. Independently configurable sensitivity settings for passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies (on dual technology sensors) for both Normal (NH) and After Hour (AH) time periods.

4. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.

5. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld configuration tool and control by remote personal controls.

6. Device Status LEDs including:

a. PIR detection

b. Ultrasonic detection

c. Configuration mode

d. Load binding

7. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools.




8. Assignment of local buttons to specific loads within the room without wiring or special tools

9. Manual override of controlled loads.

10. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual wall switch sensor shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the wall switch sensor itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.

C. BACnet object information shall be available for the following objects:

1. Detection state

2. Occupancy sensor time delay

3. Occupancy sensor sensitivity, PIR and Ultrasonic

4. Button state

5. Switch lock control

6. Switch lock status

D. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.

E. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required.

F. Two-button wall switch occupancy sensors, when connected to a single relay dimming room controller, shall operate in the following sequence as a factory default:

1. Left button

a. Press and release - Turn load on

b. Press and hold - Raise dimming load

2. Right button

a. Press and release - Turn load off

b. Press and hold - Lower dimming load

G. Low voltage momentary pushbuttons shall include the following features:

1. Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:

a. Bi-level LED

b. Dim locator level indicates power to switch

c. Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active

2. The following button attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:

a. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa).




b. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only.

c. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.

d. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours.

e. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.

f. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependent; each button may be bound to multiple loads.

H. WattStopper part numbers: LMPW, LMDW. Available in white, light almond, ivory, grey, red and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening.

2.4 DIGITAL WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR

A. Wall or ceiling mounted (to suit installation) passive infrared (PIR), ultrasonic or dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor.

B. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following:

1. Digital calibration and pushbutton configuration for the following variables:

a. Sensitivity – 0-100% in 10% increments

b. Time delay – 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments

c. Test mode – Five second time delay

d. Detection technology – PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or re-activation.

e. Walk-through mode

f. Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network.


a. Each sensor may be programmed to control specific loads within a local network.

b. Sensor shall be capable of activating one of 16 user-definable lighting scenes.

c. Adjustable retrigger time period for manual-on loads. Load will retrigger (turn on) automatically within a configurable period of time (default 10 seconds) after turning off.

d. On dual technology sensors, independently configurable trigger modes are available for both Normal (NH) and After Hours (AH)




time periods. The retrigger mode can be programmed to use the following technologies:

i Ultrasonic and Passive Infrared

ii Ultrasonic or Passive Infrared

iii Ultrasonic only

iv Passive Infrared only

3. Independently configurable sensitivity settings for passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies (on dual technology sensors) for both Normal (NH) and After Hour (AH) time periods.

4. One or two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to DLM local network.

5. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls.

6. Device Status LEDs, which may be disabled for selected applications, including:

a. PIR detection

b. Ultrasonic detection

c. Configuration mode

d. Load binding

7. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools.

8. Manual override of controlled loads.

9. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual occupancy sensor shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the sensor itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.

B. BACnet object information shall be available for the following objects:

1. Detection state

2. Occupancy sensor time delay

3. Occupancy sensor sensitivity, PIR and Ultrasonic

C. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.

D. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required.

E. WattStopper product numbers: LMPX, LMDX, LMPC, LMUC, LMDC

2.5 DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES

A. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configuration. Wall switches shall include the following features:




1. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls.

2. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttons and/or alternate color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall.

3. Configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission.

4. Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:

a. Bi-level LED

b. Dim locator level indicates power to switch

c. Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active

5. Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps.


a. Button priority may be configured to any BACnet priority level, from 1-16, corresponding to networked operation allowing local actions to utilize life safety priority

b. Scene patterns may be saved to any button other than dimming rockers. Once set, buttons may be digitally locked to prevent overwriting of the preset levels.

7. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual wall switch shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the wall switch itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.

B. BACnet object information shall be available for the following objects:

1. Button state

2. Switch lock control

3. Switch lock status

C. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.

D. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration shall be required to achieve multi-way switching.

E. The following switch attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:

1. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa).

2. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only.

3. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.




4. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours.

5. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.

6. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependant; each button may be bound to multiple loads.

F. WattStopper product numbers: LMSW-101, LMSW-102, LMSW-103, LMSW-104, LMSW-105, LMSW-108, LMDM-101. Available in white, light almond, ivory, grey, red and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening.

2.6 DIGITAL DAYLIGHTING SENSORS

A. Digital daylighting sensors shall work with room controllers to provide automatic switching, bi-level, or tri-level or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for any load type connected to a room controller. Daylighting sensors shall be interchangeable without the need for rewiring.

1. Closed loop sensors measure the ambient light in the space and control a single lighting zone.

2. Open loop sensors measure incoming daylight in the space, and are capable of controlling up to three lighting zones.

3. Dual loop sensors measure both ambient and incoming daylight in the space to insure that proper light levels are maintained as changes to reflective materials are made in a single zone.

B. Digital daylighting sensors shall include the following features:

1. The sensor’s internal photodiode shall only measure lightwaves within the visible spectrum. The photodiode’s spectral response curve shall closely match the entire photopic curve. The photodiode shall not measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell shall have a sensitivity of less than 5% for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers.

2. Sensor light level range shall be from 1-6,553 footcandles (fc).

3. The capability of ON/OFF, bi-level or tri-level switching, or dimming, for each controlled zone, depending on the selection of room controller(s) and load binding to room controller(s).

4. For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide a field-selectable deadband, or a separation, between the “ON Setpoint” and the “OFF Setpoint” that will prevent the lights from cycling excessively after they turn off.

5. For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide the option, when the daylight contribution is sufficient, of turning lights off or dimming lights to a field-selectable minimum level.

6. Photosensors shall have a digital, independently configurable fade rate for both increasing and decreasing light level in units of percent per second.

7. Photosensors shall provide adjustable cut-off time. Cut-off time is defined by the number of selected minutes the load is at the minimum output before the




load turns off. Selectable range between 0-240 minutes including option to never cut-off.

8. Optional wall switch override shall allow occupants to reduce lighting level to increase energy savings or, if permitted by system administrator, raise lighting levels for a selectable period of time or cycle of occupancy.

9. Integral infrared (IR) transceiver for configuration and/or commissioning with a handheld configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless configuration tool, and for communication with personal remote controls.

10. Configuration LED status light on device that blinks to indicate data transmission.

11. Status LED indicates test mode, override mode and load binding.

12. Recessed switch on device to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF.

13. BACnet object information shall be available for the following daylighting sensor objects, based on the specific photocell’s settings:

a. Light level

b. Day and night setpoints

c. Off time delay

d. On and off setpoints

e. Up to three zone setpoints

f. Operating mode – on/off, bi-level, tri-level or dimming

14. One RJ-45 port for connection to DLM local network.

15. A choice of accessories to accommodate multiple mounting methods and building materials. The photosensors may be mounted on a ceiling tile, skylight light well, suspended lighting fixture or backbox. Standard tube photosensors accommodate mounting materials from 0-0.62” thickness (LMLS-400, LMLS-500). Extended tube photosensors accommodate mounting materials from 0.62”-1.25” thickness (LMLS-400-L, LMLS-500-L). Mounting brackets are compatible with J boxes (LMLS-MB1) and wall mounting (LMLS-MB2). LMLS-600 photosensor to be mounted on included bracket below skylight well.

16. Any load or group of loads in the room can be assigned to a daylighting zone

17. Each load within a daylighting zone can be individually enabled or disabled for discrete control (load independence).

18. All digital parameter data programmed into a photosensor shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the photosensor itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.

C. Closed loop digital photosensors shall include the following additional features:

1. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 100-degree angle, cutting off the unwanted light from bright sources outside of this cone.

2. Automatic self-calibration, initiated from the photosensor, a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software.




3. Automatically establishes application-specific setpoints following self-calibration. For switching operation, an adequate deadband between the ON and OFF setpoints shall prevent the lights from cycling; for dimming operation a sliding setpoint control algorithm with separate Day and Night setpoints shall prevent abrupt ramping of loads.

4. WattStopper Product Number: LMLS-400, LMLS-400-L.

D. Open loop digital photosensors shall include the following additional features:

1. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 60-degree angle cutting off the unwanted light from the interior of the room.

2. Automatically establishes application-specific setpoints following manual calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software. For switching operation, an adequate deadband between the ON and OFF setpoints for each zone shall prevent the lights from cycling; for dimming operation, a proportional control algorithm shall maintain the design lighting level in each zone.

3. Each of the three discrete daylight zones can include any non overlapping group of loads in the room.

4. WattStopper Product Number: LMLS-500, LMLS-500-L.

2.7 DIGITAL ROOM CONTROLLERS AND PLUG-LOAD CONTROLLERS

A. Digital controllers for lighting and plug loads automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room and plug load controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting and plug load control requirements. The controllers will be simple to install, and will not have dip switches or potentiometers, or require special configuration for standard Plug n’ Go applications. The control units will include the following features:

1. Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room.

2. Simple replacement – Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf.

3. Multiple room controllers connected together in a local network must automatically prioritize each room controller, without requiring any configuration or setup, so that loads are sequentially assigned using room controller device ID’s from highest to lowest.

4. Device Status LEDs to indicate:

a. Data transmission

b. Device has power

c. Status for each load

d. Configuration status

5. Quick installation features including:

a. Standard junction box mounting




b. Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable

6. Based on individual configuration, each load shall be capable of the following behavior on power up following the loss of normal power:

a. Turn on to 100%

b. Remain off

c. Turn on to last level

7. Each load shall be configurable to operate in the following sequences based on occupancy:

a. Auto-on/Auto-off (Follow on and off)

b. Manual-on/Auto-off (Follow off only)

8. The polarity of each load output shall be reversible, via digital configuration, so that on is off and off is on.

9. BACnet object information shall be available for the following objects:

a. Load status

b. Electrical current

c. Total watts per controller

d. Schedule state – normal or after-hours

e. Demand response control and cap level

f. Room occupancy status

g. Total room lighting and plug loads watts

h. Total room watts/sq ft

i. Force on/off all loads

10. UL 2043 plenum rated

11. Manual override and LED indication for each load

12. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz), or 347 VAC, 60 Hz (selected models only). 120/277 volt models rated for 20A total load, derating to 16A required for some dimmed loads (forward phase dimming); 347 volt models rated for 15A total load; plug load controllers carry application-specific UL 20 rating for receptacle control.

13. Zero cross circuitry for each load

14. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual room controller or plug load controller shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the controller itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.

B. On/Off Room Controllers shall include:

1. One or two relay configuration

2. Efficient 150 mA switching power supply

3. Three RJ-45 DLM local network ports with integral strain relief and dust cover




4. WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-101, LMRC-102

C. On/Off/Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include:

1. Real time current monitoring

2. Multiple relay configurations a. One, two or three relays (LMRC-21x series) b. One or two relays (LMRC-22x series)

3. Efficient 250 mA switching power supply

4. Four RJ-45 DLM local network ports with integral strain relief and dust cover

5. One dimming output per relay

a. 0-10V Dimming - Where indicated, one 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible ballasts and LED drivers. The 0-10 volt output shall automatically open upon loss of power to the Room Controller to assure full light output from the controlled lighting. (LMRC-21x series)

b. Line Voltage, Forward Phase Dimming - Where indicated, one forward phase control line voltage dimming output per relay for control of compatible two-wire or three-wire ballasts, LED drivers, MLV, forward phase compatible ELV, neon/cold cathode and incandescent loads. (LMRC-22x series)

c. Each dimming output channel shall have an independently configurable minimum and maximum calibration trim level to set the dimming range to match the true dynamic range of the connected ballast or driver.

d. The LED level indicators on bound dimming switches shall utilize this new maximum and minimum trim.

e. Each dimming output channel shall have an independently configurable minimum and maximum trim level to set the dynamic range of the output within the new 0-100% dimming range defined by the minimum and maximum calibration trim.

f. Calibration and trim levels must be set per output channel.

g. Devices that set calibration or trim levels per controller are not acceptable.

h. All configuration shall be digital. Devices that set calibration or trim levels per output channel via trim pots or dip-switches are not acceptable.

6. Each load shall have an independently configurable preset on level for Normal Hours and After Hours events to allow different dimmed levels to be established at the start of both Normal Hours and After Hours events.

7. Fade rates for dimming loads shall be specific to bound switch buttons, and the load shall maintain a default value for any bound buttons that do not specify a unique value.

8. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:

b. Establish preset level for each load from 0-100%




c. Set high and low trim for each load

d. Set lamp burn in time for each load up to 100 hours

9. Override button for each load provides the following functions:

b. Press and release for on/off control

c. Press and hold for dimming control

10. WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-211, LRMC-212, LRMC-213, LMRC-221, LMRC-222

1.10 DLM LOCAL NETWORK (Room Network)

A. The DLM local network is a free topology lighting control physical connection and communication protocol designed to control a small area of a building.

B. Features of the DLM local network include:

1. Plug n’ Go® automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached.

2. Simple replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit without requiring commissioning, configuration or setup.

3. Push n’ Learn® configuration to change the automatic configuration, including binding and load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the digital devices in the local network.

4. Two-way infrared communications for control by handheld remotes, and configuration by a handheld tool including adjusting load parameters, sensor configuration and binding, within a line of sight of up to 30 feet from a sensor, wall switch or IR receiver.

C. Digital room devices connect to the local network using pre-terminated Cat 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors, which provide both data and power to room devices. Systems that utilize RJ-45 patch cords but do not provide serial communication data from individual end devices are not acceptable.

D. If manufacturer’s pre-terminated Cat 5e cables are not used for the installation, the contractor is responsible for testing each cable following installation and supplying manufacturer with test results.

E. WattStopper Product Number: LMRJ-Series

2.11 DLM SEGMENT NETWORK (Room to Room Network)

A. The segment network shall be a linear topology, BACnet-based MS/TP subnet to connect DLM local networks (rooms) and LMCP relay panels for centralized control.

1. Each connected DLM local network shall include a single network bridge (LMBC-300), and the network bridge is the only room-based device that is connected to the segment network.




2. Network bridges, relay panels and segment managers shall include terminal blocks, with provisions for separate “in” and “out” terminations, for segment network connections.

3. The segment network shall utilize 1.5 twisted pair, shielded, cable supplied by the lighting control manufacturer. The maximum cable run for each segment is 4,000 feet. Conductor-to-conductor capacitance of the twisted pair shall be less than 30 pf/ft and have a characteristic impedance of 120 Ohms.

4. Network signal integrity requires that each conductor and ground wire be correctly terminated at every connected device.

5. Substitution of manufacturer-supplied cable must be pre-approved: Manufacturer will not certify network reliability, and reserves the right to void warranty, if non-approved cable is installed, and if terminations are not completed according to manufacturer’s specific requirements.

6. Segment networks shall be capable of connecting to BACnet-compliant BAS (provided by others) either directly, via MS/TP, or through NB-ROUTERs, via BACnet/IP or BACnet/Ethernet. Systems whose room-connected network infrastructure require gateway devices to provide BACnet data to a BAS are unacceptable.

B. WattStopper Product Number: LM-MSTP, LM-MSTP-DB

2.12 CONFIGURATION TOOLS

A. A wireless configuration tool facilitates optional customization of DLM local networks using two-way infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a USB interface.

B. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include but not be limited to:

1. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a range of approximately 30 feet.

2. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-driven operation.

3. Must be able to read and modify parameters for room controllers, occupancy sensors, wall switches, daylighting sensors, network bridges and relay panels, and identify room devices by type and serial number.

4. Save up to eight occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors.

5. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s) on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting. Set room mode for testing of Normal Hours (NH) and After Hours (AH) parameter settings.

6. Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during auto-configuration, and input light level data to complete configuration of open loop daylighting controls.




7. Set room mode for testing of Normal Hours (NH) and After Hours (AH) parameter settings.

8. Verify status of building level network devices.

C. WattStopper Product Numbers: LMCT-100, LMCI-100/LMCS-100

2.13 NETWORK BRIDGE

A. The network bridge module connects a DLM local network to a BACnet-compliant segment network for communication between rooms, relay panels and a segment manager or BAS. Each local network shall include a network bridge component to provide a connection to the local network room devices. The network bridge shall use industry standard BACnet MS/TP network communication and an optically isolated EIA/TIA RS-485 transceiver.

1. The network bridge shall be provided as a separate module connected on the local network through an available RJ-45 port.

2. Provide Plug n’ Go operation to automatically discover room devices connected to the local network and make all device parameters visible to the segment manager via the segment network. No commissioning shall be required for set up of the network bridge on the local network.

3. The network bridge shall automatically create standard BACnet objects for selected room device parameters to allow any BACnet-compliant BAS to include lighting control and power monitoring features as provided by the DLM room devices on each local network. BACnet objects will be created for the addition or replacement of any given in-room DLM device for the installed life of the system. Products requiring that an application-specific point database be loaded to create or map BACnet objects are not acceptable. Systems not capable of providing BACnet data for control devices via a dedicated BACnet Device ID and physical MS/TP termination per room are not acceptable. Standard BACnet objects shall be provided as follows:

a. Read/write the normal or after hours schedule state for the room

b. Read the detection state of each occupancy sensor

c. Read the aggregate occupancy state of the room

d. Read/write the On/Off state of loads

e. Read/write the dimmed light level of loads

f. Read the button states of switches

g. Read total current in amps, and total power in watts through the room controller

h. Read/write occupancy sensor time delay, PIR sensitivity and ultrasonic sensitivity settings

i. Activate a preset scene for the room

j. Read/write daylight sensor fade time and day and night setpoints

k. Read the current light level, in footcandles, from interior and exterior photosensors and photocells

l. Set daylight sensor operating mode




m. Read/write wall switch lock status

n. Read watts per square foot for the entire controlled room

o. Write maximum light level per load for demand response mode

p. Read/write activation of demand response mode for the room

q. Activate/restore demand response mode for the room

B. WattStopper product numbers: LMBC-300

2.13 SEGMENT MANAGER

A. For networked applications, the Digital Lighting Management system shall include at least one segment manager to manage network communication. It shall be capable of serving up a graphical user interface via a standard web browser utilizing either unencrypted TCP/IP traffic via a configurable port (default is 80) or 256 bit AES encrypted SSL TCP/IP traffic via a configurable port (default is 443).

B. Each segment manager shall have integral support for at least three segment networks. Segment networks may alternately be connected to the segment manger via external routers and switches, using standard Ethernet structured wiring. Each router shall accommodate one segment network. Provide the quantity of routers and switches as shown on the plans.

C. Operational features of the Segment Manager shall include the following:

1. Connection to PC or LAN via standard Ethernet TCP/IP via standard Ethernet TCP/IP with the option to use SSL encrypted connections for all traffic.

2. Easy to learn and use graphical user interface, compatible with Internet Explorer 8, or equal browser. Shall not require installation of any lighting control software to an end-user PC.

3. Log in security capable of restricting some users to view-only or other limited operations.

4. Automatic discovery of DLM devices and relay panels on the segment network(s). Commissioning beyond activation of the discovery function shall not be required to provide communication, monitoring or control of all local networks and lighting control panels.

5. After discovery, all rooms and panels shall be presented in a standard navigation tree format. Selecting a device from the tree will allow the device settings and operational parameters to be viewed and changed by the user.

6. Ability to view and modify room device operational parameters. It shall be possible to set device parameters independently for normal hours and after hours operation including sensor time delays and sensitivities, and load response to sensor including Manual-On or Auto-On.

7. Ability to set up schedules for rooms and panels, view and override current status of panel channels and relays, and assign relays to groups. Schedules shall automatically set controlled zones or areas to either a normal hours or




after hours mode of operation. Support for a minimum of 100 unique schedules, each with up to four time events per day. Support for annual schedules, holiday schedules and unique date-bound schedules.

8. Ability to group rooms and loads for common control by schedules, switches or network commands.

9. Ability to monitor connected load current and display power consumption for areas equipped with room controllers incorporating the integral current monitoring feature.

10. Provide capabilities for integration with a BAS via BACnet protocol. At a minimum, the following points shall be available to the BAS via BACnet IP connection to the segment manager: room occupancy state; room schedule mode; room switch lock control; individual occupancy sensor state; room lighting power; room plug-load power; load ON/OFF state; load dimming level; panel channel schedule state; panel relay state; and Segment Manager Group schedule state control.

11. The Segment Manager shall allow access and control of the overall system database via Native Niagara AX FOX connectivity. Systems that must utilize a Tridium Niagara controller in addition to the programming, scheduling and configuration server are not acceptable.

D. Segment Manager shall support multiple DLM rooms as follows:

1. Support up to 120 network bridges and 900 digital in-room devices (LMSM-3E).

2. Support up to 300 network bridges and 2,200 digital in room devices, connected via network routers and switches (LMSM-6E).

E. WattStopper Product Numbers: LMSM-3E, LMSM-6E, NB-ROUTER, NB-SWITCH, NB-SWITCH-8, NB-SWITCH-16.

2.14 PROGRAMMING, CONFIGURATION AND DOCUMENTATION SOFTWARE

A. PC-native application for optional programming of detailed technician-level parameter information for all DLM products, including all parameters not accessible via BACnet and the handled IR configuration tool. Software must be capable of accessing room-level parameter information locally within the room when connected via the optional LMCI-100 USB programming adapter, or globally for many segment networks simultaneously utilizing standard BACnet/IP communication.

1. Additional parameters exposed through this method include but are not limited to:

a. Occupancy sensor detection LED disable for performance and other aesthetic spaces where blinking LEDs present a distraction.

b. Six occupancy sensor action behaviors for each controlled load, separately configurable for normal hours and after hours modes.




Modes include: No Action, Follow Off Only, Follow On Only, Follow On and Off, Follow On Only with Override Time Delay, Follow Off Only with Blink Warn Grace Time, Follow On and Off with Blink Warn Grace Time.

c. Separate fade time adjustments per load for both normal and after hours from 0 - 4 hours.

d. Configurable occupancy sensor re-trigger grace period from 0 - 4 minutes separate for both normal hours and after hours.

e. Separate normal hours and after hours per-load button mode with modes including: Do nothing, on only, off only, on and off.

f. Load control polarity reversal so that on events turn loads off and vice versa.

g. Per-load DR (demand response) shed level in units of percent.

h. Load output pulse mode in increments of 1second.

i. Fade trip point for each load for normal hours and after hours that establishes the dimmer command level at which a switched load closes its relay to allow for staggered On of switched loads in response to a dimmer.

2. Generation of reports at the whole file, partial file, or room level. Reports include but are not limited to:

a. Device list report: All devices in a project listed by type.

b. Load binding report: All load controller bindings showing interaction with sensors, switches, and daylighting.

c. BACnet points report: Per room Device ID report of the valid BACnet points for a given site's BOM.

d. Room summary report: Device manifest for each room, aggregated by common BOM, showing basic sequence of operations.

e. Device parameter report: Per-room lists of all configured parameters accessible via hand held IR programmer for use with O&M documentation.

f. Scene report: All project scene pattern values not left at defaults (i.e. 1 = all loads 100%, 2 = all loads 75%, 3 = all loads 50%, 4 = all loads 25%, 5-16 = same as scene 1).

g. Occupancy sensor report: Basic settings including time delay and sensitivity(ies) for all occupancy sensors.

3. Network-wide programming of parameter data in a spreadsheet-like programming environment including but not limited to the following operations:

a. Set, copy/paste an entire project site of sensor time delays.




b. Set, copy/paste an entire project site of sensor sensitivity settings.

c. Search based on room name and text labels.

d. Filter by product type (i.e. LMRC-212) to allow parameter set by product.

e. Filter by parameter value to search for product with specific configurations.

4. Network-wide firmware upgrading remotely via the BACnet/IP network.

a. Mass firmware update of entire rooms.

b. Mass firmware update of specifically selected rooms or areas.

c. Mass firmware upgrade of specific products.

B. WattStopper Product Number: LMCS-100, LMCI-100

2.15 LMCP LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS

A. Provide lighting control panels in the locations and capacities as indicated on the plans and schedules. Each panel shall be of modular construction and consist of the following components:

1. Enclosure/Tub shall be NEMA 1, sized to accept an interior with 1 - 8 relays, 1 - 24 relays and 6 four-pole contactors, or 1 - 48 relays and 6 four-pole contactors.

2. Cover shall be configured for surface or flush wall mounting of the panel as indicated on the plans. The panel cover shall have a hinged and lockable door with restricted access to line voltage section of the panel.

3. Interior assembly shall be supplied as a factory assembled component specifically designed and listed for field installation. The interior construction shall provide total isolation of high voltage (Class 1) wiring from low voltage (Class 2) wiring within the assembled panel. The interior assembly shall include intelligence boards, power supply, DIN rails for mounting optional Class 2 control devices, and individually replaceable latching type relays. The panel interiors shall include the following features:

a. Removable, plug-in terminal blocks with connections for all low voltage terminations.

b. Individual terminal block, override pushbutton, and LED status light for each relay.

c. Direct wired switch inputs associated with each relay shall support 2-wire momentary switches only.

d. Digital inputs (four RJ-45 jacks) shall support 1-, 2-, 3-, 4-, and 8-button digital switches; digital IO modules capable of receiving 0-5V or 0-10V analog photocell inputs; digital IO modules capable of receiving momentary or maintained contact closure inputs or analog sensor inputs; digital daylighting sensors; and digital occupancy sensors. Inputs are divided into two separate digital




networks, each capable of supplying 250mA to connected devices.

e. True relay state shall be indicated by the on-board LED and shall be available to external control devices and systems via BACnet.

f. Automatically sequenced operation of relays to reduce impact on the electrical distribution system when large loads are controlled simultaneously.

g. Group and pattern control of relays shall be provided through a simple keypad interface from a handheld IR programmer. Any set of relays can be associated with a group for direct on/off control or pattern (scene) control via a simple programming sequence using the relay override pushbuttons and LED displays for groups 1-8 or a handheld IR programmer for groups 1-99.

h. Relay group status for shall be provided through LED indicators for groups 1-8 and via BACnet for groups 1-99. A solid LED indicates that the last group action called for an ON state and relays in the group are on or in a mixed state.

i. Single-pole latching relays with modular plug-in design. Relays shall provide the following ratings and features:

a) Electrical:

i 30 amp ballast at 277V

ii 20 amp ballast at 347V

iii 20amp tungsten at 120V

iv 30 amp resistive at 347V

v 1.5 HP motor at 120V

vi 14,000 amp short circuit current rating (SCCR) at 347V

vii Relays shall be specifically UL 20 listed for control of plug-loads

b) Mechanical:

viii Replaceable, ½” KO mounting with removable Class 2 wire

harness.

ix Actuator on relay housing provides manual override and visual status indication, accessible from Class 2 section of panel.

x Dual line and load terminals each support two #14 - #12 solid or stranded conductors.

xi Tested to 300,000 mechanical on/off cycles.




4. Isolated low voltage contacts provide for true relay status feedback and pilot light indication.

5. Power supply shall be a multi-voltage transformer assembly with rated power to supply all electronics, occupancy sensors, switches, pilot lights, and photocells as necessary to meet the project requirements. Power supply to have internal over-current protection with automatic reset and metal oxide varistor protection.

6. Where indicated, lighting control panels designated for control of emergency lighting shall be provided with factory installed provision for automatic by pass of relays controlling emergency circuits upon loss of normal power. Panels shall be properly listed and labeled for use on emergency lighting circuits and shall meet the requirements of UL924 and NFPA 70 - Article 700.

7. Integral system clock shall provide scheduling capabilities for panel-only projects without DLM segment networks or BAS control.

a. Each panel shall include digital clock capability able to issue system wide automation commands to up to (11) eleven other panels for a total of (12) twelve networked lighting control panels. The clock shall provide capability for up to 254 independent schedule events per panel for each of the ninety-nine system wide channel groups.

b. The clock capability of each panel shall support the time-based energy saving requirements of applicable local energy codes.

c. The clock module shall provide astronomic capabilities, time delays, blink warning, daylight savings, and holiday functions and will include a battery back up for the clock function and program retention in non-volatile FLASH memory. Clocks that require multiple events to meet local code lighting shut off requirements shall not be allowed.

d. The clock capability of each panel shall operate on a basis of ON/OFF or Normal Hours/After Hours messages to automation groups that implement pre-configured control scenarios. Scenarios shall include:

i Scheduled ON / OFF

ii Manual ON / Scheduled OFF

iii Astro ON / OFF (or Photo ON / OFF)

iv Astro and Schedule ON / OFF (or Photo and Schedule ON / OFF)

e. The user interface shall be a portable IR handheld remote control capable of programming any panel in the system (LMCT-100)

f. The clock capability of each panel shall employ non-volatile memory and shall retain user programming and time for a minimum of 10 years.

g. Schedules programmed into the clock of any one panel shall be capable of executing panel local schedule or Dark/Light (photocell or Astro) events for that panel in the event that global network communication is lost. Lighting control panels that are




not capable of executing events independently of the global network shall not be acceptable.

8. The lighting control panel can operate as a stand-alone system, or can

support schedule, group, and photocell control functions, as configured in a Segment Manager controller, via a segment network connection.

9. The lighting control panel shall support digital communications to facilitate the extension of control to include interoperation with building automation systems and other intelligent field devices. Digital communications shall be RS485 MS/TP-based using the BACnet® protocol.

a. The panel shall have provision for an individual BACnet device ID and shall support the full 222 range (0 – 4,193,304). The device ID description property shall be writable via the network to allow unique identification of the lighting control panel on the network.

b. The panel shall support MS/TP MAC addresses in the range of 0 127 and baud rates of 9600k, 38400k, 76800k, and 115.2k bits per second.

c. Lighting control relays shall be controllable as binary output objects in the instance range of 1 64. The state of each relay shall be readable and writable by the BAS via the object present value property.

d. Lighting control relays shall report their true on/off state as binary input objects in the instance range of 1 64.

e. The 99 group Normal Hours/After Hours control objects associated with the panel shall be represented by binary value objects in the instance range of 201 299. The occupancy state of each channel group shall be readable and writable by the BAS via the object present value property. Commanding 1 to a channel group will put all relays associated with the channel into the normal hours mode. Commanding 0 or NULL shall put the relays into the after hours mode.

f. Setup and commissioning of the panel shall not require manufacturer-specific software or a computer. All configuration of the lighting control panel shall be performed using standard BACnet objects or via the handheld IR programming remote. Provide BACnet objects for panel setup and control as follows: i Binary output objects in the instance range of 1 64 (one

per relay) for on/off control of relays. ii Binary value objects in the instance range of 1 99 (one per

channel) for normal hours/after hours schedule control. iii Binary input objects in the instance range of 1 64 (one per

relay) for reading true on/off state of the relays. iv Analog value objects in the instance range of 101 199 (one

per channel group) shall assign a blink warn time value to each channel. A value of 5 shall activate the blink warn feature for the channel and set a 5-minute grace-time period. A value of 250 shall activate the sweep feature for the channel and enable the use of sweep type automatic wall switches.




g. The description property for all objects shall be writable via the network and shall be saved in non-volatile memory within the panel.

h. The BO and BV 1 99 objects shall support BACnet priority array with a relinquish default of off and after hours respectively. Prioritized writes to the channel BV objects shall propagate prioritized control to each member relay in a way analogous to the BACnet Channel object described in addendum aa. (http://www.bacnet.org/Addenda/Add-135-2010aa.pdf)

i. Panel-aggregate control of relay Force Off at priority 2 shall be available via a single BV5 object. Force On at priority 1 shall be available via a single BV4 object.

j. Lockout of all digital switch buttons connected to a given panel shall be command-able via a single BV2 object. The lock status of any connected switch station shall be represented as BV101-196.

10. WattStopper Product Number: LMCP8, LMCP24 or LMCP48

B. USER INTERFACE Each lighting control panel system shall be supplied with at least (1) handheld configuration tool (LMCT-100). As a remote programming interface the configuration tool shall allow setup, configuration, and diagnostics of the panel without the need for software or connection of a computer. The user interface shall have the following panel-specific functions as a minimum:

1. Set network parameters including panel device ID, MS/TP MAC address, baud rate and max master range.

2. Relay Group creation of up to 99 groups. Group creation shall result in programming of all seven key relay parameters for member relays. The seven parameters are as follows: After-hours Override Time Delay, Normal Hours Override Time Delay, Action on Transition to Normal Hours, Action on Transition to After Hours, Sensor Action During Normal Hours, Sensor Action During After Hours, Blink-Warn Time for After Hours.

3. Program up to 254 separate scheduled events. Events shall occur on seven day intervals with each day selectable as active or inactive, and shall be configurable as to whether the event is active on holidays. Holidays are also defined through the User Interface.

4. Program up to 32 separate Dark/Light events. Events shall have a selectable source as either calculated Astro with delay, or a digital IO module with an integral 0-5V or 0-10V analog photocell. Dark/Light events shall occur on seven day intervals with each day selectable as active or inactive, and shall be configurable as to whether the event is active on holidays.

5. Button binding of digital switches to groups shall be accessible via the handheld IR remote and accomplished from the digital switch station.

6. Programming of panel location information shall be accomplished by the handheld IR remote and include at a minimum LAT, LON, DST zone, and an approximate city/state location.

7. An additional handheld IR remote may optionally be specified to be permanently mounted to the panel interior via a retractable anti-theft lanyard to allow for convenient programming of the panel while assuring that the handheld programmer is always present at that panel. An unlimited number

http://www.bacnet.org/Addenda/Add-135-2010aa.pdf




of handheld IR remotes may also be purchased for facilities staff as determined by the end user’s representative.

8. WattStopper Product Number: LMCT-100

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. A factory authorized manufacturer’s representative shall provide the electrical contractor a functional overview of the lighting control system prior to installation. The contractor shall schedule the pre-installation site visit after receipt of approved submittals to review the following:

1. Confirm the location and mounting of all digital devices, with special attention to placement of occupancy and daylighting sensors.

2. Review the specifications for low voltage control wiring and termination.

3. Discuss the functionality and configuration of all products, including sequences of operation, per design requirements.

4. Discuss requirements for integration with other trades.

3.2 CONTRACTOR INSTALLATION AND SERVICES

A. Contractor to install all devices and wiring in a professional manner. All line voltage connections to be tagged to indicate circuit and switched legs.

B. Contractor to install all room/area devices using manufacturer’s factory-tested Cat 5e cable with pre-terminated RJ-45 connectors. If pre-terminated cable is not used for room/area wiring, the contractor is responsible for testing each field-terminated cable following installation, and shall supply the lighting controls manufactuerer with test results. Contractor to install any room to room network devices using manufacturer-supplied LM-MSTP network wire. Network wire substitution is not permitted and may result in loss of product warranty per DLM SEGMENT NETWORK section of specification. Low voltage wiring topology must comply with manufacturer’s specifications. Contractor shall route network wiring as shown in submittal drawings as closely as possible, and shall document final wiring location, routing and topology on as built drawings.

C. Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions unless otherwise indicated. Before start up, contractor shall test all devices to ensure proper communication.

D. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and energy savings.

1. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted while occupied.

E. Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the configuration of the system including room by room description including:




1. Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities, and daylighting setpoints.

2. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.)

3. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.)

F. Post start-up tuning – After 30 days from occupancy contractor shall adjust sensor time delays and sensitivities to meet the Owner’s requirements. Provide a detailed report to the Architect / Owner of post start-up activity.

3.3 FACTORY SERVICES

A. Upon completion of the installation, the manufacturer's factory authorized representative shall start up and verify a complete fully functional system.

B. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer with three weeks written notice of the system start up and adjustment date.

C. Upon completion of the system start up, the factory-authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the owner's personnel on the adjustment and maintenance of the system.

3.4 COMMISSIONING SUPPORT SERVICES

A. On this project, a commissioning agent will be hired to verify the installation and programming of all building systems, which includes the lighting control system. Manufacturer should include an extra day of technician’s time to review the functionality and settings of the lighting control hardware with the commissioning agent, including reviewing submittal drawings and ensuring that instructions on how to configure each device are readily available. Manufacturer is NOT responsible for helping the commissioning agent inspect the individual devices. It will be the commissioning agent’s responsibility to create and complete any forms required for the commissioning process, although the manufacturer or contractor may offer spreadsheets and/or printouts to assist the agent with this task.

B. The commissioning agent shall work with the electrical contractor during installation of the lighting control hardware to become familiar with the specific products. The agent may also accompany the manufacturer’s technicians during their start-up work to better understand the process of testing, calibration and configuration of the products. However, the contractor and manufacturer shall ensure that interfacing with the agent does not prevent them from completing the requirements outlined in the contract documents.

END OF SECTION



Panelboards 262416 - 1

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Load centers. 4. Electronic-grade panelboards.

B. Provide 35% spare ampacity in all panelboards above final loads and 30% extra breaker space

with bussing and all hardware for future breakers. Provide 10% spare breakers in each panel in addition to the 30% extra breaker space. Don’t provide panels smaller than 100 amps for vendors and EXCHANGE areas. Each vendor shall have their own electrical panel servicing only their stores or area. Provide main breakers in all panels per UFC.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.




5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

8. Include plan and elevation drawings to ½” scale indicating the equipment layout for the intended installation location. The shop drawings shall include all panelboards, transformers, transfer switches, and all other equipment which is also located in the intended space.

9. The design documents shall indicate a detailed equipment layout. The design layout shall

take into account the equipment dimensional differences between all of the manufacturers.

10. It shall be the contractor’s, supplier’s and manufacturer’s responsibility to ensure that the

equipment purchased for installation will fit in the space available and to insure compliance with all applicable code required working clearances.

11. Should it be determined that the space available is not sufficient for the manufacturer’s

equipment, the contractor shall develop a plan which is acceptable to EXCHANGE and the Government for placing the equipment in a satisfactory layout which meets all required working clearances.

12. No equipment shall be purchased without verification that the space available is

adequate for the intended manufacturer’s equipment.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Contractor’s Review: Prior to submitting the required material for review the contractor shall review all documentation received from the manufacturer and make notations to correct non-compliant items. Prior to forwarding the reviewed documentation for review; the contractor shall stamp the documents as ‘Accepted’ or ‘Accepted as Noted’. Submittals which have not been pre-reviewed by the contractor or marked as previously stated shall be rejected.

E. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

F. Panelboard Directories: Installed on the inside of the doorframe under the plastic cover and slot provided. The directory shall be typewritten with spares and spaces written in pencil. The Contractor shall identify the type of load and area served by each circuit using the permanent (end use) room numbers as determined by the Owner. Include all field changes and change order additions and deletions to the schedule. Attached copies of the panel schedules are not acceptable substitution. Provide new updated directories for all existing panelboards with load revisions.




G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device that allows adjustments.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise

indicated:




a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C).

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:

as scheduled.

3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each

size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

1.11 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. Provide flush enclosures in all finished walls and vendor stores and janitor rooms. Surface enclosures shall only be allowed in mechanical/electrical areas and MPA area.




1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Kitchen Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with

flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral

with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

6. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Flush Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.

c. Surface Back Box in Utility Spaces, Electrical, Mechanical, Storage Rooms:

Galvanized Steel.

d. Surface Backboxes in Non-Utility Spaces: Finish to match panel and cover.

e. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components.

7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.

B. Incoming Mains Location: top or as determined by the contractor at site.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Bus structure shall have minimum full current ratings as indicated for the through bus.

Section bus shall be equal to or greater than the sum of the maximum ampacity ratings of all devices, including provisions for future devices, in that section.

3. Provisions for future devices shall be such that no additional connectors or bus will bed

required to add devices.




4. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.

5. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated

from box. 6. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as

suitable for nonlinear loads.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.

3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Sub-feed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity neutral bus.

8. Coordinate and provide lugs sized for the conductors specified.

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals per UL 67 testing.

1.12 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.




D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only as scheduled.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers. All breakers for EXCHANGE provided equipment and walk-in refrigeration freezer, coolers and vender food court equipment plus Division 25 equipment shall be returnable to supplier and new breakers shipped at no extra cost.

F. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

2. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

3. Two-wire control with coil-clearing contacts.

1.13 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only as scheduled.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. All breakers for EXCHANGE provided equipment and walk-in refrigeration freezer, cooler and vender food court equipment plus Division 25 equipment shall be returnable to supplier and new breakers shipped at no extra cost.

E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

2. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

3. Two-wire control with coil-clearing contacts.

F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

G. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.




1.14 LOAD CENTERS

A. Not Allowed.

1.15 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES



B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault

protection (6-mA trip). 6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault

protection (30-mA trip).

7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.




c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Communication Capability: Circuit breaker mounted communication module with

functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent

of rated voltage. f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-

adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.

g. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

h. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit

breaker trips.

i. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

j. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking

ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices.

k. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

l. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in

on or off position.

m. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

1.16 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS



B. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, bolt-on, solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, 3rd edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:

1. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 2. Redundant suppression circuits.




3. Redundant replaceable modules.

4. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.

5. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. The indicator lights shall indicate

which phase as well as which module is fully operable. The status of each TVSs module shall be monitored on the front cover of the enclosure as well as on the module. A push-to-test button shall be provided to test each phase indicator. Push-to-test button shall activate a state change of dry contacts for testing purposes.

6. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.

7. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed,

for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

8. TVSS shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV)

of not less than 155% of nominal RMS voltage.

9. TVSS shall be constructed of one self-contained suppression module per phase.

10. The TVSS shall be equipped the following optional items:

a. A transient voltage surge counter shall be located on the diagnostic panel on the front cover of the enclosure. The counter shall be equipped with a manual reset and battery backup to retain memory upon loss of AC power.

11. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 125 kA per mode/250 kA per phase for service entrance panelboards, 80 kA per mode/160 per phase for distribution panelboards and 60 kA per mode/120 per phase for branch panelboards.

12. Minimum single-impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform described in

IEEE C62.41.2.

a. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A. b. Line to Ground: 70,000 A. c. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.

13. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.

14. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye, three-phase, four-wire circuits

shall be as follows:

a. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120] b. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120 c. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277, 400 V for 208Y/120




1.17 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

1.20 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

E. The panelboards must fit in the allotted space shown on the drawings and meet all NEC required working clearances.

F. Acceptance of the manufacturers listed above is conditional upon compliance with the electrical and spatial requirements of the project.

1.21 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete”.

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.

2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base

and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.

5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.




D. Mount panelboard with uppermost handle no higher than +72” above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

H. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from each flush mounted panelboard section into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits [into raised floor space or] below slab not on grade. Stub one 1-1/2” inch empty conduit into accessible ceiling space or as indicated on the plans per each spare device greater than 60A.

I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

J. Comply with NECA 1.

1.21 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards (SUSE) with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

F. NEC, State and local code required flash protection labels.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Perform tests, inspections and make adjustments per the manufacturer’s instructions and as specified.




2. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative for technical support and to assist in testing.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

2) The Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to test the ground fault protection system to verify compliance with NEC 230.95c requirements.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A.

1.23 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.




B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings

before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

1.24 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.




Wiring Devices 26 27 26- 1

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Wall switches. 4. Isolated-ground receptacles. 5. Pendant cord-connector devices. 6. Cord and plug sets. 7. Floor service outlets, service poles, and multi-outlet assemblies.


1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking wall plates.




C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for EXCHANGE-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. Adjust voltage and amperage rating for EXCHANGE-furnished equipment.

1.7 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide products by one of the following manufacturers.

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 5. WattStopper.

1.8 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, hand use, heavy duty, grounding type, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. Bodies shall be ivory as per NEMA WD1, face and body shall be thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap. Dimensional requirements shall be per NEMA WD6.

B. Provide screw-type, side wired wiring terminals. Connect grounding pole to mounting strap. The receptacle shall contain triple-wipe power contacts and double- or triple-wipe ground contacts.

C. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from




mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. UL 498, hard use, heavy duty, isolated grounding per NEMA WD1. Face and body shall be thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap. Dimensional requirements shall meet NEMA WD6. Provide screw-type side wired wiring terminals. The receptacle shall contain triple-wipe power contacts and double- or triple-wipe ground contacts.

1.9 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, extra heavy duty, tamper-resistant, duplex type for mounting in a standard outlet box, feed or non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A. Device shall be capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamps or greater and tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFT devices. Provide screw type, side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired pigtail leads. Provide with ‘push-to-test’ button and visible indication of tripped condition. All outdoor GFCI receptacles shall be marked weather-resistant. All receptacles shall have 10 KA short circuit current rating.

1.10 DUPLEX TVSS RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Comply with NEMA WD1, NEMA WD6, UL 498 and UL 1449, with integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.

1. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level rating of

400 volts and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45.

2. Active TVSS Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate device is ‘active’ or ‘no longer in service’.

1.11 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A and 250 V, 60A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, L22-30R, and UL 498.

1. High-impact nylon face, with one-piece all brass contact with long spring arm and oxide

cutting nibs. 2. Provide twist-locking receptacles to match EXCHANGE furnished equipment voltage,

phase and amperage.

1.12 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6 configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade or as required to match EXCHANGE furnished equipment. Coordinate voltage, phase and amperage with EXCHANGE.

1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip.




2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

1.13 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for

connection.

1.14 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches shall be rated quiet-type AC only, 120/277 V, 20 A with number of poles required. Totally enclosed single pole, three way, and four way switches with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw. Handles shall be ivory. Thermoplastic wiring terminals shall be screw type, side-wired. Contacts shall be silver-cadmium and contact arm shall be one-piece copper alloy.

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A, Wired Handle:

1. Provide pilot light adapter for 277 volt operation.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

D. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.

E. Breakers used as switches are not allowed.

F. Special Purpose Switches: Switches used for disconnection purposes (small water heaters, duct heaters, circ pumps, exhaust fans, etc.) shall be same as wall switches. Switches must have a horsepower rating adequate for the motor being switched.

1.15 WALL BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.




1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. Illuminated when ‘OFF’.

D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 10 percent of full brightness.

1.16 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS

A. Data Outlet:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Siemen CT-CT-05-02 blue in color for primary and yellow in color for secondary.

2. Description: Single 5E jacks for terminating 100 Ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA 568-B.1; eight pin, non-keyed; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.

B. Telephone Outlet:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Siemon Ct-CT-05-02 white in color

2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100 Ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA 568 B.1; eight pin, non-keyed; complying with Category 5e.

1.17 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact nylon or lexan 0.03-inch- (1-mm-)

thick, satin-finished stainless steel, 0.04-inch- (1-mm-). Plates to be same color as device. Verify plate material with EXCHANGE.

3. Sectional type device plates will not be permitted.

4. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel or smooth, high-impact nylon or lexan.

5. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with in-use cover, and listed and labeled for

use in ‘damp or wet locations’.

6. Restrooms: Smooth specification grade satin stainless steel.

E. Wet-Location, Weatherproof ‘In-Use’ UL Listed, Gasketed Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover




1.18 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, flap-type or above-floor, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Service Plate: Rectangular or round, solid brass with satin finish.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: One, two, or three modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 Category 5e jacks for UTP cable.

1.19 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES

A. The surface metal raceway shall consist of a base and cover with convenience power outlets, duplex receptacles with pre-wired branch wiring, for use in dry interiors

B. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.

C. Raceway Material: Metal, with Wilsonart frosty white #15-73-60 custom finish.

D. Wire: No. 12 AWG.

1.20 SERVICE POLES

A. Description: Factory-assembled and field-wired units to extend power and voice and data communication from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in pole near floor or in EXCHANGE provided casework and displays.

1. Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch- (65-mm-) square cross section, with height adequate to extend from floor to at least 6 inches (150 mm) above ceiling or to structure, and with separate channels for power wiring and voice and data communication cabling. Coordinate with EXCHANGE final casework layout for poles with power only and poles with power and data and security wiring.

2. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection to

supports or structure supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment where pole extends to finished floor.

3. Casework Mounting: Custom length power poles into checkout, jewelry and electronic

casework require two power circuits (one clean power, one dirty power) from these power poles. Make connections to receptacles and J-boxes in casework. The checkout, jewelry and electronics casework also require a data channel for data cabling and security duress alarm wiring. Power only service poles into EXCHANGE provided freestanding casework require custom length pole in field to the 6 ft above floor connection point with two 20 amp duplex receptacles within 12” of top of casework.

4. Finishes: Custom painted finish to match EXCHANGE requirements. Wilsonart frosty

white #15-73-60 or current standard.




5. Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors and a

minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 5e voice and data communication cables.

6. Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20-A, heavy-duty, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R units.

7. Voice and Data Communication Outlets: Two RJ-45 Category 5e jacks or as required per

final EXCHANGE store layout. Coordinate with EXCHANGE store layout and Contracting Officer.

1.21 FINISHES

A. Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory or as selected by

EXCHANGE, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange or with orange triangle on face. Orange devices

required for clean power to all checkout counters.

1.22 BUILDING ENTRY ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM

A. Provide a buzzer entry system to alert personnel of visitors or deliveries. The system shall be 24 volt and have Edwards #15-0G5 buzzer or equal, with wall mounted weatherproof Edwards pushbuttons #644 or equal at entry door. Provide systems, at receiving.

1.23 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

1. Mounting Heights:

Switches: +48” to top of J-box Receptacles: +18” to top of J-box.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,

paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.




3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls on the wall so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall or half in and half out of a tiled surface.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)

in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the

manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation: Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.




F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. Plate edges shall be parallel to wall junctions, door, windows, etc., and flush against the wall surface. All switches and receptacles shall be installed vertical unless in toe space or indicated otherwise.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.

3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers’ device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of EXCHANGE furnished partitions and furnishings.

1.24 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use machine printing with black lettering on white field Use durable wire markers inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout

or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.

3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the

circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or




similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.




Fuses 26 28 13 - 1

SECTION 26 28 13

FUSES

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits; enclosed switches; enclosed controllers and motor-control centers.

2. Plug fuses rated 125-V ac and less for use in plug-fuse-type enclosed switches.

3. Spare-fuse cabinets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment

calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.

6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.



Fuses 26 28 13 - 2

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.

3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse.

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5 deg C) more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.



Fuses 26 28 13 - 3

1.8 MANUFACTURERS: subjects to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper Bussman, Inc. 2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 3. Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.

1.9 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

B. Fuses shall be as follows:

1. Circuits 601 to 6000 amperes shall be protected by current limiting Bussmann or equal Low-Peak Time-Delay fuses KRP-C. Fuses shall be time-delay and must hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of four seconds, clear 20 times rated current in .01 seconds or less and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class L.

2. Circuits 0 to 600 ampere shall be protected by current limiting Bussmann or equal Low-

Peak Dual-Element fuses LPN-RJK (250 volts) or LPS-RK (600 volts). All dual-element fuses shall have separate overload and short-circuit elements. The fuse must hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1.

3. Motor Circuits: All individual motor circuits rated 480 amperes or less shall be protected

by Low-Peak Dual-Element fuses LPN-RK (250 volts) or LPS-RK (600 volts). The fuses for 1.15 service factor motors shall be installed in ratings approximately 125% of motor full load current except where high ambient temperatures prevail, or where the motor drives a heavy revolving part which cannot be brought up to full speed quickly, such as large fans. Under such conditions the fuse should be 150% to 175% of the motor full load current. Larger HP motors shall be protected by Bussmann Type KRP-C Low-Peak Time-Delay fuses or equal. 1.0 service factor motors shall be protected by Low-Peak Dual-Element fuses LPN-RK (250 volts) or LPS-RK (600 volts) installed in ratings approximately 115% of the motor full load current except as noted above. The fuss shall be UL Class RK1 Dual Element Time Delay or Class L.

1.10 PLUG FUSES

A. Characteristics: UL 248-11, nonrenewable plug fuses; 125-V ac.

1.11 PLUG-FUSE ADAPTERS

A. Characteristics: Adapters for using Type S, rejection-base plug fuses in Edison-base fuse holders or sockets; ampere ratings matching fuse ratings; irremovable once installed.



Fuses 26 28 13 - 4

1.12 PLUG FUSE BOX COVER UNITS

A. Box Cover Units: 4” square box cover with plug fuse holder, on/off switch, single receptacle equal to Bussmann SSY-RL.

1.13 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-coded cam lock and pull.

1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity minimum.

2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. 3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high letters on exterior of door. 4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse

manufacturer.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Service Entrance: Class L, fast acting. 2. Feeders: 601-6000A Class L, fast acting: 0-600A Class RK1, fast acting 3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 4. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay unless otherwise indicated. 5. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting

B. Plug Fuses with box cover units for motor branch circuits 120V less than ½ HP:

1. Plug Fuses: Edison-base type, dual-element time delay. Type T or TL for box cover units.



Fuses 26 28 13 - 5

2.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install plug-fuse adapters in Edison-base fuse holders and sockets. Ensure that adapters are irremovable once installed.

C. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).

2.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.




Enclosed switches, Breakers and Starters 26 56 00 - 1

SECTION 26 28 16

ENCLOSED SWITCHES, CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND STARTERS

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Receptacle switches. 4. Shunt trip switches. 5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 6. Molded-case switches. 7. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings.

3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).

4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.

5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.




B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Field quality-control reports.

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

E. Manufacturer's field service report.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).




1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than 3 of each size and type.

1.10 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

1.11 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Available manufacturers:

1. Eaton Corporation; Culter-Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D/Group Schneider.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Two or Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V AC, 1200A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KX 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuss, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and

bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.




5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.

7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 8. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

9. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac or as noted

on drawings.

1.12 NON-FUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Two or Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and

bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 5. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac.

1.13 RECEPTACLE SWITCHES

A. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Fusible Switch: 600-V ac, 30, 60 or 100A; UL 98 and NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.




B. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Non-fusible Switch: 600-V ac, 30, 60 or 100 A; UL 98 and NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Interlocking Linkage: Provided between the receptacle and switch mechanism to prevent inserting or removing plug while switch is in the on position, inserting any plug other than specified and turning switch on if an incorrect plug is inserted or correct plug has not been fully inserted into the receptacle.

D. Receptacle: Polarized, three-phase, four-wire receptacle (fourth wire connected to enclosure ground lug).

1.14 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES

A. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA interrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.

B. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and secondary fuses, with a control power transformer of enough capacity to operate shunt trip, connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.

D. Accessories:

1. Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function. 2. Oiltight green ON pilot light.

3. Isolated neutral lug; 100 percent rating.

4. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and

closed. 5. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.

6. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay; 120-V ac coil voltage. 7. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72.

1.15 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS






B. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

C. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

D. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

E. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

F. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door.

G. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

H. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

I. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type

with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module with

functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system, specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

6. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.

7. Under-voltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional

time delay. 8. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.




9. Alarm Switch: One NO and one NC contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.

10. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be

removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

11. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground-fault trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function.

12. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.

13. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered, 120-V ac.

1.16 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES



B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.

C. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles.

3. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.

7. Under-voltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional

time delay.

8. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.

9. Alarm Switch: One NO and one NC contact that operates only when switch has tripped.

10. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be removable

only when switch is in off position.

11. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground-fault shunt trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function.

12. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.




14. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered, 120-V ac.

1.17 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

3. Kitchen Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

6. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7.

1.18 STARTERS

A. Non-Reversing Starters: Reference Divisions 01, 23, and 26 drawings and specifications and provide all motor starters that are indicated to be provided by Division 26. Some starters are furnished as integral parts of the equipment specified under other Divisions. Coordinate with these trades and make all required line voltage connections to starter equipment furnished by others. Starters shall be NEMA size and provided by Division 26 unless otherwise noted. Where less than three starters are required in a room, individual starters are acceptable. Three or more require a motor control center.

B. Combination starters are acceptable for locations where both the disconnecting means and starter are provided by Division 26.

C. Motor starters provided by Division 26 shall be across-the-line, no-reversing, NEMA Size 1 (minimum). Starters shall be furnished with the following:

1. Overloads: Three Overload Relays – overload shall be block-type with a push-to-test feature. Provisions for an isolated, field-mountable alarm contact shall be available. Starter shall provide for field installation of up to 3 NO and 4 NC auxiliary contacts in addition to the hold-in interlock. Overloads provided shall be sized from the nameplate of the actual motor to be installed.

2. HOA Switch: Three position control switch for hand, off and automatic (HOA) operation.

3. NEMA enclosures rated for the environment where equipment is to be installed. Verify locations with equipment supplier and/or contractors.

4. In addition to the above items combination starters will be provided with the following features:




a. Operating handle shall always remain connected to the breaker or switch. The operating handle shall not be mounted in the door of the enclosure, but to the side of the door for safe ‘stand-aside’ operation. Position of operating handle will indicate On, Off or Tripped condition of switch or circuit breaker.

b. Interlock provisions shall prevent unauthorized opening or closing of the starter door with the disconnect in the On position.

5. Starter control voltage shall be 120 volt AC.

6. Provide 120 volt AC power for control at each 208 volt or 480 volt starter by one of the following methods:

a. 208 Volt Source: Provide 120 volt control power derived from Phase A of the feeder circuit. Provide separate overcurrent protection per NEC for the control power source. NOTE: Include a neutral conductor in the equipment feeder circuit.

b. 480 Volt Source: Provide a 120 volt control voltage transformer derived from phases A and C. Provide separate overcurrent protection per the NEC for the control power source.

c. Separate 120 volt power circuit from the nearest panel or other source approved by the Engineer. Provide a means of disconnect per NEC requirements.

1.19 MOTOR WIRING AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Provide line voltage power wiring to each unit, motor and/or equipment, furnished by other Divisions.

B. Verify motor characteristics prior to installing wiring. Exact location of motor and connections will be ascertained before installation of conduit. A flexible conduit connection with grounding wire, with sufficient slack to comply with vibration requirements, shall be provided at each motor.

C. Prior to energizing any motor or mechanical equipment circuit notify the mechanical contractor. Prior to motor start-up ensure that all motors are lubricated, rotate in the correct direction and are furnished with the proper overload protection. Energizing any mechanical circuit, prior to coordination with the mechanical contractor, is at your own risk.

1.20 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1.21 INSTALLATION

J. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.




K. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

L. Install fuses in fusible devices.

M. Comply with NECA 1.

1.22 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide technical assistance.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.




b. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

1.24 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study".




Lightning Protection System 26 41 13 - 1

SECTION 26 41 13

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the system design, materials, installation, grounding, bonding, appurtenances, inspections and certification required for a comprehensive lightning protection system.

B. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for lightning protection systems.

1. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements 2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding 3. Section 26 05 33 - Raceways, Conduits, and Boxes


A. The materials and installation shall conform to the minimum requirements and latest revisions of the following codes, standards and regulations wherein they apply:

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 2. UL 96 - Lightning Protection Components 3. UL 96A – Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems 4. NFPA 780 – Standards for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems 5. LPI 175 - Standard of Practice for the Design - Installation - Inspection of Lightning Protection Systems

1.4 Quality assurance

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in lightning protection equipment with minimum three years documented experience and material compliance with UL requirement.

B. Contractor Qualifications:




1. The Contractor for the Work covered by this Specification shall be one that is recognized as being regularly engaged in the design and installation of lightning protection systems. 2. The Contractor must be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and must employ competent personnel fully qualified in the field of lightning protection. The Contractor must have minimum ten years documented experience.

C. Master Label:

1. The system design and installation shall meet or exceed the requirements of UL 96A for a Master “C” Label. UL master label shall be obtained.

2. Upon completion, the lightning protection system shall be inspected by a representative of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

3. The lightning protection system must pass the UL inspection. If the system does not pass inspection, the Contractor must make corrections to the system to pass inspection.

1.5 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. The lightning protection system components on building roof shall be taken into consideration during the building’s design phase. System components can be built in so as to be protected from mechanical displacement, and environmental effects. In addition, aesthetic advantages can be gained by such concealment especially for low-rise buildings where exposed lightning protection system components on building roof can be highly visible. Alternate installation detail for rooftop lightning terminals shall be developed if the attachment to parapet wall is prohibited due to the concern of roof warranty.

B. Main conductors shall interconnect all strike termination devices and shall form two or more paths from each strike termination device downward, or horizontally. Main conductors shall be installed on building roof. Roof penetration can be minimized for the entry of down conductors and interconnecting conductors.

C. When a lightning conductor system is placed on a building, within or about which there are metal objects of considerable size within a few feet of a conductor, there will be a tendency for sparks or side flashes to jump between the metal object and the conductor. To prevent damage, interconnecting conductors should be provided at all places where side flashes are likely to occur.

D. A ground ring electrode (counterpoise conductor loop) encircling a structure shall be designed to connect down conductors and grounding electrodes.

E. Provide intermediate-level potential equalization for reinforced concrete structure buildings, interconnecting the lightning protection system down conductors and other grounded media with a loop conductor at intermediate levels not exceeding 200 ft per NFPA 780.




1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Product Data: Submit complete descriptive information on all materials and installation methods. Product data showing dimensions and materials of each component, and include indication of listing in accordance with UL 96.


1. Shop Drawings:

a. Detailed plan drawings shall be prepared to 1/8” = 1’-0” scale which indicates all Work to be performed.

b. Shop drawings showing layout of air terminals, grounding electrodes, and bonding connections to structure and other metal objects. Include air terminal, grounding electrode, conductor sizes, connections, and termination details.

c. Shop drawings shall include locations of conductors, roof penetrations, floor penetrations, etc., and their compatibility with provisions made during the construction. Once the contract has been established the Contractor shall make a review of provisions being made for the system installation and comment, in writing, with changes or compliance within two weeks of finalizing the contract. Contractor shall coordinate locations of conductors in walls and all penetrations with the appropriate trades: Failure to coordinate these requirements shall not relieve lightning protection Contractor from properly completing its work. This Contractor shall employ the proper trades to provide the chases in walls and roof and floor penetrations required to install the conductors if not coordinated before the floors, walls and roof are installed.

d. Manufacturer's catalog numbers and generic identification shall be indicated for all components shown on the Drawings.

e. As Built Record Drawings: The Contractor shall maintain a master set of As Built Record Drawings that shows changes and any other deviations from the Base Drawings.

2. Approvals: Secure formal approval of Shop Drawings and product data prior to ordering material or installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL





1. Bonded Lightning Protection Systems.

2. ERICO International Corporation.

3. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc.

4. Heary Bro. Lightning Protection Co. Inc.

5. Thompson Lighting Protection, Inc.

B. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. The system provided under this specification shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design.

D. Listing of the manufacturer in the lightning protection section of the current edition of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Electrical Construction Materials List will be accepted as compliance with this requirement.

E. Materials used in connection with the installation of the lightning protection system shall be approved for lightning protection systems by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

F. No combination of materials shall be used that forms an electrolytic couple of such nature that corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture.

G. Where unusual conditions exist which would cause deterioration on corrosion of conductors, conductors with suitable protective coatings or oversize conductors shall be used.

H. If a mechanical hazard is involved, the conductor size shall be increased to compensate therefore, or suitable protection shall be provided.

I. The conductors may be protected by covering them with molding or tubing made of nonmagnetic material.

J. Aluminum materials may not be used except on roofs that utilize aluminum roofing components. When aluminum materials are used, provide all materials of aluminum composition to ensure compatibility, except down conductors and grounding. Provide copper down conductors with bimetal transition at the roof assembly rated for the application. Aluminum material shall not be used where they come into direct contact with earth.

2.2 CONDUCTORS

A. All conductors shall be stranded or braided copper and of the grade ordinarily required for commercial electrical work generally designated as being 98 percent conductive when annealed.




B. Conductor minimum sizes are per NFPA 780.

2.3 AIR TERMINALS

A. Air terminals shall be nickel-plated solid copper with tapered bullet point tips (in lieu of sharp point tips).

B. Minimum air terminal size shall be 5/8 inch diameter by 24 inches long. Where air terminals longer than 24 inches are required, solid copper rods of the appropriate length with threaded ends may be securely attached to the air terminals for extensions.

C. Provide a three-leg tripod brace for each air terminal over 24 inches long. Secure the triangular brace to the roof in a manner approved by the roof vendor. Conductor connections to air terminals shall be bolted

D. Class I (Buildings less than or equal to 75 feet in height): Air terminals shall be of 3/8" x 12" solid copper.

E. Class II (Buildings greater than 75 feet in height): Air terminals shall be of 1/2" x 12" solid copper.

2.4 GROUND RODS

A. Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel, 3/4-inch diameter by 10 feet in length.

2.5 CONNECTIONS

A. All below ground and concealed connections shall be made with exothermic welded connections.

B. Visible connections shall be made with cast bronze bolted pressure connectors that utilize stainless steel or silicon bronze bolts.

C. Connectors shall be:

1. Thompson No. 424B (4 inch parallel clamp) for conductors, 2. Thompson No. 702 bonding plate, 3. Thompson No. 637 cross-run clamp or accepted substitution.

2.6 ROOF PENETRATIONS

A. Roof penetrations shall be accomplished with through-roof fittings specially designed for this purpose. Fittings shall incorporate a positive means for sealing around the penetration.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. Design and provide a complete lightning protection system consisting of air terminals, conductors, connectors, attachments, ground ring electrode, grounding, bonding and necessary appurtenances to comply with minimum requirements listed in the referenced standards.

B. The system shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner and without interfering with other building systems.

C. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work, and field measurements are as shown on the shop drawings. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

D. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.

3.2 INSTALLATION:



C. Conductors:

1. Down conductors are required. Concealed down conductors shall be installed in continuous insulating PVC raceways. Metallic raceways shall not be used. Building steel can be substituted for down conductors. All down conductors must be concealed.

2. Secure conductors to the roof or other structure at a maximum interval of 3 feet.

D. Air Terminals:

1. General: Provide air terminals at a maximum spacing of 20 feet around perimeter cable runs and not over 50 square feet apart through the center of flat roofs. The minimum projection above object protected shall be 10 inches.

Air terminal installations shall be designed and braced for 100-mph winds with 125-mph gusts.

E. Connections:




1. At the completion of the Project, all bolted connectors shall be checked for proper bolt torque.

F. Roof Attachments and Penetrations:

1. Air terminals, conductors and appurtenances for the lightning protection system require attachment to building roofs.

2. Down conductors require penetration of roof surfaces. All attachments to or penetrations through roofs must be in strict accordance with the roof manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Coordinate roof penetrations with Architectural Drawings. 4. The Contractor shall submit details of all roof attachments and penetrations to the

appropriate roof manufacturer for approval prior to installation. 5. Once the lightning protection system installation is complete, the Contractor shall

engage the appropriate roof manufacturer to inspect all roof attachments and penetrations on that manufacturer's roof.

6. Subsequent to the inspection, the roof manufacturer shall furnish the Owner with

a letter indicating that all lightning protection system component roof attachments and penetrations are satisfactory and that such attachments and penetrations will not in any way reduce the manufacturer's warranty on the roof.

7. Any fees for services or inspections provided by the roof manufacturer to

accomplish the above related requirements shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

G. Metal Bodies of Conductance: Bond all metal bodies of conductance which are

located on the roof to the lightning protection system. This includes but is not limited to exhaust fans, vents, handrails, ladders, metal screens and panels, air conditioning units, hatches, skylights, cooling towers, flag poles, antennas, and any large metal body which exceeds the height of air terminals.

H. Cover-Up Inspection:

1. Prior to cover-up of concealed components and connections, notify the Owner so that a cover-up inspection can be performed. Correct any deficiencies and request a final inspection by the Owner prior to concealment of components and connections.

H. Conflicts:

1. In the event a conflict exists between this Specification and any of the referenced standards, the requirements of referenced standards govern. Necessary variances




or corrections shall be made at the expense of the lightning protection contractor in order to obtain UL Master Label.




Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 1

SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports. 5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures. 6. Pre-manufactured wiring systems.

B. This performance specification section provides the minimum requirements for a complete and operating lighting system design, material and installation.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

2. Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control

systems with low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits. 3. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent

lamps. D. Design a complete lighting system using EXCHANGE Lighting Standards for light levels and

energy usage per EXCHANGE, UFC, and local and state standards. Address any conflicts between EXCHANGE and other codes and standards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.




C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

G. RCR: Room cavity ratio.

H. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast, including ballast factor and power factor. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Furnish data

required in "Submittals" Article in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 6. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound power level

and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

7. Life, output, CRI rating, CCT rating, color shift characteristics and energy-efficiency data

for lamps. 8. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture type,

outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by the manufacturer.

b. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current

accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

9. Voltage rating. 10. Type of mounting.




11. Type of ceiling.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 4. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Fire alarm/mass notification devices. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access panels. g. Security cameras.

5. Perimeter moldings.

D. Samples for Verification: Interior lighting fixtures designated for sample submission in Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each sample shall include the following:

1. Lamps: Specified units installed. 2. Accessories: Cords and plugs.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer.

F. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

J. Substitutions: Approval of substitution requests may be contingent upon EXCHANGE approval, furnishing sample fixtures for inspection, providing additional photometric data, such as point-by-point calculations or any or all of the above.





A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. FMG Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FMG.

F. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections.

1. Obtain EXCHANGE's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations. 2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.




2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign. Batteries: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

B. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Warranty Period for HID Electromagnetic Ballasts: Two years from date of substantial

completion

C. Special Warranty for T5, T5H0 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at

least one of each type.

3. Battery and Charger Data: One for each type of emergency lighting unit inside fixture

4. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

5. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one

of each type.

1.9 MANUFACTURERS

A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below a column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.




2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

3. Basis of Design Product: The design of each item of exterior luminaire and its support is

based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1.10 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Compact Fluorescent Fixtures: 1. Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be provided with instant start with electronic high power

factor ballasts (.90 nominal), with Class P protection and end of life protection. 2. Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be provided with lamps as recommended by the fixture

manufacturer.

3. Lamp sockets shall comply with the applicable UL and ANSI provisions with end-of-life protection.

4. Downlight reflectors shall be spun aluminum with the color and finish specified.

5. Downlights shall be self-trimming.

6. Downlights installed in food preparation, over serving lines shall be provided with clear

plastic lenses inside the reflector assembly.

7. Integral Emergency Battery Packs: Where specified, batteries shall be specification grade with highest available lumen output for lamp. Bodine or equal. Provide integral test switch internal to reflector where available. Remote test switch location shall be verified with EXCHANGE.

C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. Fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be internally wired, connected and provided with the quantity of ballasts required to accomplish the switching arrangement indicated.

D. Fluorescent fixtures which utilize double ended lamps and contain ballasts or ballasted luminaries that are supplied from multiwire branch circuits and contain ballasts which can be serviced in place, shall have an internal disconnecting means that shall simultaneously disconnect all supply source conductors per NEC Article 410.

E. EXCHANGE Furnished/Contractor Installed (AF/CI) cornice fixtures shall be Leggett & Platt 48” or 24” fixtures with 30” brackets, 277 volt, Tiger Crylac Hammertone finish, complete with contractor furnished GE F55BX/835 lamp. Contact: Leggett & Platt, Store Fixture Manufacturer, North Charleston, SC 29406 or EXCHANGE Real Estate Equipment division, Procurement Support & Policy Directorate 204/312-6969 Office, 214/312-6296 fax.




F. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. 1. Provide pulse start metal halide (MH) fixtures as specified on the lighting fixture schedule. 2. Frames shall allow for expansion of lens without distortion or cracking. 3. Plastic lens, diffusers, and covers shall be non-yellowing due to UV radiation.

4. Lamp Sockets: High Intensity Discharge comply with applicable provisions of ANSI C-81. 5. High bay type fixtures shall be provided with safety chains, wire guards and swivel hangers.

G. Induction Lamp System:

1. Lamps: The QL lamp system consists of three components which are described below:

a. The lamp (discharge vessel). The wall of the lamp shall be coated on the inside with a 3-line super 80 fluorescent phosphor.

b. The power coupler (construction base with antenna, mounting flange and electrical connection cable.

c. The HF generator (electronics inclusive housing).

2. The Power Coupler: The power coupler is the part of the QL lamp system which transfers the energy from the HF generator to the discharge in the vessel. It consists of an antenna, a heat conduction rod with mounting flange and a coaxial connecting cable, all assembled together on a plastic carrier.

a. Antenna: This cylindrical element is the part of the power coupler located in the center of the discharge vessel. It includes a coil and a ferrite core, which produce a high-frequency magnetic field (2.65 MHz).

b. Heat Conducting Rod and Mounting Flange: By means of a conducting rod, which is located inside the antenna, the heat produced by the coil and the discharge is removed to the outside via the mounting flange. This metallic disk has a double function. Firstly, it ensures the mechanical connection between the lamp and the luminaire, and secondly it transfers the heat to a heat sink, which must be a part of the luminaire. The attachment to the luminaire heat sink is by means of four bolts.

c. Cable: A coaxial cable forms the electrical connections between the antenna and the HF generator. The cable is permanently fixed at the antenna side. It can be (dis-)connected at the side of the HF generator by means of a push-wire connector in order to facilitate mounting of the lamp system in the luminaire. The coaxial cable is made of flexible stranded core conductors insulated in heat-resistant plastic (125°C/257°F max) end provided with a ferrite for EMI reasons. The Contractor may not change the length of the cable.




3. The HF generator primarily contains an oscillator, which supplies the high-frequency power to the antenna to initiate and maintain a gas discharge in the discharge vessel. The HF generator ensures a well-stbilized oscillator power supply and filtering of the mains power. In addition, it provides a very good power factor and a low harmonic distortion of the mains. All the electronics are housed in a metal box with a dual function: screening against RFI (Radio Frequency Interference) and heat conduction to ensure proper long-life functioning of the electronics. When the metal housing and power coupler are properly electrically connected to ground, the system will comply with all (inter-)national requirements regarding electromagnetic compatibility. The HF generator output frequency is approximately 2.65 MHz.

4. Compliances and Approvals:

RFI<30 MHz EN 55015 RFI>30 MHz EN 55022 Harmonics EN 61000-3-2 Immunity EN 61547 Safety EN 61347 EN 60928 Performance EN 60929 Vibration and Bump Tests IEC 68-2-6-Fc IEC 68-2-20-Eb Quality Standards ISO 9001 Environmental Standard ISO 14001

H. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. Metal Finishes: Provide manufacturer’s standard finish applied over corrosion resistant primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters or similar defects. Remove any fixtures showing evidence of rust at time of final inspection.

I. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

J. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.

K. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: Is not permitted.

L. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, Louvers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.




a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum average unless different thickness is indicated.

b. UV stabilized.

2. All fixtures installed in food preparation and over serving lines shall be provided with lenses.

3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Straight blade louvers: Steel baffles perpendicular to the lamps providing shielding. Baffle to be 8” high and 1” on center spacing, painted with 90% reflective white paint.

M. Air-Handling Fluorescent Fixtures: For use with plenum ceiling for air return and heat extraction and for attaching an air-diffuser-boot assembly specified in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

1. Air Supply Units: Slots in one or both side trims join with air-diffuser-boot assemblies. 2. Heat Removal Units: Air path leads through lamp cavity. 3. Combination Heat Removal and Air Supply Unit: Heat is removed through lamp cavity at

both ends of the fixture door with air supply same as for air supply units. 4. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of return-air volume. 5. Static Fixture: Air supply slots are blanked off, and fixture appearance matches active

units.

N. Severe Environment Fixtures: Light fixtures required to be operating in severe environmental conditions such as insulated ceilings, wet, damp or hazardous locations shall be furnished with appropriate UL labels, gaskets, ballast, etc.

O. Lamp Sockets:

1. Fluorescents shall comply with applicable provisions of UL 542 and ANSI C81.

2. Lamp sockets shall comply with the applicable UL and ANSI provisions with end-of-life protection.

P. Mounting Accessories: Fixtures shall be complete with all necessary accessories for installation, such as suspension hangers, canopies, plaster frames, spacers, etc. Where recessed fixtures are specified, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate the proper fixture type (flange, grid type, plaster frame, etc.) with the final type of ceiling construction to be installed. For suspended type luminaires, the hanger lengths (unless specifically indicated) shall be coordinated before ordering and installation. Provide swivel hangers for suspended fixtures attached to slope ceilings.

1.11 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5, T5HO and T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following:




1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated for T5, T5HO. BF=0.85 or higher for T8. 9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 10. Class ‘P’ protected. 11. Voltage: Ballast shall be multi-voltage 120/277V. The operating input voltage shall be 108

to 305 at an input frequency of 60 Hz. Light output shall remain constant for line voltage fluctuation of plus or minus 5%. Ballasts that automatically sense the connected input voltage are preferred. Ballasts with voltage taps are acceptable.

B. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory-wired with ballast arrangements and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field.

C. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F (minus 17 deg C) starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.

2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Higher: Electromagnetic type

designed for use with indicated lamp types.

D. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and

lamp type indicated.

E. Ballast shall be designed for integral mounting with fixtures unless specifically designated as ‘remote mounted’.

F. Compliance: All ballasts shall have compliance with EMI and RFI limits set by the FCC (CFR 47, Part 18) or NEMA and not interfere with normal electrical equipment, and compliance with line transient requirements of ANSI C82.41.

G. Ballasts shall be fault tolerant; lamp failure mode will not adversely impact ballast reliability.

H. Accepted Manufactures: Advance, GE or approved equal.

1.12 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:




1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.

1.13 EMERGENCY POWER UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with fluorescent ballast. Comply with UL 924, NFPA 101 and NEC Article 700.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously at an output of a minimum 1100 lumens each. Connect un-switched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or

entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay. 6. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates

coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

7. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required

test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.

8. The emergency lighting system to be designed with battery units to provide a maintained

one footcandle (minimum) level of lighting throughout the designated path of egress. The




battery unit shall provide a minimum 1350 lumen output for one T8 Octron (4 ft) lamp for a minimum duration of 90 minutes. Other manufacturers shall provide photometric data along with their submittal data to verify that the maintained one footcandle minimum light level is provided with the substitute battery unit. Should additional battery units be required to meet the specification requirements the contractor shall include such units in their bid.

9. Damp area battery units shall be Bodine BDL-500 or equal.

B. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from lighting fixture. Comply with UL 924. Locate remote emergency battery units close as possible to light fixture in accessible location or provide access panels.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp in a remote fixture continuously. 3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. 5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and

demonstrates unit operability. 7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 8. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates




1.14 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Sound Rating: A. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent. 4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.




6. Power Factor: .90 or higher. 7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 8. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.

B. Auxiliary Instant-On Quartz System: Factory-installed feature automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when power outages occur. System automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output.

1.15 EXIT SIGNS

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal

power and demonstrates unit operability. e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit

initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.

3. Master/Remote Sign Configurations:

a. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, and provide additional capacity in LED power supply for power connection to remote unit.




b. Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, except omit power supply, battery and test features. Arrange to receive full power requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently with master unit as a unified system.

1.16 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and

demonstrates unit operability. 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is

restored after an outage. 8. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates




1.17 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.

B. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 3,100 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 36,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.




C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 12,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated.

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 6. 55 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).

1.18 LED LIGHT FIXTURES

A. General 1. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the drawings, and

as specified. 2. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-compliant. 3. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load.

b. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20˚ C. (-4˚ F.)

c. Input Voltage: 120 - 277V (±10%) at 60 Hz.

d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection.

e. Power Factor: ≥ 0.95.

f. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%.

g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.

4. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated: a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements.

b. Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 3000˚ K unless otherwise specified in

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.

c. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70.

d. Light output lumens as indicated in the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.

B. LED Downlights: 1. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.

C. LED Troffers:




1. LED drivers, modules, and reflector shall be accessible, serviceable, and replaceable from below the ceiling.

2. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.

1.19 HID LAMPS

A. All metal halide lamps for indoor use shall be Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 3,500 K.

1.20 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gauge.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gauge.

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

1.21 RETROFIT KITS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Comply with UL 1598 listing requirements.

1. Reflector Kit: UL 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four-lamp, surface-mounted or recessed lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces.

2. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast, lamps, and sockets.

1.22 PRE-MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS

A. Pre-manufactured flexible wiring systems are acceptable, as a Contractor’s option, provided the intended fixture spacing and switching requirements are satisfied and provided it is acceptable to the Authority Having Local Jurisdiction.




B. Contractors intending to use pre-manufactured wiring systems shall obtain wiring diagrams and drawings from the supplier or manufacturer.

C. Wiring, support, etc., shall be per NEC and manufacturers requirements. 1.22 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting Fixtures: Install interior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA’s ‘Standard of Installation’, NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate with the ceiling grid, sprinkler system, mechanical ductwork, plumbing and electrical

conduit, boxes, cabling, etc., in the ceiling space to properly interface the installation of interior lighting fixtures.

C. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. D. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support

element.

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches (150mm) from lighting fixture corners. Comply with NEC 410-16 and UBC support and seismic requirements.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each

fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. Caddy IDS or equal, wrap-around clips are acceptable. Twist or scissor clips are not permitted.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or

center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two ¾-inch (20 mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting

fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

5. Recessed lighting fixtures shall comply with the requirements of NEC Article 410.

E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Securely mount all fixtures, provide all additional hangers and supporting brackets, including canopies, stem suspensions or proper lengths, etc., as necessary to securely fasten and support fixtures. All hangers shall support a weight equivalent of three times the weight of fixture supported. Recessed fixtures are to be secured to ceiling framing to comply with NEC 410-16b.

2. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 3. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.




4. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

5. Aircraft Cable Suspension: Provide cord clips to attach the power cord to the cable

securely and in an orderly manner.

F. Recessed Fixtures Suspended in Gypboard Ceilings:

1. Provide #12 wire hangers attached directly to two opposite corners of each fixture, to structure. At a minimum, comply with NEC 410-16 and UBC support and seismic requirements.

2. Openings cut in suspended gypboard ceilings for recessed fixtures shall be completely

concealed when fixture trim is installed. Provide recessed fixtures with plaster frames and flanges appropriate for the ceiling type. All junction boxes are to be located in an accessible location. The Contractor shall provide ceiling access panels where accessibility to junction boxes is required.

3. Recessed lighting fixtures shall comply with the requirements of NEC Article 410.

G. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section ‘Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables’. I. Junction Boxes:

1. Provide junction box within 6 feet of fixture above removable grid ceiling and wire to recessed fluorescent troffers with 6 ft or less of flexible conduit or MC cable with Type THW-MTW (90°C) conductors and ground wire.

2. Integral outlet boxes shall be acceptable for straight through wiring.

3. All junction boxes shall be accessible per NEC requirements. The Contractor shall

coordinate the box locations with duct work, piping and the ceiling type. Boxes located above suspended gypboard ceilings are not considered accessible, unless access panels are provided.

J. Requirements for lighting fixtures located in or on intermediate or heavy-duty suspended ceiling systems shall meet the intent of NEC 410-16c and UBC Section 25.213.

1. Provide positive attachment to the ceiling system. The attachment device shall have a

capacity of 100 percent of the lighting fixture weight acting in any direction. 2. Lighting fixtures weighing less than 56 pounds (25.4 kg) shall have in addition to the

requirement for attachment, two No.1 2 gauge (2.7 mm) hangers connected from the fixture housing to the structure above. These wires may be slack. Attach the slack wires to the opposite corners of each fixture.

3. Lighting fixtures weighting 56 pounds (25.4 kg) or more shall be supported directly from

the structure above by approved hangers.




4. Pendant-hung lighting fixtures shall be supported directly from the structure above with No. 9 gauge (3.8 mm) wire or approved alternate support without using the ceiling suspension system for direct support.

1.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify

transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

1.24 LAMP DISPOSAL A. Any lamps that must be removed from existing fixtures shall be properly disposed of or recycled

through an approved lamp recycler. Contractor shall contact the local jurisdiction for acceptable lamp disposal. All lamp disposal shall be considered inclusive in the contract.

B. Ballast Disposal: If present, polychlorinated biphenyls (transformer, lighting ballasts) must be

surveyed, removed and disposed of following regulatory requirements. Submit abatement/waste management plans to local jurisdiction.

1.25 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Immediately before final inspection, thoroughly clean all fixtures inside and out including plastics and glassware, adjust all trim, replace broken or damaged parts, lamp and test all fixtures for electrical and mechanical operation. Replace all non-operative lamps and/or ballasts. Noisy ballasts are to be replaced. Replace scratched or marred diffusers.

B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during construction period.

1.26 GROUNDING

A. Provide tight equipment grounding connections for each interior lighting fixture installation. B. Ground conductors in the following applications shall be listed for use as ‘fixture wire’ with a

temperature rating equal to that used in the particular fixture and capacity equal to the branch circuit protection.

1. Channels in fluorescent fixtures used as a raceway. 2. In conduit to first junction outside fluorescent fixture channel. 3. In flexible conduit from fixture to associated junction box.




FIRE DETECTION & ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00 - 1

SECTION 28 31 00

FIRE DETECTION & ALARM SYSTEMS

PART 1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A.Fire protection systems are life-safety systems and will therefore be designed, installed, tested, and expected to perform as such.

B.This Section includes a new analog addressable fire alarm system, integrated voice evacuation and mass notification system.

C.Contractor shall provide and install a complete Mass Notification System in accordance with current Military documents UFC 4-021-019 April 2008 Change 1, January 2010 and UFC 3-600-01. These specifications do not contain all requirements provided in the UFC. The contractor shall read and comply with the UFC.

D.Related Sections include the following:

1. Division "Door Hardware" for door closers and holders with associated smoke detectors, electric door locks, and release devices that interface with the fire alarm system.

2. Division “Mass Notification System”.

3. Division Mechanical and Smoke Control

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A.FACP: Fire alarm control panel.

B.LED: Light-emitting diode.

C.NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

D.Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.

E.AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction is an individual responsible for review, inspection, and/or approval of a system and shall include the building official, fire marshal, engineer, Contracting Officer, or owner’s insurance representative. For this project, the AHJ shall be the base fire department.

1.3 REFERENCES

A.All references shall be of the latest edition.

B.Factory Mutual (FM):

1. FM AG Approval Guide.




C.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 13 Standard For The Installation of Sprinkler Systems

2. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

3. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code

4. NFPA 90A Standard For The Installation of Air Conditioning And Ventilating Systems

5. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

D.Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Appropriate UL equipment standards:

1. UL 864 Control Panels.

2. UL 268 Smoke Detectors.

3. UL 268A Smoke Detectors (HVAC).

4. UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes.

5. UL 346 Water flow Indicators for Fire Protection Signaling.

6. UL 1971, Standard for Visual Signaling Appliances.

E.Building Codes:

1. International Building Code

2. International Fire Code

F.ADA, and/or State and local equivalency standards as adopted by The Authority Having Jurisdiction.

G.Military Unified Facilities Criteria: Current Edition

1. UFC 3-600-1 Current Edition




A. Monaco M-2 analog-addressable fire alarm system with Integrated Radio Transceiver for narrow band D-700 capability. The fire alarm and mass notification system shall have BTX interface with mass notification system, be equipped with all required interface relays and multiplexed signal transmission. Fire alarm contractor shall provide all required equipment and labor for a complete operable and approved system.

B.All equipment furnished shall be new and the latest state of the art products of a single manufacturer, engaged in the manufacturing and sale of analog fire detection devices for over ten years.

C.The system as specified shall be reviewed, fully tested and approved by each of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and turned over to the owner in an operational condition.

D.In the interest of job coordination and responsibilities the installing contractor shall contract with a single supplier for fire alarm equipment, engineering, programming, inspection and testing.

E.The contractor shall provide a representative as requested for project meetings such as to assist in coordination of crafts.




F.Provide a complete new analog addressable fire alarm and mass notification system. Provide new initiating and notification appliances as shown on the contract drawings and as required for a complete, approved system. The system installation shall be in accordance with UFC requirements. The new fire alarm system will include but not be limited to: control equipment, voice evacuation system, amplifiers, microphones, network control equipment, notification power expanders, addressable modules , spot-type photo smoke and heat detection, manual pull stations, strobe units, notification appliances, speakers, duct detectors, and miscellaneous connections such as, smoke exhaust system connections and operation, sprinkler valve supervisory switches, pressure switches, water flow switches, fire suppression monitoring, elevator recall/ shunt trip operation, 120 volt electrical power and connections, auxiliary relays, air handler unit shutdown, damper control, fire door holders, interface with computer room fire control panels, energy management and access control systems, release of door locks, etc. All equipment and wiring shall be new. Contractor shall provide and install conduit raceway as required. Fire alarm contractor shall provide all required equipment and labor for a complete operable and approved system


A.Comply with NFPA 72.

B.Comply with UFC 3-600-01 Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities

C.Comply with UFC 4-021-01 Mass Notification Systems

D.Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations.

2. Smoke detectors.

3. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

4. Fire extinguishing system operation.

5. Mechanical Systems

E.Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Sound an audible alarm and display a custom screen/message defining the building/zone/address/room in alarm and the specific alarm point initiating the alarm.

2. Log to the system history archives all activity pertaining to the alarm condition.

3. Sound the ANSI 117-1 signal with synchronized audible alarm and visual strobe signals throughout the facility.

4. Audible signals shall be silenced from the fire alarm control panel by an alarm silence switch. Visual signals shall be programmable to flash until system reset or additional alarm silencing, as required.

5. A signal dedicated to sprinkler system water flow alarm shall not be silenced while the sprinkler system is flowing at a rate of flow equal to a single head.

6. HVAC shut down shall be coordinated with the smoke control sequence of operation and accomplished by system operated duct detectors as per local requirements. HVAC units serving the smoke control system shall not shut down or hinder the smoke control system operation unless specified by the smoke control sequence of operation. Unless specifically required by the AHJ, HVAC and duct detectors shall initiate a supervisory signal and not a building evacuation.




7. Door hold-open devices shall release by floor or when specifically indicated otherwise on Drawings or local requirements.

8. Electric door locking devices shall release.

9. Provide for an alarm condition at an approved off-site monitoring station or as indicated on Drawings.

F.Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:

1. Signal from the Mass Notification Panel.

2. Display the origin of the supervisory condition report at the local fire alarm control panel.

3. Activate supervisory audible and dedicated visual signal.

4. Provide a means for silencing a supervisory signal shall be permitted only if it is key-operated, located in a locked enclosure, or arranged to provide equivalent protection against unauthorized use. Such a means shall be permitted only if it transfers the supervisory indication to a lamp or other visible indicator and subsequent supervisory signals in other zones cause the supervisory notification appliance(s) to re-sound.

5. Record within system history the initiating device and time of occurrence of the event.

6. Transmit the signal to the monitoring station.

G.System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:

1. Signal from the Mass Notification Panel

2. Display at the local fire alarm control panel the origin of the trouble condition report.

3. Activate trouble audible and visual signals at the control panel and as indicated on the drawings.

4. Silence audible signals from the fire alarm control panel via a trouble acknowledge switch.

5. Trouble reports for primary system power failure to the master control shall be optionally delayed for a period of time not greater than 200 seconds. Trouble conditions that have been restored to normal shall be automatically removed from the trouble display queue and not require operator intervention. This feature shall be software selectable and shall not preclude the logging of trouble events to the historical file.

6. Record within system history, the occurrence of the event, the time of occurrence and the device initiating the event.


H.System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble alarm and annunciate at the FACP and remote annunciators.

I.Power and Voltage Limitations:

1. Battery capacity calculations. Battery size shall be a minimum of 125% of the calculated requirement.

2. Power supplies shall be sized to furnish the total connected load in a worst-case condition plus 25% spare capacity. (i.e. 4A supply x .25 spare = 1A reserve.)

3. Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs demonstrating worst-case condition. Unless otherwise approved by the engineer, voltage drop calculations shall be performed using




the Lump-Sum approach using device nominal rating voltage. Calculations must include and clearly indicate wire length out and back to panel. Calculations shall be provided for horn, strobe, and speaker circuits. Use of notification power booster panels shall be limited.

4. Device current values for voltage calculations shall be based on the lowest nameplate voltage. (i.e. current values at a voltage of 20 volts shall be used when available rather than current values for 24 volts.)

5. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) design shall incorporate a 25% spare capacity for future expansion.

6. End-of-line voltage reading will be required for each circuit and must have a 25% spare capacity. (i.e. 24V circuit – 21V nameplate = 3 volt drop x 0.25 spare = 0.75 volt safety factor required.)

7. In no case shall notification appliance circuits be designed or measured to have an end-of-line voltage below 20 volts or the manufactures nameplate voltage, whichever is higher.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.Shop Drawings: Five copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for review. The contractor shall include the following information in submittals.

1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared and signed by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design.

b. Fire alarm certified by NICET, minimum Level III.

2. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

3. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.

4. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire types and sizes.

5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color code.

6. Batteries: Size calculations.

7. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. Coordinating the installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, the detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturers written recommendations.

8. Elevation Details: Details shall be provided showing mounting of wall and ceiling devices. Where exposed or pocketed ceilings are involved, specific dimensioned details of detector and notification devices shall be provided.

9. Device Mounting Details: Details of device back-box requirements shall be provided.




10. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits. Unless prohibited by Owner, CADD files for floor plans may be obtained through General Contractor from the Architect/Engineer. Unless noted otherwise, Architect/Engineer firm charges [$150.00] per sheet.

C.Cut Sheets, Calculations, and Other Design Documents: Each set of shop drawings shall be accompanied with supportive submittal documentation. This documentation shall be quality bound and shall be organized and numerically tabbed into the following sections.

1. Fire Alarm Control Panels, Power Supplies and Annunciators

2. Detection Devices

3. Audio/Visual Devices

4. System Components, Modules and Relays

5. Battery Calculations and cut sheets (summary of results shall also be on plans)

6. Voltage Calculations (summary of results shall also be on plans)

7. Compatibility Listings (matrix, table, or info showing device compatibility)

8. Operating Instructions for entire System (This will include a copy of what will be posted adjacent to FACP)

9. Manufacturers Inspection instructions and other maintenance criteria from NFPA 72 and UFC 3-600-02

10. Designer and installer certificates (documents prepared by a PE do not require certificate, but are required to be sealed.)

D.Qualification Data: Copies of certificates for installers and documenting approved manufacture representation shall be provided.

E.Field quality-control test reports.

F.Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A, recommendations for Owner's manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the FACP.

G.Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Contracting Officer for review.

H.Documentation:

1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to NFPA 72 to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to NFPA 72 to Owner. Format of the written sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix.

a. Hard copies on paper to Owner.




I.A copy of these fire alarm specifications shall be included with all submittal packages including those to the engineer, owner, and local AHJ’s.

J.Incomplete submittals shall be returned without review, unless previously approved by the Contracting Officer.


A.Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B.Qualifications:

1. The contractor shall submit copies of all required Licenses and Bonds as required in the State having jurisdiction to the Contracting Officer upon award of contract, and engineer upon request.

2. The contractor shall employ on staff a minimum of one NICET level III Fire Alarm Technician, a registered Fire Protection Engineer, a professional engineer registered in the State of the installation, or a Certified Safety Professional with proven experience in fire alarm systems. This individual shall make regular site visits as necessary to oversee the system installation. This individual will be held accountable for system oversight, code compliance, and quality of installation. This requirement shall apply to the fire alarm contractor and any other contractor installing portions of the system such as wiring and/or devices by an electrical contractor. Qualified individual shall immediately provide evidence of qualification upon request.

3. At least one NICET Level II Fire Alarm Technician shall be present and have oversight anytime fire alarm equipment and/or wiring is being installed. This requirement shall apply to the fire alarm contractor and any other contractor installing portions of the system such as wiring and/or devices by an electrical contractor. Technician shall immediately provide evidence of qualification upon request.

4. Fire alarm shop drawings shall be prepared and signed by a NICET Level III Fire Alarm Technician or a Professional Engineer with proven and documented experience/training in fire alarm system design and codes. Plans not prepared by the Professional Engineer or under the direct supervision (same employment) of the Professional Engineer shall not be approved. Design documents prepared by a Professional Engineer shall bear a seal of the engineer.

5. The Contracting Officer may accept a testing or qualification body other than NICET, if submitted and approved prior to bidding the project,. Evidence of qualification and means for verification shall be provided in writing to the Contracting Officer with sufficient time for evaluating such request prior to awarding of contract. However, such qualifications shall be specifically focused towards fire alarm system design, installation, and codes. Qualifications for other low voltage systems such as security, access control, telephone, etc. shall not be approved.

6. The State approved or licensed fire alarm contractor whose name appears on the system and who is responsible for system warranty and service shall have sole authority to establish installation responsibilities. Thus, if any portion is to be wired or installed by a separate contractor (such as an electrical contractor), then the fire alarm contractor will by contract select and warrant such contractor. An electrical or other contractor not licensed by the state and/or not meeting qualification requirements of this specification shall not dictate installation conditions for this system.




1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A.Factory Mutual (FM).

1. FM AG Approval Guide.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A.Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not less than 1 unit.

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not less than 1 unit.

3. Smoke, Fire, and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than 1 unit of each type.

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than 1 unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamper-proofed components.

6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.

7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. FACP and Equipment:

2. Monaco M-2 analog-addressable fire alarm system with Integrated Radio Transceiver for narrow band D-700 capability (165.0625).

3. Wire and Cable:

a. Comtran Corporation.

b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company.

c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company.

d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.

4. Audible and Visual Signals:

a. Cooper/Wheelock, Inc.

b. SP-405 Cooper/ Wheelock Smart Panel




2.2 FACP

A.General Description:

1. Monaco M-2 analog-addressable fire alarm system with Integrated Radio Transceiver for narrow band D-700 capability (165.0625). Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed. Fire alarm system shall report 100% of signals zone by zone to the D21 system.

2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment of sensitivity at the FACP.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

4. Interfaced with the Mass Notification System panel. (Refer to Division 13 Section “Mass Notification System”.)

B.Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the FACP and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, three line(s) of 160 characters, minimum.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands; and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

C.Circuits:

1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style 7.

2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style Z.

3. Actuation of alarm notification appliances, emergency voice communications, annunciation, elevator recall, and actuation of suppression systems shall occur within 10 seconds after the activation of an initiating device.

4. Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the FACP for mechanical equipment shutdown and magnetic door-holding circuits is not required, provided a break in the circuit will cause doors to close and mechanical equipment to shut down.

D.Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP.

2. Activate a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the detector.

3. Record events by the system printer.

4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.

5. Cancel FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

E.Notification-Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal pattern, complying with ANSI S3.41.




F.Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for the dc component shall be from the ac supply.

G.Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACP and remote annunciators, after initiating devices are restored to normal.

1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained.

2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again.

3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.

H.Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of initiating devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The FACP and annunciators shall display a test indication while the test is underway. If testing ceases while in walk-test mode, after a preset delay, the system shall automatically return to normal.

I.Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and make a print-out of the final adjusted values on the system printer.

J.Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals to a remote alarm station through a master box fire reporting system.

K.Service Modem: Ports shall be RS-232 for system printer and for connection to a dial-in terminal unit.

1. The dial-in port shall allow remote access to the FACP for programming changes and system diagnostic routines. Access by a remote terminal shall be by encrypted password algorithm.

L.Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory signal, and supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be powered by the 24-V dc source.

1. The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.

2. Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at the service entrance equipment. Paint the switch box red and identify it with "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM POWER."

M.Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger and an automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

2. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.

N.Surge Protection:

1. Install surge protection on normal ac power for the FACP and its accessories. Comply with Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" for auxiliary panel suppressors.




2. Install surge protectors recommended by FACP manufacturer. Install on all system wiring external to the building housing the FACP. This shall include power, telephone, and radio transmitter wiring.

O.Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.3 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES

A.Description: UL 38 listed; Metal Construction; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted on recessed outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type. With integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

2. Station Reset: Key operated switch. (10 Spare Keys shall be provided to the base.)

3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear polycarbonate plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

2.4 SYSTEM DETECTORS

A. Addressable Heat Detector:

1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

3. Multipurpose type, containing the following:

a. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

b. Heat sensor, combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature.

4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection of building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Heat detection shall be provided within 10 feet of each fire control panel and power supply per NFPA 72.

8. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at the FACP for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.




b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at the FACP to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.

c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.

3. Provide as indicated and as required.

C. Addressable Duct Smoke Detectors:

1. Contractor shall field verify and coordinate with mechanical engineer and contractor placement and quantity of duct detectors. Refer to mechanical specifications and drawings. All duct detection shall be mounted indoors at ceiling level after ducts have penetrated roof. Duct detection shall initiate and transmit an alarm signal.

2. Photoelectric Smoke Duct Detectors:

a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.

b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.

3. UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

5. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied detector. The enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4X.

6. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

7. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

8. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.

9. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.

10. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

11. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit. Coordinate operation with smoke control/exhaust system.

12. The fire alarm contractor shall coordinate the installation and programming of duct detection with the smoke control/exhaust system sequence of operation for proper approved operation.




2.5 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A.Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly.

B.Fire Alarm/MNS Speakers and Speaker Strobes: (8 Inch Model)

1. UL 1480 listed.

2. Range Units: Rated 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2 watts at 70-volts.

3. Mounting: Flush; bi-directional.

4. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the speaker location. Fire alarm contractor shall perform Dba and intelligibility testing. Contractor shall move, add and/or re-tap speakers as required to meet NFPA and base requirements.

5. Device shall be capable of multiple alert tones as indicated on plans or as required by the respective military facility.

6. The Speaker portion of Fire Alarm Speaker and Speaker Strobe Notification Appliances indicated on the design drawings shall be utilized by the Fire Alarm System and Mass Notification System. The Mass Notification System shall override the fire alarm system in accordance with UFC 4-021-01. Visible Alarm Devices shall be separate notification appliances.

C.Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output: As indicated on the Drawings

2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

D.Manufacturer shall provide wall mount devices and ceiling mount devices. Devices shall be installed as indicated on drawings.

E.Notification devices shall be trimmed in white unless indicated otherwise.

2.6 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REMOTE INDICATORS

A.Remote status and alarm indicator and test stations, with LED indicating lights. Light is connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a single-gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch.

2.7 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A.Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Class 1.




B.Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP. Controls with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.

2.8 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A.Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a system address for listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B.Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to air handling equipment.

2.9 GUARDS FOR PHYSICAL PROTECTION

A.Description: Welded wire mesh or polycarbonate of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, strobe, or other device requiring protection. Any device located in Receiving/Staging area shall be protected as such.

B.Manual pull station shall have tamper proof cover equivalent to Stopper II with sounder.

2.10 WIRE AND CABLE

A.Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

B.Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, No. 14 AWG.

1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70 Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service. UL listed as Type FPL, and complying with requirements in UL 1424 and in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

C.Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.

2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.

2.11 AS-BUILT PLAN CABINET

A.An As-Built plan cabinet shall be installed with every new fire alarm system installation or replacement. The purpose of the cabinet is to provide a secured location for all fire alarm documentation related to the system. This will aid in future servicing and modifications to the system.

1. The plan cabinet shall be sized and contain approved plans, specifications, manuals, test reports, service reports, computer disk, and a hard copy printout of the system logic/programming.

2. The cabinet shall be keyed the same as the fire alarm panel.

3. The cabinet shall be located as shown on plans, adjacent to the main fire alarm panel, or there shall be signage on the fire alarm panel indicating where the plan cabinet is located.




B.The cabinet shall be neatly and clearly labeled “As Built Drawings” and shall be equal to the DBX As Built Cabinets manufactured by Space Age Electronics.

2.12 FIRE ALARM MONITORING

A.The contractor shall connect the system to base-wide Monaco Fire Reporting System.

B.Provide all required equipment and connections to Monaco Radio-frequency transmitter and antenna to match the base-wide fire reporting system.

C.The FACP shall include a Monaco type alarm transmitter.

D.This equipment shall be a listed component of the fire alarm panel and shall be installed inside the fire alarm control panel per manufacturers’ criteria.

E.This equipment shall be capable of transmitting to the monitoring service the device address that is in alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions.

F.Water-flow signals shall be specifically received by the monitoring service as water flow alarms.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A.Connecting to Existing Equipment: The existing fire alarm system shall remain in service during the new fire alarm system installation. This contractor shall maintain and extend existing system integrity and circuits as required.

1. Connect new equipment to the existing monitoring equipment at the Supervising Station.

B.Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:

1. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.

2. Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas, shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72.

3. Spacing of heat detectors shall be determined based on guidelines and recommendations in NFPA 72.

C.HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

D.Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct.

E.Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

F.Notification Appliances: Install appliances on wall or ceiling as indicated on design drawings or required for complete coverage in accordance with NFPA72. In large open ceiling areas where walls are not available, devices may be suspended on rigidly supported threaded conduit.




G.Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install appliances on wall or ceiling as indicated on design drawings or required for complete coverage in accordance with NFPA72. In large open ceiling areas where walls are not available, devices may be suspended on rigidly supported threaded conduit

H.Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor. 6 ft AFF.

I.FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

J.Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

K.Antenna for Radio Alarm Transmitter: Mount to building structure where indicated. Use mounting arrangement and substrate connection that will resist 100-mph wind load with a 1.3 gust factor without damage.

L.No portion of a fire alarm system shall be installed prior to having plans on site that have been approved and stamped by the Contracting Officer and the local AHJ. This includes wiring. Approved stamped plans shall be on site at all times while the system is in the installation stage.

1. Smoke detectors shall not be installed until the construction cleanup of all trades is complete per NFPA 72. Any smoke detector that has been installed prior to the construction cleanup of all trades and without prior written approval of the engineer and local AHJ shall be marked in a permanent manner that will identify it from re-use and shall be replaced prior to commissioning of the system and/or turning over to the owner. Such detectors shall be replaced at the sole expense of the installing contractor. Subject to approval of the engineer and local AHJ this may exclude services, which do not create air-born particles such as telephone/network services, and modular furniture installation.

2. Orange shipping covers, rubber gloves, tape, or other devices shall not be used to try and get around these basic requirements.

3.2 BACK BOXES

A.Any time fire alarm speakers are to be installed, a 4-square deep box with extension ring shall be installed to limit potential damage to wiring.

B.Manual pull stations shall be located on walls such that tamper resistant covers can be installed as may be indicated, or in the future. Therefore, a 3-inch clearance from other switches, window openings, door frames, etc. shall be provided on each side of a manual pull station and 4 inches clear area above and below the manual pull station.


A.Install wiring according to the following:

1. NECA 1.

2. TIA/EIA 568-A.

B.Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."

1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.




2. Devices need to be included on the circuits as indicated on the approved plans and calculations. Changes will need to be evaluated by the designer. Changes in wire routing may require new calculations.

3. Raceway system shall be minimum 3/4" EMT Type.

4. Paint all fire alarm conduit red. In exposed ceiling areas, conduit may be painted to match surroundings but provide 3/4 inch red bands every 10 feet on center.

C.Unless noted otherwise on the plans, power booster panels shall not be fed from a separate notification power booster panel (daisy chained).

D.Each floor of a building shall incorporate an isolation module on signaling and notification circuits. Such isolation module shall prevent any fault on a floor from affecting any other building floor. This same concept shall apply to isolate individual buildings when applicable.

E.Each circuit entering or exiting the building shall be protected with surge protection. This includes 24vdc, 120vac, and telephone circuits serving the fire alarm system.

F.Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

G.Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

H.Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

I.Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the FACP and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A.Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

B.Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each end and at terminal points with wire markers. Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible.

C.Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.

D.Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."




3.5 GROUNDING

A.Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to the FACP.

3.6 Field Quality Control

A.Contractor Pre-Testing and Record of Completion Testing

1. This section covers contractor pre-testing and documentation by the installing contractor that shall be conducted before any commissioning inspection or AHJ testing is scheduled.

2. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before any system devices are installed or energized.

3. Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72.

4. Duct and HVAC detectors shall not be installed or in-place when the HVAC systems are first turned on. All HVAC systems shall be run sufficiently to remove loose dust and debris. Failure to protect detectors may result in detector replacement per this specification.

5. Audibility testing shall not be conducted until all doors, windows, walls, ceilings, and carpeting are in place.

6. All Alarm Initiating Devices shall be observed and logged for correct zone and sensitivity. These devices and their bases shall be tagged with adhesive tags located in an area not visible when installed, showing the initials of the installing technician and date.

7. Computer/labeler generated labels with the address number only may be installed on the exterior of the device as long as the background is clear and installed in a quality manner. This will assist in the inspection, testing, maintenance, and trouble-shooting of the system.

8. All Smoke detectors shall be commissioned using canned smoke or a method that will functionally test the smoke chamber. The use of Magnets for commission testing of smoke detectors is Strictly Prohibited.

9. A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or charts of tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging form for readings, dates and witnesses.

10. Air velocity readings shall be taken and recorded for each HVAC related smoke detector.

11. The installing contractor shall make instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the system tests available.

12. The following equipment shall be a minimum for conducting the tests:

a. Ladders, scaffolds, or lifts as required to access all installed equipment.

b. Multimeter for reading voltage, current and resistance.

c. Two way radios, flashlights, screwdrivers, measuring tapes.

d. A manufacturer recommended device for measuring airflow through air duct smoke detector sampling assemblies.




e. Calibrated decibel meter.

B.At minimum the following tests shall be conducted and documented.

1. Turn each sprinkler system flow valve two full turns and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.

2. Verify activation of all flow switches under approved flowing conditions.

3. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.

4. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.

5. Open and short Notification Appliance Circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.

6. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.

7. Check presence and audibility of tone throughout building spaces. This includes measuring dBA levels.

8. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the Walk Test feature.

9. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.

10. Each notification horn circuit shall be tested under standby/battery power. End-of-line voltage readings shall be taken at the end-of-line resistor for Class “B” circuits, or at the booster panel for Class “A” circuits. Any circuit that measures less than 20 volts dc or the nameplate voltage, whichever is higher, shall be considered as failing the design. Note: Some systems incorporating synchronizing modules can impair results. If the module cannot be bypassed for voltage readings, the manufacturer should be contacted for guidance.

11. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.

3.7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A.This section details criteria for commissioning inspections by AHJ’s and the owner.

1. This stage of testing shall not be scheduled or conducted until all pre-testing has been completed and is in compliance with applicable requirements.

2. A signed Record of Completion shall be provided to the inspector prior to starting this testing.

3. The contractor is responsible for testing all components in accordance with the manufacturers required and suggested procedures and in accordance with NFPA 72. If this specification incorporates a detailed Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) prepared by the engineer than it shall also be followed.

4. A program matrix shall be provided by the installing contractor referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that input.

5. The commissioning inspector shall use the system record drawings and other documents specified under this specification during the testing procedure to verify operation as




programmed. In conducting the commissioning test, the inspector shall request demonstration of any or all input and output functions.

6. All Smoke detectors shall be commissioned using canned smoke or a method that will functionally test the smoke chamber. The use of magnets for commission testing of smoke detectors is strictly prohibited.

7. New detectors that show to be dirty through system sensitivity testing shall be replaced.

8. The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. System wiring shall be tested to show the following results and the systems subsequence operation:

(1) Open, Shorted or Grounded Circuits.

(2) Primary and Battery power disconnected.

(3) End-of-line voltage readings on notification circuits.

b. System notification circuits and appliances operate as programmed. Audibility and visual levels meet required standards.

c. A minimum of 15 dBA above ambient shall be obtained in every occupiable space (throughout) per NFPA 72. This includes storage rooms, electrical rooms, telephone rooms, and any other occupiable space.

d. System shall demonstrate the correct messages at the FACP and any remote annunciator.

e. System off-site reporting shall be verified for alarm, supervisory, trouble, correct address, facility name, contact phone number, and contact name.

f. System shall be tested for stand-by battery backup as outlined in this specification.

3.8 FINAL DOCUMENTATION

A.System documentation shall be supplied to the owner and shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. System record (as-built) drawings and wiring details including one set of reproducible drawings, and a CD ROM with copies of the record drawings in AUTOCAD .dwg format, or .dxf format for use in a CAD drafting program.

2. System Operating, Installation and Maintenance Manuals.

3. System matrix showing input signals to output commands.

4. Provide a copy of the FACP system programming on a CD-ROM.

B.A copy of all above materials and documentation shall be provided in the as-built plan cabinet.

C.The installation contractor shall provide the owner with account information, phone numbers, passwords, and terms/conditions of the monitoring company.

3.9 FINAL SYSTEM TRAINING

A.The installation contractor shall familiarize the owner and/or owner representative with location of all fire alarm panels, modules, devices, wire routing, and plan cabinet contents.




B.The installation contractor shall furnish training as follows:

1. A simplified training manual on system operation unique to the system shall be prepared and presented to the owner. This manual shall cover key items and day-to-day operation. Such manual shall be presented in a professional and legible format such as that provided through use of a Microsoft PowerPoint, or Microsoft Word.

2. The owner shall be provided with at least 3 hard-copies and an electronic format that can be edited through commonly available software.

3. The training program shall be presented such that the owner can readily train new staff over the life of the system.

4. Training in the receipt, handling and acknowledgment of alarms. This shall include emphasis that alarms shall not be silenced until after a complete and thorough investigation has been conducted. If there is a hazard, then only the fire department is authorized to silence an alarm.

5. Sequence of operation for all interconnected systems.

6. Training in the system operation including manual control of output functions from the system control panel.

7. The total training requirement shall be a minimum of 2 hours, but shall be sufficient to cover all items specified. The contractor shall provide two such training sessions.

3.10 ADJUSTING AND FOLLOW-UP

A.Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B.Follow-Up Tests and Inspections: After date of Substantial Completion, test the fire alarm system complying with testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for three monthly, and one quarterly, periods. The owner shall be encouraged to participate in these services. Following training outlined within this specification, the owner should be considered qualified for monthly and quarterly tests and inspection of the system.

C.Annual Test and Inspection: Eleven months after date of Substantial Completion, test the fire alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. The owner should be encouraged to participate in these services as reinforcement of system operability.

3.11 WARRANTY AND SERVICES

A.The contractor shall warranty the entire system for electrical and mechanical failures for a period of one year. The warranty shall begin with the completion of the commissioning testing or when beneficial use to the owner is determined and so documented.

B.If a commissioning test for an AHJ has been scheduled and is cancelled without sufficient notice to modify a travel schedule without financial penalties, or the system fails to pass all requirements of this specification resulting in a re-inspection, the AHJ reserves the right to bill the contractor for expenses incurred as a result thereof. Such expenses may include travel, transportation, lodging, meals, and daily wages. Daily wages shall not exceed $800 per day.



MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM 28 39 00 - 1

SECTION 28 39 00

MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS

PART 1. GENERAL


A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B.The design of this Mass Notification system incorporates specific components beyond that required for a fire alarm system, but is directly interfaced through hardware with the fire alarm system.

C.Contractor shall provide and install a complete Mass Notification System in accordance with current Military documents UFC 4-021-01 April 2008 Change 1, January 2010 and UFC 3-600-01. These specifications do not contain all requirements provided in the UFC. The contractor shall read and comply with the UFC.

1.2 SUMMARY

A.The United States Military has developed provisions for Mass Notification of personnel in the event of threats other than fire. Threats could vary from land attacks, sea attacks, chemical attacks, radiological attacks, and others.

B.The system components, supervision, and basic installation practices shall comply with criteria outlined in NFPA 72 and the Americans with Disabilities Act.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A.FACP: Fire alarm control panel.

B.UFC: Unified Facilities Criteria.

C.LED: Light-emitting diode.

D.NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

E.Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.

F.AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction is an individual responsible for review, inspection, and/or approval of a system and shall include the building official, fire marshal, engineer, architect, or owner’s insurance representative. For this project, the AHJ shall be the base fire department and/or force protection.




1.4 REFERENCES

A.Military Documents:

1. UFC 3-600-01 Fire Protection Engineering For Facilities

2. UFC 3-600-02 Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Fire Protection Systems

3. UFC 4-021-01 Mass Notification Systems For Facilities

B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code

C.Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Appropriate UL equipment standards:

1. UL 864 Control Panels.

2. UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes.

3. UL 1971, Standard for Visual Signaling Appliances.

D.Federal and Base Codes as adopted and/or amended by The Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

E.ADA, and/or UFAS equivalency standards as adopted by The Authority Having Jurisdiction.


A.Mass notification is the capability to provide real-time information to all building occupants or personnel in the immediate vicinity of a building during emergency situations. To reduce the risk of mass casualties, there must be a timely means to notify building occupants of threats and what should be done in response to those threats. Pre-recorded and live voice emergency messages are required to provide this capability.

B.Failure of either the mass notification control panel or the fire alarm control panel shall still provide for a minimum means of occupant notification by the remaining system.

C.Each mass notification panel shall be the primary public address system for each building or facility and provide all required paging ports, inputs, addressable zone controls and paging splitters to interface with all AAFES Radio, telephone systems, music distribution systems, all-call and zone paging, for the delivery of alert tones and voice messages. Each mass notification system shall be equipped with a minimum of 10 paging zones and 10 auxiliary inputs. Paging zones shall be accessible through the telephone system. Tones and voice messages initiated by the fire alarm or mass notification systems shall mute all other programs such as music, paging or prerecorded commercial announcements.

D.All equipment furnished shall be new and the latest state of the art products by manufacturers, engaged in the manufacturing and sale of analog fire detection and/or UL listed communication devices for over five years.

E.The system as specified is subject to review, full testing, and approval by each of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and shall be turned over to the owner in an operational condition.

F.The contractor shall provide a representative as requested for project meetings such as to assist in coordination of crafts.




1.6 POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE

A.Refer to Section 28 31 00, “Fire Alarm System”, for Post Contract Maintenance.


A.Comply with all referenced documents.

B.Mass Notification initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations

2. Switches located with the main and any remote microphones

C.Mass Notification activation shall initiate the following actions:

1. Display action initiated on the mass notification panel.

2. Initiate the appropriate alert tone and pre-recorded message for the respective alert switch activated.

3. Activate the mass notification strobes throughout the building.

4. Mass notification shall have alert priority over fire alarm system. Thus, if fire alarm is also in alarm state, the fire alarm audible alarms shall stop during the mass notification messages. Fire alarm strobes may continue to flash and shall be synchronized with mass notification strobes.

5. Mass notification signals shall not be displayed as alarm conditions. Text descriptions shall clearly indicate appropriate condition.


7. System shall report 100% of signals zone by zone to the D21 system.

D.Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:

1. Display the origin of the supervisory condition report at the local fire alarm control panel and/or mass notification panel.

2. Activate supervisory audible and dedicated visual signals.

3. Provide a means for silencing a supervisory signal shall be permitted only if it is key-operated, located in a locked enclosure, or arranged to provide equivalent protection against unauthorized use. Such a means shall be permitted only if it transfers the supervisory indication to a lamp or other visible indicator and subsequent supervisory signals in other zones cause the supervisory notification appliance(s) to re-sound.

4. Record within system history the initiating device and time of occurrence of the event.


E.System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:

1. Display at the local fire alarm control panel and or mass notification panel the origin of the trouble condition report.

2. Activate trouble audible and visual signals at the control panels and as indicated on the drawings.




3. Silence audible signals via a trouble acknowledge switch.

4. Trouble reports for primary system power failure to the master control shall be optionally delayed for a period of time not greater than 200 seconds. Trouble conditions that have been restored to normal shall be automatically removed from the trouble display queue and not require operator intervention. This feature shall be software selectable and shall not preclude the logging of trouble events to the historical file.

5. Record within system history, the occurrence of the event, the time of occurrence and the device initiating the event.


F.System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate audible and visual signals at the main panels and remote annunciators.

G.Power and Voltage Limitations:

1. Battery capacity calculations. Battery size shall be a minimum of 125% of the calculated requirement.

2. Power supplies shall be sized to furnish the total connected load in a worst-case condition plus 25% spare capacity. (i.e. 4A supply x .25 spare = 1A reserve.)

3. Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs demonstrating worst-case condition. Unless otherwise approved by the engineer, voltage drop calculations shall be performed using the Lump-Sum approach. Calculations must include and clearly indicate wire length out and back to panel. Calculations shall be provided for horn, strobe, and speaker circuits.

4. Device current values for voltage calculations shall be based on the lowest nameplate voltage. (i.e. current values at a voltage of 20 volts shall be used when available rather than current values for 24 volts.)

5. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) design shall incorporate a 25% spare capacity for future expansion.

6. End-of-line voltage reading will be required for each circuit and must have a 25% spare capacity. (i.e. 24V circuit – 21V nameplate = 3 volt drop x 0.25 spare = 0.75 volt safety factor required.)

7. In no case shall notification circuits be designed or measured to have an end-of-line voltage below 20 volts or the manufactures nameplate voltage, whichever is higher.

H.Notification zones and circuits shall be defined and configured such that organizational zones within a building can be isolated for zone evacuation, and/or isolation during testing conditions.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A.Comply with submittal requirements Section 28 31 00, Fire Alarm System.


A.Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B.Qualifications: Section 28 31 00, Fire Alarm System, for qualification requirements.





A.See Section 28 31 00, Fire Alarm System, for criteria.

1.11 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A.See Section 28 31 00, Fire Alarm System, for criteria.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Mass notification control panels

a. Cooper/Wheelock, Inc. or equal

b. Madahcom or equal

2. Wire and Cable:

a. Comtran Corporation.

b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company.

c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company.

d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.

3. Audible and Visual Signals:

a. Cooper/Wheelock or approved equal.

2.2 MASS NOTIFICATION COMPONENTS

A.Control Panel:

1. The system shall be a multi channel voice evacuation system incorporating user selectability of 8 distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation of a digital voice module for 8 prerecorded messages. The system shall incorporate microphone override. The system shall have the capability of utilizing a remote microphone station with redundant controls of the evacuation system control panel.

2. A hand held microphone shall be provided and, upon activation, shall take priority over any tone signal, recorded message or remote microphone operation in progress, while maintaining the strobe NAC Circuits activation.

3. The system shall be capable of interconnection with a larger campus/base wide notification system that includes operation from a central communication center and an outdoor public notification system provided by the same manufacturer.

4. Shall be capable of remote functions via a RS-232 or RS-485 interface.

B.Circuits:




1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style 7.

2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style Z.

3. Actuation of alarm notification appliances including emergency voice communications shall occur within 10 seconds after the activation of an initiating device.

4. Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the mass notification panel.

5. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for the dc component shall be from the ac supply.

6. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the mass notification panel and remote annunciators, after initiating devices are restored to normal.

7. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained.

8. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again.

9. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.

C.Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of initiating devices. If testing ceases while in walk-test mode, after a preset delay, the system shall automatically return to normal.

D.Remote Microphone:

1. Systems shall provide two microphone locations and be capable of adding up to three (3) remote microphones.

2. The Remote Microphone station shall be compatible with any Dual-Circuit Supervised Audio, Fire and Emergency Evacuation System.

3. The unit shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, redundant controls and system status indicators of/for the system.

4. The unit shall incorporate microphone override of any tone generation or prerecorded messages.

5. The unit shall be fully supervised from the control panel.

6. The unit shall be made of steel and be flush mounted to a standard 4-gang electrical box.

7. The unit shall come equipped with a keyed lock that, when activated allows the use of the unit. The locking arrangement shall be identical to the control unit. The unit shall be painted red. The unit shall have a weight of 1 Lb., 8 oz. and its’ dimensions shall be 5"H x 9"W x .5"D. The unit shall have a 3 YEAR WARRANTY.

8. The approvals for this unit shall include: UL Standard 864, FCC Part 15.

E.Function of Amplifier:

1. Contractor shall provide quantity of amplifiers required to meet system demand plus 20%. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different announcements to different zones, or for manual transmission of announcements by use of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall be UL 1711 listed.

2. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones.




3. Programmable tone and message sequence selection.

4. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."

5. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of the type recommended by NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of the notification-appliance circuits of the FACP.

6. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units, on primary equipment failure.

F.Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory signal, and supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be powered by the 24-V dc source.

1. The alarm current draw of the mass notification system shall not exceed 80 percent of each respective power-supply module ratings.

2. Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at the service entrance equipment. Provide a red label at circuit breakers and identify it with "FIRE ALARM/MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM."

G.Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger and an automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

2. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.

3. Provide minimum 72 hours standby and 5 minutes alarm back-up power.

H.Surge Protection:

1. Install surge protection on normal ac power for the control panel, each power supply, and all accessories. Comply with Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" for auxiliary panel suppressors.

2. Install surge protectors recommended by control panel manufacturer. Install on all system wiring external to the building housing the control panel. This shall include power, telephone, and radio transmitter wiring.

I.Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.3 MANUAL ACTIVATION STATIONS

A.Description: UL 38 listed; Color shall be white, operating instructions and label in contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted on recessed outlet box.

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type. With integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

2. Station Reset: Key- switch.




2.4 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A.Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly. Ceiling speakers shall be 8”.

B.Visible Alarm Devices: Amber Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1638, with amber translucent lens mounted on a white trim faceplate. There shall be no wording on this strobe or trim.

1. Rated Light Output: As indicated on the Drawings

C.Manufacturer shall provide wall mount devices and ceiling mount devices. Devices shall be installed as indicated on drawings.

1. Voice/Tone Speakers: The Speaker portion of Fire Alarm Speaker and Speaker Strobe Notification Appliances indicated on the design drawings shall be utilized by the Fire Alarm System and Mass Notification System. The Mass Notification System shall override the fire alarm system in accordance with UFC 4-021-01. Visible Alarm Devices shall be separate notification appliances.

2. Speaker Horn: Series STH-15S Supervised Horn Loudspeaker (Tap at 3.5 Watts)

a. Color: Red or Gray

b. Mounting: Wall or Ceiling

c. 15 watt high efficiency Compression Driver

d. Weather resistant, vandal resistant

e. 25/70/100V transformer

f. 5 mfd capacitor for line supervision

g. Univeral mounting bracket (SHMP)

h. Approvals: UL Standard 1480, CSFM

2.5 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A.When magnetic door holders are provided, refer to Section 28 31 00 for additional information.

B.Activation of the mass notification system shall release all magnetic hold opens within the building. Such release shall not be by zone as a chemical release can not be detected by zoned detection devices.

2.6 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A.Trouble and supervisory conditions with the mass notification circuits shall be indicated on the fire alarm control panel and remote annunciators.

2.7 TELEPHONE ACCESS

A.System shall be capable of activation and voice messaging through a telephone connection and shall be listed for such use.




2.8 REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS

A.Mass notification panel shall be capable of integration with a site-wide wireless communication system UL listed for emergency notification.

B.Current site standards have not been established. At end of project, ascertain if site standards have been established. Refer to UFC 4-021-01.

2.9 WIRE AND CABLE

A.Wire and cable for mass notification systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760 and shall be in accordance with requirement of Section 28 31 00, Fire Alarm System.

2.10 AS-BUILT PLAN CABINET

A.An As-Built plan cabinet shall be installed with every new mass notification system installation or replacement. The purpose of the cabinet is to provide a secured location for all system documentation related to the system. This will aid in future servicing and modifications to the system.

1. The plan cabinet shall be sized and contain approved plans, specifications, manuals, test reports, service reports, computer disk, and a hard copy printout of the system logic/programming.

2. The cabinet shall be located as shown on plans, adjacent to the main control panel, or there shall be signage on the system control panel indicating where the plan cabinet is located.

3. When properly sized, fire alarm and mass notification documents may be kept in the same cabinet. There shall be room for future documentation such as inspection and testing reports or system expansions.

B.The cabinet shall be neatly and clearly labeled “As Built Drawings” and shall be equal to the DBX As Built Cabinets manufactured by Space Age Electronics.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A.Notification equipment shall be installed and mounted in accordance with design documents and specific mounting details.

B.Control panels shall be mounted in a neat, orderly, and space-limiting manner. Details in drawings shall be used as a guide and represent allotted space.

C.No portion of a mass notification system shall be installed prior to having plans on site that have been reviewed, approved, and stamped by the appropriate reviewing agency and/or AHJ. This includes wiring. Approved stamped plans shall be on site at all times while the system is in the installation stage.




3.2 BACK BOXES

A.All speakers are to be installed in at least a 4-inch square deep box with extension ring to limit potential damage to wiring.

B.5" Square Boxes 2-7/8" x 5" (67 cubic inch) deep metal box with a 5" extension ring shall be allowed. If used, careful consideration in the centering of finished devices is required due to larger box size when mounted to studs.

C.Manual push/pull stations shall be located on walls such that tamper resistant covers can be installed as may be indicated, or in the future. Therefore, a 3-inch clearance from other switches, window openings, door frames, etc. shall be provided on each side of a manual pull station and 4 inches clear area above and below the manual pull station.


A.Wiring shall be installed in accordance with Section 28 31 00, Fire Alarm System,

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A.Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Section "Electrical Identification."

B.Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each end and at terminal points with wire markers. Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible.

3.5 GROUNDING

A.Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to the mass notification control panels.


A.Contractor Pre-Testing and Record of Completion Testing shall be conducted prior to scheduling commission testing and shall comply with criteria in Section 28 31 00

3.7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A.System commission testing shall be conducted per criteria in Section 28 31 00.

B.Testing shall include the initial activation of the fire alarm system and then a subsequent and sequential activation of the mass notification system. This sequence shall be reversed. System function shall comply with criteria of this Section.

C.System commission testing shall verify that the criteria outlined in this specification are complied with.




3.8 FINAL DOCUMENTATION

A.Final documentation shall be submitted following the criteria in Section 28 31 00, Fire Alarm System.

3.9 FINAL SYSTEM TRAINING

A.Very detailed system training shall be provided to the owner following the criteria in Section 28 31 00, Fire Alarm System,.

3.10 ADJUSTING AND FOLLOW-UP

A.Mass notification system adjusting, inspection, and testing shall comply with the criteria in Section 28 31 00, Fire Alarm System,.

3.11 WARRANTY AND SERVICES

A.The contractor shall warranty the entire system for electrical and mechanical failures for a period of one year. The warranty shall begin with the completion of the commissioning testing or when beneficial use to the owner is determined and so documented.

B.The mass notification control panel shall have a 3-year manufacturer warranty.

C.If a commissioning test for an AHJ has been scheduled and is cancelled without sufficient notice to modify a travel schedule without financial penalties, or the system fails to pass all requirements of this specification resulting in a re-inspection, the AHJ reserves the right to bill the contractor for expenses incurred as a result thereof. Such expenses may include travel, transportation, lodging, meals, and daily wages. Daily wages shall not exceed $800 per day.

END OF SECTION

SMOKE BOMB HILL QDOBA FINISH OUT Bragg...23 55 11 Building Automation System DIVISION 26 –...

Documents

Transcript of SMOKE BOMB HILL QDOBA FINISH OUT Bragg...23 55 11 Building Automation System DIVISION 26 –...